Abbreviation
Pull Title
1 s t (2nd,&c.) F i e l d Survey Compajiy,
, A u s t r a l i a n Engineers . .
1 s t ( 2 n d , 4 c . ) F i e l d Park C o n p a n y ^ 8 * r a l i a n Engineers
1 s t ( 2 n d , 4 c . ) F o r t r e s s Ccmpany, Aust-.
ralian &igineers-..
..
A u s t r a l i a n Corps of Signals
'.. . .
..
Sydney U n i v e r s i t y Regiment
,. ..
Melbourne U n i v e r s i t y R i f l e s
..
A u s t r a l i a n Tank Corps , . . . . . . .
1st (2nd,4c.) Battalion, Australian
Tank Coi^s
A u s t r a l i a n Army Service Corps , , . .
A u s t r a l i a n Amy Medical Corps . . .
A u s t r a l i a n Army Ordnance Corps
..
A u s t r a l i a n Army Veterinary Corps . ,
Australian Arny Legal Department . .
Photo-Lithographed,
H.J'.SBEElt,
Government
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) Fd.Svy. •
Coy. A.E,
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) Fd-.Paric
Coy.
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) Frt.Coy.
A.C.S.
Sig.Tp.
Sig.Sec.
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) ,Bn.
.. s.n.s.
I
. . H.U.S.
. . A.Tank Corps I
...
..
..
..
..
by.
Printer,
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) A.Tankfi
A.A.S.O.
A.A.H.C.
AiA.O.C.
A.A.V.C.
A.A.L.D.
Authority;
Melbourne,
•U
d '- S a y
<
FIELD SERVICE POCKET BOOK
AUSTRALIAN SUPPLEMENT HO.3.
APPENDIX
I.
ABBREVIATED TITLES, ADDRESSES, DISTINGUISHING
LETTERS AND OTHER ABBREVIATIONS.
Add the following f o r use i n the Australian Military Forces <
•
^
. . .
1, Headquarters, Formations, e t c .
Full T i t l e
Amy Headquarters . .
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Corp3
.
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Cavalry Division
.,
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Division
. . *., .
n t h (12th e t c . ) Mixed Brigade . . .
Field Troops 4th ( j t h e t c . ) Military
District
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) D i s t r i o t Base
.. .
1 s t (2nd etc.,) Cavalry Brigade . . .<
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) I n f a n t r y Brigade
Royal Military College
School of A r t i l l e r y
Small .Arms School . .
Central Training Depot
Army Service Corps Training School . .
Defended P o r t ( s )
Operations headquarters of formations
Abbreviation
AJI.Q,
1 (2 e t c . ) Corp3
1 (2 e t c . ) Cav.Div.
1 (2 e t c . ) Div.
i l (12 e t c . ) Mxd.Bde.
Fd.Tps.Jf (5 e t c . ) M.B.
1 (2 e t c . ) D.B.
1 (2 e t c . ) Cav'.Bde,
1 (2 e t c . ) I n f . B d e .
E.M.C.
S. of A.
S.A.S.
C.T j ) .
A.S.C.Trg.Sch.
Def.Eort(s)
Ops.A.H.«.(l D i v . e t c . )
Australian A r t i l l e r y
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Corps A r t i l l e r y
. . A r t y . l (2 e t c . ) Corps
1 s t (2nd etc./) Corps Medium A r t i l l ery
MJW1(2 e t c . ) Corps
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Divisional A r t i l l e r y A r t y . l (2 e t c . ) Div,
P.501.
2
Fall l i t i s
Abbreviation
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Brigade, Australian
Field Artillery
1st (2nd e t c . ) Anny Brigade, Austr a l i a n Field
Artillery . . . .
..
1st (2nd e t c . ) Light Brigade, Australian Field
1 (2 e t c . ) Fd.Bde.
1 (2 etc.),A.Fd.Bde.
1
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Medium Brigade, Austr a l i a n Garrison
Artillery
1
1st (2nd.etc.) Heavy Brigade, Royal
Australian*
Artillery . . ..
1
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Heavy Brigade, Austr a l i a n Garrison
A r t i l l e r y . . . . ,.. 1
1st (2nd e t c . ) Anti-Aircraft Brigade,
Australian Garrison
1
Corps of Australian Ensineers
1st (2nd e t c . ) Divisional Engineers
(2 e t c . ) Xt.Bde.
(2 e t c . ) Med.Bdtr,
(2 eto.)Hy.Bde.R.A.A
(2 e t c . ) Hy.Bde.
(2 e t c . ) A.A.Bda.
Eng.l (2 e t c . ) Div.
Australian Corps of Signals
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Corps of Signals
. . S i g s . l (2 e t c . ) Corps
S i g s . l (2 e t c . ; (Cav.)
1 s t (2nd e t o . ) (Cavalry) Divisional
Signals
Div.
Australian Army Service Corps
i s t (2nd e t o . ) (Cavairy) Divisional
Army Service A.S.C. 1 (2 e t o . )
Corps
(Cav. ) Div.
2 . Conmanders, S t a f f , Appointments and Services,
The abbreviations i n the Field Service Pocket Book w i l l be
used except as shown hereunder (a) The following w i l l be s u b s t i t u t e d f o r corresponding
ones shown therein Full Title
Major General, Australian A r t i l l e r y
Cosanander Corps A r t i l l e r y
..
Conmander Divisions! A r t i l l e r y
.,
Coritnandor Divisional Engineers
..
Abbreviation
. . M.G. Arty.
. . C.C.A;
. . C.D.4.
. . C.D.E,
)
(b) AM the following
Abbreviation
Full T i t l e
D i s t r i c t Base Commandant
D.B.C.
.,
(c) I n the distinguishing
substitute "ART" and
respectively.
to he used i n messages
f o r "R.A." and "H.E."
3 . Units of the Australian Aimy.
(to he read in conjunction with para. 5 of Appendix I
F.S.P.B.)
Full Title
1st (2nd, Ac,) Light Horse Regiment
1st (2nd,Ac.) Armoured Car Regiment
Royal Australian A r t i l l e r y
.. ..
1st R e i a Battery, Royal Australian
Artillery
1st (2nd,4c.) Heavy Battery, Royal
Australian
Artillery
.. ,
Australian Field A r t i l l e r y
.. ..
1st (2nd,Ac.) Battery, Australian
F i e i a Artillery
101st (102nd,Ac.) Howitaer Battery,
Australian H e l d
Artillery
.
1st (2nd,4«.) Light Battery,Australian
M e l a A r t i l l e r y . . ..
Australian Gairrison Artillery
'
1st (2nd,Ac.) Medium Battery, Australian Garrison Artillery
1st (2nd,4c. ) Heavy Battery,Australian Garrison Artillery
1st (2nd,Ac.) Anti-Aircraft Battery,
Australian Garrison
Artillery
.. .. .
1st (2nd,Ac.) Survey Company,Australian Garrison Artillery
Royal Australian Engineers . . . . . . ..
Australian Engineers
1st (2nd,Ac,) Field Squadron, Australian Engineers
,,
l i t (2nd,Ac.) Field Consany, Austral.
ian Qigineers
..
Abbreviation
1 (2,Ac.) L.H,
1 (2,Ac.) Arml. C.
Regt.
R.A.A.
1 Fd.Bty .R.A.A.
1 (2,Ac.) Hy.Bty.
R.A.A.
A.F.A,
1 (2,Ac. ) Fd. .Bty.
101 (102,Ac.) Fd.
Bty. (H)
1 (2,Ac.) Lt.Bty.
A.G.A.
1 (2,4c.) Medifty.
1 (2,4c.) Hy.Bty.
1 (2,4c.) A.A.Bty.
1 (2,Ac.) Svy.Coy.
A.G.A.
R.A.E.
A.B.
1 (2,4o.) Fa.Sin.
1 (2,4c.) Fd.Coy.
Full Title
Abbreviation
1 s t (2nd,&c.) F i e l d Survey Company,
•Australian Engineers , .
1 s t (2nd,Sc.) F i e l d Park Company,.Austr a l i a n Engineers
..
1 s t ( 2 n d , 4 c . ) Tortraaa Company, A u s t r a l i a n Engineers- . .
A u s t r a l i a n Corps of Signals
. . . .
Sydney U n i v e r s i t y Regiment
.. ..
MelbournsUniversityKifles
..
Australian Tank Coi^s- . . . . *. . .
1st (2nd,4c.) Battalion, Australian
Tank Coijs
A u s t r a l i a n Armt S e r v i c e Corps
,,
A u s t r a l i a n Army Medical Corps , , . •
Australian Army Ordnance Corps
..
Australian Army Veterinary Corps . .
Australian Anrjr Legal Department
. .
Phoio-Lithographea,
H.J.QBBEtt,
Government
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) Pd.Svy.
Coy. A.E.
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) Fd.Paric
Coy.
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) FrtiCoy.
A.C.S.
Sig.Ip.
»
Sig.Sec.
1 ( 2 , 4 c . ) .Bn.
. • S.TJ.R,
1
. . M.U.P.
. . A.Tank Corps.
. . 1 ( 2 , 4 a . ) A .Tanks
. • A.AvS.0,
A.A.H.C.
. . A;A.O,C.
. . A.A.V.Ci
. . •A.A.L.C.
Sy
Printer,
Authority:
Melbourne,
FIELD SERVICE POCKET B O O K .
AUSTRALIAN .SUPPLEMENT NO.3.
APPENDIX
I.
ABBREVIATED TITLES, ADDRESSES, DISTING0ISHIN6
LETTERS AND COTER ABBREVIATIONS.
Add the following f o r use i n t h e Australian Military Forces
1, Headquarters, Formations, e t c .
Full T i t l e
Arny Headquarters
., ..
1st (2nd e t c . ) Corps
1st (2nd e t c . ) Cavalry Division
1 s t (2nd e t o . ) Division
. . .. .,
11th (12th e t c . ) Mixed Brigade . . . .
Field Iroops ^th (jjth e t c . ) Military
District
1st (2nd e t o . ) D i s t r i c t Base
.. .,
1 s t (2nd e t o . ) Cavalry Brigade . . . .
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) I n f a n t r y Brigade
..
Royal Military College
. . », . ,
School of A r t i l l e r y
...
.. ..
Small Arms School . . . . . . . . . .
Central Training Depot ... . . . . . .
Army Service Corps (Training School . .
Defended P o r t ( s )
.. . . . . .. . .
Operations headquarters of formations
Abbreviation
AJt.Q.
1 (2 e t c . ) Corps
1 (2 e t c . ) Cav.Div,
I (2 e t c . ) Div.
I I (12 e t o . ) SM.Bde.
Fd.Tps.if (5 e t o . ) M.D.
1 (2 e t c . )
1 (2 e t c .
1 (.2 e t c . )
E.M.C.
S. of A.
S.A.S.
C.Tj).
A.S.C.Trg.Sch.
Def.Bort(s)
OpS.A.H.Q,(l Div.eto.)
Australian Artillery;
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Corps A r t i l l e r y
, . Arty.1 (2 e t o . ) Corps
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Corps Medium A r t i l l ery
. . tt.A.l(2 e t c . ) Corps
1 s t (2nd e t o . ) Divisional A r t i l l e r y A r t y . l (2 e t c . ) Div.
P.501.
2
Full Title
Abbreviation
1 s t (2nd etc, ) Brigade, Australian
Field Artillery
1st (2nd etc, ) Anny Brigade, Australian Field
Artillery . . .. ..
)
Light
Brigade, Aust1 s t (2nd e t c ,
ralian Field
A r t i l l e r y .» . . . .
1 s t (2nd e t c , ) Medium Brigade, Austr a l i a n Garrison
Artillery
1st (2nd.etc, ) Heavy Brigade, Royal
Australian •
Artillery .. .. . .
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Heavy Brigade, Austr a l i a n Garrison
Artillery- . . . . . .
1st (2nd e t c . ) Anti-Aircraft Brigade,
Australian Garrison
A r t i l l e r y . . .» . .
Corps of Australian Engineers
1st (2nd e t c . ) Divisional Engineers
1 (2 e t c . ) Fd.Bde.
1 (2 e t c . ) A4(Fd.Bde.
1 (2 e t c . ) Lt.Bde.
1 (2 e t c . ) Med.Bde,
1 (2 etc,)Hy.Bde.R.A.A.
1 (2 e t c . ) Hy.Bde.
1 (2 e t c . ) A.A.Bda,
Eng.l (2 e t c . ) Div.
Australian 'Corps of Signals
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) Corps of Signals
. • S i g s . l (2 e t c . ) Corps
1 s t (2nd e t c . ) (Cavalry) Divisional
S i g s . l (2 e t c . ) (Cav.)
Signals
Div.
Australian Army Service Corps
i s t (2nd e t c . ) (Cavalry) Divisicmal
Amy S e r v i ^ A.S.C. 1 (2 e t c . )
Corps
(Cav.) Div;
2 . Conmanders, S t a f f , Appointments i
The abbreviations i n the Field Service Pocket Book w i l l be
used except as shown hereunder ( a ) The following w i l l be s u b s t i t u t e d for corresponding
ones shown therein «
Full Title
Major General, Australian A r t i l l e r y
Commander Corps. A r t i l l e r y
.. ..
Commander Divisional A r t i l l e r y
..
Gomoander Divisional Engineers
..
Abbreviation
. . M.G. Arty.
. . C.C.A.
. . C.D.A.
. . C.D.E,
}
(b) Add the following
Abbreviation
Full Title
( c ) I n the distinguishing l e t t e r s t o be used i n messages
s u b s t i t u t e "ART" and "ENG-" f o r n R.A." and " R . E /
respectively.
Units of the Australian Amy.
(to be read i n conjunction with para. 5
P.S.P.B.)
Bull T i t l e
1 s t (2nd,Ac.) Light Horse Regiment
1 s t (2nd,Ac.) Armoured Car Regiment
Appendix I
Abbreviation
. . 1 (2,&c.) L.H,
. . 1 ( 2 , A m i . 0.
Regt.
. . R.A.A.
Royal Australian A r t i l l e r y
.. ,,
1 s t Field Battery, Royal Australian
Artillery
. v . . 1 F d 3 t y .R.A.A,
1 s t (2nd,Ac.) Heavy Battery, Royal
1 (2,&o.) Hy.Bty.
Australian
Artillery
.. ,.
• R.A.A.
1 s t (2nd,&e.) Battery, Australian
Field Artillery . .
101st (102nd,Ac.) Howitzer Battery,
Australian Field
Artillery
.. ..
1 s t (2nd,&o«) Light Battery,Australian
Field A r t i l l e r y . .
Australian Garrison A r t i l l e r y . . . .
1 s t (2nd,&c.) Medium Battery,Australian Garrison A r t i l l e r y
1 s t (2nd,&c,) Heavy Battery,Australian Garrison A r t i l l e r y
1 s t (2nd,&c.) Anti-Aircraft Battery,
Australian Garrison
Artillery
.< . .
..
1 s t (2nd,Ac.) Survey Company, Austral ian Garrison A r t i l l e r y
Royal Australian Engineers . . . . . ,
Australian Engineers
,. . . . . .. ..
1st (2nd,Ac.) Field Squadron, Australian Engineers
,.
1st (2nd,Ac.) Field Company, Australian Engineers
.. ..
1 (2,&o.) F d . B t y .
101 (102,4o.) Fd.
Bty. (H)
1 (2,Ao.) Lt.Bty.
A.G.A.
1
(2Medipty.
1 (2,<So.) Hy.Bty.
1 (2,4o.) A.A.Bty.
1 (2,do.) Svy.Coy.
A.G.A,
R.A.E.
A.E.
1 (2,&e.) Fd.Sqn.
1 (2,4c.) Fd.Coy,
Glyn, Mills & Co.
(Established
1753).
R e g i s t e r e d w i t h u n l i m i t e d l i a b i l i t y , 1885.
incorporating
CHILD & CO. AND HOLT & CO
( E s t a b . b e f o r e 1600)
1)
(Estab. 1809)
BANKERS
Army and Air Force Agents,
Navy and Prize Agents.
Head Office: 6 7 , LOMBARD ST., LONDON, E.C.3
Childs Branch :
1, FLEET STREET, LONDON, E.C.4.
Holts Branch :
3 & 4, WHITEHALL PLACE, LONDON, S.W.I.
Managing
Partners:
LORD WOLVERTON.
LAURENCE CURRIE.
LORD HILL1NGDON.
G e n e r a l T h e H o n . S I R H . A. L A W R E N C E . G . C . 8 .
Brigadier G e n e r a l A. M A X W E L L . C.B., C . M . G . . D . S . O .
E R I C G O R E BROWNE, D.S.O.
FREDERICK WILLIAM FANE.
Current and Deposit A c c o u n t s opened on the usual terms.
The Bank has A g e n t s or Correspondents in all the principal
cities or towns throughout the World, and can provide Banking
facilities {or its customers wherever desired.
Letters of Credit and Circular Notes issued on our Foreign
Correspondents and Agents throughout the World.
Currency D r a f t s obtained;
Remittances
mailed
and
Telegraphic Transfers made to all parts of the World.
Foreign Currency Accounts opened.
Purchase and Sale of Stocks, B o n d s and S h a r e s effected and
custody of securities undertaken.
Dividends, Annuities, etc., received; forms authorising their
receipt supplied, and c o u p o n s collected for customers.
R e c o v e r y of I n c o m e T a x and Preparation of I n c o m e and
Super-tax statements undertaken.
The Bank has a special
department to advise and assist customers on questions relating to
Income and Super-tax.
The duties of Executors and Trustees undertaken.
Navy and Prize Agents. Salvage claims preferred.
11
INDEX
TO
ADVERTISERS.
PAGE
NAME
Anglo-American Oil Co., L t d .
Anzora
Berlitz School of Languages
Broadhurst, Clarkson & Co.
E . Brown & Son, L t d .
Burberry's L t d .
J. C. Eno, L t d .
Flights L t d .
W . & G . Foyle, L t d .
Glynn. Mills & Co.
T o m Hill
Hooper, Struve & Co., L t d .
Humphreys & Crook, L t d .
Imperial Hotels (London)
Keith, Prowse & Co., L t d .
Lillywhites L t d .
Morland & Co.
Morris, Angel & Son, L t d .
Navy, Army & Air Force Institutes
Geo. Parker & Sons
G . M . Reynell & Co.
Rolls Razor L t d .
T h o m a s & Sons
T u r n b u l l & Asser
C. C. Wakefield & Co., L t d .
White Horse Distillers, Ltd.
Pratt's Motor
Hair Creafn
XIX
Spirit
Opticians, etc.
Meltonian
Cream
Tailors and Military
Outfitters
Fruit Salts
Military and Civil Tailors
Booksellers
Bankers
Boots and Leggings
Mineral
Waters
Military Tailors and Colonial Outfitters
Theatre Tickets, ctc.
Sports Goods
Cigarette
Manufacturers
Outfitters.
Service Interests
Saddlers
Military Insurance Brokers
Safety
Razors
Sporting and Military
Tailors
Hosiers and Polo Specialistl
Castrol Motor Oil
White Horse Whiskey
SUPERIOR
iii
iii
iv
xiii
X
XX
xvii
iv
i
xii
viii
XV
iv
xi
vi
ii
iv
v
xvi
xiv
vii
iii
xvi
xviii
ix
HAND-MADE
CIGARETTES
at
Turkish)
M a n u f a c t u r e r s '
and
Prices
ii Virginian ii
I
6/-
J
!| per 100. |
Post Free.
MESSES AND CLUBS CATERED
FOR.
MORLAND & CO.
83, G R O S V E N O R S T R E E T ,
. BOND STREET, W.l. .
'Phone: MAYFAIR 6402.
jl AWARDED
GOLD
MEDAL
lit
Y o u need
LANGUAGES
Learn them at
BERLITZ
The BERLITZ SCHOOLS specialize in the teaching of
Languages all over the World.
Men and women of all professions learn Languages
at the Berlitz Schools.
Officers coached for interpretership and Staff College
Examinations.
London:
321, Oxford Street, &
Branches.
THOMAS
&
MASTERS THE HAIR
Anzora Cream for greasy scalps
and Anzora Viola for dry scalps.
Sold in 1/6 & 2/6 bottles by
Hairdressers, Chemists and
Stores.
SONS
Sporting
Tailors,
and
and
Makers
Military
Breeches
3 2 , BROOK STREET.
Telephone :
Mayfair 2152.
Telegraphic
Address:
" Spoitingly, London."
Specialists in Breeches
Pantaloons and Overalls.
Iv
IMPERIAL
Russell Square
8
Hotels.
2,500
HOTELS
LONDON
Rooms
R o o m , B a t h a n d Breakfast, f r o m
FULLY
/ Q
•
/
LICENSED.
Prismatic
Binoculars
from
£3/3/0
Prismatic
Compasses
from
17/6
and Repairs
Exchanges
Broadburst Clarkson & Co.,
(Over 100 Years' Reputation0
63, F a r r i n g d o n R o a d ,
LONDON, ENGLAND.
That Book You W a n t !
it. Special Department for Books on Military Science. Military History and
allied subjects, containing many thousands of volumes, secondhand and new.
Also over 1,000.000 vols, on every other
conceivable subject, an immense number being now out-of-print.
Send For Military Catalogue 603 (free) outlining requirements
and interests; other suitable catalogues
V^ T L' C
will then be included. Books sent on *
\ J
X La l _ i k }
approval to any part of the world. 121-125, Charine Cross Road,
Books Purchased.
London, W.C.2.
Morris Angel & Son, Ltd.
117 & 119, Shaftesbury Avenue, London, W.C.2.
Military and Civil Tailors.
Price List on
Application.
Full D r e s s U n i f o r m m a y be hired for Levees and
Court Functions.
Telephones: Gerrard 5181 and Regent 5497.
J n
t/ie
Progress and Success
Navy, Army & Air Force Institutes.
both Officers and ^ ^ r r a n t
Officers alike a r e i^eervly
interested. For this reason:
that 'N.A.A.FL'is the S e r v i c e s '
own Business
b e / o n g j j j g to
controlled
t£e
Services,
byt/ie
Services.
and aiming solely at the
p r o m o t i o n
S e r v i c e
o f
J i i t e r e s t s
A business without Shareholders
—consequently with no Dividends
to pay; but paying substantial
R e b a t e orv. all P u r c K a s e s
and securing all u l t i m a t e
p r o f i t s j f o r t/ie
o f t h e Sei-vice
b e n e f i t
M a n
vi
and
Sports Officers
should write for an Illustrated Catalogue of
Sports Goods and special terms to
LILLYWHITES,
LTD
CRITERION BUILDINGS,
PICCADILLY CIRCUS, W.l.
before placing their orders for the equipment
of their teams.
LILLYWHITES, Ltd., have a most representative stock of cricket, football, boxing
and hockey requisites suitable for every
climate where officers are likely to be
stationed, and specialize in boots and
athletic clothing.
Officers requiring goods for their individual requirements will be given the
same terms as those accorded to Sports
Officers, provided they order through their
mess secretary.
vil
% > 4 l a d e &
i b
The Rolls Razor is a safety
razor with only one blade.
The one blade is guaranteed
in writing to shave you
perfectly for five years and
with care it will last you a
lifetime.
There are no loose parts to
a Rolls Razor except the
handle.
The self-setting
and self-stropping mechanism is contained in the case.
Buy a Rolls Razor; it is
entirely London made;
there will be no blades to
buy when you are far from
shops; and it is of an ideal
size to go into your pocket
or kit.
ROLLS
RAZOR
Obtainable of all Chemists, Cutlers and Hairdressers,
or direct from
ROLLS
RAZOR
LTD.,
I, Charing Cross, London,
S.W.I.
VILL
Bv
ROYAL WARRANTS OF APPOINTMENT
TO
F O U R SUCCESSIVE
SOVEREIGNS.
MINERAL
WATERS.
Established
LONDON
-
-
1825.
BRIGHTON
i
Obtainable throughout the world, from
the N. A. & A. F. Institutes, and all
first-class establishments.
THE BURBERRY
SELF -
VENTILATING
WEATHERPROOF
made in special Burberryproofed materials, supplies
the services of three coats
• for the price of.one—•
DUST-COAT
WEATHERPROOF
OVERCOAT
The Burberry keeps its
wearer perfectly dry in
downpour or drizzle—comfortably warm when it's
chilly — yet practically
weightless and naturally
ventilating, is worn on hot
or dusty days without the
least suggestion of overheating.
Military or Mufti Catalogues
and
Patterns,
Post
Free
MILITARY KIT
Burberrys supply every item
of Military Dress and Equipment, in materials suitable
for Home or Foreign Service.
To Order in 3 to 5
Days, or Ready-to-Wears.
BURBERRYS S f f i l
Bd. Malesherbes P A R I S ; and Agents in Chief Military Centres.
Murlxmm
HM.
[Issued with Army Orders for March, 1926
[Crown Copyright Reserved
Publications
163
F I E L D S H1 R V t C H
P O C I ^ T
g g t f P E N T OF DEFENO
LIBRARY. 1
1
u n t r i e d "oiBgi
o r n e r "mHi
aa
n nrtflttta
r n a i a .
Part l.—Coifourius
]
cuss
DEFENCE INFORMATION
SERVICES
1 AlttlSSK
I
hOMbbft. ..
0 0 6 6 2 4 6 9
(Corrected up to August, 1925.)
LONDON
P U B L I S H E D BY H I S MAJESTY'S STATIONERY OPPIOE.
To 1)6 purchased directly f r o m H.JL S T A T I O N E R Y OFFICE at t h e f o l l o w i n g a d d r e s s
A d a s t r a l House, Kingaway, London. W.C. 2 : 28, Abingdon Street, London, S. VV. 1,
T o r i Street M a n c h e s t e r ; 1, St. Andrew's Crescent, Cardiff:
or 120, George Street, E d i n b u r g h ;
or t h r o u g h any Bookseller.
Price 2s
Net.
8
By Command
T h e
W a b
Office,
30th January,
1926.
of Hie Army
Council,
Hi
N O T E 1.
THIS
BOOK
IS
SUBJECT
TO
PERIODICAL
REVISION. IT IS ONLY I N T E N D E D A S A
HANDY AND CONCISE BOOK OF REFERENCE
FOR
USE
ON
ACTIVE
SERVICE,
AT
MANOEUVRES,
OR
ON
INSTRUCTIONAL
EXERCISES.
IT SHOULD N O T BE QUOTED
A S A N A U T H O R I T Y IN OFFICIAL CORRESPONDENCE, NOR SHOULD IT B E UTILIZED
A S A T E X T - B O O K FOR T H E S T U D Y
OF
MILITARY SUBJECTS.
OFFICERS ARE EXPECTED TO KEEP THE BOOK
U P TO DATE BY AMENDING IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY CHANGES
THAT
MAY
A P P E A R IN ARMY ORDERS A N D
OTHER
OFFICIAL P U B L I C A T I O N S .
NOTE
2.
S I N C E T H E 1926 E D I T I O N O F T H E F I E L D S E R V I C E
POCKET BOOK W E N T TO PRINT, A NEW
S Y S T E M OF M A I N T E N A N C E OF A M M U N I T I O N A N D S U P P L I E S IN T H E FIELD H A S
BEEN APPROVED.
A M E N D M E N T S T O T H E P O C K E T B O O K WILL
B E I S S U E D W H E N T H E R E V I S I O N OF W A R
ESTABLISHMENTS,
SCALES OF
AMMUNITION, &c., ENTAILED BY T H E I N T R O D U C T I O N OF T H E N E W S Y S T E M , H A S B E E N
COMPLETED.
(B 28/332)Q
lV
Part I.—Countries other than India.
CONTENTS
SECTION.
—
—
Abbreviations . .
Definitions
PACK.
..
..
..
CHAPTER
••
••
• -•
••
••
..
..
..
in
..
1
. 2
3
3
3
4
II.
Marches and March Discipline
Time and Space
lload Space Tables
Quarters
Camp Cooking, &c.
Water Supply . .
13.
14.
15.
IS.
17.
18.
vi.
I.
1. War Establishments . .
..
..
..
..
..
2.„, System of Command in the Field
3.j Duties of the General Staff Branch of the Staff in War ..
4.| Duties of the Adjutant-General's Branch of the Staff in War
5.t Duties of the Q.M.G's. Branch of the Staff in War
..
6. Organization of the Services and Maintenance of the Forces
the Field
..
CHAPTER
••
--
CHAPTER I I I ,
Orders
Intercommunication ...
Information
Protection
Combined Operations
Map Heading and Field Sketching
7
14
16
21
29
31
34
41
56
65
69
72
CHAPTER, IY.
19. Field Engineering—Field Works
20. Effort, nf Weapons
•
21. Defence of a Position . .
22. Obstacles,"Cover, Improvised Roads and Tracks . .
23. Camouflage
..
..
..
24. Knots, Cordage, Blocks, Tackles, Anchorage and Spars
25. Bridging and Bridging Expedients
26. Demolitions
..
..
..
..
.—
78
93
95
99
102
103
108
115
CHAPTER V.
27. / Transport
28. Road Transport
29. Details of Vehicles in Common Use
30. jMethod of Packing and Weight of Ammunition
31. Convoys
121
133
144
153
154
V
PAGE.
SECTION.
CHAPTER VI.
Kin Arms
"'
' Guns-32. mi
Small
and
Supply of Ammumtiou and Explosives
34. Itatious, Fuel, and Forage
-.35. Notes on Supplies
Supply Arrangements
CHAPTER. VII.
37.
38.
39.
- 40.
41.
42.
43.
156
106-
172
178170
183
184
185
198
Pay Arrangements
Clothing
Field Kits
Medical Service
Maintenance of Health
Remount Services
Veterinary Service
202
209
210
CHAPTER VIII.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
Office Work and Private Correspondence
Ciphers and Codes
..
..
..
Discipline
..
..
Courts-Martial
..
. Provost-Marshal and Military Police
..
..
'
..
..
214
217
221
222
223
CHAPTER IX.
49.
The Military Forces of the Oversea Dominions, Crown Colonies
and Protectorates
..
..
..
..
..
..
50. Details of Foreign Armies
51. "Weights, Measures, Thermometer, Moneys, Ac
APPENDICES.
I.—Points of the Compass
II.—Magnetic Variation
III.—Dates of Full Moon, 1925-1930
IV.—Sunrise and Sunset
..
..
..
..
V.—Authorities to whom Indents should be addressed
VI.—Burial' Service
..
. . . .
,.
. (.
..
..
.,
225
248
267
276
279
279
281
282
284
L I S T OF P L A T E S .
No.
I.—Type of Bivouac for a Cavalry Regiment
To face page 22
II.—Type of Bivouac for a Battery oi HOT3C or Field
Artillery . .
..
..
..
..
To follow plate I
III.—Type of Bivouac suitable for Units with many Vehicles
To follow plate It
IV.—Distinguishing Flags and Lamps . .
..
„ •„
,, I I I
V.—Type of Perimeter Camp for a Mixed Force . To face page 24
VI.—Sketch plan of lay-out of a camp site for a'Battalion
To follow plate. V
VII.—Portable Tarpaulin Hut, and Bivouacs . .
To face page 26
VIII.—Method of Disposal of Rain Water from Roof of Touts,
&c.
..
..
To follow plate VII
IX.—Stables
..
..
..
..
. . „ • • „
„ VIII
X.—Cooker for Camps and Billets . .
..
,,
•„
,,
X
XI.—Chamber Oven
..
.,
To follow page 28
XII.—Cooking in the Field, Cooking Trenches, Hay Box-, &c.
To follow plate XI
XIII.—Typo of raised double Kettle Trench . .
„
.,
,, X I I
XIV.—Portable Field Kitchen . .
..
..
„
„
„X11I
XV.—Scales and Covenfcional Signs
..
..
To face page 72
XVI.—Section of Breastwork in Wet Soil
..
To follow page 96
XVII.—M.G. Emplacements
..
..
, . To follow plate XVI
vi
LIST OF PLATES—continued.
NO.
XVIII.—Sangar Piquet Post
To follow plate X V I I
X I X . — F i r e , Communication Trenches and Shell Slits
To follow plate X V I I I
X X . — A d a p t a t i o n oi Hedges and Walls . .
. . To follow page 98
XXI.—Defence of a House (not exposed to Artillery file)
To folio w plate X X
XXTT.—Gas-Proof Curtains
..
..
..
,, ,,
,, X X I
X X I I I . — F o r w a r d Koads—Shell H o l e s ^ E o a d Repair—Corduroy
Boad
To face page 100
X X I V .—Plank I n f a n t r y footbridge.
-,,108
X X V . — K a p o k Assault and Improvised Bridges To follow plate X X I V
XXVI.—Bridging'Expedients
„
„
XXV
X X V I I . — L a s h e d Spar Trestle
„
„ XXVI
X X V I I I . — C a t a m a r a n Foot-bridge
„
„ XXVII
XXIX.—Demolitions—TJse of F u z e Instantaneous Detonating
To face page 115
XXX.—Demolitions—Method of Placing Charges
,, ,, ,, 116
X X X I . — A m m u n i t i o n Supply
..
..
..
,,,,>>
tfiG
X X X I I . — S y s t e m of Supplies
„
„ „
180
X X X I I I . — L a t r i n e s and Urinal
..
..
..
„
,, „
204
X X X I V . — E e f u s e Destructor, Incinerator and Grease Salvage
Traps
To follow plate X X X I I I
XXXV.—Mosquito-proof Dugouts . .
..
,,
,,
,, X X X I V
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviations denoting names of corps such as B.H.A., B.A.S.C., &c., are
omitted. F o r t h e abbreviated titles of units for use in t h e field, sre Sec. 14,
18, col. 2.
" A " before an abbreviation signifying a principal staff officer, oi t h e
head of a service or department, means Assistant, similarly " D " signifies
Deputy, and D.A., signifies Deputy Assistant.
Abbreviation
for use in
Full Description,
the field. ,
A.A.
Anti-aircraft or A r m y Act.
Army Book.
A.B.
Armoured Car or Army Co-operation Sqn., B.A.F.
A.C. . . .
Army Council Instructions.
A.C.I.
..
Air Defence.
A.D.
A.D.C.
..
Aide-de-Camp.
Addsd
..
Addressed.
Army Dental Corps.
A.D. Corps
Administration.
Admn.
..
Advanced dressing station.
A.D.S.
..
Advanced Guard.
Adv. G d . . .
Army F o r m .
A.F.
Adjutant-General.
A.G.
Ambulance.
Amb.
Assistant Military Landing Officer.
A.M.L.O.
Ammunition.
Amn.
A.(I.E.
Air Officer Commanding.
Army Order.
A.O.
Armour Piercing.
A.P.
Army Printing and Stationery Services.
A.P. & S.S.
Ammunition Railhead.
A . E . H . ...
Ammunition Refilling Point.
A.B.P. ...
. . ' Artillery Beconnaissance.
Arty. I t . . . .
Army Troops.
A.T.
^
Auxiliary.
Aux.
M
B.A.C.
B.C.
Bde.
B.L.
B.M.
...
Brigade Ammunition Column.
B a t t e r y Commander.
Brigade.
Breech Loading.
Brigade Major.
Vii
Abbreviation
lor use in
the field.
Bmbr
Bn.
..
Bdi\
..
Bty
Full Description,
..
.•
Capt.
..
Cav
C.li
C.B.O
C.C.S
C.G-.S
C.E
C.I.G.S
C.-in-C. ..
CI. R.
..
Col.
..
C.C.
..
Coin.
..
Comdg. . .
Comdr. . .
Comdt. . .
C.O.
..
C.0.0
C.O.S.G.S.
Coy.
..
C.it.A
C.R.E
C.R.O
C.S.M
C.S.O
Cpl.
..
C.T.
..
Comn.
D.A.C. . ,
D.C.M
D. Can. ..
D. Docks
D. Grs. . .
D.I.W.T.
D. Lab. . .
D. L a n d s . .
D. L.Ry
Dept.
..
Defc.
..
Detn.
..
D.F.
..
D.G.J1.S..,
Dgn.
..
D.G.Tn. . .
Dist. R. ..
Dist
Div.
Div. Train
D.M.S. . .
D.O.S. . .
D. Post . .
Dr.
..
D.R.L.S.
D.Ry.
..
D.R.O. . .
D.R.
..
..
..
..
..
r.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.,
..
x
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
Bomber.
-Battalion.
Bombardier.
Battery.
Captain.
Cavalry.
Confinement to Barracks,
Counter Battery Officer.
Casualty Clearing Station.
Chief of the General Staff in the Field.
Chief-Engineer.
Chief of the Imperial General Staff at the War Office.
Commander-in-Chief.
Close Reconnaissance.
Colonel.
Colonel Commandant.
Column.
Commanding,
Commander.
Commandant.
Commanding Officer.
Chief Ordnance Officer.
Colonel on the Staff.
Company.
Commanding Royal Artillery.
Commanding Royal Engineer.
Corps Routine Order.
Company Serjeant-Major.
Chief Signal Officer.
Corporal.
Communication Trench or Corps Troops.
Communication.
Divisional Ammunition Column.
District Court-Murtial.
Director of Canteen Services.
Director of Docks Services.
Director of Graves Services.
Director Inland Water Transport Service.
Director of Labour Service.
Director of Lands Service.
Director of Light Railways.
Department,
Detachment.
Detention.
Direction Finding.
Director-General of Medical Services.
Dragon.
Director General of Transportation.
Distant reconnaissance.
District.
Division or Divisional.
Divisional Train.
Director of Medical Services.
Director of Ordnance Services.
Director of Postal Services.
Drummer or Driver.
Despatch Rider Letter Service.
Director of Railways.
Division Routine Orders.
Despatch Rider.
-e
1
vflfl
Abbreviation
for use in
the flel i.
I). Remounts
D.S.T.
..
D. Svy. . .
D.V.S. . .
D . o f W . ..
Director
Director
Director
Director
Director
E. and M.
Ecli.
13.L.
E.S.O.
..
list.
Electrical and Mechanical;
Echelon.'
Electric Light.
Embarkation Staff Officer.
Establishment.
Fur.
Fd. A m i .
Fd. Bde. . .
Fd. Bty. . .
Fd. Coy. ..
Fd. Sqn. . .
F.G.C.lt.
Fd. I m p . . .
I'lt.
F.M.
F.O.
F.S.
F.S.M.
..
L.'.S.E, . .
F.O.O. . .
Fus.
F.W.D. . .
Farrier.
Field Ambulance.
Field Brigade.
Field Battery.
Field Company.
Field Squadron.
Field-General Court-Martial
Field Imprisonment.
Flight.
Field-Marshal.
Field Officer.
Field Service
Field Service Manual.
Field Service Hegnlations.
Forward Observation Officer.
Fusilier.
Four "Wheel Drive.
G.C.M.
Gd.
Gdsm.
G.H.Q,
G.O.C.
Gp.
Gr.
G.K.O
G.S.
G.S.O.
General Court-Martial.
Guard'.
Guardsman.
General Headquarters.
General Officer Commanding,
Group.
Gunner.
General Routine Order.
General Service or Genera! Staff.
General Staff Officer.
..
..
..
..
..
H.D.
H.E.
H.G.
Hosp.
How.
H.Q.
H.T.
Hy. Bde...
Hy. Bty.
Full Description.
of Remounts.i
of Supply and Transport.
of Survey Services.
of Veterinary Services.
of Works.
Horse Drawn or Heavy Draught.
High Explosive or Horizontal Equivalent
Hotclikiss Gun.
Hospital.
Howitzer.
Headquarters.
• Horsed Transport.
Heavy Brigade.
Heavy Battery.
I.A.
l/e.
Impt. H.L.
Inf.
Int.
I.O.O.
..
I.W.T. . .
Indian Army.
In charge of.
Imprisonment with Hard Labour.
Infantry.
Intelligence.
Inspecting Ordnance Officer.
Inland Water Transport.
J.A.G.
Judge-Advocate-General.
L.D.
L.G.
..
Light Draught.
Lewis Gun.
Abbreviation
for use in
the field..
L.G.S. Wagon.
Lieut.
L. of C
1/T
Full Description.
..
..
Lt.-Col
Lt.-Gen
M.A.C
Maj
Maj.-Gen.
M.D.S
M.E
Med. Bty.
Med. Bde.
M.F.O
M.F.P
M.F.W
M.G
M.L.O.
M.M.P. . .
M.O
Mob.
Mob. Vet. Sec. .
M.P.
m.p.g.
..
m.p.h.
M.S.
M.T
Mtd.
m.v.
N.C.O.
Non-commissioned officer.
..
Officer Commanding.
Officer.
Officer in charge.
Ordnance Officer.
Observation Post.
Other ranks.
Officers Training Corps,
Offr.
O. i/c
O.O.
P.O.
Pdr.
Pack '
Pi.
P.M;
Pmr.
Pnr.
P.O.
Ph. E
Pte.
Motor Ambulance Convoy.
Major.
Major-General.
Main Dressing Station.
Military Engineering.
Medium Battery.
Medium Brigade.
Military Forwarding Officer.
Miltary Foot Police.
Military Foreman of Works.
Machine Gun.
Military Landing 0filter
Military Mounted Police.
Medical Officer.
Mobilization.
Mobile Veterinary Section.
Military Police.
Miles per gallon.
Miles per hour.
Military Secretary.
Mechanical Transport.
Mounted.
Muzzle Velocity.
..
O.C
O.P.
O.R.
O.T.C.
Limbered General Service Wagon.
Lieutenant.
Line or Lines of Communication,
Line Telegraphy.
Lieutenant-Colonel.
Lieutenant-General.
..
Principal Chaplain.
Pounder.
Pack.
Platoon.
Provost-Marshal.
Paymaster.
Pioneer.
Post Office.
Photographic Reconnaissance.
Private.
Principal S^a Transport Officer.
P.S.T.O. . .
Q.F.
Q.M.G.
Q.M.S.
Qr. Mr.
ft.A.P.
Ref.
Regt.
..
..
..
..
Quick firing.
Quartermaster-General.
Quartermaster-Serjeant,
Quartermaster.
Regimental Aid Post.
Reference.
Regiment.
Abbreviation
for use in
the field.
Rptd.
R.F.
Rfn.
By.
Ry. Tel.
R.O.
R.P.
R.S.M.
R. Sup.
R/T.
R.W.
Full Description.
Repeated.
Representative Fraction or Range Finder.
Rifleman. Railway.
Railway Telegraph.
Routine Order.
Rules of Procedure.
Regimental Serjeant-Major.
Railhead Supply Officer.
Radio Telephony.
Royal Warrant for pay and promotion.
Small Arm Ammunition,
Sanitary.
Staff Captain.
Section.
Signal.
Signalman.
Signals.
Serjeant.
Searchlight.
Serjeant-major.
Short Magazine Lee-Enfield (ritie).
Staff Officer.
Special Despatch Rider.
Sapper.
Squadron.
Squadron Leader.
Sound Ranging.
Single Seater Fighter.
Station,
Standard "SVire Gauge,
Supply Officer.
Supply Railhead.
Supply Refilling Point.
Territorial Army.
Tractor Drawn.
Transport Officer.
Troop.
Trooper. •
Transport.»
Trumpeter.
Vet.
V.T.
V/T.
Veterinary.
Vertical Interval.
Visual Telegraphy.
W.E.
W/T
W.W.C.P.
War Establishments.
Wireless Telegraphy.
Walking Wounded Collecting Post.
DEFINITIONS
(For special definitions of terms used in Combined Operations, see Sec. 17.)
ABATIS, An obstacle formed of trees or branches of trees picketed to the
ground with their points towards the enemy.
ACCOUTREMENTS comprise belts, pouches, bandoliers, slings, packs, mess tins,
haversacks, water-bottles, and similar articles (other than arms) carried
outside the clothing.
ADMINISTRATION. The business of maintaining the forces in the field and of
performing for them the various services required to enable them to fight.
ADMINISTRATION, GEXERAI. That part of the business which iB directly controlled from the Headquarters of the forces in the field.
ADMINISTRATION, LOCAL. That part of the business "which is executed by the
local authority.
ADVANCED BASE. A iocaiity in which are situated the advanced depots of
ammunition, supplies, animals, and materials from which issues are
made to formations, field depots and dumps.
ALIGNMENT. Any straight line on which a body of troops is formed, or is
to form.
AREA. A locality or district organized under one authority for purposes of
local administration.
ARM. A branch, of the army whose primary duty is to fight.
BANQUETTE. The-place upon which men stand to fire over a parapet,
BASE. A locality where a line of communication originates and where main
depots of reinforcements, animals and stores are usually established.
BASIN, (i) A small area of level ground surrounded (or nearly so) by hills ;
(ii) a district drained by a river and its tributaries,
BAULK. A timber beam or road bearer in a military bridge,
. BAY. The distance bridged by one set of baulks.
BEARING. True bearing is the angle a line makes with the true north line.
Magnetic bearing is the angle a line makes with the magnetic north
line. I n each case the angle is measured from North by East and South.
BENCH MARK, A mark cut by surveyors on a stone or permanent structure
to indicate that a level has been accurately fixed by instruments.
BERM. The distance between the edge of an excavation and the parapet
formed of the excavated earth—in a defence work.
BIGHT. The portion of a rope used double when the ends are not available.
BIVOUAC, An encampment without tents or huts.
BOMB-PROOF. A shelter, proof against penetration by shells.
BUTT, The thick end of a spar or the wooden end of a rifle.
CALIBRE. The diameter of the bore of a gun in inches not counting the depth
of the grooves.
CAMOUFLAGE. An artificial means employed to deceive the enemy's visual or
photographic observation from the ground or from the air,
CASEMATE, A shell-proof chamber constructed for the accommodation of a
garrison of a work or position,
CHESS. A plank forming a portion of the decking of a bridge.
COL. A depression between two adjacent hills; a break in a ridge; the
neck of land connecting an outlying feature with the main range.
COLUMN. Bodies of troops formed one in rear of another.
COMMAND (M.E.). Vertical height of the crest of a work above the
natural surface of the ground.
COMMANDER. An officer vested with the command of a detachment, unit,
or formation of fighting or administrative troops.
xii
COMMUNICATIONS. The system of communication BY road, rail, navigable
waterways and air between the Army and its base or bases of operations
inclusive.
CONSOLIDATION. Making captured ground secure against attack, by careful
organization of the troops and b y provision of protection.
CONTOUR. A contour is the representation 011 a m a p of an imaginary lino
running along the surface of the ground a t t h e same height above mean
sea level throughout its length.
CONTRIBUTION. A levy made on a town or community (see Chap. X X , F . S . R . ,
Vol. 1,1923).
COSSACK POST. A small p a r t y of mounted men (3 to 6) under a N.C.O. or
senior soldier, which supplies its own sentries.
COVER. Concealment f r o m view or protection from enemy projectiles.
COVERING TIRE. Fire by one u n i t or a r m t o engage the enemy's attention
and force him t o seek covcr in order t h a t another unit or a r m may
advance or retire.
CREST (M.E.). The intersection of the interior and superior slopes of a
parapet. The highest point of a parapet.
CREST (TOPO.). The edge of t h e t o p of a hill or m o u n t a i n ; t h e position a t
which a gentle slope changcs to an a b r u p t one.
CRIB-PIER. A support for a bridge formed of layers of beams of wood laid
alternately a t right angles t o each other.
DEAD GROUND. Ground which cannot be swept b y aimed or observed fire.
DEFILE, A portion of the route which troops can only traverse on a narrow
f r o n t , e.g., a mountain pass, a bridge, an embankment.
DEPLOY. To extend A u n i t or formation into A more open formation.
DEPOTS. General establishments in which personnel, animals, supplies, stores
or ammunition are held and dealt with in bulk.
DEPTH. The space occupied by a body of troops f r o m f r o n t to r e a r .
DERRICK. A single spar held b y four guys, used for lifting or moving weights.
DISTANCE. The space between men or bodies of troops from f r o n t t o rear.
DRESSING STATION. A placc where wounded are collected and attended by
the personnel of a field ambulance.
DUG-OUT. An underground chamber or passage.
DUMPS. Small collections of supplies stores, or ammunition accumulated
temporarily for some particular purpose.
ECHELON. A formation of successive and parallel units facing in the same
direction, each on a flank, and to the rear of, t h e uni,t in f r o n t of i t .
EMBRASURE, A channel through the parapet of a work through which a
gun is fired.
"ENFILADE FIRE. Fire which rakes the greatest length of a position or body
of troops.
FASCINE. A long bundle of brushwood used for revetting, roadmaking, (fee.
FIELD ARMY. T h a t portion of the forces in the field not allotted t o coast
defence garrisons or L . of C» areas.
FIELD DEPOT. A small t e m p o r a r y depot of ammunition, supplies or stores,
in the immediate vicinity of the field units and under the direct control
of their formation commander.
FIELD OF FIRE. The area of ground which any u n i t or weapon can sweep with
fire.
FIELD UNITS.. Mobile units belonging to the field army.
.FIGHTING TROOPS. I n f a n t r y , cavalry, artillery (including ammunition
columns), tanks, armoured car units, engineer field units, and Royal Air
Force operating with t h e field army. The headquarters of commanders, of
fighting troops are fighting units.
FIRE, DIRECT LAYING. When the gun is laid by looking over or through
the sights a t the target.
Xlll
FIRE, FRONTAL. Fire, the line of which is perpendicular to the front of the
target.
FIRE, HIGH ANGLE. Five from all gnus and howitzers at all angles of elevation
exceeding 25°.
F I R E , INDIRECT LAVRXO.
W h e n t h e g u n is l a i d f o r d i r e c t i o n o n a n a i m i n g
point or on aiming posts and elevation adjusted by sight clinometer.
F I R I S BAY. A length of trench from which it is intended to deliver rifle fire,
FIRE, OBLIQUE. Fire, the line of which is inclined to the front of the target.
FILE. A f r o n t rank man and his rear rank man.
FORCES IN THE FIELD. This term comprises the whole of the military forcc3
in the theatre of operations under the supreme command of the C. in. C.
FORM LINE. An approximate contour ; a sketch contour.
FORMATION. A number of fighting units grouped together under one
commander may be referred to as a "formation." The lowest permanent
formation is a Cavalry or Infantry Brigade. Other permanent formations
arc:—(a) Division. (6) Corps, (c) Army.
FORWARD ZONE. That portion of a defensive system which is in advancc of
the main zone.
FOUUASSE. A small mine filled with stones which are projected toward?
the enemy 011 the mine being fired.
FRONTAGE. The extent of ground covered laterally by a body of troops.
GABION. An open cylinder of brushwood, shcetiron, &c., used for revetting.
GLACIS. The ground round a work within close rifle fire. Sometimes formed
artificially. A term used to describe an even natural slope.
GORGE (TOPO.). A rugged and deep ravine. (Mil. Eng.) The face of a work
least prepared to receive frontal fire.
GRADIENT. A slope represented by. a fraction. ^ represents a rise or fall of
one unit measured vertically for every 30 units measured horizontally.
GRID NORXH.
Sec S e c . 1 8 , 8.
GRID VARIATION. The angle between true north and grid nortli.
GUY. A rope fastened to the tip of a spar or frame, to support, raise, or
lower it.
GYN. A tripod with tacklc, used for raising weights,
HEADERS. Sods, sandbags, etc., placed so t h a t the longest side is at ri*:hl.
angles to the face of the structure.
HEADQUARTERS, CORPS. The headquarters of the commander of a corps or
group of divisions.
HEADQUARTERS, ARMY. The headquarters of the commander of an army
or group of . corps. Tf corps arcuot grouped in separate armies, army
headquarters and general headquarters become identical, and the latter
term will be used.
HEADQUARTERS, GENERAL.
T h e h e a d q u a r t e r s of C. i n C. of t h e f o r c e s i n
the field.
HEAD OF SERVICE. The senior officer of a service in the theatre of operations.
HOME AUTHORITIES. The authorities responsible for the provision and
maintenance of the forces in the field, i.e., the Army Council in the case
of forces it administers and, in the case of troops belonging to the selfgoverning dominions and India, the supreme military authorities in those
countries.
HORIZONTAL EQUIVALENT. The distance in plan between two adjacent
contours measured in yards.
HORSE-LENGTH.
8 feet.
HORSE-WIDTH. 3 feet, which includes 3 inches outside the rider's knee on
either side.
IMPREST. An advance of public money for expenditure on the public service,
e.g., payment of troops, local purchases, &c.
xiv
INTERVAL, The lateral space between men, units or corps measured from
flank to flank.
KNOLL. A low detached hill.
LINES OF COMMUNICATION. The systems of communication by .rail, road,
waterway or otherwise, between a base (inclusive) and the army, or parts
of the army, in the fleJd.
L. OF C. DEFENCE TROOPS. That portion of the forces in the field which from
time to time is detailed for the defence of the L. of C. and placed under
the orders of commanders of L. of C. areas.
L. OF C. UNITS. Units allotted to the L. of G.
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN^ A magnetic north and south line.
MAGNETIC VARIATION. The angle between the true north and magnetic
north.
MAIN ZONE. That portion of a defensive system in which the commander
decides to fight out the battle and break the enemy's attack.
MERIDIAN. A true north and south line.
MOBILIZATION is the process by which an armed force passes from a peace
to a war footing. The mobilization, therefore, of a unit means its completion for war in men, horses, and material.
ORDERS, OPERATION. Orders which deal with all strategical and tactical
operations and which include such information regarding supply, transport, &c,, as it is necessary to publish to the troops.
ORDERS, ROUTINE. Orders which deal with matters not concerned with
operations, such as discpline, interior economy.
ORDERS, STANDING. Orders issued to adapt existing regulations to local
conditions and to save frequent repetitions m operation and routine
orders.
PACE; The demomination of different degrees of speed ; also a measurement
of distance (30 inches).
PARADOS. A bank of earth constructed to give cover from reverse fire and
the back burst of high-explosive shells.
PARAPET. Earth, &c., banked up in front of a trench above ground level to
afford protection against frontal fire.
PARKS. Collections of personnel, animals, supplies, stores and ammunition
placed by U.H.Q. at the disposal of subordinate commanders. Administrative records are kept of receipts and issues.
PATROL. A body of men sent out to reconnoitre, or to guard against surprise.
PLATOON. The quarter of an infantry company. Consists of four sections.
PLOTTING. The process of laying down on paper field observations and
measurements.
POSITION IN OBSERVATION (artillery) implies batteries in action watching
all ground in their field of fire and ready to open fire.
POSITION IN READINESS (artillery) implies batteries limbered up under cover
with all possible alternative positions in the immediate neighbourhood
reconnoitred and everything ready for their occupation.
PROFILE. The outline of the section of a parapet at right angles to the crest.
PRIMERS. A specially prepared nature of high explosive which acts as t h e
medium of detonation between the detonator and the demolition charge.
RAILHEAD. A railway station or siding to which men, animals, supplies and
stores are despatched from a base or regulating station.
RAILWAY TERMS : —
Chairs—connect rails with sleepers.
Crossings—gaps in rails by means of which a vehicle on one line of rails
crosses another line of rails.
Cross-over roads—to pass rolling stock from one line to another.
Fishplates^plates
connecting one rail with another,
Keys—connect rails with chairs (they arc wedges).
xxxiv
Points—rails fixed at one end and movable at the other, to lead a vehicle
in either of two directions.
Sidings—allow rolling stock to remain out of danger while traffic on the
m a m line is being carried on.
Through road—combination of crossings, enables one line of rails to
cross another without means of communication between the two.
RECONNAISSANCE. Surveying and searching the country in order to discover
and locate the enemy and to find out the lie of the laud.
REDOUBT. A field work entirely enclosed by a parapet giving all-round fire.
.RE-ENTRANT. A valley or depression running into a main feature.
REFILLING POINTS. Places' at which divisional trains or ammunition columns
are refilled.
REGULATING STATION.—A place where all railway trains are given a final
destination, and where bulk trains packed with supplies, materials, &c.,
may have to be re-marshalled.
REAR POSITION. A separate defensive system some miles in rear of the leading
system which can be occupied in the event of the leading system being
captured by the enemy,
RELIEF. The length of time that men have to work before being relieved,
or a number of men who work, or are on duty, for a given length of time.
RENDEZVOUS. Places where transport columns are met by representatives
of the headquarters concerned and directed to refilling points.
REPORT CENTRE. A pre-arranged postion to which reports intended for a
commander must be sent.
REQUISITION. A mode of making inhabitants of a district contribute supplies,
<fcc., to an army. Must be paid for (see page 181), but a Requisition
Receipt Note implies no promise to pay.
'REVETMENT. Any material formed into a retaining wall to support earth
at a steeper slope than the natural one.
RIBAND. A beam or spar fastened down on each side of a roadway to keep
the chesses in place.
RUNNER. A man detailed to carry messages.
SADDLE,
See COL.
SANGAR. A parapet composed of dry built stone wall.
SAP. A trench formed by constantly extending the end towards the enemy.
SCALE. The proportion which a distance between any two points on a map
bears to the horizontal distance between the same points on the ground.
SECTION. Cavalry (and artillery). 4 front rank men with their coverers.
,,
Artillery. One of the divisions of a battery with its complement of
men, horses and wagons,
,,
Infantry. The quarter of a platoon.
,,
Tanks. 4 tanks.
,,
Topography. The outline of the intersection of the surface of
the ground by a vertical plane.
SECTION OF DEFENCE. A portion of a defensive position which is allotted
to a distinct body of troops.
SERREFILE. Such officers, Jf.C.Os. or men, as may be detailed to ride in
rear of the rear rank of a squadron when in line.
SERVIOE. A " service " is a branch of the army whose primary business is to
supply the fighting arms with what they require or to perform some
necessary work on their behalf.
SHEERS, tfwo spars lashed together at the tip and raised to rest on their
butts, which are separated. They are used to lift and move weights in
one plane.
SIGNAL UNITS. Units employed on the service of intercommunication.
They include signal squadrons and troops, airline cable,wireless, divisional
and L. of C. signal companies, but do not include regimental signallers
on the establishment of other units.
xvi
SLOPE.
Exterior. The outskle slope of a parapet extending downwards
from the superior slope.
Interior. The inside slope of a parapet extending from the crest
to the banquette.
,,
Superior. The top of a parapet immediately forward from the crest.
SPAN. The horizontal distance between the centres of any two supports of
a bridge.
SPLINTER-PROOF. A shelter, proof against splinters of shell.
SPITLOCK. TO mark out a line on the ground with the point of a pick-axe.
SPOIL. The material resulting from any excavations.
SPOT LEVEL. The record on a map of the exact height of a particular point.
Srim (TOPOGRAPHICAL). A projection from the side of a hill or mountain
running out from the main feature.
SQUAD. A small body of men formed for drill or for work.
STAFF, THE. Staff officers appointed to the General Staff, to the A.G.'s
and Q.M.G.'s branches of the staff, or as brigade-majors and staff captains,
to assist certain commanders in the discharge of their duties.
STRETCHERS (M.E.). Sods, sandbags, <fcc., placed so that their longest
side is parallel to the face of the structure.
SUPPLIES. Food, forage, fuel, light, petrol, disinfectants and medical comforts.
TACKLE. Any system of blocks and ropes by which power is gained at the
expense of time (i.e., more power, less speed).
TAMP, TO. To cover a charge over with earth or other material so as to
conftue the gases at the commencement of an explosion, and thus develop
their forces more fully.
TASK. The amount of work to be executed by a man party, or unit, during a
relief.
THEATRE OF OPERATIONS. The whole area of land or sea in which fighting
may be expected or in which movements of troops are liable to Interruption or interference by the enemy.
TRACE. The outline of a work in plan.
TRAIN. IT.A.S.C. transport allotted for the conveyance of the baggage, stores, *
ammunition (other than gun ammunition) and supplies for the units of a
division.
TRAVERSE (M.E.). A buttress of earth provided between two adjacent
portions of a tire or communication trench for protection against enfilade
tire, and to localize the burst of shells.
TRAVERSE (TOPOGRAPHICAL). The survey of a road, river, or track by
measuring a continuous series of straight lines along its course and theangles at their junctions.
TROOP. A sub-division of a squadron, corresponding to a platoon in the
infantry. Also used for certain units, e.g., field troop, signal troop.
VERTICAL INTERVAL. The difference of level between two adjacent contours
in feet.
WATERCOURSE. The line defining the lowest part of a valley, whether occupied
by a stream or not.
WATERSHED. A vidge of high land separating two drainage basins; the
summit of land from which water divides or flows in two directions.
Jt does not necessarily include the highest points of a range.
WATTLE. Continuous brushwood hurdle work.
,,
1 Chap. 2, Sec, 10.
FIELD SERVICE POCKET BOOK
1925
PART I
CHAPTER
1. W A R
I
ESTABLISHMENTS*
1. Information regarding the war establishment and war outfit of regular
units can be derived from the following sources :—
Men and animals
..
..
—
J" War Establishments.
Transport, Remount and Veterinary
I. Manuals, War. Field Service Manuals.
("Equipment Regs.
m
•dnance stores, i.e., Iarms,
U M o».H-J
a r Equipment
Ordnance
W
War
Eouin'ment Tables,
Ti
A.F. G 1098.
munition, vehicles, harness,^ 0 r d n a n c a Manual, War.
tools, &c.
"' ^ Field Service Manuals.
/ Clothing Regs., P a r t I I I .
Clothing and necessaries
' ' \ F i e l d Service Manuals.
/ T a b l e s of. books,
required on mobili•'
zation. A.F. L 1398.
Stationery
..
: f R.A.M.C. Training.
. . -i Field Service Manuals.
Medical stores
Regulations, A.M.S.
/ Veterinary Manual, War.
Veterinary stores
..
"* Field Service Manuals.
f Supply Manual, War.
Food, forage and light
. . -( War Establishments.
.. ^ Field Service Manuals.
f War Establishments.
) Transport,. Remount and Veterinary
Transport
''
Mnnuals, War.
(_Field Service Manuals.
•Certain War Establishments for general use are enclosed iu the pocket a t
the beginning of this book (These are subject to amendment f r o m time t o
time, and care should be taken t h a t corrections are kept up to date.)
(B 28/332)Q
B
War Office
8047
2. S Y S T E M OF COMMAND I N T H E FIELD
Commanders of
Armies.
Commanders of
L. of C. Areas.
C. in C.
I
Staff
)
See Sees.3,1
4 and 5
^ I
I
Officers
G.H.Q.
holding
Troops,
special
appointments.
Commanders of
Fortresses.
I Staff
TTT
1
I
1
Army Troops. Commanders Representatives
of Corps,
of Services.
Headsof
Services.
I Staff
|_
Staff
RepreCorps
sentatives Troops.
of Services.
I
I
I
Division. Division. Division.
Staff
J
Infantry
Brigades.
Divisional
Troops.
Staff
Infantry
Battalions.
Commanders ol HepresenBase and L . ol
tatives ol
C. Sub-Areas.
Services.
I
Representatives
oi Services.
Commanders of
posts in L . of C.
Sub-Areas.
Representative
of Services.
a
V
•s
•A
01
<9
o
Units
attached.
3
C h a p . 1 F S e e s . 3, 4 a n d 5.
3. D U T I E S
OF T H E
GENERAL
STAFF
IN
WAR
1. The duties of the general staff branch in war are:—
i. To obtain and communicate information about our own troops,
the enemy, and the theatre of war.
ii. To prepare plans and issue orders for operations.
Iii. To arrange for communication, ciphers, censorship. The provision
and distribution of maps, secret service, guides, interpreters and
propaganda.
iv. The organization, training and efficiency of troops.
v. To draft despatches.
4. D U T I E S
OF
THE
ADJUTANT-GENERAL'S
BRANCH IN WAR
1. The duties of the adjutant-general's branch of the staff in war include:—
i. In the field.
Questions of personnel, reinforcements, discipline, interior
economy, spiritual welfare, health and sanitation, clearing battlefield, labour, routine orders, ceremonial, disposal of prisoners of
war and enemy dead, philanthropic bodies. Formation of new
units other than policy.
ii. At the base.
Routine work of strength and records of personnel of units,
casualty returns, records of strengths of units, questions of man
power, reinforcements, custody of effects of casualties, personal
services, postings, transfers, promotion, pay, claims under the
Pay "Warrant. Detail of policy laid down in regulations,
questions affecting prisoners of war. Custody and transmission
of war diaries and other documents.
5. D U T I E S
OF THE Q.M.G's.
BRANCH
IN
WAR
1. The duties of the quartermaster-general's branch of the staff in war
include:—
1. Under the heading of maintenance.
Supervision and co-ordination of the work of. and allocation of
labour to, the services. Quartering; supplies ; maintenance of
the scale of reserve stocks ; employment of local civilian labour
gang3.
Arrangements for messing, institutes, fire protection, salvage,
baths, disinfectors, clean clothes and postal arrangements.
The formation of ammunition, engineer stores, remount and
other depots, workshops, veterinary hospitals, laundries; the
allocation of remounts.
Notifying the War Office of the priority between demands for
supplies, ammunition and stores.
Ii. Under the heading of movement.
Embarkations and landings (other than in the presence of
the enemy). Supervision of all systems of communication by
road, rail, inland waterways and, by adequate staff arrangements,
ensuring their maximum use.
• (B 28/332)Q
B 2
4
Chap. 1 , S a c . 6 .
6. O R G A N I Z A T I O N
OP
THE
SERVICES
AND
M A I N T E N A N C E OF T H E F O R C E S I N T H E
FIELD
1. The process of maintaining the forces in the field by the supply of all
they require, other than personnel, is effected in the five stages given below :—
i. Design, specification and initial inspection.
ii. Provision.
iii. Production.
iv. Holding, repairs and local inspection.
Y. Distribution.
2. The mechanism for supplying the forces in the field with its daily
requirements, other than personnel, is furnished by the services in accordance
with the distribution given below (arranged alphabetically).
1. Chaplains.
Spiritual and moral welfare of all personnel in the field.
il. Graves.
Burial of dead, registration of graves, provision of cemeteries,
enquiries regarding dead and missing.
til. Eirings service.
All questions concerning the purchase, requisition and hire
of billets, manoeuvre grounds, buildings and lands and all claims
in connection therewith, except such as may be dealt with by
the claims commission, if one is established.
I n the case of operations on a small scale, where no directorate
of hirings is formed, the responsibility for administering these
services rests with the D. of W.
lv. Judge Advocate General's service.
Legal advice on matters arising under military, civil, martial
and international law. Review of proceedings under military
and martial law.
v. Medical service.
Care of the sick and wounded and their evacuation when
necessary. Administration of all medical units and advice as
to their siting. Application for and provision of specialized
medical stores. Recommendations regarding all precautionary
or remedial, medical and sanitary measures conducive to the
prevention and mitigation of disease and the preservation of the
health of the troops.
vi. Ordnance service.
Provision, storage, maintenance, issue and such inspection as
is in the province of the D.O.S., of all stores and material including
armament, ammunition, clothing, tanks, track and semi-track
vehicles, and all M.T. vehicles peculiar to fighting units, but
exclusive of supplies and specialized medical and veterinary stores
and appliances. Organization of store,-ammunition and salvage
depots in the theatre of operations. Responsibility for such stores
as have been salvaged being reconditioned and utilized to the best
advantage. Organization in the theatre of operations of laundries
and repair workshops for the conditioning and reparation of all
damaged or defective material.
Reception and disposal of captured arms, stores, material and
trophies.
5 Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
vii. Pay service.
Provision of funds. Issue of pay and allowances. Payment
for services performed for the army. Accounting for cash
expenditure. Making of claims against individuals or others for
repayment, securing punctual collection and accounting for cash
receipts.
Central office for payment of requisitioning claims. .
viii. Postal service.
Arrangements with the civil postal authorities at home and in
the theatre of war, excluding wireless telegraphs and telephones.
Transmission of letters and postal packets within the postal
limit of weight.
Such other postal business as may be arranged.
ix. Printing and stationery service.
Letterpress printing, army forms, books and stationery, typewriting and duplicating machines. Reproductions of photographs.
x. Provost service.
Police matters. Executive control of road traffic. Military
prisons and detention barracks.
xl. Remount service.
Provision and training of animals of all descriptions other than
carrier pigeons and messenger dogs.
xii. Supply and Transport service.
Provision of supplies of all kinds, i.e.t food, medical comforts,
forage, fuel, petrol, mineral burning oil and disinfectants.
Agricultural operations.
Provision, maintenance (second line repairs) and inspection of
all M.T. vehicles other than tanks, track and semi-track vehicles
and those peculiar to fighting units ; also operation and first line
repairs of staff M.T. vehicles, and M.T. vehicles of medical and
R.A.S.C. units.
xiii. Survey service.
Trigonometrical and topographical field survey, and all work
incidental thereto, including production, reproduction, and supply
of maps.
xiv. Transportation service.
Communications on technical and financial matters with civilian
transportation authorities.
Construction, maintenance and working of railways of all
gauges, and the construction and maintenance of railway bridges.
"Working and maintenance of inland waterways.
Control of signal personnel working the telegraph and telephone
circuits in connection with the operation of railways and inland
waterways. Technical operations of ports and landing stages,
with special reference to the handling and disposal of material in
transit.
Military forwarding agency for parcels.
Where transportation construction units are not provided,
the D. of "W. will be responsibe for carrying out such constructional
work as transportation services may require.
xv. Veterinary service.
Prevention of disease and care of sick and injured animals.
Organization of veterinary hospitals and convalescent depots.
Provision of specialized veterinary stores and appliances.
6
Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
xvi. Works service.
Building and constructional engineering work of all kinds
(other than railway construction (including bridges) and work
which comes under the heading of field engineering). Installation
and working of stationary water supplies, sanitary and fire fighting
systems, baths, provision of electricity for power and lighting
and the installation and working of such constructional workshops as may be necessary for carrying out these duties. Design
and construction of camouflage material.
Construction and maintenance of roads, including the working
of quarries.
Construction of cemeteries and burial places.
"Where transportation construction units are not provided, the
works service will be responsible for carrying out such constructional work as transportation services may requireWhere no directorate of hirings is formed, all questions concerning the purchase, requisition and hire of billets, manoeuvre
grounds, buildings and lands and all claims in connection therewith.
3. I t follows from' the grouping of the functions of the services given in
para. 2, t h a t the orders of the C.-in-C. will usually be communicated to the
heads of services as follows :—
i. Through the C.G.S.
Survey service.
Royal Corps of Signals (see Footnote t).
ii. Through the A.O.
Provost service.
Medical service.
Chaplains.
Pay service.
Judge-Advocate-General's service.
Graves.
iii. Through the Q.M.O.
Transportation service.
Works service.
Remounts service.
Supply and transport service.
Postal service.
Ordnance service.
Veterinary service.
Printing and stationery service.
Lands service.
t The head of the Royal Corps of Signals in the field will be responsible to the C.G.S. for the efficient working of his service. He will be styled
Signal-Officer-in-Chief or Chief Signal Officer according to the size of the
forces in the field. He will receive instructions through the operations section
of the general staff branch at G.H.Q. and, in subordinate commands, officers
of the signal service will similarly receive their commander's instructions
through the operations section.
The signal-officer-in-chief or chief signal officer, as the case may be, is
also vested with the responsibilities and duties of a head of a service,
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
7
CHAPTER II
7. M A R C H E S A N D MARCH
DISCIPLINE
(See Sec. 150 el seq., F.S.R., Vol. II, 1924.)
GENERAL RULES.
1. The rate of marching throughout a column should be uniform. An
Irregular pace is mo3t exhausting to the troops, especially to those in rear
of the column.
No trumpet or bugle call is allowed on the march, and on service no compliments are to be paid unless special orders are issued to the contrary.
2. Space must be left on the outer flank of a column, both whe.i marching
and when halted for the passage of officers and of orderlies and for the passing
of columns in reverse direction. Unless orders to the contrary are issued,
troops and transport will march on the rule of the road side of the road ; but
in dusty and hot weather, or in order to render it less conspicuous from the
air, a column may, with advantage, be opened out on cach side of the road
the centre of the road being kept clear. I t may even be advisable t o increase
the distances and intervals between men, but this will only be done by order
of the commander issuing the orders for the march.
3. Au average march under normal conditions for a large column of all
arms is 10 to 15 miles a day, with a rest at least once a week ; small commands of seasoned troops can cover longer distances under favourable conditions.
4. To prevent minor checks in a column being felt throughout its length,
the following distances will normally be maintained .*—
In rear of—
Yards.
An infantry company
..
..
..
..
..
10
Squadron, battery or other unit not specified here
..
10
Cavalry regiment, artillery brigade or infantry battalion
20
Cavalry or infantry brigade
..
..
..
..
30
An officer, when available, m i l march in rear of each squadron, battery,
company, or other unit, to see that no man quits the ranks without p e r mission, that the sections, files, vehicles and animals keep properly closed up,
and that the column does not unduly open out.
5. By order of the commander of the column, distances may be increased
in dusty or hot weather, and rcduced or omitted when marching by night
and, by day, when an engagement is imminent.
When there is no possibility of meeting .an enemy, the order of march of
the main body will depend chiefly on the comfort of the troops. During hot
weather every opportunity should be offered troops on the march to secure
increased evaporation from the skin by opening or removing jackets and
rolling up tlio sleeves. When marching in frost and snow, the most efficacious
measure against cold is an increased issue of rations ; during halts the men
should not be allowed to sit down or to fall asleep.
6. The normal march formations on a road are—
For cavalry
..
. . Column of sections or of half sections, i.e.,
4 men or 2 men abreast.
For artillery
..
. . Column of route, i.e., guns and vehicles in
single file.
For infantry
..
. . Column of route, i.e., fours.
For cyclists
..
. . Half sections, i.e., 2 men abreast.
For motor vehicles
. . Single file.
On unenclosed ground it may sometimes be advisable to march on a
broader front than in a single column in the normal march formation. I t is
better to march in a formation composed of several columns abreast than in a
line formation, as marching in line is fatiguing for the troops.
8
Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
7. Cavalry.—When marching along a road, not more than four horses if in
sections (or groups), or not more than two horses if in half-sections (or files),
should march abreast, including commanders, &c.
To avoid any increase in the length of columns, commanders, centre guides,
&c., should march in the regulation distances between units, or fill up blank
files.
8. Artillery.—The regulation distance between carriages should be strictly
preserved.
When a halt is ordered each carriage must be drawn up at once by the
roadside. C oss roads should be left clear.
Dismounted detachments will march in rear of the carriages.
9. Infantry.—"When marching in fours, not more than four men should
march abreast, including commanders and supernumeraries. Bands and
drums will conform.
Exact distances and covering are to be maintained at all times when
marching in fours ; t h e fact of marching at ease is not to affect the relative
position of men in the ranks, or that of supernumeraries or commanders,
unless orders t o the contrary are issued.
10. Transport.—When
a halt is ordered each vehicle should be drawn up
a t once on the side of the road. Cross roads should be left clear. The regulation distance between vehicles should be strictly preserved, and no one
other t h a n the driver, and one man t o a t t e n d t o the brake when necessary,
should be allowed t o Tide on any vehicle without written permission.
11. Followers.—Camp followers, sutlers, civilians, <fcc., who accompany
troops or their transport on the line of march, must be marshalled and made
to observe the regulations laid down for infantry.
12. Starting point—A point, termed the starting point, which the head
of the main body is to pass at a certain time, is fixed in operation orders.
If troops are not all quartered together, it may be necessary for the commander t o fix more t h a n one starting point, so as to enable subordinate
commands to take their places in the column of march punctually without
unnecessary fatigue to t h e troops, and without crossing the line of approach
of other commands.
Each subordinate Commander must fix his own local
starting point and the time the head of his command must pass it so as to
be able t o pass the higher'formation starting point at the hour specified. .
. In fixing the starting point, care must be taken t h a t each unit reaches it
b y moving forward in the direction of the march.
Should a march begin in the dark, special arrangements for marking the
starting point will have to be made, and notified in operation orders. Lights
may be used for this purpose, but they must be effectively screened f r o m the
enemy. Fighting troops with their first line transport have precedence on
the road over all other transport during the movement to the starting point.
13. Salts.—On the Bait being signalled, everyone will at once halt and
fall but on the.same side of the road on which they are marching and take off
their equipment.
During a march halts should take place at regular intervals, and all ranks
should know when to expect them and their duration. Normally these halts
will be from 10 minutes before each clock hour until the clock hour, the signal
for the halt and subsequent advance being given by unit commanders independently.
14. Fords.—The following depths are fordable :—
f t . in.
Cavalry .-.
._.
..
..
..
...
_
4 0
infantry
_
..
..
3 0Tanks
*4 0
Artillery (light)
2 6
Dragons
.
2 6
Lorries . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
2 0
Hotor cars
1 0
,,
cyclists . .
..
..
..
..
..
1 0
* Provided the bottom of ford is sound.
9 Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
Gravelly bottoms are best, sandy bottoms are bad, aa the sand gets stirred
up, thus increasing the depth of water.
The depth of a river is generally moat uniform in straight parts ; at bends
the depth will generally be greater at the concave bank and less at the convex.
For this reason a river which is not anywhere fordable straight across
may be found passable in a slanting direction between two bends.
The simplest plan for measuring the velocity of a stream is described in
Section 15, 29.
All fords should be clearly marked by strong pickets driven into the river
bed above and below the ford, their heads being connected by a strong rope.
Marks should be made oil those pickets which stand in the deepest water, at
a height of 3 feet and 4 feet above the bottom, in order that any rise of water
above the fordable depth may at once be evident.
15. Military bridges.—Military bridges are classified according to Ihe load
they are designed to carry, as follows :—
i. Light bridges—
(а) Footbridges—For infantry in single file.
(б) Packbridgea—For infantry in file, cavalry, pack artillery and
pack transport in single file.
ii.-Medium bridges.—For infantry in fours, cavalry in half sections,:
horse transport, motor cars, armoured cars, light and medium
artillery, 3-ton lorries and all ordinary M.T. up to the limit of
5£-ton axle load, also track vehicles up to 8 tons, but whose
track should not exceed 8ft. 9in. in width.
iii. Heavy bridges.—For heavy artillery, tractors and other M.T.
vehicles in excess of medium loads and up to the limit of 16-ton
axle load ; also tanks up to 18 tons.
iv. Super heavy bridges.—For axle loads and tanks in excess of the above
loads.
A guard will be posted to prevent the passage on to the bridge of vehicles
over the authorized weight the bridge is calculated to take, and the R.E. unit
detailed for construction of the bridge is responsible for posting a maintenance party and for the provision of notice boards showing the class of traffic
for which it is designed. When crossing a military bridge, infantry must
break step, files or sections must not be closed up.
Horse traffic will- cross at a walk, riding horses should bo mounted, spare'
horses should be led singly by mounted men.
Mechanical transport will cross a floating bridge dead slow.. If it becomes
necessary to halt, heavy gun axles or tractors should rest as neaT as possible
midway between two piers, so as to distribute the weight evenly over both
piers.
GENERAL R U L E S FOR N I G H T MARCHES.
10. For a night march local guides should be procured where possible ; but
this does not relieve commanders of the responsibility of carrying out reconnaissances previously or of checking the direction of the march by compass or
other means.
As secrecy is of vital importance outposts should not be withdrawn until
the main column has moved off: fires should be banked and left burning.
Compass bearings must be given for direction. The route should, whenever
possible, follow a well defined natural or artificial feature even though a
slight increase in distance be entailed. Side roads or turnings where
troops in rear.might go astray should be blocked by tree "branches, whitened
stones or ropes. The destination should be some easily recognizable landmark,
or where this is not possible, a detailed description of the place should be given,
in orders.
17. The march should generally be protected by small advanced and rear
guards, usually composed of infantry only ; flanks arc best protected by piquets
posted by the advanced guard. The distance of these bodies from the column
should be small.
i. All ranks must know what to do in case of an alarm.
. ii. Every commander must have a fixed place in the column.
iii. Regulation distances between units should be reduced or omitted.
An officer should invariably march in rear of each unit.
10
Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
"When night marches are carried out without the protection of other bodies
of troops, magazines should be charged but rifles should not be loaded. No
one must fire without a distinct order. A pass-word should be arranged and
troops should wear some distinguishing mark.
Hours and periods of halts should be arranged beforehand. Men may
lie down but must not leave the ranks during a halt.
18. Protective measures must be arranged for adoption in event of a gas
attack, and the procedure to be followed in event of attack by aircraft must
be known by all ranks.
NOISE.
19. The chief causes of noise are : (a) in harness : mouthpieces of bits and
links, spare and quick release; (b) in vehicles: play of pole supporting pole
bar, swingle-trees, wheels, trail-eye, and shield of gun.
No special stores are carried for the purpose of stopping the noises caused
by the above. The following hints are given as a guide to the materials
which may be made use of if obtainable.
To silence the noises caused by links of pole bar straps, breast'collar, and
quick release ends of traces they should bo bound with strips of canvas and
secured by stitching; bits should be bound with cord or twine in such a
way as to stop the play of the bar ; loops of bar supporting pole and swingletrees, with cord or sacking ; pole, with sacking over the copper binding ;
trail-eye, with sacking, leather or rubber ; drag washers, tied to a spoke or
fitted with additional washers to a working fit. Wheels may be covered
by motor tyres (eight to a gun and limber), leather belting 6 to 7 inches wide,
15 feet long laid along the tyre and tied across the felloes, or straw, hay, or
rope bindings. To save the necessity of binding stirrup irons, spurs should not
be worn. "When within possible range of hearing by the enemy, absolute
silence must be preserved and no smoking, talking, striking of lights or flashing
of electric torches should be permitted. Accoutrements must be securely
fastened to prevent them rattling. Troops should always break step when
moving. Men should be warned t h a t if they cannot refrain from coughing
or sneezing they must press a handkerchief or some similai article against
their mouth or nose.
Definite instructions must always be issued as to the action to be taken in
case the enemy is encountered.
MOVEMENTS OF TANK AND ARMOURED CAR U N I T S .
20. Spaces occupied by tank and armoured car units are calculated in tank
lengths. One t a n k length is taken to be 8 yards.
Distances are calculated from the tail of one tank to the nose of the next.
Although the distance between tanks in column must depend to some
extent on the pace at which the column is moving, the normal distance for
purpose of calculating march tables will be considered to be 5 tank lengths
and the corresponding rate of movement <4-6 miles an hour. This allow.?
sufficient elasticity and minimises inconvenience from dust and exhaust fumes.
Should it be necessary to move a column at an appreciably greater speed,
due allowance must be made for additional distances between tanks.
"When the tactical situation demands, or the rate of movement is reduccd,
the distance between tanks can be reduced to a minimum of three tank
lengths.
When ordered to halt, tanks will close up to one tank length.
The normal distance between tank sections is nine tank lengths, and between
companies twelve tank lengths.
UIJLES FOR MECHANICAL TRANSPORT.
21. The pace of mechanical transport vehicles will be carefully regulated
and varied according to the type of vehicles comprising the convoy, and as to
whether they are towing trailers or guns or running independently. Normally,
10 miles an hour will not be exceeded, and this pace will be reduced when
passing through towns or villages. Loaded lorries should not move at a
slower pace than 5 miles an hour as this damages their engines.
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
11
22. When passing infantry, motor vehicles will move at as slow a pace as
possible. On good and level roads, a distance of 15 yards between IorrieB
and 30 yards between every ten will be maintained ; u p steep gradients
columns of lorries should be allowed to open out.
23. Loaded vehicles will have the right of way over empty convoys which
will halt, if necessary, to allow them to pass.
24. On no account are any transport vehicles to " double bank " or to
draw up on both sides of the same stretch of road.
Columns of lorries should not be halted at or near a corner unless sentries
are placed to warn approaching traffic. Whenever a column is halted, sufficient intervals will be left between each batch of ten vehicles, or less, to allow
of side tracking any passing vehicles when necessary. All motor transport
vehicles when travelling after darkwill c a n y lighted side and tail lights ; head
lights should not be used near the enemy.
25. Special instructions should be issued as to the forward limit beyond
which all lights must be extinguished for vehicles working in the forward area
between dusk and dawn.
MOVEMENTS BY MECHANICAL TRANSPORT,
26. The movement of troops by mechanical transport will usually be
confined to dismounted personnel, and the distance of the move will normally
be limited to 40 miles, i.e., 2 days' march of the Horse Transport.
Troops so moved will be without transport on arriving at their destination,
therefore Lewis guns, ammunition, rations and all impedimenta required for
immediate use will generally have to be carried by the troops moved.
27. Essentials for the movement of troops by M.T.
i. Careful previous arrangements.
ii. The move must be effected with the same detail and accuracy as a
move by rail.
iii. Close co-operation between the Staff, the M.T. authorities and the
troops.
iv. Selection of suitable roads.
v. Good discipline of the troops throughout the move.
28. Embussing and debussing points should be on straight lengths of broad
road, with open ground on the rule of the road side and in the case of a
debussing point with a suitable assembly ground to which the troops can
move without crossing the road.
Villages, defiles and bridges must be avoided. M.T. should never have to
turn round on embussing or debussing points.
29. The following require special attention:—
i. The selection and previous reconnaissance of embussing and, when
possible, of debussing points.
ii. Troops to be embussed will be told off into unit groups of vehicles.
The leading vehicle of each unit group will be marked by a flag,
as also will be the point at which it is to draw u p at the embussing
point.
iii. Unit groups will be told off into parties of 25 to a bus and 20 to a
lorry ; each party will be given a number corresponding to the
number of the vehicle on which they are to embus. Parties will
form u p on the rule of the road side on the embussing point at
the place at which their vehicle will halt. (Six vehicles occupy 80
yards of road space.)
iv. No troops will be on the embussing point or the approach to it while the
vehicles are arriving.
v. Prior to embussing, troops will prepare their Lewis guns for action
in case of attack from the air.
30. The time taken to embus a body of troops will be affected by—
i. The number of vehicles that can be loaded simultaneously ;
ii. Whether the operation takes place by day or by night.
Under favourable conditions it should be possible to embus a battalion,
exclusive of its animals and vehicles, in 20 minutes, provided t h a t the men
12
C h a p . 2, S e c , 10.
have been told off beforehand into parties for each vehicle, and are suitably
spaced alongside the embussing point prior to the arrival of the vehicles.
The speed of a 'bus column (in groups of 50 vehicles) may be taken as
averaging:—•
(a) B y day, 12 m.p.h.
(b) By night, with headlights, 9 m.p.h.
(c) By night, without headlights, 6 m.p.h.
81, The responsibility of formations ordering a move by M.T. is as follows i
i. Higher Formation—
Embussing point, halting point, debussing point, time of start,
route. Any restrictions, protection. Change of Command
(if any).
ii. Divisional orders should include—
Order for the move, destination, time and date, role on arrival,
composition of groups, road parties (time of start, arrival and
route), advance parties and means of transport. Protection,
Supplies, medical, and equipment.
32. The following are headings of a march table suitable for a move by
M.T.:—
i. Serial number.
ii. Formation.
iii. B u s u n i t g r o u p a n d c o m m a n d e r .
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
Bus parties.
Bus numbers.
Lorry numbers.
Men.
Total of unit.
Embussing point,
Time personnel clue at embussing point,
Remarks.
D U T I E S OP OFFICERS COMMANDING B U S COLUMNS.
33. An officer, known as the O.C. bus columu, will be appointed to command every body of troops moving by M.T,
1. He ^ill arrange with the O.C., M.T. unit for the numbering throughout
from front to rear of the vehicles on the rule of the road side,
and for the flagging of the leading vehicle of each unit group. If
the transport unit consists of various types of vehicles, he will
ascertain the number of each kind.
Buses and lorries of unit groups will be grouped separately, the
buses preceding lorries. Spare vehicles will not be numbered, and
will be marked " Not to be loaded."
ii. He will give the order for the column to move when the embussing is
completed ; this will be notified to him by the unit group commanders by signal.
iii. He will make the necessary arrangements for the protection of the
column while en route, especially in regard to attack from the air.
iv. He will give the signal for halts, if a n y ; the place, approximate
time and duration should be notified in the orders for the move.
v. At the debussing point he will give the orders to debus, and unless
time is an object, he will ensure t h a t the M.T. clears the point
before the troops use the road.
vi. He can best control the column by travelling, with the O.C. bus unit
in the latter's motor car, unless a car has been provided for his
use during the move.
34. The O.C., M.T. unit will be responsible for march discipline and for
ensuring t h a t correct distances are kept between vehicles as laid down in
Seo. 7, 22.
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
13
CARE OF ANIMALS ON THE MAUCH,
Care of Morses.
35. Nothing should be carried beyond the authorized aTticlrs.
"Rise in the stirrups, do not lean on rifle (if carried), see t h a t the load is :
evenly distributed on both sides of the saddle. All mounted men should
dismount from time to time. At halts, whenever it is possible, off-saddle o r lopsen girths and shift the saddle. When saddles are "removed slap the
backs to promote circulation and allow the horses to roll.
On a night march, at the end of which hard work is expected, halt, water
and feed an hour before dawn.
36. Watering.—Take every opportunity of watering on the march. Always
water before feeding, never immediately after.
Dismount, remove bits and loosen girths before watering.
Do not allow horses to go further into a pool to drink than necessary, or
the water will be fouled for those coming after.
Do not move at a fast pace immediately after watering.
If possible, select watering place with sound bottom, good approach and
water at least 4 inches deep. Running water with gravelly bottom is the best.
Avoid dark-coloured water.
Animals do not drink well in the early morning. When an early start
has been made, all animals should be watered after about 3 hours' march.
37. Feeding.—Give a small feed before a long march, however earlyr the
start may bo.
, ~
Feed en routt during marches over 5 hours. Remember that horses require
a considerable time to consume their rations—not less t h a n 5 hours in 24
should be allowed.
;
Remove nosebag when horse has done and let him graze if possible.
Opportunities t o feed, water, and rest men and horses should be found even
during the progress of battle.
38. I n hot climates horses should be protected from the sun, and in cold
weather from winds and draughts.
Their protection from attack from the air must be constantly Considered.
For protective and orderly duties a wise economy in horse flesh can be made
by using bicycles or other mechanical means available.
.
Care of Transport Camels and Cattle.
"'
39. If possible, avoid marching in the heat of the day. Camels and cattle
travel best, and with least fatigue, at night or in the cool of the morning and
evening. The whole of the marching should be. done between 4 p.m. and
9 a.m.
.
Avoid keeping camels loaded up a moment looger than is necessary. Men
should be trained to load and unload as quickly as possible. Loads should
not be carried more than 4 hours at a stretch.
Great care is necessary in balancing loads carefully and packing them as
securely as possible to avoid unnecessary swaying and fatigue to the animal.
Cattle should never be driven beyond their natural, steady walk, but they
will travel much faster at night than during the day, without pushing.
Do not march more than 4 hours at a stretch.
40. "Whenever possible, camels and cattle should be given 5-6 hours a day
to graze and ruminate. Immediately after the morning march is the best time
for this. The young shoots of the Camel Tliora are the best grazing for
camels. Care should be taken to detect and avoid poisonous plants, some of
which are readily eaten by camels.
Grain should be given at night mixed with some chaff or hay, and a good man
will get up once or twice during the night and give his cattle a small feed.
Nothing helps so much to keep them in condition.
Desert camels are the best for fast work. Camels bred in districts where
water is plentiful require to be watered daily, but desert camels will usually
not drink more than once in three days and are best for fast work. Water
should be given in the morning, before grazing, and with desert camels no
marching should be done for several hours afterwards.
Cattle should be watered after the morning march and in the evening1 before
starting. If possible, cattle should bo grazed near water, where they can
drink at will, and where grass is luxurious.
14
Chap. 2, S e e s . 7 a n d 8.
41. The backs and feet of camels should be inspected daily after the morning
march. Camelmen must do any repairs necessary to saddlery during the
midday halt.
Wounds and sores on cattle are difficult to heal, and every effort should be
made to prevent them by careful attention to the fitting of the yoke. The men
should constantly look to this and make any small alterations which may be
necessary at the mid-day halt.
Grooming is not usual; both camels and cattle thrive much better if they
are rubbed over daily with a piece of sacking or a whisp.
42. Ticks should be removed daily after grazing. I n a badly-infested
country ticks are liable to collect in large numbers between the toes and
cause sores. This may be prevented by removing the ticks and rubbing the
skin with tar.
Skin disease must be constantly guarded against, and any suspicious
patches, particularly between the legs, should be periodically washed with
soda or wood-ashes and dressed with a mixture of sulphur and oil, or fat,
1—4. This should be issued regularly to camelmen, and a little tar may be
added, if available,
43. Provision must be made for the protection of animals from attack by
aircraft.
8. T I M E A N D
SPACE
1. I t may be taken that all troops, mounted or dismounted, move to the
starting point at the rate of 100 yards a minute.
The average rate of marching for a large body of troops composed of all
a m s is
miles an hour including short halts. Bates of movement for small
bodies of troops in the field are approximately as follows:—
Arm
Yards for
each minute.
Minutes required
to traverse
1 mile.
Miles an hour,
including
short halts.
INFANTRY—
Usual pace ..
100
18
117
235
440
15
MOUNTED TROOPS—
Walk
Trot
Gallop
Trot and walk
8
H
7
The length of a pace in slow and quick time is 30 inches.
,,
,,
,,
stepping out
,,33
,,
,,
,,
,,
double time
,,40
,,
,,
,,
,,
stepping short
,,21
„
n
»»
»»
sidestep
,,12
,,
A side pace to cover off another man, as in forming fours, is 27 inches.
The rates of marching of transport on a level road are :—
Wheeled transport
2\ miles an hour.
Mule or pony cart, A.T. (2 mules or ponies) . .
Bullock cart, A.T. (2 bullocks)
1*
Camel
2
Pack mule or pony
..
..
..
.. 3
Pack bullock
2
Pack don Uey
..
...
..
..
..
Coolie
2
Motor lorries
..
..
..
..
. . 10
Thcao rates Include short halts only,
C h a p . 2, S e c . 10.
15
The following are the approximate rates of movement of transport on a
level road in single file:—
Pack mules or ponies
..
Camels
Pack bullocks
..
..
Army transport carta (mules
or ponies)
..
..
Army transport carts (bullocks)
250 pass a given point in 10 minutes.
100
,,
„
„
160
„
,,
„
100
,,
,,
,,
60
„
,,
„
On rough, uneven, or hilly roads the above numbers should be halved.
2. Space allowed in column of route for :—
Cavalry or mounted rifles in
sections
Cavalry or mounted rifles in half
sections
Infantry in fours
Cyclists in half sections . .
Each pack animal (or pair)
,, camel
,, 2-mule or pony vehicle
,, 1 or 2-horsed vehicle
,, 4-horsed vehicle
,, 6
,»
,, 8
,,
,, 2-bullock vehicle (2-wheeled)
,, 4
,,
,, 4-bullock vehicle (4-wheeled)
,, motor car, van or motor
ambulance
„ lorry or tractor
,, tank
1 yard for each horse in the ranks.
2 yards
„
„
,,
1 yard for 2 men in the ranks.
yards for each man.
4 yards. ~
7
10
15
20
25
»Including distances.
10
15
20
>Actual length.*
3. I n calculating the road space in tables given below it is assumed t h a t : —
Cavalry march in columu of half sections, i.e., two men abreast.
Artillery march in column of route, i.e., guns and wagons in single file.
Pack artillery in column of half sections, i.e., two mules abreast.
Infantry march in fours.
Cyclists in file, i.e., two men abreast.
Motor vehicles in single file.
Spare horses and pack animals march in half sections.
The distances enumerated in See. 7, 4 and 22 are left between units.
• For distances to be allowed between vehicles of tank and armoured car
units or of M.T. columns, see Sec. 7, 22. In calculating the road space
occupied by a M.T. convoy moving at full speed, 100 yards for each vehicle
should be allowed.
9. ROAD SPACE
TABLES
(See Note 2 on page iii.)
UNITS 03? A CAVALRY DIVISION.
lload space of M.T.
>,H
.as
Unit.
X) 3
II
(1)
H.Q. Cav. Division
H.Q. Cav. Brigade
Cav. Regiment . .
Squadron
M.G. Squadron . .
Battery B.H.A. . .
Section B.H.A.
H.Q. Bde. B.H.A,
H.Q. Bde. Amu. Coin.
B.H.A
A. Echeton
B. IGchelon
Field Squadron Jl.E.
Field Troop
Cav. Division Sigs. (A)
Cav. Bde. Sig. Troop
Cav. Field Ainb. . .
Cav. Field Amb. Coy.
Cav. Div. Sanitary Sec.
Cav. Mobile Vet. Scction
Provost Squadron
Cavalry Division (B)
Cavalrv Bde. (C)
B.H.A. Bde. H.Q. and 3
Batteries
Cavalry Divisional Train
H.Q
No. 1 Coy. H.Q.
No. 1 Coy., No. 1 Sec. .
No. 1 Coy., No. 2, 3 or 4
Sections each . .
No. 2 Cpv. H.Q. . .
No. % gov., No. 1 See. .
No. 2.Coy., No. 2, 3 or 4
Sections each , .
No. 3 Coy. H.T. . .
.
Cavalry Div. Train
Cavalry Division (D)
J?L
180
115
1,930
415
430
770
195
115
75
440
575
130
395
140
285
155
15
90
05
miles
14
£ «
3.S
w
rf a
(3)
2
1
19}
4
ii
7i
1st line
Transport
in yards.
(1)
6
6
(1)
(1)
244
61
27' ' (2)
77
215* '(10)
50
(3)
140' ' (7)
30
(2)
315 (15)
80
(4)
45
(3)
6' ' (1)
(4)
77'
(1)
54'
(3)
54'
6'
6
6
(A) Does not
include the Bde.
Sig.
Troops.
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
1 mile
(79) (c)
(B) Excluding
Cav. Div. Train.
yards
50 (3) (c)
241
D70
970
miles
14J
(5)
30
(2)
30
(2)
322 (14)
54 (3)
77' ' W)
1
'<5
H
4
li
3
1*
i
1
1
Bemarks.
(a) (6) (rf) (a)(b)(rf)
2
1
ii
Train
Transport
in yards.
(C) Including
Bde. Sig. Troop.
318
(14)
50
315
435
(3)
(13)
(19)
635
315
935
(27)
(13)
(31)
765
(32)
3,630 (138)
1.0)
1 mile
(79) (c)
3 miles
(217) (c)
(D)
Including
Train.
(a) These distances allow 15 yards between each vehicle and 30 yards between
every 10 vehicles.
(b) Figures in brackets represent the number of M.T. vehicles to which the road
space refers.
(c) 30 yards has been allowed between the M.T. of one unit and that of another.
(d) Motor cycles and motor cars are not included.
17
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
UNITS OF A DIVISION*.
Eoad space of M.T.
BE!
Unit.
TJ 3
(1)
H.Q.
H.Q.
H.Q.
H.Q
Division
Infantry Brigade
Divisional Arty.
Divisional Engrs.
H.Q. Field Brigade, E.A
18-pdr. Battery lt.A.
Section 18-pdr. E.A.
4 • 5 How. Battery, E.A.
Section 4- 5-inch How
Bty. B.A.
Field Brigade E.A. (A)
H.Q. Pack Bde. R.A.
3-7-inch
Pack
Bty
E.A
3 • 7-inch Pack Section
Pack Bde. E.A. (A)
H.Q. D.A.C.
A. Echelon D.A.C.
Nos. 1, 2 or 3 Sections
each
No. 4 Section
B. Echelon D.A.C.
Field Park Coy. E.E.
Field Coy. E.E. . .
Section Field Coy. E.E.
E.A. H.Q. Sig. Section
Infantry Bde. Sig. Section
Artillery Bde. Sig. Section
..
Div.H.Q.Sig. Section(/)
Cable Sig. Section (/)
.
W/T Sig. Section (/)
D.E. Section (B) (/)
H.Q. Div. Sigs. (/)
Div. Sigs. (d)
Infantry Battalion
Infantry Cov.
M.G. Platoon
1st line
Transport
in yards.
Train
Transport
in yards.
(«) (t) («)
(a) (6) (e)
(2)
(3)
W
145
li
li
i
i
6
160
50
20
120
410
130
450
150
1,915
60
480
165
1,605
85
1,785
465
;360
(5)
(1)
i
4
1*
(3)
(3)
(1)
6
(1)
30
54
19
320
30
i
5
54
16
(3)
(14) (A) 1 n c 1 u d es
(2)
Arty. Bde. Sig.
Section.
(3)
320 "(14)
169
(8)
1
18
368
(16)
90
390
70
372
(12)
75
75
6
(1)
e"
(i)
65
65
105
120
54
54
6
54
•4}
H
Remarks.
27
30
(2)
(2)
(B) H a s
19
motor cycles.
6 5 " (3)
80
85
495
865
95
130
6"
107
(1)
(5)
54
54
146
(3)
(3)
(7)
- -
(а) These distances allow 15 yards between each vehicle and 30 yards between
every 10 vehicles.
(б) Figures in brackets represent the number of M.T. vehicles to which the road
space refers.
(i) Total includes only units marked (/).
(e) Motor cycles and motor cars are not included.
(/) See (i).
(b 28/332)Q
0
18
Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
(1)
^ Road space in yards,
£2 exclusive of M.T.
^ Minutes to pass a given
S point at 100 yds. a min.
U N I T S O F A DIVISION—continued.
Fiold Ambulance
R.A.M.C
Company of Field A m b . . .
Div. Sanitary Section . .
365
115
20
3}
1
t
Mobile Veterinary Sec. . .
80
1
Provost Company
90
1
Unit.
Road space of M.T.
1st line
Transport
in yards.
Train
Transport
in yards.
(«) (&) («)
(a) (6) (e)
(4)
(5)
195
(9)
5 0 " (3)
6
(1)
8
(1)
6 " (1)
6
(1)
6
(1)
mile3
Infantry Brigade (C)
Infantry Division (D),
(C) Bde. H.Q.
4 Bns. Bde.
Sig. Sec.
37
2J
..
240
1 mile
(66) (c)
(D) Excluding
Div. Train.
13&
D ! v. Train H.Q.
No. 1 Company H.Q.
..
No. 1 Company, No. 1
Sec
No. 1 Company, Nos, 2, 3
or 4 Sections, each
No. 2 Company H.Q.
No. 1 Company, No. 1
See
No. 1 Company, Nos. 2, 3
or 4 Sections, each
No. 3 Company
Divisional Train
Infantry Division (E)
Remarks,
30 (2)
300 (12)
610 (31)
810 (39)
280 (12)
1,570 (61)
280 (12)
680
680
'7
7
miles
14J
247
6,360"(241)
1 mile
(66) (c)
4f miles
(307) (c)
(E)
Including
Div. Train.
For (a), (6) and ' e \ fee page 17.
(c) 30 yards has been allowed between M.T. of one unit and that of another.
Chap. 2, S e c , 9.
NON-DIVISIONAL TROOPS.
•3
<3
flH
Unit.
a bp
9
n
11
(1)
(2)
JI.Q. Corps Medium or
Heavy Arty. . .
••
Field A m Coin. ll.A.—
A. Echelon
B. Echelon
25
H.Q. Medium
Bde. R.A.
60-pdr-. Battery H.J).
. . 460
155
60-pdr. Battery Section . .
6-incli How. Battery H.D. 135
0-ineh. How. Battery
140
Section
50
fl-inch How. Battery T.D.
6-inch How.
Battery
Section T.D.
1,000
Medium Bde. R.A.
H.Q., A.A. Brigade, R.A.
A.A. 3-inch Lorry Battery
Gun Section
Lewis Gun Section
A.A. 3-inch Platform
Bty. R.A
Gun Section
Lewis Gun Section
A.A. Brigade, R.A.
180
R.A. Survey Coy.
Army Troops Company
R.E
E. and M. Company R.E.
E. and M. Company, Boring Section
A.A. Searchlight Bn. R.E.
A.A. Searchlight Coy. . .
Light Bridging Park R.E.
Corps Signals No. 1 Coy.
Corps Signals No. 2 Coy.
Corps Signals No. 3 Coy.
Corps Signals H.Q. and
Coys.
Sig. Section Medium Bde.
R.A
A.A. Signal Coy.
(a)
(f>)
every
(rf)
apace
i i
Road space of M.T.
S !»
»o
43 <3
G °
a p.
(3)
1st line
Transport
in yards.
2nd line
Transport
in yards.
(a) <b) (<J)
(a) (6) (d)
(4)
(5)
6
H
"i
a
(1)
1 4 0 " (6)
30
(2)
31
8
81
(2)
(1)
(2)
3 1 " (2)
H
*
10J
210
2
170
li
365
(16)
8
140
790
50
(6)
(34)
(3)
8
146
54
630
120
70
(27)
(6)
(4)
820
180
70
2,205
95
(34)
(8)
(4)
(91)
(5)
145
680
(7)
(29)
(1)
54
(3)
8
(1)
40
245 (10)
3,033(121)
730 (30)
790 (33)
345
40
100
225 (14)
405 (18)
180
(9)
31
8
520
880
(43)
77
35
30
295
(2)
(16)
120
Remarks.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(4)
Motor cars and motor cycles arc not included in these tables.
This table allows 15 yards between each M.T. vehicle aud 30 yards between
10 M.T. vehicles.
i , . ..
Figures in brackets represent the number of M.T. vehicles to which the roaa
refers.
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) Q
O 2
20
Chap. 2,S e c ,10.
NON-DIVISIONAL TEOOPS-continued.
M
U
Sa
>> .
CH
Unit.
8»
^rd £ •
(1)
tf d
(2)
g.3
Road, space of M.T.
rf .
g'S
rt >a
fto
o©
r-i
m
<
U 35
1B
a o
s ft
(3)
1st line
Transport
In yards.
2nd line
Transport
in yards.
(a) (6) (d)
(«) (4) W
(4)
(S)
Tank Battalion
5.162(c) (91)
Tank Coy.
1.096(c) (21)
Tank Section
Auxiliary Horse Transport Coy. R.A.S.C.
. . 1,055
Auxiliary Horse Transport Section R.A.S.C...
345
H.Q. Cav. Div. M.T.
Coy. B.A.S.C. . .
H.Q. Cav. Div. M.T:
Coy. Supply Sec.
Airm. Sec.
M.T. Coy
H.Q. Div. M.T. Coy:
B.A.S.C.
H.Q. Div. M.T. Supply
Section
H.Q. Div. M.T. Coy.
Amu. Section
Divisional M.T. Coy.
H.Q. Corps Troops M.T.
Coy. R.A.S.C. . .
Nos. 1 and 2 Sections, each
No. 3 Section
No. 4 Section
Corps Troops M.T. Coy.
H.Q. Medium Arty. M.T.
Coy. B.A.S.C
Nos. 1 and 2 Sections, each
Medium Arty. M.T. Cov.
H.Q. Tank Corps M.T.
Coy. R.A.S.C
Nos. 1 and 2 Sections, each
No. 3 Section
Tank Corps M.T. Coy. .;
Water Tank M.T. Coy.,
R.A.S.C
Water Tank M.T. Section
Includes
73
tanks.
Includes
17
tanks.
Includes I
tanks.
'152 (c)(4)
Armoured Car Coy. Tank
Corps
Tank Salvage Company
1.432 (c) (28)
1,208 (c) (24)
In elude)
tanks.
10*
For (a) (b) and (d), see page 19.
(c) For distances between tanks, &c., see Sec. 7, 20,
Remarks,
310
(13)
1,560' (64)
500 (21)
2,400 (98)
310 ' (13)
1,340; (55)'
1,255 (52)
2,935 (120)
335 (14)
370 (16)
770 (32)
'705 (30)
2,345 (108)
255
705
1,695
(11)
(30)
(71)
335 (14)
920 (20)
205 (11)
1,565 '(61)
2,765 (116)
680 (29)
7
21
C h a p . 2, Sac, 10.
10. Q U A R T E R S
(See chap. X I I I , F.S.U., Vol. I I , 1924.)
GENERAL R U L E S .
1. Full consideration must always be given to the possibility of attack from
the air in the selection or siting of every type of quarters. In the presence of an
e n e m y tactical considerations, e.g., favourable ground for deployment in the
event of battle, concealment from ground and air observation, cover from
bombardment, and economy in outposts are of primary importance. I n
these circumstances the time which it will take t o get the troops under arms
and in position to meet the enemy determines the form of quarters to be
adopted.
"\Vhen not in proximity to the enemy the health and comfort of the troops
axe t h e ftrst consideration.
2. If an engagement is anticipated, the larger units should be distributed
in tiie order f r o m f r o n t to rear in which they will come into action, provided
t h a t when liable to attack, cavalry and other mounted troops are in the least
exposed position. Artillery, t m k s , train, ammunition columns, and medical
units should always be covered by other arms.
3. The following rules will be observed in distributing troops
i. Depots should be near good roads and railways.
ii. Dismounted units should be nearest the drinking water supply, and
mounted troops should be accommodated with due regard to t h e
facilities for watering horses.
iii. Medical units and headquarters offices have the first claim on
buildings.
iv. Hospitals should be given a quiet spot and t he most sanitary position,
as near good roads as is compatible with safety from the air, and
away f r o m depots of warlike stores and strategical points which
the enemy would be likely to attack by air or long range gun fire.
v. Staff and signal offices should adjoin each other and be clearly
marked. (Eor distinguishing flags a n d lamps, see Plate IV.)
vi. Officers should be close to their men.
vii. Horse lines should be so situated t h a t horses do not have t o cross
traffic routes to go to water.
viii. Dismounted units carrying out continuous marches and halted for
the night should be billeted as close as possible to the line of m a r c h
for the next day.
ix. Tanks, armoured cars, and M.T. should be disposed so as t o leave
main roads clear.
x. Well paved yards and large buildings with good access to main roads
should be reserved for M.T. units.
4. Areas for accommodation will be delimited and allotted to formations
by the General Staff branch. The allotment of accommodation within these
limits will then be the duty of Q.M.G.'s branch of the staff.
6. Areas in rear of the zone of active operations selected for the accommodation of troops, must be so arranged t h a t , so far as tactical requirements allow,
the troops are provided with the maximum comfort possible. Since these
areas will probably be made use of by successive bodies of troops, either during
a concentration or m the course of a move by stages f r o m one area t o another,
or for periods of rest and training, they will'usually be divided into sub-aTeas.
The accommodation available in each sub-area will be definitely allotted for
a complete formation, special sub-areas being allotted for artillery and other
units with horses, and special buildings or localities being reserved for headquarters. This procedure simplifies billeting arrangements, since each formation is detailed to an area organized t o suit its requirements. Signal communications are also facilitated, since lines once constructed can be used
for subsequent formations.
BILLETS.
6. Whenever possible billets will be alloted in advance. Billeting areas
may be allotted to armies, corps or divisions, in the first instance on a basis of
population, but the capacity of areas varies greatly with their character;
22
Chap. 2, S e c , 10.
e.g., whether urban or rural, agricultural or industrial, rich or poor, and with
the season of the year. Data as to the capacity of an area should therefore be
collected beforehand, if circumstances permit.
7. I n allotting areas, units should be kept together under their own commanders as far as possible. To make full use of stabling, it may be necessary
to mix the arms.
8. I n the absence of data as to the capacity of an area, ordinary billets with
subsistence should be possible for a force about twice the population for one
week. Billets without subsistence can be provided at the rate of about 10
men for each inhabitant in rich agricultural districts, and at the rate of about
5 - 6 men for each inhabitant in town or industrial districts.
9. "When time permits, billeting demands are issued to representatives Of
units by brigade area commanders. The former, accompanied by a billeting
party, consisting of an officer or N.C.O. and one rank and file for each
company, &c., proceeds to the mayor, or equivalent official in the area,
presents the billeting demand, and obtains a billeting order for each inhabitant
on whom men and horses are to be quartered. He will also make enquiry
regarding the health conditions amongst the civil population.
10. The men of the billeting party proceed to the houses allotted to them,
inspect them and mark with chalk on the door the names of officers, the
number of men and horses the building is to hold. The marks must be removed
before marching o f f . The officer selects regimental headquarters, guard room,
alarm post, sick inspection room, gun and transport parks, ascertains the
best roads in and out of the area and the local sources of water supply, and
informs the billeting party when reassembled. A rough sketch of the area
should be made if possible.
11. The following points should be observed in addition to those given in
para. 3 : —
i. Headquarters offices should be selected with due regard to signal
communications and be easily found. Within danger areas, cross
roads should be avoided. I n areas occupied successively by
different formations the same buildings should be occupied as headquarter offices.
ii. Mounted men .must be near their horses, guns, and wagons ; and
staff officers near their offices.
iii. Both sides of a street should be allotted to the same unit to prevent
confusion in case of alarm.
iv. Roads and communications must never be blocked. Guns and vehicles
will, if necessary, be parked outside towns and villages, and should
be concealed from aircraft. If parked on the sides of roads, the
first and last guns or vehicles should be marked with a shaded
light.
General Rules in Billets.
12. "From the moment the advanced troops enter a village or farm, precautions must be taken to prevent the inhabitants conveying information to
the enemy. The local telephone system or any wireless installations must be
controlled, pigeon lofts searched for, and all confined pigeons taken charge of.
13, All ranks should be warned against talking on military matters in the
presence of inhabitants, against leaving letters or papers about, and of the importance of taking precautions against any leakage of information.
14:. Officers mil visit the billets of their men and their horses' stables at
irregular intervals, at least once by day and once by night.
15. If necessary, the inhabitants should be disarmed and forbidden to
leave their houses after a certain h o u r ; the streets should be patrolled to
see that this order is obeyed. I t may be necessary to take hostages for the
good behaviour of the inhabitants.
16. Military tribunals should be established to deal with any infractions by
the inhabitants of the orders issued, and with offences committed against
the troops.
AH houses where liquor is obtainable must be placed under control.
To face page 22.]
PLATE I .
X Y P E O F B I V O U A C F O B A. C A V A L R Y
/6/ydTr
REGIMENT
£5yff-
- -
>
O
<Sttare(
II
I
Officers
Shelter
JAeitors
Xitchen\
A
1
1
1
I
m r a ^
'Direction
£atr/nes
i•
|
[To
PLATE
T Y P E
O F
B I V O U A C
F O R
A
follow
plate
II.
B A T T E R Y
O F
H O R S E
O R
F I E L D
A R T I L L E R Y .
QUARD
K-IO*.
it
i t
it
±1
. B - t -
I S
±t
0 - * -
i
HORSE
4"
x
±t
B - +
LINES
© V
a*
5*
x
4 "
X 5 " '
a IN
Si
EH-
s
B-+
In
FORAGE
@
\\SECTIOM
CENTRE
i| I? 5 9 5
.1|
FIELD
COOKER
WATER
CART
OFFICERS
(WHIM
{WHERE ORDERED)
MESS
CART
(WHERE
lATRlNEsfv/HEITE OTEETOI)
ORDERED)
DIRECTION
THE NOUSES
OF
or EACH
THE R O P E .
IJ
OROEREB)
5 FEET
SECTION
BETWEEN
ARE
OF
FASTENED
HORSES,
pjiH
WIND
TO ONE
& END
HORSES
ROPE,USING
S YARDS
BOTH
FROM
SIDES
VEHICLE.
I.
To follow plate
II.]
PLATE I I I .
T Y P E 0.F BIVOUAC.
Suitable for units with many vehicles.
IOO*
-£a
w
o
KJ
0)
-i—j
£b
<K
Uj
0
fcl
•ic
§
Cj
0
ty
I
o
oj
-A-
4
FIELD
COOKER
LATR/A/ES
(WHERE
ORDERED)
DIRECT/ON
)>>>>
OF
W / M D
>—
i<u
t
»
1
s>
P l a t e IV
DISTINGUISHING
PositLoiv
G.H.
H. Q.
of
3
H. Q. of
4
H
Lamp
Flag
(by
day) (by
o f
Q
a.
s
Corps
Q, of a-THvisiyOn,
u
Tumier
in- w7iit&}"C"uv
cast} of Cav. Div.
H. Q- of a. B-rvgade
Administrative
or
Area,
IS
(S
fl
I f . Q. Line
of
ConlTtXlCrVLC4Xt2X>n
IS
HQ.
I I
of a.
Post,
frarri^oriyOr
Ammunition
Supply
ficuve
Column
Dp-pot
f886./2824 ? 26. Pig. H7I/868-100,000.4.26.
n
10
of
Hospital
or
Fi&ld,Ambulance
(pie Gervevaflag
wiZtbe
ac<xwnparvied-by
the
UnionJack)
11
(h-dn/xrvce
1Z
Veterinary
13
Signal*
14
Post
IS
Pay
M .
(by
FLcl-9
clay)
*
Laitxp
(by n i g h t )
u n
Depot
Hospital.
IS
O f f i c e
1537 )
O f f i c e
O f f i c e
(British
16
-plcute
LAMPS.
Position,
night)
I
ccnsArm-y
To follow
FLAGS AND
Lairing
mm
Note
-Trvlndicvthe
Flog for
British..
Latrines
hcts clreri
centre.
[Native
i
Malby & &>ns,Lith
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
23
17. I n every house occupied by the troops at least one man must be detailed
to guard the arms. Arms are not to be piled or left outside.
18. As a precaution against fire and against air observation, and also to
prevent signalling to the enemy by means of lights, directions should be issued
controlling the use of fires and lights by the troops and inhabitants. I t may
fiometimes be necessary to establish special ATQ piquets.
19. Close billets are adopted when a greater state of readiness is required
than is possible in ordinary billets. Tactical considerations have precedence
over considerations of comfort. As many men and animals as possible are
billeted, the remainder bivouac.
Billets may be of three descriptions, viz:—
i. Billets with full subsistence.
ii. Billets with partial subsistence.
iii. Billets without subsistence.
"When billets with subsistence are provided, officers and others must be
satisfied with the usual fare of the householder on whom they are billeted.
Neither bedding nor furniture in billets can be demanded as a right. All
billets will include attendance, and—when required—the use of ordinary
cooking utensils belonging to the inhabitants.
20. "When in proximity to the enemy, every unit must be given an assembly
post in the vicinity of its quarters, at which it will assemble in ease of attack
and from which its battle position can be quickly reached. If units are
scattered in billets it may be advisable to have squadron, battery, and company
assembly posts.
Routes from billets to assembly posts and from assembly posts to battle
positions must be reconnoitred, and care should be taken that main communications are not blocked by troops proceeding to their assembly posts, and t h a t
troops from different areas will not cross each other in proceeding to ground
which they may have to defend in case of attack.
21. Special arrangements must be made for the protection of troops in
quarters against observation and bombardment by aircraft, and, in areas
where such attack is possible, for defensive measures against gas or bombardments by high velocity guns.
Civilians are entitled to protection from these special forms of attack, and
the arrangements made will include provision for them.
22. The defensive arrangements will include distinctive alarm signals for :—
i. Land attack.
ii. Gas.
iii. Air or artillery bombardments.
CAJIPS AND BIVOUACS.
(See Plates I to I I I and V to VII.)
23. Bivouacs admit of concentration and readiness, but are trying to the
health of men and horses in cold or wet weather, and should be resorted to
only in cases of tactical necessity.
24. Camps admit of concentration, and are healthy, but can be used only
In exceptional circumstances by troops engaged in field operations.
Tents
quickly become unserviceable and their carriage imposes a great strain on the
transport. For standing camps huts arc healthier and more comfortable than
tents. In hot climates huts or tents with thick or double roofs should be used.
25. The site should be dry and on grass if possible. Avoid steep slopes.
Large woods with undergrowth, low meadows, the bottoms of narrow valleys
and newly turned soil are apt to be unhealthy. Ravines and watercourses
are dangerous sites.
26. Good water supply is essential. Other points to be considered are the
facilities offered for obtaining shelter, fuel, forage and straw.
27. On arriving within 2 or 3 miles of the site, staff officers of brigades ride
ahead with representatives of units, receive instructions concerning arrangements for the night, lead their units to the ground allotted them, and explain
arrangements.
63
Chap. 2,S e c .10.25
28. Each commander must be informed of any localities or depots outside
his own area on which he may draw' for water, fuel, forage, <fec.; also which
roads he may use and any special defensive, sanitary or other measures lie is
to take.
29. If grazing is necessary, the allotment and- protection of grazing areas
must be arranged for. The position to which dead animals arc to be taken
and method of disposal must be settled. The general position of latrines and
kitchens in each area must be fixed.
30. Special care is necessary to prevent troops from the various areas
crossing one another in proceeding to ground which they may have to occupy
in case of attack.
31. "When British and Indian troops camp together avoid putting slaughter
places near Hindu troops. The slaughter places should be screened from
view. British troops must not be allowed near Indian cooking places or
watering place!;, nor must they touch the cooking utensils of Indian troops.
TUENCH SHELTEBS AND DTJG-0UTS.
32. Trench shelters and dug-outs are used in position warfare and their
construction is described in the Manual of Meld Works (All Arms). Prolonged
occupation of dug-outs is trying to the health, and detrimental to discipline
and morale.
I n the forward area, dug-outs and bomb-proof shelters will be required
whose locations will be determined by tactical requirements.
In areas immediately in rear of the above, dug-outs and bomb-proof shelters
require to be amplified by camps so erected as to be obscured from air observation. I n the rear area lmtted camps and billets will be utilized for the troops
and every endeavour;will be made to make the troops thoroughly comfortable.
CAMPS IN MOUNTAIN "WAKFARE.
33. When selecting the site, the necessity for occupying and denying t o the
enemy the chief points from which snipers can fire into the camp and for
forming a defensible perimeter round it should be borne in mind.
To adapt the site to the force, lay out the longest diameter, then the cross
diameter and allot space to units along these cross roads (which should be
15 yards wide, if possible). The perimeter should be allotted to fighting
troops, preferably to infantry only. See Plate V for type of perimeter camp.
The following points should be attended to
i. All troops should fall in on their alarm posts as soon as possible after
camp is laid out, and every evening at sundown,
li, A perimeter should be prepared, 5 yards clear of all shelters, with
breast work and entanglement. The defence should be based on
a framework of machine guns.
iii. Arrange for ground which is not piqueted to be searched by the fire
of guns and machine guns.
iv. No cooking places or latrines (except those for use at night) inside
camp.
v. Camels should be in a zareba outside the camp.
vi. All exits to the perimeter camp must be traversed and blocked with
obstacles by night.
STANDING CAMPS AND R E S T CAMPS,
34. When conditions in the air permit, standing camps may be required.
"When laying out a standing camp, a sketch plan should be prepared and a
copy given to the officer responsible for pitching the camp; tents, at the
required intervals and distances, should be dressed both from the front and
Jlank; main and cross streets should be maintained for the purposes of
communication. (See Plate YI.)
35. A system of surface drainage should be constructed.
/
PLATE XX.
TYPE
OF
PERIMETER
(LESS
CAMP
TRAIN
pne
Squadron
cf
Ccrva/ry
FOR
A
Of
Field
Coy
Bde m
and
Syoai Sac
fit
MIXED
FORCE.
TRANSPORT.)
infantry
Held Ambulance
and
Sanifary Sec.
$ Coys of
infantry
fa
<8
64*
Supply
Debits
of
infctnfry
J
One $
Battalion
||
' Pack
cf
Ba,tJery R A. "
in {anTry-
To follow plale F.]
PLATE V I .
SKETCH PLAN OF LAY OUT OP
BATTALION
SHEWING
THE
PRINCIPLES.
Entrance
to
FLAG,
STAFF
OFFICERS MESS
1
—
OFFICER.
T _ J
MTCHCNrJ woascRcn
SOAKP,
WOohSerci'$]
KITCHEN-
• I94K v t i
TENTS
© © © © © © © © © ©
'URIHAL SaAxPrr
© © © © © © © © ©
© © © ©. ©
©©©©
• UfutJAL SaAKPrr
SMKPP .
lKo
f l
"
p
RCCIMffm +OT77t!7jE__,
W
TENT
©
OFFICERS
© © O © .©© © © ©
© © © © © © © © ©
MENS
KITCHEN
COFFEE
'BAR
SOM.PI
Camp
to
ORDERLY ROOk.
iCUAROTENTK
IP
A CAMP SITE F O R
A
GENERAL
SANITARY
3
SOAK&T
^DRYING
®
© © © © © © © ©
© © © © © © © © ©
•llm/Mt
SqakPIT
©© © © © © © © ©
© © © ©_©
©©©©
'(JR!H*L S(MKF)T
TENT
OFFICERS
!®lBATHHOUSE
urn
RE C R £ AT
a Boiler
w
%ABlUT!ON
Bench
/ ON ScheeFTZ
URtnAiSoAKPtj^fwo.sseRorff-
A R E A
IATWNE
MENS
'SoakRt
rJ)lSINF£CrOF>
horsb
LATRINE
Screen
i/A/es
•.
iiiiiiiiiHifiiifiiiiiiiimin
M M HVEHiCLSS
K H K H M
25 YARQ.R m
OS
IO
gO '
40
M
i
l
I
'
^
FuciSHEO^
eoKwis
si
H
C h a p . 2, S e c . 10.
25
36. Care should be taken to prevent the pollution by latrines, urinals or
refuse pits, of ground within 100 yards of the encampment or any possible
extension of it. An improvised pail system of removalshould be established,
if possible, otherwise latrine trenches at least six feet deep, must be dug.
pails and trenches should be flyproof.
37. Incinerators for burning dead animals, refuse, &c., should be constructed.
Horse and cattle lines should be cleaned regularly, dung removed, and special
precautions taken to prevent ground in the neighbourhood of kitchens and
washing places becoming fouled. Flies are a source of disease and car© is
necessary to prevent them from breeding in dirt, horse dung and refuse and
from coming in contact with the food. If they cannot be burnt, dead
animals should be buried as far away as possible, and the spots marked,
38. Notice boards should be erected showing the position of offices, depots,
hospitals, veterinary hospitals, watering places, latrines, urinals, refuse pits,
&c.
Camping grounds should be definitely allocated for mounted troops, dismounted troops, and convoys, respectively.
39. Cavalry and infantry require an alarm post of 60 yards depth in front
of the camp or bivouac, in addition to the depth shown below. Other arms
fall in on the ground where they camp or bivouac.
The following distances should be kept clear in front of guns or vehicles:—
Medium gun (8 horses)
..
..
..
..
. . 16 yards.
6-horsed gun or wagon
..
..
..
..
. . 12
,,
4-horscd vehicle
..
..
..
..
..
..
8
,,
1 or 2-horsed vehicle
..
..
..
..
..
6
,,
All resources available must be made use of to conceal guns and vehicles
from aircraft.
40. The following spaces are required for animals, vehicles and tents :—
Horse, mule, pony or bullock
..
..
..
. . 8 ' x 15'
Camel . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
. . 9' x 15'
Elephant
9' x 21'
13-pdr. or 18-pdr. gun or 4-5" how. and limber . .
. . 7' x 28'
Ammunition wagon and limber
..
..
»,
. . 7' x 23'
Store cart, I.P
7' x 14'
Army transport cart
5*' X 14'
L.G.S. wagon
6 f x 22£'
G.S. wagon
e{' x 22$'
Circular tent, single
9|'\^nAi„a
„ double
10' / T a d l u 3
E.P.
,, (peace only)
40' x 36'
Hospital marquee, large
..
..
..
..
. . 80' x 55'
„
,,
small
50' x 36'
G.S. tent, India (160 lbs.)
22' x 16'
„ ,,
,, (80 „ )
16' x 10'
„ ,,
„ (40 „ )
12' x 10'
„ „
„ (21 „ )
9A' X 7'
,, ,,
,, (officer's)
14' x 9'
Operating tent
..
..
..
..
..
. . 48' x 40'
Shelter tent
12' x 7'
Store
150' x 40'
70' X 60'
41. With circular tents, accommodation is allowed as follows
Generals, colonels and C.Os.
1 to a tent.
Other officers
..
v.
3
,,
"Warrant officers
..
..
5
,,
Serjeants
..
..
..
. . 7
>t
Men
15
26
Chap. 2, S e c . 10. 25
The accommodation in other tents is as follows :—
E.P. tents accommodate 16 British.
G.S. ,, (160 lbs.) accommodate
16 British or 20 native soldiers,
11 „ (80 „ )
8
,,
10
„
„ (40 „ )
1 warrant officer or N.C.O,
,,
,, (officers')
,,
2 officers.
Shelter tent accommodates
2 men.
Staff serjeant's tent accommodates
2 staff serjeunts.
DIRECTIONS FOR PITCHING TENTS. (CIRCULAR).
42. Mark centre with peg. Describe a circle, with radius of 4 paces, on
which the pegs will be. On this circle, drive in the two pegs opposite the
door of the tent one pace apart. At 3 paces from these pegs, on either side
of them, drive in pegs for guy ropes. The other guy rope pegs will be 5 paces
from these and 6 paces from each other.
Put up tent, pole to be set and kept perfectly upright.
Drive in the other pegs, which should be one pace apart and in line with
the seams of the tent.
Doors should, if possible, point to leeward.
yards should be allowed from centre to centre of tents.
Cut drains round bottom of tent walls and heap earth inside flap, (See
Plate VIII.)
Dig a hole 6 inches deep close to tent pole, then if heavy rain comes on
suddenly, the tent pole can be pushed into the hole and much strain is taken
off the canvas, ropes and pegs. .
.
.
Allow 1 yard between pegs of adjacent tents.
- ' ,,
1 ,,
,,
tents of adjacent squadrons.
»» 3 ,,
,,
,,
,,
companies.
>> 10 ,,
,,
,,
. ,,
units.
TYPES OF BIVOUAC SHELTERS,
43. The Tent shelter for two men consists of two sheets of dyed khaki
duck, 5 feet 3 ins. square, fitted with buttons, button holes, guy and
looping lines, eyeltts, two poles 3 feet long. Approximate weight,
lbs.
One shelter can be joined on to the next.
Plates VII and I X suggest methods of forming shelters for men and
horses.
Plate VII, fig. 2, two forked sticks driven into the ground with a pole resting
on t h e m ; branches are then laid resting on the pole, thick end uppermost,
at an angle of about 45°, and the screen made good with, smaller branches,
ferns; &c.
A hurdle may be supported and treated in a similar way.
Fig. 3, a waterproof sheet, blanket, or piece of canvas secured by poles and
string.
Fig. 4, a tenl d'abri for two men, formed with two blankets or waterproof
sheets laced together at the ridge, the remaining two blankets being available
for cover inside.
When materials are available extemporized huts can be made by erecting
a rough lean-to of light poles and brushwood rods, roughly thatched with
branches, brushwood, pine brush, or covered with a tarpaulin (Plate VII,
Fig. 1).
Plate V I I I shows a method for disposal of rainwater from the roof of a shelter.
Plate IX, Stables.
When no other materials than earth and brushwood are available, a comfortable bivouac for 12 men can be formed by excavating a circle with a
diameter of 18 feet, or thereabouts, and piling up the earth to form a wall
2 feet or 3 feet high. The men lie down, like the spokes of a wheel, with their
feet towards the centre. Branches of trees, or brushwood stuck into the wall,
improve the.shelter.
PLATE VII.
P O R T A B L E TAEPA"OI<RTF
H3
o
HUT.
PLATE
VII.
BIVOUACS.
PLATE
DISPOSAL
VIII
OF
RAINWATER.
WRONG
RIGHT.
Side af tent
Draught
& leaks
,
Fly
tent
• Excavated
Tent peg
WRONG
earth
No Draught
or leaks ^
p F!y of
|
tent
Tent peg
RIGHT
Excavated
earth
jg^j Ground level
PLATE XX.
STABLES.
Fined screen of Core iron
Or Qoartjmg or Canvas
Concrete or Brick standing
TYPICAL
Forest poJes 8' ep*rt in plan
Spuoier-proof W/
SECTION .
Chaff
Cutce r |
Harness Room
We tar Trough •
O
O
Short
/ B& fa
6ppro*Ct>
rood
SITE
PLAN.
r
S"
s
•a
Forge
s
To follow plate
7X]
PLATE X .
COOKER
£
FOR C A M P S A N D
BILLETS.
27
Chap. 2 , S e c . 10. 25
HUTTING.
Huts can bo made by thatching with stalks of any grain. In the absenco
ol ropes, creepers can be used if available.
44. If huts are constructed of material drawn from the engineer parks,
the most convenient form is rectangular in plan, 17 or 18 feet wide, to allow
of bunks on either side. "When attack by aeroplanes is expected only one tier
of bunks can be provided, and that must be as close to the ground as possible.
The floor should be of hard material or wood, the sides and roof of corrugated
iron or of wood covered with tarred paper or felt, and the windows of oiled
canvas or glass.
Comfortable huts can also be made of materials obtained locally secured to
a framework of rough timber, such materials include matting, brushwood,
reeds, Ac.
A useful type of hut consists of a thatched roof supported by uprights and
walls of " Malay Mat " made with brushwood and well plastered with mud.
For warm climates ample space for ventilation should be left at the top of
the walls.
Splinter-proof walls of earth, shingle, &c., must be constructed round each
hut, as a protection against splinters from shells or bombs from aeroplanes.
To economize material and labour and to increase the protection afforded,
the floors of all huts should be close to ground level, or in dug sites below ;
on sloping ground the site of each hut should be levelled by cutting into the
slope of the hill.
If stoves are provided, the floors, walls, and roofs of huts and billets must
be specially protected with sheet iron or tin where the stoves stand, or the
stove piping passes through.
CARE OF HORSES IN CAMP OR BTVOUAC.
45, If possible choose ground flat enough to givo a ! :vcl standing to the
horses, but with sufficient natural fall to carry away storm water ; sheltered
by higher ground from the wind ; within easy reach of the water supply, but
not draining into it. Shift after a wet night.
In very cold weather do not groom, but wisp and rub mud off legs. Put
more covering on back. Do not let a horse stand in a hot sun with his back
wet
4G. A horse when picketed requires 3 to 5 yards between picket line and
heel pegs ; 5 feet between head ropes. The head rope should only be long
enough to permit the horse to carry his head naturally when standing; too
long a rope permits him to get his leg over the rope and leads to heel galls.
In the case of a horse given to reining back, pass his head rope through
a shackle on the forefoot. This soon tires him of reining back, Picket
kickers separately. A gangway of 5 yards should be maintained between
two horses' lines.
47. Horses require hay, grass or some substitute in addition to grain.
Give a hungry horse some hay first, then his oats.
48. Scrub nose-bags frequently ; turn and dry them in sun. They should
not be interchanged owing to the risk of spreading infection. Avoid waste
by keeping nose-bags in repair and by lining hay nets when available.
49. Do not herd horses in mobs when grazing, but have guards out, who
should only mount when rounding up. Keep kickers apart, or hobble their
hind pasterns.
50. Measures for the protection of animals from attack by aircraft must be
thought out beforehand, when this form of attack may be expected.
METHODS OF SECURING HORSES.
51. Tying tip a horse.—The following is a useful method for securing a
horse to a bush or small tree.
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
f i g . 1.
Fig. 2.
Take a suitable branch or bunch of branches, place the loop of the reins
under and round it, then double back the end of the branch, breaking, if
necessary, and pass it through the reins as shown in Fig. 1 and tighten up.
A separate piece of stick will answer for the same purpose.
The more the horse pulls the tighter will the knot become, whereas the
man can unfasten it very rapidly by simply pulling back the doubled end
of the branch or piece of stick through the loop in the reins.
52. Single horses can also be kept from straying as follows :—
i. By knee-lialtering.—The correct knot for knee-haltering is a clove
hitch, fairly tight, above the knee, with a keeper knot (luilf-hitch)
round the rope to prevent it from coming loose. The end should
then be carried back to the head collar and so secured that the
horse cannot tread on it. The rope should be from 1 foot to 1 foot
6 inches from knee to lower ring of jowl piece of head-collar.
ii. By securing the bit to the stirrup iron by means of the rein or strap.
iii. By securing the bridoon rein to the girth on the near side, as shown
iu Fig. 2, I t should be drawn sufficiently tight to bend the horse,'a
head to the left. "When mounting in haste the rider can easily
loosen the slip knot after mounting, and then pull the reins clear
and pass them over the horse's head.
Iv. By being hobbled above the knees by a rope, or leather thong tied
round in such a way a3 to prevent the horse moving one foot in
advance of the other.
53. Coupling horses.—Horses can be securely coupled by turning them
head to tail and tying each with the bridoon rein to the off back-slay or
arch of the saddle of the other, taking care t h a t the reins when tied are
not more than 6 to 8 inches long. (See Fig. 3.)
"With a slip knot a horse can be tied to the head collars of either or both of
the two horses so coupled. The length of reins should not exceed one foot.
Fig. 3.
PLATE
XI
CHAMBER
Corrugated
Top bend
OVEN.
'ron
f«SECTION
THROUGH
CHIMNEY.
PERSPECTIVE
3'-9S I D E VIEW-
VIEW.
-»j
To fottow ptale XI ]
PLATE X I I .
Fig. 1.—COOKING I N T H E F I E L D ,
Fig. 2.
Brazier for Mess Tins.
SECTION OF
COOKING TRENCH.
Fig. 3 . — K I T C H E N S
Length varies with
No. .of Kettles,
allowing 8 for
every 10ft.
K g . 4.
P l a n of K e t t l e Trench.
Cooks for
t?0 men
2.6
Kettle
measures
12 quarts 9X/S&XH
K g . 5.
R a i s e d Trench
(wet weather),
F i g 6;
HAY
BOX.
hijh
To follow
plate
XII.]
PLATE XIII.
R A I S E D D O U B L E CAMP K E T T L E T R E N C H .
Shuts of Corrugated
.SECTIONAL
ELEVATION
To follow Plate
XIII.]
PLATE
PORTABLE
Diameters"
cr
Oven
Ground J a
e'o'
D
SIDE.
\
1
B
E L E V A T I O N .
d
t'8'-h
SECTION
D
A.B.
L O N G I T U D I N A L SECTION. SE.CT I O N
CO.
|i- / s ' - f —
a'o'
3 - 0 - i
831$
P L A N .
M ^ ^
Cooker
folded
complete
XIV.
FIELD KITCHEN.
Telescope
chimney
to
fit in oven fbr
packing.
•Two creso!
drums
form
ovens.
/Fire
guard
to
up fit
Pivot on which front of
cooker swings to
fit.undon
ovens for
packing.
Corrugated
iron hammered
at sides for
folding,
"•Loose f / r o bars to fit
when cooker is folded
P E R S P E C T I V E
VI
in oven box
for
packing-
E.W.
Telescopic
chimney
stowed in ono of
over,s.
Method
of
folding
and
packing.
flat
Chap. 2, S e e s , 10 a n d 11.
29
54. Linking horses.—The head ropes are brought over the horses' heads
clear of the reins, without ui.fastening the coil or knot. Each man, facing his
horse, hands his rope to the man on his right, who passes it through the upper
ring of his own horse's head collar, and lies it with two lialf-hitchc3.
55. Ringing horses.—The reins are taken over the horse's heads and the
flanks of the troop are brought forward until the horses are in a ring. The
surcingle or stirrup leather of the right-hand man is then passed through all
the reins and fastened.
CARD o r HARNESS AND SADDLERY.
56.—i. The leather work of all saddlery should be kept soft and supple.
Leather girths, girth .attachments, sweat flaps, and breeding's should be
greased regularly. Steel work should be oiled.
ii. Stirrup leathers should occasionally be shortened about an inch at the
buckle ends to-bring the wear on fresh holes.
iii. Leather must not be washed with soda or hot water. Lukewarm
water may be used, but leather should never be allowed to soak in any
water.
iv. Saddlery should, if possible, always be hung up or raised off the ground.
11. C A M P C O O K I N G ,
3cc.
1. Various types of field kitchens are shown on Plates X-XIA r .
Camp kettles will cook for 15 men and, when cooking potatoes only, will
cook for 30 men. Plate XII, Fig. 1, shows how camp kettles can be arranged
for cooking when time does not permit of a kettle trench being made.
2. Cooking can also be done in mess tins. No trench is necersary. The
mess tins are arranged in the same way as camp kettles shown in Plate XII,
Tig. 1, with the opening facing the direction of the wind.
Another method of cooking in mess tins is as shown in Plate XII, Fig. 2,
by puncturing a bucket, tea tin, or drum all over. Light a coke or charcoal
fire inside, place mess tins one on top of the other in rows on each side and
on top. Individual soldiers can cook in mess tins separately by standing the
mess tin on two stones, leaving an open fire-place underneath for fuel. The
mess tin lid should cover the tin loosely, otherwise the expansion of metal by
extreme heat will prevent its removal.
Boiling, slewing and frying.
3. To boil a joint of meat plaec it in boiling water and allow it to boil
quickly for ten minutes, then simmer by removing the vessel to a cooler position
or reducing the flre. The average loss by boiling is 15 to 20 per cent. The
time required to cook is about 15 minutes for each pound of meat.
Vegetables should be placed in boiling water with a little salt and boiled
quickly until tender. Potatoes take from 20 t o 30 minutes, car rots and
parsnips 20 to 45 minutes. Dried vegetables should be soaked for about
4 hours and then boiled slowly.
Stewing is not boiling. All that is required for a stew is a gradual simmering.
This will make the toughest parts of meat tender.
Frying is cooking with the aid of fats. When possible cover the article to
be cooked with fat.
Travelling field kitchen.
4. To obtain the best results, the asbestos chamber of the travelling Held
kitchen should not be used for cooking any dish that does not require continued
simmering.
Meats, etc., should be boiled not less than 30 minutes and fruit and vegetables not less than 5 minutes before being transferred at boiling point to
the asbestos chamber where they will finish cooking.
A dinner of meat, vegetables and pudding for 250 men can be cooked with
about 45 lbs. of coal.
The travelling field kitchen should be thoroughly clcaned inside and out
daily. The air space between the flre box and the coal box frequently becoracs
Chap. 2 , S e c . 10. 25
30
choked with coal, and if this space is nob cleaned out regularly the fire box
will in course.of time burn out.
Ahlershol oven.
5. The Aldershot oven is used in standing camps for baking bread, meat,
&c. I t will cojk dinners for about 220 men.
Gamp kettle Irench,
6. Camp kettle trenches are easily constructed with bricks, tins filled with
eartli and similar materials (see Plate X£l, Figs. 3, 4 and 5).
Kay box cookery.
7. "When fuel is scarce, the hay box method of cooking will be found most
useful.
The hay box is constructed to store heat The contents of a cooking pot,
which has been brought to boiling point on an ordinary fire, should be placed
in the hay box I0113 enough to finish cooking the contents of the vessel, I n
order to do this, the vessel must be enclosed in some form of packing which
will store heat, for which purpose waste hay has been found most suitable.
Place hay in bottom of the box and press it firmly to a depth of 6 inches,
then place the empty kettle in the centre on the top of the hay and proceed
to press hay all round it level with the top of the kettle. Take out the kettle
leaving the mould perfectly made (see Plate X I I , I'ig. 6).
Prepare food in the kettle and bring it to the boil on an ordinary fire.
After it has boiled the necessary time, see t h a t the lid is tightly fixed on,
and without delay place the kettle into the mould already prepared. Now
fill the top portion of the box with hay tightly pressed in and put on the lid
of the box, which should be tightly closed with suitable fastenings. The
vessel now being encased in 6 inches of compressed hay, the contents will
continue to cook and keep hot for hours.
RECIPES
8. Stewed beef or mutton.—Cut up the meat into tliin slices or small pieces,
the smaller the better, put a little fat into the bottom of the cooking pot ami
when hot put iu the meat, stir till brown, add a sliced onion, carrot or turnip,
season with pepper and salt, add a little flour and some hot water, stir well
and allow to simmer slowly till done. Rice and powdered biscuits in lieu of
flour may be added.
9. Irish stew.—Ingredients : meat, potatoes, onions, pepper, salt. Peel,
wash and slice the potatoes; peel, clean and cut up the onions, cut up the
meat into small pieces, place a little water in the kettle and a layer of potatoes
at the bottom, then a layer of meat and onions. Season with pepper and salt,
then add another layer of potatoes and so on to the top, potatoes forming the
top layer. Barely cover the whole with water and stew gently for about 2
hours.
10. Sea pie.—Ingredients as for Irish stew, with 5 lbs. of flour a ".d lAlbs.
of dripping or suet added for every 20 men. Prepare ingredients as in the
case of stew, cutting the potatoes in slices lengthwise, and cover with paste,
making a hole in the centre. To make the paste, mix flour and water, roll or
beat it out with the hands 011 a flat surface, adding a small teaspoonful of
baking powder for each pound of flour. The paste should be about J inch
thick. Time required to cook, about 2 hours.
11. Beef tea.—Cut up about 1 lb. of lean beef into small pieces, put iu a
kettle, add 2 pints of cold water, boil slowly, removing the scum as it rise3,
cook for about 2 hours or longer if time admits ; strain and serve.
12. Stew (made of preserved meat and vegetables).—Cut up the meat,
removing all fat and jelly, render the vegetables to powder and put them in akettle or mess tin with a moderate supply of water, cook until done, add meat
and jelly, season with pepper, salt and a teaspoonful of brown sugar, if available ; put on the lid and allow to heat through, then serve. If desired, a
little flour or pea flour thickening may be added and allowed to simmer for.
15 minutes.
Chap, 2, S s c s . 11 and 12.
31
To make palatable dishes with preserved meat which has already been cooked
ifc will only be necessary to heat it through.
If fresh vegetables are obtainable they should be fried first then stewed
and added to the meat.
13. Preserved meal soup.—Take'4 ozs. of meat and half a biscuit for each
man, with his allowance of preserved vegetables; cut up the meat and powder
the biscuit and vegetables. Put the vegetables into a camp kettle containing
half a pint of cold water a man. Boil slowly, and add the meat and biscuit,
continue the boiling for i an hour; season with pepper and salt, if required,
and serve; a quarter of "a teaspoonful of brown sugar for each man may be
added to improve the flavour.
14. Bread made with baking powder.—Spread the flour out evenly, sift the
baking powder over it taking care to break up any small lumps. Mix flour
and powder thoroughly, Dissolve salt in water in the proportion of 1 oz.
to 7 lbs. flour; mix with the flour and powder very thoroughly. Place the
loaves in a quick oven.
For further information regarding cooking in the field, see Manual of Military
Cooking and Dietary.
SALVAGE.
15. Salvage means the prevention of waste, care and conservation ot
stores, and the recovery of abandoned and unserviceable stores, with a view
to their repair and re-issue, thereby relieving, os for as possible, the necessity
for the provision of fresh raw materials.
16. All orders regarding salvage ore issued by the Q.M.G's. branch of the
staff. The responsibility for salvage rests with the commanders of units and
formations.
17. Salvage, particularly in the field, must be regarded as on essential
function of all troops.
18. It should be second nature to all ranks never to leave derelict material
lying about. Everything shoidd either be taken to the nearest salvage dump,
or, if time does not permit of this, a small dump should be made at some
position easily located on the nearest road, and the information, together with
the map reference, sent to the nearest H.Q.
10. Opportunities should be token to load with salvage all vehicles returnlug empty from the front,
12. W A T E R
SUPPLY
(See also Sec. 41 Maintenance of Health.)
1. A daily average of 1 gallon a man is sufficient for drinking and cooking
purposes. A horse, bullock, or mule drinks obout l i gallons at a time.
In standing camps, an average allowance of 5 gollons should be given for a
man, and 10 gallons for a horse or a camel. An elephant drinks 25 gallons
a day, a mule or ox drinks 6 to 8 gallons, a sheep or pig 6 to 8 pints. These are
minimum quantities.
One cubic foot of water = 6J gallons (a gallon = 10 lbs.).
2. The rough average yield of a stream may be measured as follows:—
Select some 15 yards of tlis stream where the channel is fairly uniform and
there are no eddies. Take the breadth and average depth in feet in three or
four places. Drop in a chip of wood and find the time it takes to travel,
say, 30 feet. The surface velocity in feet per second will thus be obtained.
Four-fifths of this will give the mean velocity, and this multiplied by the
sectional aTea will give the yield a second in cubic feet of water.
3. The quantity of water in a well may be estimated by the following
formulcc;—
i. In the case of a square well:—
Length (in feet) x breadth x depth x 6i = gallons,
li. NY here the well is circular :—
Diameter (in feet)- x 5 times depth, less 2-1 per cent, of resultant
= gallons.
(B 28/332)Q
E
32 Chap. 3, Sec. 14.
PURITY OP W A T E R .
4. As the health of a force depends largely on the purity of the water
provided, everything possible must be done to ensure an ample supply of
pure drinking water, and to keep it pure when obtained. Through drinking
contaminated water cholera, dysentery, enteric fever and other diseases may
be contracted and spread. The water supply will therefore always be selected
in conjunction with a medical officer, who will satisfy himself as to its fitness
for use. On active service all water must be considered as polluted, and
puri fication of the drinking and cooking water, by clarification and chlorination
or other suitable means will invariably be carried out unless orders to the
contrary are issued on the advice of the medical authorities. The possibility
of water having been intentionally poisoned should be kept in mind, and, if
considered desirable, a medical officer should examine the supply by means
of the case, water testing, poison.
5. Men must be prevented from drinking water from unauthorized sources,
and they must be trained to economize the contents of their water bottles,
which, before marching, should be filled with weak tea or sterilized water.
Bad water drunk on an empty stomach is even more dangerous than that drunk
with a meal. Thirst is best assuaged by first moistening the lips and mouth,
and drinking only a small quantity at a time. Sufficient water to replace
t h a t lost to the body by continued exertion must be supplied, but the danger
of drinking large quantities of cold water while the body is overheated should
be borne in mind.
6. Wherever possible, water should be purified in the unit's water cart.
The process involves preliminary filtration, assisted by the use of alum and
subsequent chemical treatment by water sterilizing powder (chlorine). I n
the absence of a water enrt, sedimentation by alum (5 grains to a gallon),
followed by chlorination by water sterilizing powder (chlorine) may be carried
out in any storage receptacle, such as metal or canvas tanks or pakhals.
7. The quantity of water sterilizing powder (chlorine) required to sterilize
water and render it safe for consumption is calculated by means of the " case,
water testing, sterilization."
After water sterilizing powder (chlorine) has been thoroughly mixed with
the water, half an hour at least should be allowed for sterilization to be effected
before the water is drunk.
As water sterilizing powder (chlorine) deteriorates readily on exposure, it
should be kept in small quantities, well sealed, and renewed at intervals.
8. Small bodies of troops temporarily detached and without facilities for
chlorination may sterilize drinking water by the addition of 2 of the Service
tablets of acid sodium sulphate for each water-bottle.
9. Efficient sterilization of water can be effected- by boiling, but this method
Is practicable only for small quantities of water which is best made into
tea.
10. Vessels and tanks in which water passed for drinking is stored, should
be raised off the ground, kept covered and, when possible, provided with pipes
and tap3. These tanks and also water carts, water-bottles and other receptacles should be cleansed periodically with a strong solution of water sterilizing
powder (chlorine), followed by free flushing.
11. Posts on the lines of communication should arrange to have enough
sterilized water on hand to supply the wants of detachments passing through.
This is of special importance at entraining, halting and detraining stations on
a railway route.
WATERING
ARRANGEMENTS.
12. As a rule the military police or otherwise the first troops t o arrive at a
halting ground, will mount sentries on all water likely to be required for use,
with such orders as will prevent any form of pollution. These sentries will
not be withdrawn until permanent water guards arc detailed. The water
supply will be selected in consultation with a mecUcal officer, or the 0.0, a
sanitary section.
C h a p . 2 | Sec. 19,
ss
13. She water supply slibilid Usually fee marked with flags, as follows, by
the advanced party of engineers :—
White for drinking-water.
Blue for watering places for animals.
Bed for washing or bathing places.
14. If water is obtained from a stream, horses will be watered below the
place where troops obtain their drinking-water, but above bathing and
washing place3. Patrolling by mounted men will often be necessary for some
distance above Ibe spot where the drinking-water is drawn.
IB. If running water is hot available, the supply must be very strictly
protected, a rough barbed wire fence, if procurable, being run round it to keep
animals out. Animals should, in this case, be watered by bucket or nosebag ;
and washing should be allowed only at some distance from the water supply,
and, if possible, at a lower level, empty biscuit tins or other receptacles being
used to draw off water for this purpose.
Similar precautions are often necessary with running water, if other bodies
of troops are halted lower down the stream.
16. If many animals have to be watered and the frontage is small, times
should be laid down for each corps to water. Five minutes may be taken as
the average time for watering an animal.
There should be sufficient troughing to enable all animals to be watered in
1 hour. Allow 3 feet 6 inches for each animal.
An officer will invariably accompany watering parties of more than 20
animals.
17. Each troop of a field squadron and each section of a Held company
carries one lift and force pump (weight 84 lbs. complete), with suction and
delivery hose ; a field park company carries four pumps. A lift and force
pump In good order can supply 600 gallons an hour at a combined lift and
force of 60 feet, with 4 men at work, but twice that amount with 2 or 3 men
if the height to which the water is to be raised is 9mall,
(B 28/332)Q
34
CHAPTER
III
13. O R D E R S
(See Chap. XIII, F.S.R., Vol. 1,1923.)
GENERAL
RULES
REGARDING THE PREPARATION AND
ORDERS, REPORTS AND MESSAGES.
DESPATCH
or
1. Communications in the field may be verbal or written, according to
circumstances. The following general rules should be observed:—
i. Orders issued by the higher commanders, and reports, will normally
be prepared in writing. When issued verbally their substance
should be recorded in writing by the recipient or his staff officer
whenever it is practicable to do so ; they should be confirmed in
writing. I n war, verbal messages are often incorrectly delivered,,
especially in the excitement of an engagement.
ii. Orders and reports must be as concise as possible, consistent with
clearness. They must be precise as regards time and place, the
language should be simple and the handwriting easily legible.
Anything o£ an indefinite or conditional nature such as " dawn,"
" d u s k , " " a s far as possible," "should," or " m a y " is to be .
avoided.
iii. I n all orders, &c., in the field, whether verbal or in writing, time
will be described on the system of the 24-hour clock. I n written
messages a group of four figures, representing hours and minutes,
will invariably bo used. The group of figures will be followed
by the word hours*, thus seven minutes past four in the afternoon
will be shown as 1607 hours; nine o'clock in the morning, as
0900 hours; and one minute past midnight, as 0001 hours. In
verbal messages the procedure will be the same, each number
being pronounced separately. Thus, 0317 will be pronounced
" owe three one seven."
iv. A night will bo described thus:—Night' 29/30 Sept., or night
30 Sept./l Oct. Midnight will be described as midnight 29/30
Sept., and one minute past midnight as 0001 hours 30 Sept. The
hour 2400 will not be used. Messages despatched at midnight
will be timed as 2359 hours or 0001 hours.
v. Names of places and persons will be written in block capitals, e.g.,
LONDON. Names of places must be spelt exactly as given on
the map In use. Only abbreviations about which there can be no
doubt will be used. For authorized abbreviations, see page vi and
Sec. 14,17 and 18.
vi. In naming units or formations from which a portion is excluded,
the unit will be named and the words " less
"
_ appended, e.a.% 10 H. less one sqn.
Tii. if a map is referred to, the one used must be specified unless this
is provided for in standing orders. The position of places will
be denoted by co-ordinates, if the map is squared or gridded.
I n all orders, when the names of towns, villages or trigonometrical
points are mentioned for the first time, or when there is likely to
be any difficulty in quick identification, co-ordinates should be
added after the place concerned. When gridded or squared maps
are not .available positions can be denoted by the points of the
compass, e.g., "wood, 600 yards S.E. of TET8WORTH," or
when no points of reference are available, by actual compass
bearings, e.g., " hill, 1,500 yards true bearing 272° from CHOBHAM
Church," or by description, e.g., " cross roads £ mile S.W. of the
Becond E in HASEEEY," the letter indicated being underlined.
When using the four"ardinal points of the compass the words
should be written in full, e.g., " South of BAGSHOT," and not
" S of BAGSHOT." A road is best indicated by the names of
places on it, care being taken to name sufficient places to ensure
* The word " Hours " will not bo used in the space " Time of Origin " on
A.E. C 2128.
88 C h a p . 3, S e c . 14.
that the road intended is followed. Our positions will be described
from right to left, looking in the direction of the enemy. The
enemy's positions will be similarly described, looking in the
direction of our own troops. / The terms " r i g h t " and " l e f t " are
used in describing river banks, it being assumed t h a t the writer
is looking down stream. An area will be described by taking its
northernmost point first and giving the remaining points in clockwise order. Except in the foregoing cases,indefinite or ambiguous
terms, such as light, left, before, beyond, front, rear, on this side
of, &c., must not be used unless it is made clear to what force they
refer. If the term " r i g h t " (or " left ") is applied to our own
forces in retirement it is always to be understood t h a t it refers to
the original " r i g h t " (or " l e f t " ) flank when facing the enemy,
viii. "When bearings are given, they will invariably be true bearings,
and this should be so stated. The variations of compasses must
be checked before true bearings are converted into magneticbearings or vice versa.
lx. If the order, report or message refers to troops reaching a placeat a certain time, it is assumed that the head of the main body is.
meant, unless otherwise stated,
x, The writer having finished his order or report, should read i t
through carefully at least once, and, if possible, get someone elseto read it, in order to assure himself t h a t it is clear, and, in thecase of an order, t h a t it is calculated to influence the recipient im
the way intended.
xl. An order or report must be dated and clearly signed, the rank of the
sender, his appointment, and the force he is with being stated,
xii. A copy of all orders and messages sent will be kept by the sender.
2. Each class of order will be prepared and numbered separately. The
heading of the order will indicate the class to which it belongs.
Each branch of the staff is responsible for keeping the other branches
Informed of any orders or action taken which may concern them.
3. I n the case of orders and instructions dealing with operations, the
original and all copies will bo endorsed with the method and hour of issue or
transmission, e.g., " to Signals a t 1430 hours," the time shown to be the actual
time the copies are handed over to Signals, and not the time the message was
written or signed.
4. The means of despatching messages in the field are described in Sec. 14,
Important messages should, when there is danger of their non-delivery or
delay, be sent by more than one route or method, and an acknowledgment
of re'eeipt obtained.
The fact that a message is Important should be notified by the ofHccr
concerned to the signal service, who are then responsible for selecting the
methods to be employed. If. important messages are not acknowledged
within a reasonable time, such fact should be reported by the signal scrvice
to the branch of the staff or officer concerned.
5. Communications of a secret nature should usually be. in cipher, but it
must be remembered t h a t enciphering and deciphering causes loss of time.
One part of a message must not be enciphered and the remainder left in clear.
6. Rules regarding the use of code or cipher for messages of a secret nature
are given in Sec. 45.
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT o r
ORDERS.
7. Orders in the field are classified as follows —
I. Standing orders.
II. Routine orders,
ill. Operation orders.
Iu addition to the above, special orders, such as " orders of did day,"*
will occasionally be necessary.
* An order of the day is an order of ail exceptional nature which cannot be
classed conveniently in tho ordinary series of standing, routine, or operation
orders, .
36
Chap.
S e t , 13.
Standing orders.
The object of standing orders is—
(a) To adapt existing regulations to local conditions.
(b) To save frequent repetitions in routine and operation orders.
8. Standing orders are prepared by the three branches of the staff in consultation and arc issued by the A.G's. branch of the staff.
9. Unless carefully revised and kept up to date, standing orders may lead
to misunderstanding. They must therefore be confined to essentials, and
added to as circumstances require. They are not suitable for use in formations, the composition of which is subject to frequent change.
10. The authority issuing standing orders is'responsible t h a t any alteration
Iti. them Is notified to the troops, t h a t they are comiriunicated to troops newly
entering the command, and t h a t in so far as is possible they contain nothing
which contradicts existing regulations.
11. Repetition of existing regulations is to be avoided.
Boutine orders,
12. Routine orders are of the same nature in war as in peace. They deal
with all matters not concerned with operations, such as discipline, interior
economy, <fcc. By developing to the utmost the use of routine orders, which
have a fixed circulation, telegrams and correspondence can be largely reduced.
13. Routine orders ate prepared by the A.G's. and Q.il.G's. branches of the
staff and issued by the former branch.
Operation Orders.
14. Operation orders deal with all strategical and tactical operations, such
as marches, protection, occupation of quarters, reconnaissance and battle,'
and are discussed in detail in Chap. XIV, I\S.R., Vol. II, 1924.
15. The object of an operation order is to bring about a course of action in
accordance ivith the intentions of the commander, and tvith full co-operation
between all arms and unit*.
16. An operation order ?m«t contain just what the recipient requires to know
and nothing more. I t should tell him nothing which he can and should arrange
for liimselfi and will not, especially in the case of large forces, enter into
details except when details are absolutely necessary. Any attempt to prescribe to a subordinate at a distance anything which lie, with a fuller knowledge of local conditions, should be better able to decide on the spot, is likely
to cramp his initiative iii dealing with unforeseen developments, and will be
avoided. I n particular, such expressions as "will await further orders"
should be avoided,
In.framing an operation order, therefore, the general principle Is that the
object to be attained, with such information as affects its. attainment, Will be
briefly but clearly stated ; while the method of attaining the object will be
left to the recipient to the utmost extent possible,
17. I t is essential t h a t subordinates should not only be able to Work intelligently and resolutely in accordance with brief orders or instructions, but
should also be able to take upon themselves, whenever necessary, the responsibility of departing from, or varying, the orders they may have received.
18. Operation orders are prepared and issued by the general staff branch,
but the A.G's. and Q.M.G's. branches, and the senior artillery, engineer and
signal officer of the formation are responsible for drawing up, if necessary
in consultation with any service concerned, all orders regarding arrangements
for which they arc responsible in connection with the operations. Such
portion of the orders to the artillery or orders regarding inter-communication,
supply, transport, ammunition, medical and other services of maintenance,
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
< as it is necessary for all recipients of an operation order to know, will be
published, either in the body of the operation order by the general staff
branch, or, after co-ordination by t h a t branch, by the branch concerned as a
supplement to the operation order in the form of instructions. Detailed
orders to the artillery, engineers, signals, find services, which it is unnecessary
for all recipients of an operation order to know will, after co-ordination bv
the general staff branch, be issued separately by the branch of the staff or the
officer responsible for drafting them, to those immediately concerned.
19. In order to facilitate co-operation, the whole of the directions to each
portion of a force taking part in an operation will usually be embodied in one
operation order. "When, for any reason, separate orders are issued, instead
of a combined order, each separate order will include such information regarding other troops as the recipient may find it useful to know.
20. A specimen type of order is given below :—
SECRET.
Division
Operation Order
No.......
Copy
N
o
.
.
Date
Ref
Map No
i.
Information.
i. Regarding the enemy.
ii. Regarding our own troops. Secrecy must always be fully considered.
ii. Intention.
Alternative plans and intentions depending on developments are
liable to cause doubt and should be avoided.
iii. jMethod of executing the order.
Detailed orders to fighting troops and aircraft, arms being dealt with
in order of importance.
iv. Administrative arrangements.
Sunply, transport, ammunition, medical services. &c. (See para. 18
above.)
v. Inter-communication.
(a) "What routes the H.Q. of subordinate formations are to follow.
(b) Instructions as to liaison duties with flank formations.
(c) Instructions as to wireless control.
(d) Method of communication t o and from the air.
(ie) Where reports are to be seut.
vi. Acknowledge.
A
B
- Colonel.
General Staff
Division.
Method of issue
Distribution and Copy No.f
Time*
21. With the increased length and complication of operation orders, it may
often be advisable to place in appendices details such as the hostile order of
battle, the composition of the detachment, the order of maTcli, or the artillery
plan of attack, leaving only the important essentials in the body of the order.
* See para. 3.
t The distribution should be in a logical order : Formations and units under
command, staff and heads of services, war diary and file, the superior formation,
and formations and units co-operating in the operations, f or informat'.on,
38
Chap. 3 , Sec. 13.
Tabulation of such details tends to clearness.
table is shown below
The pro forma for a march
SECRET.
MARCH T A B I E ISSUED WITH OPERATION ORDER NO.
Copy No
Dated
Place.
Serial
No.
(«)
Date.
(b)
Formation or
Unit.
(c)
From
(cl)
To
M
Starting
point.
(/)
Time.
CO
Re(V)
.Route. marks.
Each unit or formation will be given a serial number to allow of easy future
reference ; for this reason also each column is given a letter. Any necessary
instructions for the movement not given in the body of the order will be
shown in the column of remarks.
22. Subordinate commanders in framing their orders, will only embody
so much of their superior's orders as is necessary. The distribution by a
commander to hi3 subordinates of copies of operation orders received by
him from higher authority can seldom be justified.
23. Superior orders must be issued in sufficient time to enable subordinate
commanders in t u r n to frame and distribute their own orders. If detailed
orders cannot be issued till late in the evening, great inconvenience will be
prevented by the issue of a preliminary warning order giving the time of
assembly or of starting. The preliminary warning order should state when and
where the complete order will be issued.
KITI.ES REGARDING THE EXECUTION OF ORDERS IN THE FIELD.
24. Notwithstanding the greatest care and skill in framing orders, unexpected local circumstances may render the precise execution of the orders
given to a subordinate unsuitable or impracticable. I n such circumstances
the following principles should guide an officer in deciding on his course of
action:—
i. A formal order should never be departed from, either in letter or
spirit (a) so long as the officer who issued it is present; (b) if the
officer who issued the order is not present, provided t h a t there
is time to report to him and await a reply without losing an
opportunity or endangering the command.
ii. A departure from either the spirit or the letter of an order is justified
if the subordinate who assumes the responsibility bases life decision
on some fact which could not be known to the officer wlio issued
the order, and if he is conscientiously satisfied that he is acting
as his superior, if present, would order hiin to act.
iii. If a subordinate, in the absence of n superior, neglects t o depart
from the letter of his orders, when such departure is clearly
demanded by circumstances, and failure ensues, he will be held
responsible for such failure.
iv. Should a subordinate find it necessary to depart f r o m an order, he
should at once inform the issuer of it, and the commanders of any
neighbouring units likely to be affected.
C h a p . 2, Sec. 10.
25
ORDERS FOR ATTACK.
Issue of Orders, Conferences and Preliminary Arrangements for a deliberate
attach'.
25. Strict regard must be paid to secrecy,
26. Having formed bis plan, the commander will, if time permits, assemble
such subordinate commanders, staff officers, and heads of services as necessary.
At this conference he will:—
i. Explain the situation.
Ii. Describe the scope of the operations.
iii. Allot tasks.
iv. Consider any i>oints raised by those present.
27. Subordinate commanders will then carry out reconnaissances, form their
plans, and in turn hold conferences of their subordinates.
28. As soon as the plan has been approved, the staff will work out the necessary details to give it effect. Those details will be issued in the form of
preliminary instructions, which must be co-ordinated by the general staff.
29. Preliminary instructions will deal with :—•
i. Formation of ammunition dumps.
ii. Construction of artillery, mortar and machine gun positions.
lii. Accommodation for troops.
iv. Selection and preparation of h e a d q u a r t e r s , observation posts and intelligence posts.
v. Landing grounds for aircraft and co-operation with the R.A,F.
vi. Signal communication.
vii. Intelligence arrangements (including maps, ciphers and codes).
viii. Arrangements for storing reserves of rations, forage, engineer stores,
camouflage material, water, Ac., and for getting stores and supplies
forwarded during the action.
ix. Jledical arrangements (including evacuation of wounded).
x. Traffic control.
xi. Evacuation of prisoners.
xii. Control of civilians.
xiii. Clearing the battlefield.
xiv. Reinforcements.
In order to ensure the efficient execution of the necessary preparations,
detailed programmes of work must be drawn up by the staffs of formations,
before work is begun, showing :—
i. The work to be done and its priority iu importance.
il. The labour available.
iii. The methods of concealing work.
Q
iv. The dates on which work must be started in order to be ready by the
day of attack.
31. The arrangements for the conduct of the attack may be issued in orders
and instruction1?.
The instructions as to the allotment of tasks and frontages must clearly
define the successive objectives and give the times at which these objectives
will be reached. This will usually be done by means of barrage maps on
which will be marked the programme of the supporting artillery and supple*
mentory weapons. In addition to the points already referred to, Instruction?
will also deal in detail with the following points :—
i. Arrangements for the synchronization of watches.
ii. Collection of stragglers.
iii. Special instructions, if neccssary, as s!0 the equipment to be worn.
iv. Special instructions os to surplus officers and men who will remain
behind to replace casualties when the engagement is over.
32. The final orders for the attack should not, in the interests of secrecy,
be issued until the last moment compatible with all ranks understanding
the tasks allotted to them. The time selected for the issue of these orders
should admit of the troops arriving at their forming u p places in the best
possible condition. These orders will include the time a t which the attack
will begin (usually referred to as the zero hour), any fresh information as to
40
Chap, 3, Seo. 13,
t h e enemy's dispositions, and any points which for reasons of secrecy it has
been inadvisable to inoludc in previous instructions.
As a general guide, orders-for a deliberate attack should reach an infantry
brigade headquarters not less than 48 hours before zero hour.
33. The h o u r and date of the a t t a c k should be communicated separately,
and n o t inoluded i i r t h e body of an operation order.
OBDnns FOU NIGHT ADVANCES AND NIGHT ATTACKS,
34. I n framing orders for n i g h t operations i t m a y b e necessary t o deal with
some or all of the following points, in addition to those mentioned above, under
Operation orders " and " Orders for t h e A t t a o k , "
I. Time of assomb'y a t and departure from, and description of, the
position of assembly.
U. Order of march, and formations.on leaving the position of assembly.
Distances and intervals. Maintenance of communication, and
tools to be carried,
ili, The compass bearing of t h e routes or roads allotted to different
•units,
W. Time and duration of halts.
v. If possible, the forming-up places for night attacks should be
described, and their distance from the position of assembly and
f r o m t h e objectives should be notified.
.
vi, Formation to be adopted a t t h e forming-up places.
vii. Special instructions for t h e a t t a c k and t h e signal for i t ; arrangements for artillery support.
viii, Description of the objectives.
lx, Conduct of troops during t h e advance.
x. Aotion in case t h e operations are disclosed b y flares dropped f r o m
hostile aircraft.
xi. Aotion to resist counter-attack a f t e r t h e position is captured,
xii. E x t e n t to which t h e captured position is t o be fortified and t h e
detail of troops who are to perform this d u t y .
xiii. Aotion of reserves or neighbouring troops against positions likely
t o enfilade t h e captured position.
xlv, Distinctive marks and password.
xv, Place of t h e commander a t t h e position of assembly, during t h e
maroh thenoe, and a t the forming-up place,
•xvl. Straggler posts,
xvii. Prisoners.
xviii. Wounded.
xlx, Ammunition and rations,
xx, Aotion of close reconnaissance aeroplanes.
Orders will usually be communicated beforehand t o those officers only f r o m
whom aotion is required, so t h a t timely arrangements may be made. * U n t i l
t h e troops reaoli t h e position of assembly no more should be m a d e known
t o t h e m t h a n is absolutely neoossary. I t m a y be advisable, in order t o
deceive spies, t h a t misleading orders should be given out.
ORDERS FOR MOVEMENTS BY HAIL.
35. The following points should be observed in drawing u p orders for the.
despatch of troops by rail, in addition t o those mentioned under operation'
orders:—
i. D a t e and place of entraining, destination and railway route t o be
followed.
ii. Schedule of trains and allotment of troops, hour a t which troops
are t o reach t h e entraining place, a n d if necessary, t h e road they
are t o use.
iii. Advance parties, loading and unloading parties a t entraining and
detraining stations, respectively.
iv. Special instructions regarding wheeled t r a n s p o r t to be t a k e n by
rail, entraining and detraining.
v. Arrangement^ for cooking and feeding t h e troops and for watering
,
jlijimals en route.
Chap, 3 , S e e s . 13 a n d 14,
41
vi. Places of assembly near entraining and detraining stations.
vii. Special instructions regarding detrainment, off-loading, protection
against attack from the air.viii. Steps to secure detrainment from surprise.
OIIDEUS FOR MOVEMENT BY MECHANICAL TRANSPORT.
6, See Sect. 7, paras. 26 to 32.
14.
INTERCOMMUNICATION
1 . T H E SERVICE OP INTERCOMMUNICATION IS CARRIED OUT B Y : —
i. The units of the Royal Corps of Signals.
ii. Intercommunication personnel forming part of other units.
2 . T H E UNITS OP THE ROYAL CORPS OF SIGNALS ARE : —
For & Cavalry Division :
A Cavalry Divisional Signals consisting of :
HQ.
Despatch Rider Troop.
H.Q. Troop.
3 Brigade Troops.
W/T Troop.
Por a Division:
A Divisional Signals consisting of
H.Q.
No. 3 Coy.—
No. 1 Coy.—
No. 2 Coy.—
Coy. H.Q.
Coy. H.Q.
Coy. H.Q.
Div. H.Q. Sec. .
Wireless Sec.
B.A. H.Q. Sec.
D.R. Sub. Sec.
2 Cable Sees.
4 Arty. Bde. Sees. 3 Inf. Bde. Sees.
For a Corps—
A Corps Signals consisting of :
H.Q.No. 1 Coy. (Construction).' . •• ' :
No. 2 Coy. (Wireless).
No. 3 Coy. (Operating and maintenance).
For G.H.Q.:
A G.H.Q. Signals consisting o f :
H.Q.No. 1 Coy. (Construction),
No. 2 Coy. (Wireless).
No. 3 Coy. (Operating and maintenance).
For Lines of Communication :
A L. of C. Signals consisting of:
H.Q,—
No. 1 Coy. (Construction),
No. 2 Coy. (Wireless).
Base Signal Coy.
Signal Stores Sec.
H.Q. Railway Telegraphs.
Rly. Tel. Construction Coy.
Rly. Tel. Operating Sec.
For an Air Defence Bde—
An A.A, Signal Coy. consisting o f :
H.Q.
2 A.A. Arty. Bde. Sig. Sees.
4 S.L. Coy. Slgual Sections.
,3 Cable Sees.
Signal Scction is provided for each of the following:—
A Non-Divisional' Field Brigade R.A.
, , ..
. _
A Medium Brigade R.A.
A Squadron -H.Q., Royal Afr tfotce.
A Tank Battalion.
An Aircraft Park, Royal Air Force.
H.Q., Royal Air Forc6.
A Port Depot, Royal Air Force.
A Wing HJQ., Royal Air Force.
Advanced Aircraft Depot, R.A.F.
42
C h a p . 3, S e c . 14.
3 . T H E MEANS AT THE DISPOSAL OF THE VARIOUS SIGNAL UNITS, AND THE
NORMAL D U T I E S TO TPHICH THEY ARE ALLOTTED, ARE SHOWN BELOW : —
Cav. Div. Sigs.
Linemen, line operators and
switcliboatd operators
H.Q. Tioop
W / t Troop
»
3 " 0 " wireless sets
D / R Troop
Despatch riders
Brigade Troop.
4
Div.
" C"
wireless sets,
despatch riders.
Linemen,
line
operators,
switchboard
operators
and visual operators.
Sigi,
No. 1 Coy.—
W/T Sec.
2 Cable Sees. .
No. 2 Cov.—
R.A. H.Q. See.
Arty. Bde. Sec.
No. 3 Coy.—
Div. H.Q, Sec.
D/R
_
To provide Cav. Div. Signal
office and to maintain and
operate any lines that may
be available in the area
occupied bv the Cav. Div,
At Cav. Div. H.Q., for
communicating with Cav.
Bdes.
Communication from Cav.
Div. H.Q. to
lateral
formations and Cav. Bdes,
Communication with lateral
formations and with Cav.
regiments, using any lines'
that may be available.
Sub-Sec.
Inf. Bde. See.
10 " C " wireless sets
4 mounted cable detachments, each with 10 miles
single line
Linemen, ' line operators,
switchboard
operators
and visual operators
1 Mounted Telephone Det.,
with 7 miles of line,
despatch ridefs,
and
visual operators
Liijemen, line operators,
switchboard
operators
and visual operators
20 Despatch Riders
4 " A " wireless sets, 2
D.fts,,
linemen,
line
operators
and
visual
operators
Communication with latetal
formations. Communication with Arty, and Inf.
Bdes. and. lateral communication within the
division.
For communication with
Arty, and Inf. Bdes.
To provide Div. Arty.
Signal Office and to work
any lines that may be laid
b y the Cable Sees, or
found in the area.
For communication with
Batteries and Bde. Observation Post.
To form the Div, Signal
office and to work any
lines laid by the Cable
Sees, or found in the
area.
Communication with Inf.
Bdes. and lateral formations.
To
communicate
with
battalions, and lateral
communication
within
the brigade.
25
C h a p . 2, Sec. 10.
Unit.
Means available.
3 Construction Sees. M.T.
for which air line material as required is sent
up from the Signal Stores
Sec. at the Base. 3 Cable
Sees., each carryiug 20
miles of single or 10 miles
of twisted wire
Normal duties.
For communication
Divisions and any
work within the
area.
1 Cable Sec. is to help
Medium Arty.
with
other
Corps
Corp3
2 light motor "NV/T Sees.,
each with. 2 " D " sets
To supplement the communication provided by
No. 1 Coy.
2 E,A. light "NV/T Sees., Tor communication with
each with 2 " C " sets
Corps Arty. Bdes.
Despatch riders
..
,, Tor general Corps communications.
Linemen, line operators To form the Corps Signal
and switchboard operaOffice and to work and
tors
maintain lines p u t u p by
No. 1 Coy. or found in the
area.
Corps Medium Arty. Sec. To establish a Corps Medium
with telephone wagon,
Arty. Signal Office and t o
linemen, line operators,
communicate
with
switchboard
operators
Medium Bdes., K.A.
and despatch riders
3 Construction Sees. M.T.
and 1 Construction Sec.
H.T. for which air line
ijiaterial is sent up as
required from the Signal
Stores Sec. at the Base.
4 Cable Sees., each with 10
miles of twisted or 20
miles of single cable
2 light motor "W/T Sees,
each with 2 " D " sets,
1 light horsed-\V/T Sec.
with 2 " D " sets
Despatch riders
Linemen, line operators
and switchboard operators
Construction Sees. M.T.
for which air line material
is supplied from the Base
asrequired. 1 Cable Sec.
with 10 miles of twisted
or 20 miles of single wire
For communication with
Corps and for general
work in the G.H.Q. area.
To supplement the work of
No. 1 Coy.
For general G.H.Q, communications.
To form G.H.Q. Signal
Office and to work and
maintain lines p u t up by
No. 1 Coy. or found in the
area.
For general L. of 0, communications.
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
44
Unit.
L. of 0. Sigs.
—cont.
No. 2 Coy.
Base Sig. Coy..
Means available.
Normal duties.
1 heavy motor W/T See.
with 2 " E " sets, 2 light
motor W/T sets, each
with 2 " D " sets
Despatch riders
To supplement the work of
No. 1 Coy.
Linemen, line operators and
switchboard operators
Signal
Sec.
Stores
Ely. Tel. Construction Coy.
Ely. Tel. Operating Sec.
A small clerical staff and 15
men for general duty
2 Construction Sees. M.T.
for which airline material
is supplied as required
from the Base
Linemen, line operators and
switchboard operators
For general L. of C. communications.
To form Base Signal Office
and to work and maintain
lines put up by No. 1
Coy. or found in the area.
Storage of technical stores
and distribution to Signal
Units.
For railway operating telegraph and telephone communications.
To work and maintain lines
put up by the Ely. Telegraphs Construction Coy.
or found in the area.
A.A. Signal Coy.
4 despatch riders, linemen For communication to A.A..
and switchboard operators
Bdes., Searchlight Bn,, and
S.L. Coys.
A. A. Bde., E . A., Despatch riders, linemen, For communication with
visual operators and switchA.A. Batteries.
Signal Sec.
board operators
S.L.Coy., Signal 2 despatch riders, linemen For S.L. Coy., communicawith M.T., and switchtions with sections.
Sec.
board operators
M.T. Cable
Cable deatcliments,
deatcliments, For communication from
Cable Sec.
, , 22 M.T.
each with 5 miles of
A.A.
Bde.
H.Q.
to
twisted or 10 miles of
Batteries, to Searchlight.
single cablc
Coys, and to the R.A.F.
Communication for non-mobile guns and lights employed on the
L. of C. will be placed on a permanent or semi-permanent basis as
soon as possible by L. of C. Signals.
Miscellaneous
Signal Sections
Signal Sec. for Despatch riders, 1 mounted For communication with
telephone
detachment
a non - divi batteries and to provide
with 7 miles of line.
sional Field
Bde. Signal Office.
Visual operators
Bde.
Sig. Sec. for a Despatch riders, 1 imounted For communication with
telephone
detachment
Medium Bde.
batteries and t o provide
with 7 miles of cable.
Bde. Signal Office.
Visual operators
5 Badio Telephone Tanks . . For communication between
Sig. Sec. for
Tanks or between Tanks
Tank Bn.
and close reconnaissance
aircraft.
For communication with
Sig. Sec. for a Despatch riders
Wings, E.A.F.
"H.Q., E.A.F.
Linemen, line operators and To provide H.Q. E.A.F.,
switchboard operators
Signal Office.
H.Q.
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
Normal duties.
Unit.
Sig. Sec.
tan
Wing H.Q.,
B.A.F.
gig. Sec. for
„ Squadron,
R.A.F.
Despatch riders
Linemen, line operators and
switchboard operators
Despatch riders
For communication with
Squadrons, B.A.F.
To provide Wing H.Q.,
Signal Office.
For Squadron communications.
For Squadron Signal Office.
Linemen, line operators and
switchboard operators
A Sig. Sec. for Despatch riders, linemen, For Aircraft Park Signal
line
operators and switchOffice and general coman Aircraft
board operators
munications.
Park, B.A.F.
Despatch
riders,
linemen,
For
Port Depot Signal
A Sig. Sec. for a
line operators and switchOffice and general comPort Depot,
board
operators.
munications.
B.A.F.
For
Advanced
Aircraft
A Sig. Sec. for Ditto
depot, B.A.F.
an Advanced
Aircraft depot,
B.A.F.
The line communications for B.A.F. formations and units are provided
by the Army formations to which they are attached. The ground
wireless stations for B.A.F. communications are provided by the
B.A.F.
4 . T H E ESTABLISHMENTS OP SIGNALLERS AND MATERIEL IN UNITS (OTHER
THAN B O T A L CORPS OE SIGNALS) ARE GIVES BELOW.
Personnel,
Unit.
Cavalry Begiment—
H.Q Wing Signallers
M.G. Troop
Squadron . .
'
i
Battery B.H.A.—
H.Q
Section
. . 1 officer,
18 O.B.
7 O.B.
3 O.B.
SInteriel,
1 motor cycle, 16 telephones, 6
fullerphones, 10 miles cable,
flags, shutters, 6 helios, 8 lamps,
6 torches, 1 aerial signalling
pane], ground strips.
9 O.B. . . 12 telephones, 2 fullerphones, 6
miles cable, flags, shutters,
4 O.B.
2 lielios, 2 lamps, 16 torches,
2 aerial signalling panels, ground
strips.
Field Battery B.A.—
H.Q
Section
..
..
9 O.B. . .
4 O.B,
Ditto.
Pack Battery
H.Q
Section
4 O.B. . .
7 O.B.
Ditto.
R.A.—|
Medium Battery
H.Q
Section
B.A.—
9 O.B. . . 12 telephones, 2 fullerphones, 9
4 O.B.
miles cable, flags, shutters, 2
helios, 2 lamps, 16 torches, 2
aerial signalling panels, ground
strips.
46
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
Unit.
Div. Ammunition
H.Q.
" A " Echclon
Materiel.
Colinnn3 O.K.. .
12 O.K.
Field Amn. Column R.A." A " Echelon
A.A. Battery
H.Q
Section
Flags, lamps.
Flags, lamps.
B.A.—
Infantry
BattalionH.Q. Wing
Tank Battalion—
H.Q
Coy
Armoured Car Coy...
9 O.U. .. 14 telephones, 24 miles cable, flags,
shutters, 2 lielios, 2 lamps, 24
3 O.U.
torches.
1 officer,
32 O.K.
8 bicycles, 6 telephones, 6 fullerphones, 6 miles cable, flags,
shutters, 8 helios, 12 lamps, 24
torches, 1 aerial signalling panel,
1 ground indicator, ground strips.
2 O.U.
These men are motor
despatch riders.
Ditto.
2 O.U.
5 O.U.
cyclist
Ditto.
5. ADMINISTRATION OF THE ROYAL CORPS OF SIGNALS I N THE F I E L D .
The Signal units belonging to or attached to any formation are under the
Commander of t h a t formation. At G.H.Q. an officer designated the Chief
Signal Officer or Signal Officer-in-Chief, according to the size of the force
which he accompanies, advises the C.-in-C. on general signal policy. "The
Signal Officer-in-Chief is represented at H.Q. of subordinate formation as as
below:—
O.C. Signals.
L. of C. area
Chief Signal Officer.
Corps (or Army)
O.C. Divisional Signals.
Division
O.C. Cavalry Div. Signals.
Cavalry Division
0. METHODS OF INTERCOMMUNICATION U S E D I N THE F I E L D ,
i. Permanent line,—Permanent Post Office routes found in the country
can be used, and routes carrying up to 16 wires can be put up by
the Construction Sections. One section can put up about a mile
a day.
ii. Semi-Permanent Line.—This may be built on light poles cut or found
locally. A semi-permanent route will not, as a rule, carry more
than 12 wires, and a construction section can provide two detachments, each capable of erecting about a mile a day.
ill. Field Air Line.—Special service stores ore used for this, designed for
lightness and rapid erection. The route carries from 2 to 8 wires,
and a construction section provides two detachments, each
capable of putting up about 5 miles a day.
iv. Fifibl Cable.—This is insulated wire laid on the ground. A cable
section provides two detachments, each capable of laying cable
at an average rate of about 3 miles an hour.
All the rates of work shown in i, ii, iii and iv above depend on
the country to be crossed, or on the congestion of the roads if the
lines do not go across country.
47
Chap. 3 . S e e , 14.
v. Wireless.—The following table shows the capabilities of field wireless
sets under normal conditions :—
Normal range
to similar
set.
Type.
" A " Set..
Method of Transport.
Wagon transport, manpack for short distances,
mule pack.
Wagon or pack t r a n s p o r t ;
12-25 miles
can
be
mau-carried
short distances.
100-200 mile3 . . Wagon or motor van.
4 miles
" C " Set . .
120-Watt set (to
placed by " D "
500-Watt Set (to
placed by " E "
Tank R / T Set
be reSet)
be reSet)
400 miles
lorry.
2-5 miles
Tank.
vl. Visual Telegraphy.—The range depends on t h e country and t h e
weather. A rough guide under fair weather conditions is :—
Flag
3 to 7 miles.
Heliograph
..
. . N o limit in clear weather, provided t h e stations can see one
another.
Shutter
J- mile.
Signalling lamp
..
. . Day, 2, Night, 8 miles.
Signalling torch . .
..
—
,,
J-mile.
SIGNAL TRAEEIO IN THE F I E L D .
7. No message should be handed to Signals for transmission when it would
serve the purpose if it were sent b y post, and no message should be handed t o
Signals t o go as a telegram when it would serve t h e purpose if it were sent by
despatch rider letter service.
8. Telegrams are sent in the order in which they are handed in, unless a
special degree of priority is indicated by the writer. The different priorities
for telegrams are shown below, and a space is provided in the form for t h e
writer to fill in t h e priority of any except ordinary telegrams :—
1. Urgent service messages affecting t h e working of the signal communications,
ii. " Emergency " messages,
iii . " P r i o r i t y " messages.
i * Service messages connected with the working of the signal communications,
v. Official messages not marked " priority."
NOTE.—The Royal Navy and R.A.E. recognize an additional category
known as " Urgent." If any such messages are transmitted by Army Signals
they will be given precedence after " Priority " messages.
9. Messages t o go by the Despatch Rider Letter Service are marked
" D.R.L.S." by t h e sender, and are sent off by Signals in batches a t suitable
times. Very urgent messages may be marked " Special D . R . " by certain
officers entitled t o do so, and are sent a t once by a special despatch rider.
10. Certain senior officers are entitled to ask for " clear t h e line " telephone
connections, which take precedence of any calls which are waiting for connection. This privilege should be sparingly used.
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) Q
B-
48
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
11. The senior Signal Officer on t h e s p o t is alone entitled t o send " Signal
Service Messages requiring immediate a t t e n t i o n . "
12. The appointments of other officers entitled t o f r a n k telegrams with the
various degrees of priority, t o send messages by special despatch Tideis, or t o
ask for " clear t h e line " telephone calls, will be published in Standing Orders,
a n d Signal Office personnel m u s t be kept informed of these appointments.
I n urgent circumstances any officer may maTk a telegram for priority or &
message for special despatch rider, b u t he will be responsible t h a t his action
is justified b y t h e urgency of t h e message.
13. Any officer m a y originate a message for transmission by signals, and
t h e message will be accepted a t a Signal Office, provided t h a t it is clearly
written, and signed with the name and appointment of t h e originator. The
officer is responsible t h a t t h e message is urgent enough to justify its being sent
b y Signals and n o t b y post.
14. Officers or W.C.Os. in charge of Signal Offices will use their
discretion in stopping work on a message to deal with one of higher priority,
taking into consideration t h e lengths of t h e messages, their Importance, and
how near t h e y are t o t h e end.
16. The decision as t o whether a message may be sent by wireless or not,
and, if i t may go by wireless, whether it is t o be sent in cleaT or cipher, rest®
with t h e originator. (See Sec. 97, 6 and 7, F.S.R., Vol. 1,1923.) The foot of
the message f o r m m u s t be completed t o show his intentions ; if this is n o t done
the message m a y be returned t o him by the Signal Office t o be completed.
16. Special arrangements will be made b y t h e General Staff a t G.H.Q.
regulating t h e censorship and despatch of private or press messages. They
will n o t be accepted unless it has been officially notified t h a t t h e Signal Office
is open for such messages, a n d will n o t be allowed t o delay official messages.
17. i. I n messages addressed to or from t h e headquarters of a formation,
or unit, t h e formation or u n i t will be specified b y its abbreviated title in
accordance with the list given below. These abbreviations will also be used
in t h e space From of t h e message form to indicate the originator.
Full title.
General Headquarters . .
_
Headquarters—
First (second, &c.) Army
_
1st (2nd, &c.) Corps
1st (2nd, &c.) Cavalry Division
1st (2nd, Ac.) Division
1st (2nd, &c.) Cavalry Brigade
1st (2nd, &c.) Field Brigade R.A.
1st (2nd, &c.) B r i g a d e . .
Unit
Authorised abbreviations in addresses To
and From.
G.H.Q.
"First (Second, &c.) Army.
1 (2, <fec.) Corps.
1 (2, &c.) Cav. Div.
1 (2, &c.) Div.
1 (2, Ac.) Cav. Bde.
1(2, <fec.) F d . B d e . R . A .
1 (2, &c.) Bde.
F o r abbreviation of unit, see Sec.
14,18.
li. If t h e message is to or from a branch of t h e staff, t h a t branch will n o t
be specified and nothing will be added t o the abbreviated title of the formation
or unit.
If t h e message is t o or from t h e Senior R.A., R.E., II. Signals or R.A.F.
officer, or the Senior Officer of an administrative service a t a headquarters, the
following abbreviations will be used t o designate the officer concerned :—
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
Officer at a H.Q.
Senior Artillery officer
Engineer officer
Signal officer
Tank officer
Royal Air Force officer
Air Defence officer
Intelligence officer
Supply officer
Ordnance officer
Survey officer
Transport officer
Transportation officer..
Railways officer
l i g h t Railways officer
Docks officer
Inland Water Transport offic
Works officer
Remounts officer
Medical officer
Veterinary officer
Postal officer
Pay officer
Printing and Stationery office
„ Chaplain
..
Deputy Judge-Advocate-General
Provost Marshal and Asst. P.M.
Oamp Commandant —
Lands
Graves
Labour
Designation in address.
R.A.
R.E.
Sigs.
Tanks.
R.A.F.
Air Def.
Int.
Supplies.
Ordnance.
Survey.
Transport.
Transit.
Hail.
Light rail.
Docks.
I.W.T.
Works.
Remounts.
Medical.
Vet.
Postal.
Pay
Print.
Chaplain,
Advocate.
Provost.
Camp.
Lands.
Graves.
Labour.
Example:—
A message to D.A.D.O.S. 1st Division from A.D.O.S. 1st Corps should be
addressed
To Ordnance, 1 Div.
From Ordnance, 1 Corps,
ill. The officer will not be designated by his name or appointment In the
address to or from unless it is absolutely essential.
The originator of a message to a unit may, if he considers i t essentialin order
to ensure correct delivery, add the letters c/o, followed by the name of the
formation to which the unit is attached, for example :—" R. S, c/o 1 Div."
The name of the place to which the message is to be sent or from which It
originates will only be inserted by the originator when he considers i t necessary
in order to ensure correct transmission.
iv. In filling in originator's numbers, the following initial letters will be
used to designate the branch of the stall from which the message originates :—
Branch of Originator.
General Staff Branch—
Operations Section
Intelligence Section
A.G.'s Branch . .
Q.M.G.'s B r a n c h Maintenance Section
Movement Section
(B 28/332)Q
Distinguishing letter
to be used in
originator's number.
0
I
A
Q
Q (M)
F
2
Chap. 3, Sac. 14.
50
18. The address of a message to a unit should consist of the abbreviated
title of the unit as given below.
When a " danger area " is specified by the general staff within which
the enemy may be assumed to overhear any telegraph or telephone messages
transmitted, names of units or formations will not be transmitted in clear
in t h a t area.
The abbreviated title will be used by the originator in the addresses of the
message. Intercommunication personnel wiil substitute cipher calls for the
addresses in transmission, and will write the address in clear again befofe
delivering the message to the addressee. In the text of the message, however,
the originator when referring to a unit or formation will use its cipher name.
I n all telephone conversations, units or formations will be referred to by
their cipher names only.
Cipher calls and cipher names are secret and will be communicated as
required by the general staff.
Unit—Full title.
Abbreviated
title for use
in tlie field,*
Column 1.
Column 2.
The Life Guards (1st and 2nd)
Royal Horse Guards (The Blues)
E Battery, Royal Horse Artillery
..
1st King's Dragoon Guards
The Queen's Bays (2nd Dragoon Guards)
3rd/?ih Dragoon Guards
1st Tlie Royal Dragoons
The Royal Scots Greys (2nd Dragoons)
3rd The King's Own Hussars
5th/6th Dragoons
9th Queen's Royal Lancera . .
13th/18th Hussars
16th/5th Lancers
69th Field Battery, R.A.
..
2nd Pack Battery, R.A
17th Medium Battery, R.A
3rd Anti-Aircraft Battery, R.A.
Survev Company, R.A.
12th Field Company, R.E
4th Field Park Company, R.E.
3rd Fortress Company, R.E.
13th Survey Company, R.E
Anti-Aircraft Searchlight Battalion, R.E
4th Divisional Signals
No. 1 Anti-Aircraft Signal Company
3rd Battalion Royal Tank Corps
1st Armoured Car Company
Tank Salvoge Company
Grenadier Guards
Coldstream Guards
Scots Guards
Irish Guards
Welsh Guards
The Royal Scots (The Royal Regiment)
The Queer's Royal Regiment (West Surrey)
The Buffs (East Kent Regiment)
LG.
RUG
E Bty., RHA.
KDG.
Bays.
3/6 DG.
Royals.
Greys.
3 H.
5/6 D.
9 L.
13/18 H .
16/5 L.
69 Fd Bty.
2 Pack Bty.
17 Med Bty.
3 AA Bty.
Svy. Coy., RA.
12 F d Coy.
4 Fd Park Coy.
3 Frt. Coy.
13 Svy.Coy., R E .
AA SL Bn.
4 Div Sigs.
1 AA Sig. Coy.
3 R Tanks.
1 AC Coy.
Tank Sal. Coy.
Gren Gds.
Coldm Gds.
SG.
IG.
WG.
RS.
Queens.
Buffs.
* The abbreviated title of a unit not specifically mentioned in this table
will be the same as t h a t given above for a corresponding unit of the same
arm or branch, with the unit number, letter, etc., adapted.
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
Unit—Pull title.
Abbreviated
title for use
in the field.
Column 1.
Column 2.
The King's Own Royal Begiment (Lancaster)
The Northumberland Fusiliers
The Boyal Warwickshire Begiment
The Boyal Fusiliers (City of London Begiment)
The ICing's Begiment (Liverpool)
The Norfolk Begiment
The Lincolnshire Begiment
The Devonshire Begiment
The Suffolk Begiment
The Somerset Light Infantry (Prince Albert's)
The West Yorkshire Begiment (The Prince of Wales
Own)
The East Yorkshire Begiment
The Bedfordshire and Hertfordshire Begiment
The Leicestershire Begiment
The Green Howards (Alexandra, Princess of Wales's Own
Yorkshire Begiment)
The Lancashire Fusiliers
The Boyal Scots Fusiliers
The Cheshire Begiment
The Boyal Welch Fusiliers
The South Wales Borderers
The King's Own Scottish Borderers
The Cameronians (Scottish Bides)
The Royal Inniskilling Fusiliers
' The Gloucestershire Begiment
The Worcestershire Begiment
The East Lancashire Begiment
The East Surrey Begiment
The Duke of Cornwall's Light Infantry
The Duke of Wellington's Begiment (West Biding)
. The Border Begiment
The Boyal Sussex Begiment
The Hampshire Begiment
The South Staffordshire. Begiment
The Dorsetshire Begiment
The Prince of Wales's Volunteers (South Lancashire)
The Welch Begiment
The Black Watch (Boyal Highlanders)
The Oxfordshire and Buckinghamshire Light Infantry
The Essex Begiment
The Sherwood Foresters (Nottinghamshire and Derbyshl
Begiment)
The Loyal Begiment (North Lancashire) . .
The Northamptonshire Begiment
The Boyal Berkshire Begiment (Princess Charlotte of
Wales's)
The Queen's Own Boyal West Kent Begiment
The King's Own Yorkshire Light Infantry
The King's Shropshire Light Infantry
The Middlesex Begiment (Duke of Cambridge's Own)
The King's Boyal Bifle Corps
The Wiltshire Begiment (Duke of Edinburgh's) . .
The Manchester Begiment
The North Staffordshire Begiment (The Prince of Wales's)
King's Own.
NF.
Warwick.
BF.
Kings.
Norfolk.
Lincollls.
Devon.
Suffolk.
Som LI.
W Yorks.
E York.
Bedfs Herts.
Leicesters.
Green Howards.
LF.
BSF.
Cheshire.
BWF.
SWB.
KOSB.
Cameronians
Inniskg,
Glosters.
Wore B.
E Lan B.
Surreys.
DCLI.
DWB.
Border.
B Sussex.
Hamps.
S Staffords.
Dorset.
PWV.
Welch,
Black Watch.
Oxf Bucks.
Essex.
Foresters.
Loyals.
Northamptons.
B Berks.
BWK.
KOYLI.
KSLI.
Mx.
KBBC.
Wilts.
Manch.
N Staffs.
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
52
Unit—Full title.
Abbreviated
title for use
in the field.
Column 1.
Column 2.
The York and Lancaster Regiment
The Durham Light Infantry
The Highland l i g h t Infantry (City of Glasgow Regiment)
The Seaforth Highlanders (Ross-shire Buffs, The Duke of
Albany's)
The Gordon Highlanders
The Queen's Own Cameron Highlanders
The Royal Ulster Rifles
The Royal Irish Fusiliers (Princess Victoria's)
The Argyll and Sutherland Highlanders (Princess Louise's)
The Rifle Brigade (Prince Consort's Own)
West India Regiment
West African Regiment
..
Y &L
DLI.
HLI.
Seaforth.
Gordons.
Camerons.
RUE,
RlrF.
A & SH.
RB.
WIR.
WAR.
19. The name of a place or the formation to which the unit is attached
should only he included in the address of a message when, in the opinion* of
the originator, this is essential t o avoid mistakes.
20. Messages should be written when possible on A.E. C 2128. The first
group of the text will be the originator's reference n u m b e r ; if the originator
refers to a message for the addressee, the number of t h a t message will be
written in the appropriate space.
The message will then follow ; the originator will fill in the time of origin
and will complete the foot of the message ; the foot will not be transmitted.
The text of messages should be as short as possible consistent with clearness.
Only one word should be written in each space on the message form.
Important numbers in messages should be written in words. The use of
roman numerals and the signs for yards, feet and inches, is forbidden. The
letters AAA should be used for a full stop, but should not be written at the
end of the t e x t ; the word " stop " will not be used to indicate punctuation,
as it may affect the sense of the message. When letter ciphers or important
words such as " not " are used, they should be written in block letters.
I n the case of dates in the text of a message, the month should be written
in words, thus :—5 Deo. j 19 ; not 5/12/19.
21. I n the caso of messages for more than one destination, a separate copy
for each destination will be handed in to the Signal Office to avoid serious '
delay in transmission.
22. "When the sender desires to inform different addressees t h a t a message
has been circulated, he will add this information at the end of the text, thus :—
Addressed 1 and 2 DIVS, 4 CAV. BDE. or addressed List A ; or if the message
requires action from the 1st Division and is only sent to the other addressees
for information, it will be ended thus:—Addsd. 1 DIV. rptd. 2 DIV.
4 CAV. BDE.
W I R E L E S S TELEGRAMS.
23. The originator of a message may not always know by what means it
may be transmitted, and the following regulations are intended to guard
against the results of wireless messages being intercepted by the enemy.
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
The instructions at the bottom of the message forin, namely:—
i. If sent by wireless, this message must be sent—
As written,
I n cipher.
ii. This message must not be sent by wireless,
will be completed by the originator as follows :—
to) If the message may not go b y wireless over any part of Its route, h©
will delete " As written " and " I n cipher."
(b) If the message may go by wireless, he will delete either " As written "
or " I n cipher," as the case may be, and will delete " This message
must not be sent by wireless."
24. Messages giving warning of an enemy attack or calling for support
mav always be sent in clear without an officer's endorsement.
The senior officer on the spot may authorise urgent tactical messages to be
sent by wireless in clear if he considers t h a t the necessity for speed outweighs
the importance of security.
ORDERLIES AND MESSENGERS.
25.—i. The bearer of a verbal order or message should repeat it t o the
issuer and understand its p u r p o r t ; whilst the person to whom the
order or inessage is delivered should commit it to writing, and
request the bearer t o sign it, if it is of any importance.
ii. The bearer of a written order or message should know its purport,
in case he loses the despatch or has to destroy it. I t is sometimes
advisable to give a messenger two messages—one real, the other
false, the real one being concealed on his person.
iii. The bearer of a message, on approaching the addressee, will call
out " message for " and the name of the addressee in a loud tone,
he will then deliver his message, and will obtain a receipt. I t is
the duty of all to assist him in finding the addressee.
iv. A messenger will always be given a receipt for his message. The
envelope, if there is one, will serve as such. The recipient must
note the hour and date of receipt on it, sign it, and return it to the
bearer. The messenger is not to be detained longer t h a n is
necessary.
v. Orderlies bringing messages from advanced bodies of troops should
carry them open. Commanders of troops, whom such orderlies
may pass on their way t o the addressee are authorised t o read the
message, which they should initial. I n carrying this out, it is
highly important t h a t such orderlies are not detained a moment
longer than can be avoided.
vi. The sender will instruct- the messenger as to his rate of speed, the
route he is to take, and where he is to report himself on his return.
vii. Commanders will assist in forwarding messages by all means in their
power, supplying a new messenger, if necessary, or replacing
tired horses by fresh ones.
COMMUNICATION WITH AIRCRAFT.
26. This communication can be classified under the following headings :—
i. Artillery Observation.—Aircraft employed on this duty communicate
normally by Wireless Telegraphy (W/T) with receiving stations
provided and manned by the R.A.F. These are supplied on a
scale of two for each brigade of field or medium artillery and one
for each medium battery.
ii. Communication between close reconnaissance aircraft and H.Q. of Corps,
Divisions and Cavalry Divisions.—For this purpose the R.A.F.
provide and man one radio telephone (R/T)* set, mounted in a
* Information regarding the position of our own troops will only be
transmitted by radio-telephony when the protractor reference method is
employed.
54
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
motor vail at the H.Q. of Corps, Divisions, and Cavalry Divisions.
This set can both send to and receive from the close reconnaissance
aircraft.
In addition to this R.A.F. set, one army R / T set in a division
(which may be available if a Tank Battalion with its five R / T
tanks is operating with the division) may be used to communicate
with close reconnaissance aircraft.
These aircraft can also drop messages at the H.Q. of Corps,
Divisions, and Cavalry Divisions. The message dropping stations
are marked by ground indicators as shown below, the identity
of the H.Q. being shown by letters known as ground calls, placed
on the left of the indicators, except in the case of Regimental or
Battalion H.Q., when they will be placed to the left, top, right
or bottom of the indicator, to denote 1st, 2nd, 3rd, &c., Regiment or Battalion in the Brigade. They should be arranged so
as to be read from the direction of the enemy:—
COUPS N . Q .
(No call letters
necessary.)
STRL
"DIV, H.Q.
(With Div. call
letters.)
CIRCLE
e'inDiam.
OAV. DIV. H.Q.
(With Cav. Div.
call letters.)
TRIANGLE
6
Side
The indicators and call letters will be displayed only when ordered or called
for by an aeroplane, and not as a routine measure.
iii. Communication between close Reconnaissance Aircraft, and Infantry,
Artillery and Cavalry Brigades and units.—The following ' are
provided with signalling panels with which messages can be sent
to close reconnaissance aircraft:—
Cavalry regiments.
H.Q. Section Div. Signals.
Batteries R.H.A.
Infantry Brigade Signal Sections.
Field Batteries R.A.
Medium Brigade R.A. Signal
Medium Batteries R.A.
Section.
H.Q. Troop, Cavalry Div. Field Brigade R.A. Sign
Sections.
Cavalry Brigade Signal Infantry Battalions.
Troops
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
These messages are acknowledged by Klaxon Horn or lamp
from the aircraft, and are transmitted to their destination by
being dropped at dropping stations.
Forward infantry can show their position to aircraft by displaying flares or discs, and the information so obtained
conveyed to the H.Q. concerned by messago dropping.
Messages from the rear for infantry and cavalry brigades and
for battalions and regiments may also be conveyed by aircraft and
dropped at the marked H.Q.
H.Q. of brigades and units are marked a3 below:—
CAV. BDE. H.Q
(with Cav. Bde.
call letters.)
External side = < 8 ' 6
i 1' 4,
Width of a
INF. BTVE. n q.
(with Inf. Bde.
call letters.)
OAV. RAAT. H.Q.
(with Cav. Begt.
call letters.)
External side = 8' 6*
Width of a
= 1 ' i'
I S * . BTF. H.Q.
(with Inf. Bn.
call letters.)
The indicators and call letters will be displayed only when ordered, or
called for by an aeroplane and not as a routine measure.
COMMUNICATION WITH H I S MAJESTY'S SHIPS IN COMBINED OPERATIONS.
27. The principle of this communication is that both ends of a connection
between ship and shore should, whenever possible, be manned by the same
service. For this purpose, it will be usual for the Navy t o provide visual or
wireless stations* ashore to communicate with ships, and for tho Army to
provide line operators on board when line telegraphic communication is
established between an Army Signal Office ashore and a ship.
* I n the event of light portable W/T sets being required, the Army will
provide the set, but the Navy will provide the personnel to work it.
66
C h a p . 2, S e e s , 10 a n d 11. 109
CONVENTIONAL SIGN3 TO BE USED IN ROUTE PLANS OR CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS.
28. Route between wireless stations
Route between visual stations
Runner or D / R route
Route of cable on the ground
or in trenches, hedges, &c. . .
Route of buried cable . .
...
Route of poled cable
..
..
Route of field airline
..
f*0
—©—
—©—
.
Route of permanent or semipermanent line
..
..
/Q
e
o
• q
NOTE.—The figure over t h e route shows t h e number of wires in it.
Signal Office
O
Test point or linemen's post
Wireless Station
..
..
..
^
(The type of station is shown against it, such
as " A , " " C," " 120 W a t t . " )
X
Visual Station
PHONETIC ALPHABET.
29. When it is necessary to spell out words in telephoning a message, the
following phonetic alphabet will be used. This alphabet is common to the.
Royal Navy, Army, and R.A.F.
A.—Ac.
J.—Johnnie.
S.—Sugar.
B.—Beer.
K.—King.
T.—Too.
C.—Charlie.
L.—London.
U.—Uncle.
D.—Don.
M.—Monkey.
V.—Vic.
E.—Edward.
N.—Nuts.
W.—William.
F.—Freddie.
O.—Orange.
X.—X-ray.
G.—George.
P.—Pip.
Y.—Yorker.
H.—Harry.
Q.—Queen.
Z.—Zebra.
I.—Ink.
R.—Robert.
15.
INFORMATION
(See Chap. VI., F.S.R., Vol. I I , 1924.)
1. Detailed and timely information about the enemy and the theatre of
operations is a necessary factor of success in war.
Information is acquired principally by :—
i. Air and land Reconnaissances.
ii. Study of air photographs.
iii. Examination of inhabitants, prisoners, deserters, or papers.
iv. Intercepting messages.
v. The intelligent observation of all ranks.
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
The value of information depends on whether it can reach the authorities
concerned in time to be of use.
2. The time and place of the receipt of information should always be
noted, as well as the persons to whom it has been communicated, and the
exact time when this was done. An officer bringing or sending information
to a headquarters must state to whom else he has communicated, or is about
to communicate it, the time of communication and the means employed. A
subordinate commander to whom information is given should be informed
as to the other commanders to whom similar intelligence has been given.
3. Information whether positive or negative acquired by direct contact
with the enemy, is t h a t on which every commander mainly relics in making
his tactical plans. Hence it is of supreme importance not only to establish
contact from the earliest possible moment, but also to maintain it at all costs
throughout operations. Once discovered the enemy must be kept under such
close and continuous observation t h a t he can make no movement without
being detected. The achievement of this purpose is the primary object of
all reconnaissance whether on the ground or from the air.
4. The maintenance of contact aims not only at the acquisition of information about the enemy, but also at the interchange of information regarding
the situation as a whole, including the progress of our own troops. The
latter must not, therefore, merely keep touch with and report on the hostile
forces, they must similarly keep touch with and report on their own
neighbouring forces.
RECONNAISSANCE.
5. Reconnaissance is the service of obtaining information with regard
to:—
i. The topographical features and resources of a country.
ii. The movements and dispositions of an enemy.
In the latter case it may be strategical or tactical.
Strategical reconnaissance is required before the opposing armies are within
striking distance, to locate the hostile columns, and to ascertain their strength
and direction of march. Information of a strategical nature is constantly
required during the course of a campaign, and will be chiefly obtained by air
reconnaissance.
Tactical reconnaissance is required when two forces are within striking
distance, to discover the tactical dispositions of the opposing force.
6. The principal means at the disposal of a commander for obtaining
information about the enemy will be air and land reconnaissance. The
information obtained from the air must be confirmed and supplemented by
land reconnaissance; for this purpose, cavalry or dismounted troops pushed
forward in motor vehicles will be used so long as the enemy is at a distance.
When opposing forces are closely engaged, dismounted troops will generally
be employed for frontal reconnaissance, but mobile troops will still be of
value on the flanks.
7. While the, advanced troops are engaged with the enemy, information
may also be obtained :—
i. By personal observation on the part of a commander and his staff.
ii. By officers' patrols or scouts.
iii. By the R.A.F.
8. In modern warfare, the quest for information is not the exclusive
privilege of any particular arm or body of specialists ; individuals and units
of all arms and services are equally responsible. Their opportunities for
acquiring information will naturally vary, but powers of observation should
be developed in all officers and men, who must be systematically taught
how to look, what to look for, and how to report in unmistakable language
on whatever they may have seen.
9. Information may be gained by personal observation of the enemy;
by questioning the inhabitants, prisoners and others; by reading signs,
such as tracks, dust, fires, deserted camping-grounds, uniforms ; or b y tapping
telegraph wires, listening in and intercepting wireless messages, taking letters
and newspapers from post offices, telegrams and telegraph registers from
telegraph offices, registers of despatches from railway stations, <£c.
58
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
A scout should receive special instruction in—
i. Ability to find the way by day or night.
ii. Use of eye, ear and ground.
iii. Concealment.
iv. Travelling across country.
v. Reporting and judging distance.
vi. Map reading and sketching.
vii. Tracking.
10. In questioning prisoners, or hostile inhabitants, it is well to take them
separately out of hearing of others, to let them suppose t h a t a great deal more
is known by the questioner about the enemy than possibly is the case, and
t h a t questions are being put merely with a view to seeing whether they are
speaking the t r u t h or not, the answers being known.
As a rule detailed examination will be carried out only by interrogators
selected by the General Staff for this duty ; careful arrangements being made
for these examinations to take place as soon as possible after the individual's
capture. Preliminary examination by subordinate commanders on the spot
will be limited to information of immediate Importance to the unit.
11. People not accustomed to seeing large numbers of troops are very apt
to exaggerate their strength, a point which a soout should be careful to
avoid. Information as to the uniforms of the enemy, number of regiment on
the buttons or badges, &c., may be of great use.
A scout should know what are the usual formations of the enemy, and
what are the usual strengths of his different organizations of troops.
12. If troops are moving along a road or defile, they may be timed while
passing a certain point. For each minute the following numbers would
approximately go p a s t : —
Cavalry, in sections, at a walk
..
..
..
..
120
„
at a trot
240
Artillery guns or wagons, at a walk
..
..
..
6
,,
,,
at a t r o t
..
..
..
10
Infantry in fours
..
..
..
..
..
..
200
13. The following signs should be noticed as affording information:—
i. Clouds of dust show movements of troops, baggage, or cattle &c.
Cavalry raise a high light cloud. Infantry and vehicles a lower
denser cloud. Motors, moving rapidly, a thick, high and continuous cloud. I n some countries, it is customary to set fire to
grass or bush so t h a t the smoke may hide the dust of a movement.
ii. Fires.—In many countries it is customary to light signal fires, to
send up a flare by night, or puffs of smoke by day. This latter
is done by lighting a damp fire, and alternately covering it with a
blanket and uncovering it.
iii. Tracks.—Much information can be gained by a good tracker from
observing tracks on the ground.
Tracks may give warning of enemy's patrols; show the
formation, direction and speed of his force, and almost the hour
when the force passed by, by the marks of the feet, hoofs, wheels,
&c.
Iv. Sounds.—Since much of a scout's work has to be done at night, it
is necessary t h a t he should not fail to make every use of his senses
of hearing and of smell, as well as of sight. Sound travels at the
rate of about 380 yards a second. Roughly, four beats of the
pulse to 1,000 yards is a fair calculation.
The sound of the explosion overtakes the modern pointed bullet
at about 2,000 yards. A double report is heard when the bullet is
fired by some one exactly facing the hearer.
14. In Egypt, Africa, India, &c., heat vapour often causes curious effects
on the appearance of open country, lakes appear where there Is no water,
trees look like mountains, cattle like cavalry, and so on. These are very
liable to deceive a scout who is not accustomed to them.
16. Motor cycles and cyclists will often be useful additions to reconnoitring
detachments for the transmission of intelligence, but they should seldom be
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
employed for obtaining information because, being tied to roads, they are
particularly liable to capture.
Armoured cars and light motor patrols will also be found useful, but except
where distances to be traversed are beyond the capacities of cavalry or when
operating with a M.T. column, they should not be employed for reconnaissance
purposes.
16. Co-operation with aircraft should be arranged both for the interchange
and the transmission of intelligence.
17. I t must always be borne in mind that the primary duty of reconnoitring
parties is to gain information and not to fight. At the same time, the
importance of gaining " identifications " of hostile units cannot be oversetlmated ; the most economical method of obtaining these identifications is
to employ vigorous offensive action against small isolated detachments.
18. I n event of capture by the enemy, scouts must refuse to give any
information except their rank and name. I t should be explained to them
that, by international custom, they cannot be punished for this refusal.
They should also be warned t h a t the enemy will probably have made special
arrangements for listening to the conversation of prisoners when they think
that they cannot be overheard.
RECONNAISSANCE REPORTS.
19. To obtain satisfactory results it is essential t h a t the reconnoitring
officer should be given a cleurly defined task, which should be within his
powers to perform.
20. In drawing up his report the reconnoitring officer should be as concise
as possible and should be careful to confine his information to what is relevant.
The most satisfactory method is to divide the report into two parts.
Part I should be written primarily for the use of the commander, and
should contain a general description of the outstanding features of the reconnaissance to enable him to obtain a comprehensive view of the situation;
it should present clearly and unencumbered with minor detail those points
of which he will have to take account in arriving at his decision.
Part I I should contain detailed information collected under headings,
and, where possible, arranged in tabular form.
For P a r t I set headings are to. be avoided, though it is possible t o indicate
for each class of reconnaissance certain points which should invariably receive
attention. For P a r t I I headings, usually the same for the same nature of
reconnaissance, can be justified. The disadvantages in the case of a regular
form are counterbalanced by the greater ease with which the report can be
analysed and diverse reports collated. Care should be taken to distinguish
between what are impressions or hearsay only and what are facts. I t is
important to know the time of day and year when a reconnaissance is made.
The time will be described on the system of the 24-hour clock (see Sec. 13,1,
iii.)
21. "Where the names of foreign places or towns are spelt in various ways,
the anglicised form should be used, followed by the local form in brackets.
(See Sec. 13, 1 to 6, for the general rules for t h e preparation and
despatch of reports and messages.)
22. A map or sketch is an invaluable adjunct to a reconnaissance report.
A map or sketch is a graphical presentation, by the use of conventional signs,
of certain information regarding the area represented. In it can be recorded:
(a) The existence of certain features, natural or artificial; (b) their positions
relative to one another; (c) certain facts regarding them, e.g., the forms of hill
features, the extent and outline of woods, the shape of buildings, the course
of streams, &c.
A report without a map or sketch for reference is of little value ; whereas
by supplementing the information which can be conveyed through conventional signs, by the addition of a few written notes on the face of the map,
it may often be possible to dispense with the separate report.
AIR RECONNAISSANCE.
23. The broad principle upon which reconnaissance duties are subdivided
among R.A.F, units in the field, is that each military commander with R.A.F.
units a t his disposal, is responsible for watching the hostile forces on his
60
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
immediate front, and obtaining all information which chiefly affects hia own
immediate plans.
At the beginning of a campaign it will be the task of aircraft attached to
G-.H.Q. assisted by such aircraft as may be attached to lower formations, to
locate the direction of the enemy's main concentrations so that the C.-in-C.
may receive early information of any movement likely to affect the plan of *
campaign. The aircraft attached to the headquarters of armies will report
on the enemy's movements and activities in rear of his leading troops. Subser
quently it will be the task of aircraft attached to the leading corps or lesser
formations to report on the tactical dispositions of the enemy's leading
divisions and corps, the construction or destruction of bridges, the construction
of new defences, <fcc. I t follows, therefore, that, as a general rule, the larger
the formation to which an airforce unit is attached the longer will be the reconnaissance flights which it will bo required to undertake.
24. The information required from R.A.F. units attached to corps or lesser
formations is principally tactical in character, and can only be obtained in
sufficient detail by aircraft flying low.
Aircraft carrying out a close reconnaissance can be expected to distinguish '
troops in the open and artillery in action, and can dive near enough to the
ground to clear up a definite point, such as the existence of a machine-gun
emplacement or whether a trench system is occupied or not. I t will as a
rule, however, be difficult even for low-flying aircraft to discover small parties
of the enemy, such as a carefully-concealed outpost position, unless the hostile
troops reveal their positions by opening fire on the aircraft. For such duties,
therefore, aircraft cannot replace land troops.
25. Photography forms an essential part of all air reconnaissances. Even
in the case of reconnaissances at high altitudes photographs may be expected
to show road movements, tracks, camps, new works, battery positions, dumps,
hospitals, light railways, telegraph lines, and otheT signs of military activity,
while in the case of corps reconnaissances carried out at lesser altitudes,
photographs taken in favourable weather enable experts to discover the
smallest details of the enemy's defences.
RECONNAISSANCE OF ROADS.
26. Outside Hostile Zones.—Reconnaissance of roads may be ordered for
a variety of purposes ; the relative importance of the different considerations
will vary according to the object of the reconnaissance. Thus, if it is made
with a view to a march remote from the enemy, the comfort of the troops,
and, therefore, the characteristics of the road as a channel of communication,
demand first consideration.
Such points as the following must be reported • —
i. Surface condition.
ii. Width, particularly of metalled portion.
iii. Gradients. (Mention such only as are steep enough to affect rate
of marching or to present a difficulty to transport.)
iv. Bridges, with a view to the loads they will carry.
v. Points where special measures for control of traffic may be required,
particularly very narrow or winding ways through a town or
village.
vi. Watering places, with a statement of the facilities and number of
horses t h a t can be watered at a time.
vii. Towns or villages on or near the route, from the point of view of
billeting.
viii. Local administration, names and addresses of mayors and chicf civil
functionaries.
ix. Telegraph and telephone lines and offices.
27. In the presence of the enemy.—Where the road has to be reconnoitred
with a view to a march in the presence of the enemy, or when the possibility
of encountering him is not precluded, first importance has to be siven t o
tactical considerations. The character of the country through which the road
passes becomes then of more importance than the actual details of the road
itself. The point of view from which the country has to be regarded will
vary t o a certain extent according to whether the march contemplated is an
advance or a retreat.
Chap. 3, Sec. 15.
61
p a r t I of the report should deal in general terms with such subjects as :—
i. The general nature of the country—whether open or enclosed, and
the extent to which it favours delaying action by a small mobile
force.
ii. The extent to which the road is under observation either from the
ground or air and commanded by surrounding features.
Ui. Defiles.
iv. Tactical points which must be secured, in the case of an advance,
before the main body can pass any particular p o i n t ; or which, in
' the case of a retreat, must be held until it is past a certain point.
v. I n the case of an advance, any positions particularly favourable to
the enemy for opposing the advance, with a brief statement of
the considerations that constitute the strength of such positions
and affect the decision as to the best mode of attack on them.
In P a r t II, information may usefully be given in addition on the following:—
vi. Particulars of the roads as for a march under peace conditions,
More especially in the case of an advance, greater detail should be
§iven regarding bridges ; for example, the possibility of executing
temporary repairs and of constructing alternate crossings should
receive ample treatment.
vii. Obstacles to deployment from the road.
viii. Obstacles to movement across country, such as woods, swamps,
rivers and streams, railway cuttings and embankments, &c.
ix. More detail regarding positions favourable for delaying action by
the enemy or opposition by him to an advance.
x. I n the case of a reconnaissance for a retreat, a more detailed report on
positions favourable for rearguard action.
xi. I n the case of a retreat, points where delay could be caused with little
labour but with considerable inconvenience to the enemy, either
by demolitions or by blocking the road where movement off it is
restricted.
R I V E R RECONNAISSANCE.
28. Headings used in Part I will vary according to the tactical object;
those in Part I I , which normally contain nothing but facts about the river,
need not vary. In reporting on a river, the most material considerations
are:—
i. Average width and depth in different stretches.
31. Nature of bottom,
ill. Approximate strength of current.
iv. Character of banks.
v. Existing crossings, nature and dimensions of bridges, loads they will
carry, and particularly their practicability for motor transport,
heavy guns or tanks. In the case of fords, state depth, nature of
approaches, bottom, and strength of current. The nature of the
ferries should be described and the load which the vessel will
take.
vi. If some time may elapse before the report is utilized, ascertain by
enquiry or observation the effect of a heavy rain or a thaw, and the
liability to flood.
29. The velocity of a river can be found by throwing a piece of woou well
out and timing it over a measured number of feet. Mean velocity = f surface velocity; £ mean velocity in feet per second = number of miles an
hour.
30. Ice 3 inches thick will bear men in small detachments ; 6 inches thick,
horses and carts; 9 to 12 inches thick, wagons and guns.
31. When the object of the reconnaissance is to report on the river from the
point of view of the defence, the following points should be considered :—
i. Tactical considerations
affecting the enemy's probable choice of a
point of attack,1*e.g.t cover on his side facilitating surprise, sections
in which the course of the river or the configuration of the ground
on his side favour concentration of fire in support of an attack,
any stretches in which the river cannot easily be covered by the
fire of the defence.
62
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
ii. Locks, dams and weirs, and other artificial means of controlling the
waters of the river, their influence on the water level, and the
possibility of utilizing them to form inundations.
iii. Existing crossings. These should be reported on from the point of
view of possible destruction, and the extent to which their destruction would impede the enemy. Details required are, the nature
of the bridge, number and width of spans, nature and dimensions
of piers, nature and height of abutments, thickness of arch in ,a
masonry bridge and number and detailed dimensions of girders in
a steel bridge.
In attach, the points on which information is required are similar to those
above, with the difference t h a t facilities for attack should be reported instead
of those for defence, stretches of the river favourable to the construction of
improvised crossings should be reconnoitred and reported in greater detail,
and the existence of material on the spot, suitable for the construction of these
crossings, should be noted and particulars given.
RAILWAY RECONNAISSANCE.
32. I t should be borne in mind t h a t an expert would be required to write
an adequate report on which to work a railway.
33. Stations.—In ordinary circumstances a rough sketch of the stations
showing the following information would suffice :—The approaches ; number
of lines ; cross-overs; number, length, breadth and height of platforms;
number and length of sidings; w a t e r ; turn-tables; end-loading and other
ramps ; goods sheds ; lighting.
34. Forming-up places.—Places suitable for forming up troops before
entraining or after detraining, with their area, approaches, water supply,
latrine and urinal accommodation, <fcc., should be reported.
35. Track.—As regards the line itself, the gauge, any unusual gradients,
stocks and type of fuel, any triangles, and. details of any bridges of importance.
Height of embankments and depth of cuttings should be noted. In case of
a single line the distance between passing places.
BILLETING RECONNAISSANCE.
30. A billeting reconnaissance may he made with a view to a record of the
capacity of an area, or to the definite allotment of billets to a specific force
within a specified area. I n reconnoitring areas for billeting purposes the
population of the town, village or parish, whichever is available, must be
taken as the basis of calculation. In addition to estimating the number of men to every inhabitant t h a t can be accommodated, the number of vehicles
should also be given.
37. Billets without subsistence can be provided at varying rates.
The best class of village in a rich agricultural district will take up to 10 men
to every inhabitant; a residential town or village with good houses and wide
streets about 5 men t o every inhabitant; while industrial towns with a dense
population and a poor type of house will take still fewer. As regards horses
a good agricultural village in Europe will provide accommodation for 3 horses
to every 4 inhabitants ; this will entail using all barns, sheds and outhouses.
38. P a r t I of the report should include a general description of the character
of the area from a billeting point of view, whether agricultural, residential, or
industrial, and the predominant type of house. The area may be divided
if necessary into sub-areas of different characters. A rough statement should .
be made out in terms of units, of the capacity of towns, villages, hamlets, and,,
any particularly large isolated farms or country houses. The source, quality,
abundance, or scarcity of the water supply should be noted ; where facilities
for watering animals are good, and where they are deficient, and the health
of the civilian population. Suitable positions for Headquarters, and the
best means for parking vehicles concealed from* observation from the air
should be recorded.
39. I n many civilized countries chief officials of localities keep detailed
lists showing billeting accommodation. Efforts should be made to obtain
these lists.
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
25
40. I n a billeting report baaed on the population of each pariah, t h e amall
hamlets in each parish should be mentioned by name, as well as the parochial
headquarters.
Billets.
P.O.
ui
M
U
1
j
Watersupply.
Telegraph.
a
a
Horses
under
cover.
Horses
in open.
Name of
Pariah, Town,
or Village, or
reference No.
of area.
Telephone.
Large public or 1
other buildings, j
Parks and open!
spaces.
1
Buildings suit1 able for H.Q.
41. Headings for Part II
H I N T S FOU COMMANDERS OF PATROLS.
42. Stake sure t h a t what has to be done is understood, i.e., how f a r to go,
and what to look for. A patrol commander should, as far as possible, make
up his mind beforehand what he will do in various circumstances.
43. Patrols are not sent cut with the primary object of fighting. Therefore do not fight if the object can be gained without doing so, b u t remember
that if small parties of the enemy are suddenly met, the assumption of a
resolute offensive may be the best course of action.
44. Take precautions against surprise ; do not move or enter a village,
copse, &c., in one compact body.
The formation of the patrol must be such that if it is cut off, at least one
man can get back with the information already gained. For this reason,
every member of a patrol, while advancing in an enemy's country, must
take notice of landmarks and distances as he goes along, so as to be'able to
lind his way back. When advancing look behind from time to time, so
that the appearance of the country may be familiar.
45. When touch with the enemy is gained, do not be in too great a hurry
to send back a man to report, ltemember the number of messengers available is small and t h a t as much information as possible must be conveyed
by each man sent.
'if the enemy is not found where he was expected, information to this effect
should be sent back.
46. Avoid drawing attention to the movements of the patrol, e.g., keep
off the roads and in shadow as much as possible, cover up anything that will
reflect the sun, avoid crest lines, <fcc.
ltemember that to go and return by the same road m a y lead to being
ambushed.
47. Do not halt all in one spot. Have men out watching the approaches.
In the case of a mounted patrol the horses must not all be off-saddled a t t h e
same time.
48. I n sending a written report think over what has t o be sent before
commencing t o write. Be accurate as regards statements concerning places,
hours, numbers. Do not waste time in writing a long story,
A verbal report should bo as far as possible in the same form as a written
report. Make t h e messenger repeat the message before lie leaves.
RECONNAISSANCE OP A POSITION,
In Attack.
49. In reconnoitring a position on which an attack is'contemplated,
definite information will rarely be obtained without fighting, since it will be
necessary to drive in the enemy's covering troops. The troops engaged in
this task will often have opportunities for acquiring information of value t o
(B 28/332)Q
q
64
Qhap. 3 , S e o . 15.
the commander of the force, and special reconnoitring parties may be attached
to them for this purpose. I t will rarely be possible for one party to obtain
all the information about a position which is wanted. Definite instructions
should be issued by the commandcr of the force to each party employed on
reconnaissance work.
50. The closest co-operation between reconnoitring detachments and the
ft.A.F. is necessary if the best- result', are to to obtained.
51. The following are the principal points on which information will be
required:—
i. The extent of the position.
ii. The enemy's defensive dispositions.
iii. The weak parts of the position.
iv. Machine gun emplacements, defended localities, command posts and
signal communication centres.
v. Gun positions, mortar emplacements and observation posts.
vi. Wire and other obstacles.
vii. Probable lines of approach of the enemy, including 'bus and lorry
routes and assembly positions for the enemy's reserves.
viii. The best forming-up positions for the attacking troops.
ix. The best line of attack.
x. Positions for our own artillery.
xi. Forming-up positions for tanks.
xii. Best line of attack for tanks.
xiii. Probable line or lines of enemy counter-attacks and suspected cover
for enemy tanks.
xiv. Successive positions for the various headquarters.
xv. The best line for signal communications in the attack.
xvi. The best positions for the reserves.
In Bcjcncc.
52. The object of the reconnaissance may be either to estimate the capabilities of a position for defence and the force t h a t would be required to
occupy it, or may have in view its occupation by a specified forcc. In the
latter case, definite proposals as t o the location of defences, preparations
required and distribution of troops may be called for.
Part I of the report should deal with :—
i. The extent of the position.
ii. The defensive capabilities of the flanks.
iii. The extent to which the country over which the attacking troops
must advance can be observed.
iv. Possibility of concealment for the defence and facilities for observation on the side of the attack.
v. Tactical points, the loss of which would weaken the general hold o|
the defence.
vi. Weak points of the position, i.e., deficient field of fire, difficulty of
observation and of mutual support, &c.
vii. Considerations affecting the question of a general counter-attack and
its most favourable direction.
viii. The possibility of employment of tanks on either side.
ix. Any special features affecting the defensibility of the position, not
previously mentioned.
If definite proposals for the distribution of a force are called for, Part 1
sjould contain, in addition :—
(а) An estimate of the force required.
(б) Proposals for sub-division into sectors.
(f) General recommendations as to artillery positions.
(d) The general line proposed for the infantry defence.
(e) Suggested position for the reserve.
53. Part I l f h o u l d deal with:—
i. Observation posts.
ii. Positions suitable for the different types of artillery and the capacity
of each area in Batteries or Brigades.
65
Chap. 3, S s c s . 15 a n d 16.
iii The defence of flanks, tactical points and the weak portions of-the
position, in detail; the question of /oca] counter-attack to r e
establish the line in such spots.
Iv The field of fire, concealment, and the possibility of mutual support
between neighbouring Sections,
v. Natural obstacles and the extent to which they influence the defence,
v i The nature of the soil.
vii. Communications.
viii. Drinking water.
18. P R O T E C T I O N
(See Cliap. VII. F.S.B., Vol. I I , 1924.)
1 Every commander is responsible for the protection of his command
nftalnst surprise. A force can only be regarded as secure when protection
U* furnished in every direction from which attack is possible (both by land
a
" 2 'l , he commander of each protecting detachment, wherever situated,
must keep hi3 command in such readiness for action as the circumstancca
require^ a j 3 3 e n c e 0 f special orders protective troops are responsible that
connection with the force protected is maintained. In the event of attack
they must at any sacrifice gain time for the body which they protect to prepare
to meet the attack.
3. Mounted troops and armoureu cars are especially fitted for the service
of 'prutection on account of their mobility. They may bo employed as
follows:—
i. Local protection of a body of troops on the march or at rest, by day.
ii. Protective screen duties,
iii. Dctaclied missions.
4. Local protection on the march is afforded by Advanced, Bear and Flank
Guards, and when at rest by Outposts.
As a general guide, the strength of nn advanced guard can be taken to be
from a third to an eighth of the whole force. It should, whenever possible,
be composed of a complete unit or formation under its own commander.
When this is impossible, arrangements must be made to provide an adequate
staff and communications for the advanced guard. It is divided into advanced
guard mounted troops, van guard, main guard. As it has to reconnoitre ancl
fight, it will usually be composed of all arms, the proportion of each depending
chiefly on the character of the country. In an open country, the proportion
of mounted troops and guns may be much greater than in a close or
mountainous country.
The advanced guard must protect its main body from the moment the
march of the latter begins. It is the duty of the advanced guard commander
to decide the, hour at which the advanced guard will clear the starting point
and the distance it will precede the main body.
Armoured cars should be allotted to the advanced guard when available.
Their action should be controlled by the officer commanding mounted troops.
OUTPOSTS.
6. Every body of troops when baited wili be protected by outposts.
6. The duties of the outposts are :—
_ (. To provide protection against surprise and ensure rest for the remainder
of the force.
it. To prevent the enemy irom obtaining information.
Iii. In case of attack, to gain time for the commander of the force to put
• his plan of action into execution.
7. If an enemy Is so continuously watched that he can make no movement
without being observed, surprise will be impossible. The first duty, therefore, of the outposts is OBSERVATION OP THB ENEMY.
(b 23/332) Q
q
2
66
Chap. 3 , S e c . 13.
8. Should the enemy attack, he must be delayed and his troops must be
prevented from approaching within effective field artillery range of the
ground on which the main body will deploj\ The second duty of the outposts
therefore, is EESISTANCE.
Outposts protecting a large force are usually composed of all arms. The
task of the mobile troops, when the opposing forces are not in close contact
is to obtain information by means of reconnoitring patrols which can proceed
to some distance. Mobile troops will act in co-operation with units of the
ltoyal Air Force. At night mobile troops will usually be withdrawn to rest.
The infantry are responsible for the occupation of the outpost position at all
times, and for observation by means of sentries and patrols. Outpost artillery
is required to support by fire the infantry detailed for the defence of the
outpost position, and to deal with tanks.
9. Three rules can be laid down as regards strength:—
i. Oulpostduty is most exhausting. Not a man nor horse more than
is absolutely needed should be employed. As a general guide, not
more than one-quarter of the force should be used on outpost duty,
ii. In enclosed country, the movements of troops being generally confined to the roads, it will usually be sufficient to hold the roads
by which the enemy may approach in strength, and to observe
the intervening country.
iii. The power of resistance of the outposts must be sufficient to delay
the enemy's attack until the main body has had time to get ready
to defend itself.
THE OuTrosi COMMANDER.
10. Before the force halts, an outpost commander, who will usually be the
commander of the unit or formation finding the outposts, should be given
information on the following points :—
i. "What is known of the enemy and of other bodies of our own troops.
ii. Intentions of the commander who appoints him, if the enemy attacks,
and in particular the position to be occupied by the main body and
the approximate time its occupation will take.
11. He will then give out sue1! orders as are immediately nccessary for
protection against surprise, and then allot tasks to his mobile troops, decide
on details of the outpost position, co-ordinate his arrangements with those of
his neighbouring outpost commanders, finally issuing orders on the following
point-s:—
i. Information as to the enemy, and our own troops so far as they affect
the outposts.
ii. General description of the outpost position; frontage, or number
of roads, allotted to each subordinate formation; and situation of
the reserve.
iii. Distribution of outposts, mobile troops and artillery and any special
instructions for machine guns.
iv. Dispositions in case of attack.
v. Special arrangements by night.
vi. Smoking, lighting fires, and cooking.
vii. The hour at which the outposts will be relieved.
viii. The place to which reports will be sent.
12. Traffic through the outposts.—No one, other than troops on duty,
prisoners, deserters from the enemy and flags of truce, will bo allowed to pass
through the outposts either from within or without, except with the authority
of the commander who details the outposts. Inhabitants with information
will be blindfolded and detained at the nearest piquet pending instructions,
and their information sent to the outpost commander.
"Where there are large numbers of refugees it will, in practice, be impossible
to prevent them crossing the outpost position. Special arrangements will be
nccessary for their collection as close behind the outpost position as possible.
No one is allowed to enter into conversation with persons presenting them*
selves at the outposts except the commander of the nearest detached post,
piquet or outpost company, who should confine his conversation to what is
essential. Prisoners and deserters will be sent at once, under escort, to the
authority appointed to interrogate them.
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
DUTIES OF A COMMANDER ON OUTPOST D U T Y .
t a k i n g precautions against surprise, move his Command to the area
allotted to it and halt under cover, from .air and ground observation. Send out covering troops.
ii Examine the ground, decide on the distribution and allocation of his
command, disposing it primarily with a view to defence, due
regard, however, being paid to the safe retention of commanding
ground for purposes of observation.
iii Make certain that his dispositions will ensure support to adjoiningiv Explain and issue his orders for the occupation of the area and give
instructions regarding action in case of attack and for strengthening the position.
v. Give the following information to his subordinates :—
(«) The direction of the enemy.
/M position of neighbouring units, supports or reserves and whether
there are any of our own troops in front.
(c) The time at which any mounted troops may be expected to withdraw and their route.
(d) What is to bo done with persons found entering or leaving the
outpost line.
vi. If necessary send out patrols and establish observation posts. Such
troops as are required only for night dispositions should not be
posted till after dark.
vii. Co-ordinate plans and dispositions with flank units, and maintain
communication with his own commander.
14. Cavalry when employed on outpost duty follow the same principles as
laid down for Infantry.
Cossack posts are equivalent to sentry groups (see para. 16), and consist of
3 to 6 men under a N.C.O. or senior soldier. They never off-saddle.
Feeding and watering should be carried out one-third at a time.
UNITS ON PIQUET OR IN SUPPORT, &C.
16. Duties of the commander of a unit on piquet or in support:—
i. Move his command by a covered approach, if possible, to a position in rear
of that portion of the line for which he is responsible.
ii. Examine the ground and decide on the distribution of his troops.
iii. Issue and explain his orders and satisfy himself t h a t each man knows
tho direction of the enemy, position of neighbouring bodies, and action in
case of attack, by day or night.
iv. Inform his command whether there are any of our own troops in front.
v. Satisfy himself t h a t his men know what is to be done with persons found
entering or leaving the outpost line.
vl. Strengthen post as far as possible, make sanitary arrangements.
vii. Take ranges of important objects and lay out lines of lire.
vill. To avoid disturbing the men make arrangements t h a t N.C.Os. and
men of cach relief of the various duties bivouac together.
ix. Not allow men to take off accoutrements by night except in the case of
the supports, when special permission to this effect has been given. To avoid
confusion in case of attack by night arrange that personnel lie head towards
front and rifle at side.
16. Sentry groups should normally consist of 6 men by day and 3 men by
night under a N.C.O. They should be relieved every 8 or 12 hours. One
or more sentries should be posted at cach post to communicate with sentry
groups and warn the post in case of attack.
A sentry must understand clearly :—
1, The direction of the enemy.
Ii. Tho situation of the sentries on his right and left.
Hi. Tho situation of the troops in his neighbourhood,
iv. The extent of ground and any special points he is to watch.
v. How he is to deal with persons approaching his post.
68
Chap. 3 , S e c . 13.
vi. "Whether any friendly patrols or scouts will return through his portion
of the line and the signal by which they may be rccognizcd.
vii. The names of villages, rivers, &c., in view'; and the places to which
roads and railways lead.
17. Detached posts vary in strength from a section to a platoon according
to the duty required of them. They are used to watch the flanks or places
where the enemy might collect, but should be employed only in exceptional
circumstances.
18. Outpost patrols consist of 3 to 8 men under a N.C.O. They are sent
out from the outposts to search the country in front of the outpost position
or to watch the enemy if in clo.se touch. They may consist of mounted men,
or infantry. I n normal circumstances a pair of trained scouts can perform
this duty'more efficiently than a strong patrol of men untrained in scout
duties. By day, when cavalry or other mounted troops are attached to the
outposts it will rarely be necessary to send out infantry patrols, unless the
couutry is very close or the weather misty. By night the mounted troops will
usually bo withdrawn and infantry patrols will then be required. They,
should be sent out at dusk, at intervals during the night and one hour before
it begins to get light.
PROTECTION FROM AIRCRAFT.
19.—i. Lewis gun, or concentrated and carefully controlled rifle fire from
the ground is effective against aircraft up to about 3,000 feet, and antiaircraft gun fire up to 18,000 feet. Indiscriminate rifle fire against aircraft is
forbidden.
ii. Every commander must make arrangements for the protection of his
command from t h e air, and normally controlled fire should always be opened
against low-flying aircraft.
iii. When it is desired to conceal from the enemy t h a t a locality is occupied,
orders prohibiting small-arm fire against aircraft from that locality must be
issued; and conversely.
iv. In fair weather the following detail can be seen from the air :—
At 500 feet troops can be recognized as hostile or friendly.
At 1,000 feet concentrations in trenches can be seen.
At 1,500 feet movements of small parties in the open can be observed.
At 5,000 feet movements of formed bodies on a road are visible.
PROTECTION OP CONVOYS.
(See Sec. 62, E.S.E., Vol. II, 1924.)
20.—i. Commanders of fighting troops are responsible for the protection
of all transport and supply units whose movements they regulate, and will
detail such escorts for them, or make such other arrangements for their security,
as the situation may demand.
ii. A convoy can be protected either by permanent piquets which protect
the route traversed, by piqueting the route with troops who are sent out
daily from posts on the L. of C., or by escorts accompaiiying the convoy.
I t will usually be necessary for escorts accompanying a convoy to seize and
hold tactical points in advance, and to move by bounds.
iii. The senior combatant officer with a convoy will command both the
transport and its escort.
iv. The commander of a convoy will on no account engage the enemy if
his task can be accomplished without fighting. If fighting is inevitable the
enemy should be engaged as far from the convoy as possible. The convoy,
will not be halted and parked, except as a last resort.
v. I n the case of M.T. convoys, the whole of the escort will be carried in
motor vehicles, and except when parallel roads are in existence, little can be
done to secure flank protection while on the move. A portion of the escort
will move with the convoy and a portion will be sent ahead to secure any
bridges or defiles which have to be passed. Armoured cars provide an efficient
and economical form of escort for M.T.
vi. I n the. case of a horsed convoy the escort will usually consist of infantry,
with a proportion of more mobile*troops. Small advanced and rear guards
69
Chap. 2, S e e s , 10 a n d 11.
will be detailed, and sufficient men will be posted along the convoy t o ensure
nrder and easy comiminication.
The remainder of the escort will usually move
ou that flauk of the convoy from which attack is most likely.
17. C O M B I N E D
OPERATIONS
1
C o m b i n e d operations in which the
r e q u i r e d to play their particular p a r t in
navy, a r m y and air forces are each
attaining a common object is one of
the most difficult forms of warfare, requiring the closest and most cordial
co-operation of all ranks of all services,
2 The success of oversea expeditions demands as a first postulate the
c o m m a n d of the sea.
In making use of this term it is n o t considered desir- •
able to lay down any precise definition as to when this condition m a y be
c o n s i d e r e d t o have been obtained.
I t is sufficient to state t h a t the naval
situation will be such that the navy are willing t o rccoimuond the despatch
of an expedition, t v n d t h a t such a decision on their i art docs not necessarily
imply t h a t the maritime communications would be absolutely sccure against
nny interruption whatever.
3. The main types of operations a r e : —
i. Landings—
(<r) Opposed.
(b) Unopposed—in enemy territory.
(c) Unopposed—in friendly or allied territory.
ii. Coastal operations by the navy and R,A.F. in furtherance of a military
plan of campaign.
iii. Operations on inland waters and waterways.
Iv. Occupation, equipment and defence o f ' a d v a n c e d bases by navy,
army and R.A.F.
v. Coast and harbour defence.
vi. Supporting operations of the air force acting independently.
4. The most important function of the navy in connection with a combined operation is the preservation of command of the sea. Whether it
is preferable t h a t the principal naval force shall actually be in company with
the convoy or be disposed elsewhere is a matter for the decision of the navy,
having in view the general strategical situation afloat.
5. The navy is responsible for the safe conduct of all forces and stores
embarked for operations overseas from the moment they leave harbour until
they pass within the local defences of the p o r t nf arrival or are landed at
theit destination (where sucli defences do not exist).
6. In the sphere of operations t h e embarking and landing of all troops,
horses, stores, equipments and guns will be controlled by the navy, until the
area of operations is sufficiently secure from attack t o permit the work to be
carriedout as a matter of routine, when the Board of Trade will assume control,
The moment when the control can be transferred t o the Board of Trade must
be decided by the naval commander.
7. The Mercantile Marine Department of the Board of Trade is responsible
for providing shipping for the sea traiisport of military and air force personnel
and stores, and for arranging with the proper naval, military and air force
authorities, the ports of embarkation, berthing accommodation and stowage
of the vessels.
8. The R.A.F. commander during combined operations :—
i. Commands the It.A.F. units not attached to the i:avy or army,
ii. Js responsible for their technical supply.
iii. Arranges for supply and administrative services.
iv. Advises the R . A . i \ unit commanders of the naval and military
forces if required to do so. The Air Ministry will decide, if
necessary, as to the responsibility in any given case for technical
supply of R.A.F. units attached t o t h e navy or army.
9. The senior R.A.F. officer with each service (army or navy) acts.as air
adviser to the service commander. He gives advice as to the co-ordination
of the air work of the services. He will refer to the Air Ministry on any
70
Chap. 3, S e c . 13.
question as to responsibility for control. H e is responsible for tlie admintitration of all R.A.F. units under his command, the supply (other t h a n technical) being the responsibility of the service with which t h e R.A.F. is working.
10. While t h e foregoing are t h e general rules regarding t h e division of
duties between the Services, i t is neither practicable nor advisable t o lay
down elaborate details which shall govern all situations t h a t may arise in
the course of combined operations, but each service should a t all times have
a just appreciation of t h e tasks of the other services, and be prepared beforeh a n d t o give t h e u t m o s t assistance within its power t o the other services in
all situations. The complicated duties of embarking and landing troops
and stores can only be carried out successfully so long as perfect harmony
and co-operation exist between t h e naval, military and air force authorities,
and the staff duties devolving on these services have been carefully organized
and adjusted.
DEFINITIONS OP TITLES AND TERMS.
11. During combined operations special duties devolve on officers of the •
services. Their titles and other t e i m s used are as follows :—
Sea Transport Officers.—A Board of Trade official, working in closest
co-operation with t h e commanders and staff of t h e fighting services, but
responsible t o t h e Board of T r a d e for all m a t t e r s relating t o t h e handling
of sea t r a n s p o r t which come within the jurisdiction of t h a t department.
Military Transport Officer.—A military officer appointed to co-operate •
with the Sea Transport Officer.
Principal Military Landing Officer.—An officer of t h e Q.M.G's. branch of
t h e Staff t o assist t h e principal beach master in co-ordinating the work of the
Services on the beaches, and to supervise t h e military beach control personnel.
Beach.—The stretch of shore allotted for t h e disembarkation of troops
and material f r o m one or more transports.
Principal Beach Master.—A senior naval officer who supervises and directs
the work of landing on t h e whole of the beaches under his charge.
Beach Master.—A naval officer responsible for t h e rapid and safe clearing
of t h e boats of t h e division of transport to which he is appointed.
Military Landing Officer (M.L.O.).—A military officer appointed t o assist
the Beach Master.
Military Forwarding Organization (M.F.O.).—An
organization working
under t h e Senior Movement Control Officer a t selected ports a t home or
overseas for the conveyance of public and private stores, kitSj <fcc.
Forming-vp Place.—A place of assembly for t h e smaller units, clear of, b u t
close to t h e beach, to which troops proceed directly they land.
llailu-ay Transport Officer (R.T.O.).—Military
officers of t h e movement control .
staff who form t h e channel of communication between the railway service
and t h e troops.
Rendezvous.—A place of assembly for the larger units, t o which t h e smaller
units proceed from t h e " Forming-up Place." (NOTE.—This term must not
be confused with t h e " Rendezvous " used in the chapter dealing with supplies,
which is a place where transport columns from the railhead are m e t by
representatives of t h e headquarters concerned and directed t o refilling points.)
Covering position.—A position to be occupied by an advanced detachment
of troops a t such distance from t h e selected landing t h a t , if possible, neither
anchorage, beach, nor forming-up place are exposed t o shell fire Irom t h e
enemy's land forces.
A tow.—The number of boats, barges, or lighters, secured to one another,
t h a t can be towed by one steamboat.
A trip.—The passage of a tow f r o m a t r a n s p o r t t o t h e landing place.
A round trip.—The time taken t o load, tow ashore, and unload a tow
as well as t o r e t u r n t o the t r a n s p o r t in readiness for t h e n e x t trip.
NAVAI TERMS AND THEIR MEANING.
12. "When naval and military forces are associated in combined operations,
all military ranks should be familiar with t h e meaning of t h e following expressions, naval terms and words of command :—
A ship or a b o a t is divided lengthwise into t h e fore part, or bom ; midships,
or tvaist; after part or
25
Chap. 2, S e c . 10.
The right is t h e starboard, and t h e left the port tide, looking forward.
Forward.—Towards the bows.
Aft or abaft.—Towards the stern.
Fore and aft.—Lengthways
of the vessel
T hwartships.—Across.
Alongside.—3y t h e side.
•
Foe''sic.—In t h e fore p a r t of the ship.
Quarter-deck.—A portion of the deck reserved for officers.
Accommodation ladder.—A ladder-way or staircase for entering a b o a t
lving alongside a ship and vice versa.
Gangway.—A. term indicating passage way.
Gang board or gang plank.—A special form of gangway for embarking or
disembarking on or from a boat on ail open beach.
Sea gangway.—The gangway used when the ship is a t sea.
Qumvale.—A t e r m used in a general way for t h e t o p of the sides of a boat,
Freeboard.—The distance between t h e water and the gunwale.
Lanyard.—A. short piece of cord for tying on a knife, oar, <fco.
Thwarts.—Seats for rowers in a boat.
Stretchers.—Rests for feet of rowers.
Stern sheets.—The space between t h e after t h w a r t and the stern fitted
with scats for passengers and steersman.
Rowlocks.—That p a r t of a boat's gunwale in which the oar rests in rowing.
poppits.—Pieces
of wood which fit into t h e rowlocks when t h e boat is
under sail.
Crutch.—A metal swivel rest for t h e oar to fit into when rowing ; they are
usually removable, b u t secured t o t h e b o a t b y a lanyard.
halliards, stays, guys.—Names for ropes; halliards are used for hoisting
purposes ; stays t o support masts, &c.; guys for working derricks or other
moving spars.
Purchase or tackle.—An arrangement of ropes and pulleys for raising or
lowering weights.
Fall.—The rope of a purchase OT tackle.
Cleats.—Pieces of wood or metal round which halliards, &c., are secured,
Painter.—A rope fastened to t h e bows of a b o a t with which t o tow or
fasten it.
Naval words of
Command.
Ship or unship.—Fix or u n f i x ; p u t into place or t a k e out of place.
Back starboard.—Reverse t h e oars on t h e starboard side and back water.
Back port.—Reverse t h e oars on the port side and back w a t e r .
Lay on your oars, or Oars.—Cease rowing, place t h e oars in a horizontal
position with blades feathered.
Toss your oars.—Lift oars to a perpendicular position and retain t h e m
there.
Boat your oars.—Place all oars inside the boat, blades forward.
Belay.—Make fast.
Base off.—Slacken off.
Handsomely.—Gently,
easily.
Stand by.—Be ready.
Walk back.—After hoisting a weight with a purchase, walk towards t h e
weight with the fall of t h e purchase in hand to keep control over t h e weight
when lowering.
Light to.—Let go t h e tail of t h e purchase.
"When leaving a ship or p i e r : —
Shove off.—Push off f r o m t h e ship's side.
Oars down.—Place oars in the water.
Give way together.—Commence rowing.
When approaching a ship or p i e r : —
Bows.—Bow oar " boats " his oar and prepares to use his boathook.
Way enough.—After t h e bow oars are laid in, this is the order given t o t h e
rowers a t which t h e y stop rowing, taking one stroke after the order, and
toss and boat their oars ; or in a gig or boat fitted with " crutches " (from
which oars cannot conveniently be " t o s s e d "), stop rowing and allow their
oars to swing free, fore and a f t .
72
Chap. 3, S e e s , v f a n d 18,
AERONAUTICAL TERMS AND T H E I R MEANING,
Definitions.
13. Aeroplane.—Any mechanically driven heavier-tlian-air craft with
fixed wings.
Airship.—An aircraft lighter than air, propelled through the air mechanically. An airship is supported by the statical reaction of the air on the
surface of "the gas bag.
Biplane.—An aeroplane with two sets of main planes one above the other.
Cant, to.—To t i l t ; to take any inclined position.
" Ceiling."—The limit of height to which an aeroplane can climb.
Cockpit.—The portion of a fuselage designed to accommodate pilot and
passengers.
Fuselage.—That part of an aeroplauc which usually contains the engine,
crow, tankg,
and to which the wings, undercarriage, and other organs
are attached.
Longerons.—The main longitudinal members of a fuselage.
Monoplane.—-An aeroplane with one set of main planes.
Stagger.—When one main supporting surface of a biplane or multiplane
is in advance of another, these planes are said to be staggered.
Forward stagger.—When the top main plane is forward the stagger is said
to be forward stagger.
Backward stagger.—When the bottom main plane is forward the stagger is
said to be backward stagger.
Tail plane.—A fixed horizontal aerofoil attached to the tail of an aeroplane,
and affecting her longitudinal stability.
Tail skid.—An attachment, to the tail of an aeroplane, which helps to take
the shock of lauding and drags along the ground in doing so, thus slowing the
aeroplane.
Tractor machine.—An aerpolane having its propeller in front.
Triplane.—An aeroplane with three sets of main planes one above the
other.
Undercarriage.—That part of an aeroplane beneath the body, intended to
support it on land or water, and to absorb the shock on alighting.
Common Expressions.
14. Banking.—Describes the angle taken up by the planes when turning.
Gliding.—"When an aeroplane is descending without the engine running.
Diving.—When an aeroplane is descending steeply.
Nose Dive.—A steep descent, nose foremost.
Pancake.—To lose height by sinking, due to loss of flying speed.
Spiral.—A steeply banked continuous gliding turn with the engine giving no thrust.
Spinning Divz.—A diving descent combined with a continued rotation about,
the centre of gravity, the angle of incidence of the supporting surfaces being
above the stalling incidence.
Stalling.—An aeroplane is said to bo " stalled " when the speed is so reduced
that it ceases to bo under control.
" Taxy," to.—To run on wheels over the ground, or to move on floats over
the surface of the water, with the engine running at insufficient revolutions to
produce flying speed.
Balloon Terms.
15. Dirigible.—Capable of being guided.
Rigid.—A term applied to a dirigible balloon whose envelope is provided
with a stiff framework to keep it in shape.
Semi-rigid.—A term applied to a dirigible halloon which maintains its shape
partly by the as3i3tance of a suitable framework.
18. M A P R E A D I N G A N D F I E L D
SKETCHING
1. Scales.—i. Scales on maps of the United Kingdom, India and Canada
are usually expressed in words, showing the relation between inches on the
map and miles on the ground.
XV.--SCALES AND CONVENTIONAL SIGNS.
PLATE
To face page 72.
FIG.
S c a l e
T(a1
1
Y a r d s
S-oo mo
300
W - — I
Y a r d s loo
o
i
•
<t>)
200
1
2
too
1
3
1 :>S
4
s
7
<B)
,
5
Minutes
1
M
'
- 3 2
4
' •'
'
'
I
0
10
s
0
2
0
| ' 11 I • . 1 I ' • • I ' .
to
Versts
(bJ
M i l e s
J:
RVLOTTV.
5(a)
fb)
Mile
„
8
.
.
,
8-
=
Irhchjzs
1
77~~T7n
ie
~na
innn
2000
YardS
Ver-sts,TFncJu=6-63
M i l e s
00
-w
1
>
'
20
/•' 62,500,
1 Cm,.
= • 625
<!z
I—I
I
0
I
fa
I • T•
1
C
i
'/z
&
1
' — —
Metres
Miles
So
Versts
30
Miles
Mlanv.
sWlxrm,.
00
3000
Scale
1:100,000
-A
t
M i l e
Yards
4000
3000
I
"T"
10
hour
an
%
1°
Mile,
z 000
1Inctv=10
1
1
1
'
A
'
Z
1
1
1
•/*•
1
— 1
1 f. 1 i 1 1 1
1000
000
1
Vz
'/4
S
O
7000
, 1 Inch/—1-56
4
at
3
/• 40,000
m'/ies
an
, 11nch,
Sours
hour
= • 631
MiXes
—
woo
to
20
.
zooo
1 : 6 3 , 3 6 0 ,
1
o
3
z
I
o
1
'
1 : 1 , 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 ,
00
U n c i v i l
l
— 1 —
3000
u
—
4000
a
1 1 n c h =15-78
M i l e s
Metres
I f i l e
2
to
Metres
9 Miles
6
1
o
i
liioo
eooo
Miles
5
o
S c a l e
JO
4J0
3
-L-
S c a l e ,
7
fe Is
20
Scale,
6
2
miles
Marching
Mil&
~!3
(3
iz
2000 Yards
,500
5
1
Hour
. it/V
10
1000
f b ) dfetre,s
at
4-20,000,
Scale
4 ( a i
jg
io
i : 3 1 , 6 8 0 ,
1000
1
Trotting
S c a l e
o ( a )
= 1 Mile, \
taoo
^$
e
S c a l e ,
Yards 1000
1
2 (3-)
!
4-Inc7i£s
soo
o
L
1.—SCALES.
8 4 0 ,
s i d e s
M i l e s
so
eo
70
no
Miles
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) Q
CONVENTIONAL SIGNS «, L E T T E R I N G USED IN
FIELD
SKETCHING
N o t e : W o r d s w h i c h s h o u l d a p p e a r o n t h e S k e t c h a r e shewn in b l a c k
Road e n c l o s e d by hedge.fence,ditch,
o r o b s t a c l e o f any k i n d
A
ZMiU,-
-aM,.
fSSBtP**
Embankment.
..
jV
R o a d w i t h o u t fence.&c.
P/ JfiZe^
Brown tint denotes mots Iled
•uitabJo for traffic at all times. Metal led
naff^T
likely to be cut up in bad weather doited brown. 4
If brown colour is not available the word "Metalled*
orUnmetaHed* should be inserted and any other
necessary remarks added.
Hillside
Footpath
—
HAW LEY,
4-MiUs
—-
Fields with walls,hedges/fences, ditches o r ar\y obstacle
Hops
10" high
ours,
quarry,or
prec/p/tous .
ground Jt
ft is unnecessary to ttate the nature.
I of the cuftivation unless such information
j is required by the object ofthe sketch
7
Wheat L
1
1JIJ
4'
••'"F®
—-
*
a
Orchard
a.
Stone
Bridge
with piers
Heath
~-
Irorv
S&ite nature of
foreshore<# at what
state of the tide it is
practicable for landing
Wire fence
Hough pasture
Marsh
rouse
Wood
Nature of wood to be given
in writing thus'Oak'*Pine~
and whether passable
,
impassable wd by what
arm; also the value of the wood
as cover
with Tower
Rocks covered
at high water
if colour available
C h u r c h or Chapel
without Tower
with Spire
or Spire
Telegraph, or
Telephone
BRITISH
/n Line
Obstacles
Windmill
!
Entrenchments
Artillery
ABBREVIATIONS
Post Office
. Telegraph H
,
•
under 4- to /Mile
E.YNSFORD
Sign Post
. . Well
HAW L E Y
i
-
Column of route .... mmm
Other formation.. _
G
-* \
I1 Vedette
^ns m acton
Guns on march. — - - -»
In Line
. mm*
Column of route — . mam
Other formations
•
Sentry —
>
i On mareh ...
MB
T
Transport > _
| Parked
«
Opposing forces coloured blue
Infantry
Clearance
or
Demolitions
TROOPS
P l a t e XST
F i g . 3 . THE
PRINCIPAL
CONVENTIONAL
The
Signs
SIGNS
are
TO
drawn
ENEMY
Batteries
and Gun
Emplacements:
or
communication
Trench
—» or n*"""*^
(alternative)
/
X
Isolated
Mortar
Anti - Aircraft
BE
suit
USED
ON
1:20,000
TRENCH
scale
ARTILLERY
MAPS.
maps.
WORKS
Balloon
Signs to represent position of emplacement fixed
by photography and clcjrly visible or the ground
On larger scales show actual shape if possible.
Machine
Guns:
In trench
to
b
Telephone
or Telegraph
Exchange:
Main
i
Sub
i
Telephone
or
Telegraph.
Air/jne
Buried
Gun.
Track
Dumps.
Obstacles:
Supply
R. E. or
Abatis
Pioneer
Ammunition
r On posts
-j
Coiled
Wire Entanglement
Zone of Activity
(hatched)
Chevaux
de
Frise
Huts
System
Dugout
do.
Trenches
Concrete
Trenches
Searchlight
Tank
of
Trap
Anti-Tank
O
Gun
Lamp Signalling
Observation
Command
(details)-
Main line,
<
Post
Post
A
&
Post
Aerodrome
character
, ^
Organised for
unknown
(
fire
-j
i
Main
Communication
Other
Communication
Old, abandoned,
From
information
is shown on Artillery
~rr"T"F'i\ iiMirTf" 1
fkc.
other
T
* An occupied emplacement
Traversed
Recessed
maps by sign m (IGun), unoccupied
than
photo
BRITISH
Same Signs
WORKS
in RED.
O, overprinted
in another
colour
Malby & Snos.lilh.
Chap. 4, S e c . 20.
73
ii. Foreign maps and maps of British African Colonics and possessions
are constructed on scales which bear the proportion of 1 to some multiple
of 10.
The following examples explain the two methods :—
(a) Scale -oinrco~, o r 1 ^ h to 1 mile.
(b) 1 :100,000 (or TWti'inOj o r o n a foreign map 1 centimetre to 1 kilometre.
The fraction in each case is called the Representative Fraction or R.F.,
and means t h a t 1 unit on the map (numerator) represents a certain number
of the same units on the ground (denominator), thus from («) above—
1 inch on the map represents 63,360 inches on the ground ( = 1 mile)
f r o m (6) 1 inch on the map represents 100,000 inches on the ground;
or 1 centimetre on the map represents 100,000 centimetres ( = 1 kilometre) on the ground.
To find the number of English miles to the inch for any map t h a t has a
R.F., divide the denominator of the R.F. by 03,360;
this gives the number
of miles to t h e inch ; thus, if R.F. is ^-fonT* t l i e n
1-263 miles to
the inch.
To find the number of inches to the mile divide 63,360 by t h e denominator
of the B/F.; thus, if R.F. is t o w o , then I M w = '792 inch to the mile.
A scale should usually be about 6 inches long (see Plate XT, Fig. 1). The size
of the scale depends on the object with which the sketch is made. Reconnaissance sketches of an area to explain a plan of attack, or t o show lines of
advance, of a road or river, or of a defensive or outpost position, are usually
made on a scale of from 1 to 4 inches to 1 mile. Sketches for the defence of
a village or town, or for the selection of a camp or billeting area, are generally
on a scale of 4 inches to 1 mile.
2.' Conventional signs enable information to be given on a sketch or map
which could not otherwise be conveniently shown.
Plate XV, Figs. 2 an I 3, show the approved conventional signs. I n
outpost sketches the letters P, S, R, may be written instead of piquet,
support and reserve. The direction of a patrol is shown by an arrow. Whatever lettering appears on a sketch must be easily legible and should not
interfere with the detail.
3. Map enlarging,—When it is required to enlarge a map, squares of any
convenient size should be drawn on the original, and the paper on which the
new map is to be made ruled with squares, whose sides bear the required
ratio to the sides of the squares on the original.
4. Measurement of slopes.—Slopes may be uniform, convex or concave,
and may be expressed in degrees or as a gradient. Slopes are usually
expressed in military reports, etc., as a gradient shown by a fraction. Thus
represents a rise or fall of the unit in 50. An approximate rule for expressing as a fraction a slope given in degrees is to divide the number of degrees
by 60. Thus a slope of 3° is equivalent to
This rule does not hold for
steep slopes. Generally, if the slope between two points is convex they are
not visible f r o m the other, if the slope is concave they arc visible. Slopes are
indicated on a sketch by means of " form lines." These are approximate
contours sketched in by eye without accurate instruments. The level of a
certain number of points is fixed and the shape and slope of the ground is
shown by form lines arranged in accordance with these points.
GRIDDED MAPS AND VARIATIONS.
5. Gridded maps.—Military gridded maps arc covered with a continuous
network of fines called " grid " lines.
" Grid North " and " Grid E a s t " are drawn through the origin* of the
* The Meridian of the origin is chosen approximately in the centre of the
area mapped. The co-ordinates would naturally be 00-00, but if this were
the case, points would have to be described as east, or west, north or south
of the origin. To avoid this and the consequent liability to error, it is customary to give the origin " f a l s e " co-ordinates so t h a t all points coming
within the grid have East and North co-ordinates from the origin. (The
Meridian of the origin in Great Britain runs through " Dunnose " in the
Isle of.Wight, whereas co-ordinates are given from a false origin near the
Scilly Isles.)
74
Chap. 4, S e c . 19.
grid and tlie other lines of the system are drawn parallel to them at a definite
distance apart and form a number of squares on which the system is based.
On each map will be found large squares defined by letters of the alphabet;
the sides of each square being divided into ten equal parts. The resulting
smaller squares are numbered. The sides of the large and small squares
are 10,000 and 1,000 metres, respectively.
6. jReferences and description of a locality or point.—The position of a locality
or point is described by its co-ordinates in the " large lettered square," and
measured from the S.AV. comer of this square in an easterly and northerly
direction and termed " easting " and " northing."
Example 1.—To find the co-ordinates of the locality " P " (Fig. 4), count
the number of lines the point lies east and north of the S.W. corner of the
square, thus, 3 cast and 7 north. The position is then described as B 37.
Example 2.—To find the co-ordinates of the point " X " (Fig. 5), as when
using the 1/20,000 map, the smaller squares are again sub-divided into tenths
or the " protractor " or " co-ordinate measurer " used (see para. 7 and Fig. C),
the reading then being cast 32 and noTth 74 and written thus, B. 3274, the
prefix " B " being the letter of the "largo lettered square." In all cases,
either 2, 4 or 6 figures, must be used, the number of figures used depending
on the degree of accuracy required (6 figures are only used on survey work).
7. To construct and use the protractor.—Place a sheet of plain paper beneath
the map and prick with a pin through the corners of the " numbered " square.
Cut out this paper square along the lines of the pin pricks, divide the top
and right-hand edges into ten equal parts and number them as in Fig. 0.
To use the protractor, place the arrow head on the point with edges of
scale parallel to sides of square and read scales where cut by square lines.
8. Grid North.—" Grid N o r t h " coincides with true north on the meridian
of the origin only, and the more we move east or west from the origin, the
more does grid north depart from true north, since grid north lies on the
grid line drawn parallel to the north line through the pcint of origin, while
all true north lines would meet at the North Pole.
9. North Points.—The angular relations between true north, magnetic
north and grid north will normally be shown in the margin of all gridded
map3. A table of magnetic variation for 1925 is given in Appendix I I .
10. Conversion of grid to true bearing, or ince versa.
Should it he desired to convert a grid bearing to a true bearing, or vice
versa, it is first necessary to ascertain the convergence of the grid and true
meridians, if this is not already known. (This is also defined as the deviation
of the grid from the true north line at any point.)
The convergence may be calculated from a large scale map, such as the
new 1/20,000 scale m a p of England, on which are shown the points where
the true meridian cuts the top and bottom of the sheet. Measure the distance
at top and bottom from the meridian cutting to the nearest grid line and take
the difference; divide the difference by the depth of the sheet, i.e., divide
the difference easting by the difference northing. The result is the tangent
of the convergence. (See Fig. 7 and note thereto.)
To find the true bearing from the grid bearing, in the Northern Hemisphere,
the convergence must be added if the point is east or subtracted if the point
is west of the meridian of the origin of the grid.
Conversely, to obtain the grid bearing from the true bearing, in the Northern
Hemisphere, the convergence must be subtracted if the point is east or added
if it is west of the central true north line.
11. Conversion of True to Magnetic.—Let the angle between True Nor til
and Magnetic North, i.e., the magnetic variation — Y°. Then—
Deduct V° if magnetic north is to the EAST of True North. If the result
is minus subtract it from 360°.
Add F° if magnetic north is to the west of True North. If the result
is greater than 360°, subtract 300° from it.
Magnetic to True.—Reverse the above.
12. Map reading.—i. Look at once for the scale ; this is the key to distances.
ii. Note the vertical intervals used, and methods of showing form of ground.
iii. Note the position of ridges, hills and watercourses.
iv. Look for the direction of true magnetic or grid north. In quoting a
bearing the nature of the bearing should be given.
- v . Note the character of the country and the effect this might have on
operations carried out in it.
C h a p . 3, S e c . 18.
75
F/G.S.v
F I B , 4 . ,
<#
--
L
I
FIG.
6 . \ -
71
PROTRACTOR
OTT
COORDINATE
MENSUFTER.
fi-B
A-X
B
NOTE
Meridian
' Grid North
- Converqence
through A
of True 8 Grid
lines
-
The tangent of
'OIK
For every 5' increase
or
decrease of this Ancj!e
Add or Deduct \0Q!513. Setting a map.—A m a p is said to be " set " when it is laid out to correspond with t h e ground.
To set the m a p :—
i. With compass.—Lay the compass over the magnetic north line
(produced if necessary) and, without disturbing t h e compass,
t u r n the m a p slowly round until t h e north end of t h e north point
on the m a p is exactly under t h e north end of the needle.
ii. By objects.—A m a p can be set b y objects on t h e ground without
using the n o r t h point or compass.
Chap. 4, S e c . 19. 132
Identify the spot where you stand as some point marked on th«
map. Also identify on the map some distant object you can
see. Join these two on the map by a straight line. Then turn
the map about the point marking your position till this line
points to the distant object.
When you do not know your position, place yourself between or
in prolongation of a line joining any two points which can be
identified. Revolve the map until the line joining the two points
on the map points to the* two places in the country.
A map can be set roughly for reading by identifying on the map several
prominent objects that can be seen. The map is then held so that the directions between these objects as they appear on the ground and on the map
are parallel to one another.
14-. The Service compass.—The dial is graduated with two sets of figures
which read like the hands of a watch. The inner set is for direct readings
without the prism.
The compass gives " bearings" nob " angles." The horizontal angles
between any distant objects are found by taking the difference of their
observed bearings.
To give the direction on night marches the compass is used as follows:
turn the luminous direction mark to the required magnetic bearing as shown
on the external ring ; then, when the arrow head corresponds with the
luminous direction mark, the line between the luminous patches on the lid
indicates the line of advance.
To prolong the liue of advance, a stick painted white or prepared with
luminous paint held at an angle of 45° to 60° with the horizontal in the direction indicated by the luminous patches will assist the operator to pick up
some object to march on.
If no terrestrial objects are visible an assistant should be employed who
notes the alignment of the stick and advances in t h a t direction till halted
by means of a low whistle. The operator then notes whether his assistant
is on the true line of advance, and moves up on to what he judges the correct
alignment, and again sends him forward. After a few advances the assistant
should know how far he can go before being lost to sight and halt without
waiting for the whistle.
15. Approximate methods of finding the true north :—
I. With a compass.—The magnetic variation can be obtained approximately from Appendix II,
II. In the northern hemisphere.—
(a) By the Pole star. I n ordinary latitudes the bearing of the Pole
6tar is always within 2° of North. To find the Pole star look
for the Great Bear (Figs. 8 a u i 9);—
Pole
Star.
#
/
C R E A T
\i/
V-
f
B E A R .
#
-it
#
M'
The two stars on the right in Fig. 8 point to the Pole star.
As, however, the stars revolve round the Polo star, the Great
Bear is sometimes in the position shown In Fig. 9 : —
Chap. 3 , S e c . 18.
77
r i g . 9;
-J/
GREAT
T
*
BEAR,
/
/V.
Pole Star.
#
lb) By a watch. Hold the watch lace upwards, point the hour hand
at the sun, and bisect the angle between tlio hour hand and
12 o'clock. The line so found will point roughly to south,
lii. / « the southern hemisphere :—
(n) By the Southern Cross. Consider the Southern Cross as a k i t e ;
prolong the greater axis
times in the direction of the tail,
and the point reached will be approximately the South Pole.
If a piece of paper marked along its edge with 12 equidist ant
lines and held so that the first and third coincide with the head
and tail stars, respectively, the twelfth line will give the approximate south point.
(6) By a watch. Hold the watch face upwards, point the line from
the centre of its dial to 12 o'clock at the sun and bisect the angle
between this line and the hour hand. Tholine so found will
point approximately to north.
78
CHAPTER IV.
19. F I E L D
ENGINEERING
F I E L D WORKS.
(See also Manual of Field Works (all arms).)
1. Field Works should be regarded as a military duty and executed as
a military operation.
2. They are classified as :—
i. TVork for -which formations and units of infantry or other arms are
responsible.—This will be carried out under the orders of the
infantry (or other arms) commanders, with materials supplied
by the engineers, but without engineer supervision or assistance
other t h a n technical advice, if required, or minor assistance in
technical details, such as fixing of timbers in completed shelters, ifcc.
U. Work for which the engineers are responsible.—This will be carried out
solely by engineer units, or an engineer unit with the assistance
of working parties from infantry or other units, or by civil labour.
3. Orders for work to be executed by any formation, e.g., brigade, division,
corps, will be issued by the staff of the formation. Orders for work to be
executed by the engineers will be issued by the staff to the C.R.E. (or G.E.
as the case may be) who will issue the necessary instructions to hi3 engineer
units. Chief Engineers will not issue orders for work to Engineer Commanders of lower formations, but they should prepare technical specifications to ensure uniformity of method and standardization of materials for the
guidance of aubDrdinate formations.
ORGA.NIZA.TION OP W O R K .
4, In all field engineering work under class ii (of para. 2) which is not being
carried out solely hy engineer units, two principal officers are concerncd :—
A.—The engineer officer in charge of the work.
B.—The officer commanding the working party.
(In minor works one officer may act in both capacities.)
OFFICER I N CHARGE OP THE WORK.
5. The Officer in charge of the work is responsible for >
i.
\\.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Making the preliminary reconnaissance.
Tracing out the work.
Demanding the working party.
Organizing the working party in reliefs t o suit the work.
Supplying materials and extra tools if necessary.
Supplying guides to ensure t h a t the working party actually arrive
on the site of the work.
vii. Seeing t h a t the work is completed as designed.
\ i n . Arranging for covering party, if required, in addition to the working
party.
Chap. 4 , S e c . 20.
79
OFFICER COMMANDING THE WORKING PAKTY.
6. Tho Officer Commanding the tvorJeing party is responsible f o r : —
i. The disposal of the men on the work.
ii. Issuing all orders as regards, smoking, lights, talking, Ac.
iii. The completion of the work to the satisfaction of the officer i/c of the
work as regards both quantity and quality,
jv. I t is also his responsibility to decide whether in the event of suffering
serious casualties the men should bo withdiawn temporarily or
an attempt made to carry out the task at all costs. If heavy
casualties are anticipated, the authority which orders the work
must give definite directions as to its relative urgency.
Task work should be given whenever possible.
PREPARATORY MEASURES,
7. When reconnaissance is possible, before sending in demands, tho officcr
1/c of the work will make a reconnaissance of the work, if possible bv daylight.
He should take with him, whenever conditions permit, a tracing party to
mark out tho work, and the guides who will direct the working party from the
rendezvous to the .work. If possible, the officer who will command the
•working party and some of his N.C.Os. should take part in this reconnaissance.
Before starting, they should all be informed where the work is, what it is,
and its purpose.
8. Hote should be taken of the following points :—
I. The route to the work involving the least fatigue and delay and
the time required to reach the work (plenty of time must be
allowed, remembering that a large party moves very slowly,
especially across country or in the trenches in single file). If t h e
enemy's harassing fire is heavy, it may be necessary to tape out
routes across country; these may involve special measures being
taken to cross trenches.
II. Land marks which assist in locating the site of the work and the
route to be followed; if none exist, artificial marks should be
erected.
iii. The guides should be shown the rendezvous at which their parties
will be ordered to report.
9. The work should next be marked out, and the O.C. the working party
will decide, in consultation with the officer i/c of the work, how best
to distribute his men. This should be done by platoons and companies.
The limits of each platoon and company should be clearly marked ; cach
guide should be shown the points to which he must bring his party, and the
extent of its task. The officer i/o of the work, having reconnoitred andlaid out
the work, will make a rough estimate of the amount of each sort of work,
digging, carrying, Ac., and an estimate of men, time, tools, and material
required.
He will then :—
i. Submit his demand for these, in quadruplicate (as shown on specimen
pro forma, para. 17 below).
H. Fix exact location of the rendezvous. (This, if possible, should be
done on the way up t o lay out the work.)
III. Fix time of arrival at rendezvous.
iv. Arrange for the necessary materials, tools, Ac., and for the transport
of tho same, ensuring delivery of these at the rendezvous before
the arrival of the working party.
v. See that the arrangements are made for the provision of a covering
party if required.
(B 28/332)Q
n
80
Chap. 4 , S e c . 19.
10. On receipt of the working party demand, the H.Q. of the formation
will issue orders to the units supplying the working party, which will ensure
t h a t the party meets the guides and brings the necessary tools, &c» (see
specimen instructions, para. 18 below). Working parties will consist of
complete unit?, i.e., companies or platoons, &c., with their normal proportion
of officers and N.C.Os. If necessary, the minimum working strength will
be specified in the orders, e.g., " 2 platoons, minimum working strength 50."
11. Each relief should arrive complete with all tools required for the work
and return them to the dump f r o m which they were drawn, as it is very
difficult to hand over tools from one relief to the next in the dark without
confusion and loss.
,
There should be no " b u n c h i n g " on t h e march up. The arrival of the
parties shoilld be timed so that one party does not have to wait while another
is being p u t on the work.
The normal rate of arrival should be 50 workers at 15-minute intervals,
or when harassing fire is heavy, 25 workers at 15-minute intervals.
'
With carrying parties, the loads should be so distributed that it is possible
to carry on if a portion of the party fails to arrive.
12. If the time available before commencement of work is less than eight
hours, a working party must be demanded, and the rendezvous and time
fixed, before the reconnaissance is made.
13. When there is not sufficient time for reconnaissance before submitting
demands, the officer i/c of the work will base his demands on previous knowledge of the ground and large scale maps.
He will also
. i. Detail guides (from the rendezvous to the site of the work) to meet
the working party at the rendezvous,
ii. Request that the O.C. the working party, with officers or N.C.Os.
representing companies or platoons, be at the rendezvous,one hour
before the remainder of the working party arrive there.
The officer i/c of the work with a tracing party and guides will show the
latter the rendezvous, and thence proceed to the site of the work, where
a reconnaissance will be made and work marked out if conditions permit.
When the O.C. the working party arrives at the rendezvous with his advance .
party, the guide sent back by the officer i/c of the work leads him to the site
of the work, where the latter officer explains the work to be done, and hands
ovei any templates t h a t may be necessary.
The O.C. the working party then decides how to distribute his companies
and platoons.
The main body of the working party, on arrival at the rendezvous at the
appointed time, are taken by guides to the site of the work where the O.C.
the working party marches tiiem straight to their tasks.
TRACING AND SETTING OUT W O R K .
14. Any work that is to be executed should be marked out beforehand
by tracing tapes (each tape is 50 yards long) or by Hambro' lines, pickets,
spitlocking, &c.
Tracing often has to be done by night, in which case preliminary reconnaissance is important; the direction should be checked at frequent intervals
by compass or by measuring the distances at right angles to a known Jiije,
The steel helmet and box respirator must be taken off before the compasses
used, as both these articles affect it.
F I L I N G ON TO WORK.
15. FMendinq a tvorking party from the left.—Ah officer or N.C.O. will stand
at the left of the line on which the squad is to be extended, prepared to pace
or to measure out each man's task. The squad will be formed into single
rank at a convenient distance from the line and marched up in single file,
tools at the trail and rifles slung, at right angles to the line, until the leading
man is within two paces of the officer (or N.C.O.) charged with pacing out the
task. The officer will then indicate the. left of the task and the leading man
will step forward and drive the point of his pick into the ground at t h a t spot.
81
Chap. 4, S e c . 19.
•me officer will then pace out the tjisk and the man will lay hip shovel to the
rlsht alone the line of liis task, blade to t h e left and face downwards. The
second and remaining men will wheel t o t h e right iintil opposite t h e left of their
tasks when they will wheel to t h e left and carry on as detailed for the leading
' " A f t e r each man's task is paced out he will wait till t h e remainder of t h e
sauad in rear of him is clear and will then unsliiig his rifle, t u r n about, take
six paces, ground arms, r e t u r n t o his former position and lie down until t h e
order to commence work is given.
;
I n extending from the riqkt the proceedure is Similar t o the above, t h e men
wheeling t o the left and right instead of to the right and left.
16. Alternative method.—The leading man goes right t h r o u g h to the f a r end
of'tli'e work and t h e remainder space themselves o u t behind him along t h e line
of 'the work. H i e commander of t h e p a r t y t h e n checks and corrects their
intervals, starting from the leading man and working backwards. By this
method the men are always well extended, and as a result, although it takes
s l i g h t l y longerthan the first method, it is usually necessary to a d o p t it in frontline wor)c. The tendency to close up, when the f r o n t ttian halts, for fear of
l o s i n g touch in the dark must be checked.
;
SIMPLE, I?IELD GBOJIETIIY.
17. To lay out a right angle. Xet X be a point in a given straight line AB
Fig. 10, from which it is required to set off a r i g h t angle.
From X measure off a distance of 4 units XC 'along AB. Take a piece of
line or tape 8 units long, apply ohe end to poiiit X, and the other to point C ;
find a point in the tape 3 units from X, and, seizing it a t this point, draw the
bight out to D, till t h e line is t a u t , then CXD is a right angle. For example,
if 1 foot is the u n i t ^ - X C = 4 feet; X D = 3 feet and CD == 5 feet. The longer
the sides of the triangle, the more accurate will be t h e right angle, and it
wjll be found t h a t when laying out long lines, such as a parade ground, or
football ground, t h e sides of tlie triangle should not be less t h a n 16 feet,
12 feet, and 20 feet.
<
18. To Unci the distance between any two points A aiul B when it cannot
bo measured directly. From B (Fig. 11) lay off the line BD as nearly a t
right, angles to AB as possible, D being a t any convenient distance.
In BD
select a point 0 so t h a t BO is some multiple of CD. From D lay off the
angle 111)1'' equal to tile angle ABD, and on the ; opposite side of the line BD
Maku 1) K of such a length t h a t the point B Is In line with A and C.
Then AB : BO :: DE : CD,
28/332)q
H 2
19.
SPECIMEN o r A WORKING PARTY DEMAND.
G)
m
1
6th
50
2
6th
25
3
6th
50
4
6th
50
"Unit*
providing
party.
o
>5
% Date
Number of
working
men.
WOUKING PAKTY DEMAND, N I G H T 6 / 7 OCTOBER, 1 9 1 7 , " A " F I E L D COMPANY, R . E . , NORTH B E I G A D I .
Rendezvous.
Time.
Guides.
Tools.
Task.t
Officer
in charge of
work.
Remarks.
Hours.
(Map
Ref.)
Bank, R . E .
Dump
Do.
1800
Field Coy.,
Sapper
Shovel
Tools
from
Bank Dump
Deepening Engineer
Avenue:
time work,
4 hours
1830
Brigade
Nil
Carryingtrench
boards
for
Engineer
Avenue, two
journeys.
(Map
Ref.) 1800
junction Railway Avenue
and
main
road
Do.
1815
Field Coy., Every man 1 Digging Plug
Sapper
shovel, every
trench. Task
Wire
second man 1
work
estipick in addimated
tion
hours
Do., Sapper
Pick
•
Do.
Do.
I. Serial Nos. 1,3, 4,
5, 6 : All officers
and N.C.Os. n o t
digging to bring
6-foot
sticks
marked in feet.
II. Instructions for
brigade
guide
Lt. Jones,
(serial
No. 2)
R.E.
attached.
III.
Up
route
Serial Nos. S, 4,
5, 6, Railway
Avenue;
Down
Lt. Smith,
Route, Engineer
R.E.
Avenue.
IV. Serial Nos. 3
and i , pick u p
tools
at
rendezvous.
Lt. Smith,
R.E.
Lt. Jones,
R.E.
•OB = « 01.
6 P S ."2 e
§ * S
Rendezvous.
Time.
Guides.
Tools.
Task.-f
Officer
in charge of i
work.
Remarks.
»
•0
Hours.
7th
(Map
Ref.) 0015
junction Railway Avenue
and
main
road
Do.
from
Field Coy., Tools
Bank Dump
Sapper
Post
Do., Sapper
Screw
* This column Is for use of general staff.
•f- State whether task or time work and probable duration.
and site of work.
Copies—
North Brigade.
2
C.R.E.
1
O.C. Field Company.
1
Tools
from
Bank Dump
Digging Plug Lt. Smith,
trench. Task
R.E.
work
estimated
3Ahours,
2na
relief
Do.
01
a
a
Lt. Smith,
R.E.
If duty fs carrying stores, state number of Journeys between damp
O.C. " A " Field Company.
00
w
00
K>-
20. SPECIMEN OF INSTRUCTIONS TO A UNIT PROVIDING A WORKING PARTY.
O.C. 28th Black Watch.
Please provide the following p a r t y for work as detailed below :—
Party.
Serial
No.
3
M
Strength:
Rendezvous.
Tools
to he
brought.
"2
50 shovels,
Platoons 25 picks
Date.
Time.
6/10/17
Hours.
1800
Place.
Map
ref:
Junction
. Railway
Avenue
. and Main
Road
To
report
to.
Sapper
Wire
'A."
Nature
' and
place of
work.
' Officer '
i/c of
work.
Digging a t L t . Smith,
Plug
" A " Fd.
Trench
Coy. R . E .
Probable
time to
complete.
Remarks.
3J hours
Task
work.
NOTE.—This form is to be given t o t h e guide who meets the p a r t y a t the rendezvous in exchange for a similar Jorm marked,
B " which will be handed in a t t h e battalion orderly-room on r e t u r n f r o m work.
• ~-•• -
Brigade Major.
Date—6 Oct., 17.
I n f a n t r y Bde.
y
_
o?
o
<o
2 1 . TABLES o r TOOLS CARRIED IN T H E F I E L D .
els'
•s
i. Tools.
(Other than those allowed for machine gnns, or as cart or wagon equipment.)
A
Detail.
St?
^ A3
s*
Axes, felling .
Axes, hand .
Axes, pick
Crowbars
Hooks, bill
Hooks, reaping
Sand bags
Saws, cross cut
Saws, folding
Saws, band _
Shovels
—
'V
«
oE
MS
.5«
1
160
12
300
48
.5 V
•gffl
<5
eS
0
A
0
V
f=i
64
48
72
12
40
16
200
8
12
40
96
8
(a) Carried by Field Park Comoanv. R.E.
O
n
v
PH
49
40
107
8
39
13
400
4
4
35
111
10
PH
-
(H -P,
•§s
o'.bc
gfi
1=1 •
18
10
49.
4
16
3,
400
6
4
35
60
10
1
550
2
840
19
19
76
8
28
20
12
1
100
10
18
20
40
5
30
22
16
4
04
C h a p . 4 , S e c . 20,
ii. Cart, wagon, tank and machine gun equipment.
Axes,
Felling.
Detail.
Carts. Maltese
Carts, officers' mess
Carts, water
Wagons, G.S.
Wagons, telephones
Machine Guns—
Vickers, for each gun
Hotchkiss (Cavalry) lor
each gun
lewis (Infantry) for each
8 guns
1
1
'i
l
Axes,
Pick.
Hooks,
Bill.
1
1
1
'i
1
1
'i
1
1
1
Shovels. Spades.
2
'i
2
'L
2
1(«)
1
4
4
(a) With 30-incli helve.
• *
t_
22. TABLE OF T I H E , MEN AND TOOLS REQUIRED TOR THE EXECUTION OF CERTAIN F I E L D "WORKS.
It is assumed t h a t : —
i. All tracing and marking out has been done beforehand.
il. Materials are on the site of the work, except when provision for carrying is made.
iii. The labour is ordinarily trained infantry working parties.
iv. Rain is not falling.
v. The march to work does not exceed
hours.
Nature of work.
21.—ENTRENCHING.
Excavating
..
Unit
or
party.
Time.
1
1 hour
1
4 hours
Amount of
work.
Tools for each party.
.20 cubic f e e t . . 1 pick
1 shovel
60 cubic f e e t . .
Do.
...
Remarks.
Soil average easy; increase by
50 per cent, for very easy soil;
decrease by 30 per cent, for very
difficult soil.
Decrease by 30 per cent, for very
dark nights.
Maximum throw
12 feet and
lift 4 feet, or maximum lift only
9 feet. When these maxima are
exceeded, one shoveller, with one
shovel, is required for every two
diggers.
When depth of trench exceeds
4 feet, one shoveller, with one
shovel, is required for every two
diggers, to clear berms and level
p a r a p e t : parados must be left
heaped and uneven.
I n heavy clay provide sticks as
scrapers.
Officer in charge of work is
responsible for the provision of
any special tools, such as crowbars,
s^are pick handles, spades, axes,
billhooks, &c., required by the
nature of the soil.
One pick between two diggers
or one pick between three diggers
will suffice in certain soils.
Nature of work.
ii. Moving earth 25 yards,
depositing and return
Hi Filling sandbags
Unit
or
party.
Time.
Amount of
work.
Remarks.
Tools for each party.
1
2 mins.
1 cubic foot . . 2 wheelbarrows
2
2 mins.
1 cubic foot . . 2 stretchers
1
2 mins.
£ cubic foot . . 1 sandbag
Sandbags ready filled—dumped, but
not emptied.
3
1 min.
1 bag
Sandbags
filled.
3 shovels
Spare wheelbarrows or stretchers
being filled while the others are
being emptied.
to
be
three-quarters
22.—REVETMENTS, &C.
i. Sandbag revetment—
(а) Filling sandbags . .
(б) Carrying sandbags
to site, &c.
See 21. iii, above.
See 21. ii, above.
—(c)-Building-sandbags . . - -2
ii. Sod revetment:—
(a). Cutting sods
(b) Carrying sods to site,
&c.
(c) Building sods
2 mins,- -
3
3 mins.
2
3 mins.
1 square ioot
of revetment
2fillfid-bags
1 flat beater
' 5 sods
3 sharp spades
See I. 2, above.
1 square foot
of revetment
1 shovel or spade
Size of sandbag 20 by 10 by
5 inches.
Alternate courses of headers and
stretchers.
..Flat beater may .be a .billhook
or a spade.
Size of sod IS by 9 by 4A- ins.
1 sod to be taken as £ cubic foot.
. . Allow 5 sods, each 18 by 9 by
4 A- ins. per square foot of surface
revetted 18 ins. thick.
iii. Sheeting and anchored
pickets
iv. Sheeting and
" A " frames
v. Gabions,: placing
filling
small
and
SO mlns.
10 feet run of
revetment
7.
SOiriins.
. . . 10 feet run (of
trench)
I
5 miiis.
10
1 square foot
revetted
2 mauls
_
1 saw
1 billhook
1 pair pliers 2 shovels
1 pick
1 crowbar
Trench cut to section.
Sheeting 'consisting of corrugated
galvanized iron sheets,, planking,
hurdles or expanded metal.
Wire,
sharpened"' pickets,
and
sheeting distributed at frequent
intervals on site.
1 anchorage .picket to""each""main
picket.
•
8 strands of wire from, each picket
to anchorage.
Anchorage pickets 8 feet from
main pickets.
With angle iron pickets use sledge
hammers instead of mauls. ' ' "'
2 men on anchorage pickets!"
2 men on main pickets.
2 men sheeting.
2 men wiring.
2 men filling and trimming.
2 picks
2 shovels
2 mauls
2 spades
1 saw
1 hammer
nails
Trench cut to section.
Materials "distributed", at frequent
intervals.
.
Sheeting consisting of corrugated
galvanized irOn sheets, planking,
hurdles or expanded metal.
Allow 15 mins. for each corner. With
rounded corners time includes bending the corrugated galvanized iron.
2 men supplying materials.
2 men trimming and packing.
3 men placing frames
1 shovel
1 pick
Square gabions 1 ft. 6 ins. wide
and 3 ft. high; area revetted 4$
sq. ft., contents 6£ cub. f t . ; earth
to be excavated.
Nature of wor-k.
Unit
or
party.
o
o
Time.
Amount of
work.
Tools for each party.
Remarks.
vi. Picket trestles and laying trenchboards on
same
5
15 mins.
6 feet run (of
trench)
1 maul
2 saws
2 hammers
nails
Pickets distributed on site.
Trestles at one foot intervals.
vii. Trenchboards laying
on " A " frames
3
10 mins.
10 feet run (of
trench)
1 saw
1 hammer
nails
1 man supplying material; 2 men
laying and fitting.
Allow 10 mins. for each corner.
vili. Hurdles, rough, making
3
20 mins.
1 hurdle
2
2
1
1
billhooks
knives
mallet
pair pliers
Materials:
75 lbs.
brushwood
and 60 ft. of wire or yarn for
each hurdle, 6 ft. by 2 ft. 9 ins.
Weight of each complete, about
56 lbs.
Brushwood ready cut on site.
ix. Fascines, making
4
1 hour
1 fascine
3
1
1
2
1
1
billhooks
handsaw
pair pliers
knives
maul
choker
Materials: 200 lbs. of brushwood
and 60 ft. of MIRE or hoop-iron (40 ft.)
per fascine. 18 ft. long by 9 ins. diam.
Weight complete about 140 lbs.
Cradle for making requires 10
pickets, 6 ft. 6 ins. by 3 ins. diam.
All materials on site.
23.—CUTTING AND
FELLING.
i. Trees, felling
1
1 min.
1 in. in diam.
1 felling-axe or s a w . . Up to 12 ins. diam. If over 12 ins.
diam., allow time in mins.
where " d " « mean diam, in
144
Inches.
O
fs*
p>
?
05
If only hand-axes are available
allow twice the time as calculated
in both these rules.
li. Woods, clearing of
brushwood and small
trees
10 _ 2fcmins.
20 sq. yards
(up to 12 ins.
diam.)
10 billhooks
4 felling-axes
2 saws, crosscut
4 saws, hand
1 grindstone
2 whetstones
All hands felling at first, then a
proportion detailed for collecting
and removing according to purpose
in view.
Produce: about 5 lbs. brushwood
for each sq. yard.
iii. Hedges, cutting stems
2
5 mins.
1 yard run
(up to 2 ins.
diam).
1 billhook or handaxe
1 saw
3 fathoms of rope
Average stiff thorn hedge.
If necessary use rope to expose
lower stems to the cutting tool.
iv. Brick walls,
loopholes in
cutting
1
30 miiis:
1 loophole
1 pick or 1 crowbar
Up to 18 ins. thick.
If possible, obtain & mason's chisel
and hammer.
v. Brick walls, notches in
1
10 miiis.
1 notch
1 pick or 1 crowbar.. Up to 18 ins. thick.
If possible, obtain mason's
and hammer.
chisel
2 4 . — W I R E ENTANGLEMENTS.
L Standard Trench wire . .
10
Bay, lOmins.
Night, 20-30
mins.
50 yards
1 pair pliers
* Two coils barbed wire for thicken9 windlassing sticks
ing entanglement, if spirals are not
Gloves, if desired
available,
26 long pickets
t Coils of barbed wire are 130 yards
4 anchorage pickets
coils, unless otherwise stated.
6 coils French wire
24 staples
3 coils barbed wire +
2 spirals barbed wire*
Unit
or
party.
Nature of work.
Time.
Amount of
work.
8
Bay, 20 mins.Night, 30-35
mins.
50 yards
1 pair pliers
7 windlassuig sticks
Gloves, if desired
34 long pickets
4 anchorage pickets
16 concertinas
2 coils barbed wiref
iii. Standard low (or kneehigh) wireentangement
8
Bay, 30 mins.
Night, 1 - l i
hours
50 yards
1 pair pliers
7 windlassing sticks
Gloves, if desired
54 medium pickets
2 coils barbed wiref
3 coils barbed wire
(50 yards)
4 spirals*
iv. Standard double apron
fence
11
Bay 30 mins.
Night, 45-60
mins.
50 yards
1 pair p l i e r s —
10 windlassing sticks
20 long pickets
40 short pickets
7 coils barbed wiref
v. Entangling hedges, &c.,
rough abatis
8
20 mins.
50 yards
li. Standard double
of concertinas
belt
Remarks.
Tools for each party.
*Four
coils
barbed wire
for'
thickening entanglement, if spirals
are not available.
2 billhooks ....
2 pairs pliers.
5 coils - barbed wire
(50 yards)
f Coils of barbed wire are 130 yards coils, unless otherwise stated.
-
Chap. 4 , S e c . 20.
93
20. E F F E C T O F
WEAPONS
1. The main objects of field fortifications a r e : —
i. To develop to the utmost the power and effect of the defender's
weapons. This will normally be achieved by p u t t i n g t h e defender
in a position where he can use t h e m freely while t h e attacker is
exposed to their effect as long as possible.
ii. To restrict t o the greatest possible extent t h e power and effect of the
attacker's weapons. This is normally effected by protecting
t h e defender from them, thus reducing casualties.
2. The heights over which an average m a n can fire on level ground are:—•
Lying down . .
..
..
..
. . . 1 ft.
Kneeling
..
..
..
..
.. 3 ft.
Standing
..
..
..
. . 4 f t . 6 ins.
A higher parapet can be used when firing uphill, and a lower one must be
used when firing downhill.
RIFLE F I R E .
3. 3Iodcrn military rifles are sighted to about 2,800 yards. Their maximum
range may be t a k e n as about 3,700 yards. The slope of fall of the bullet
varies from about 1/120 a t 600 yards and 1/30 a t 1,100 yards, to 1/4 at
at 2,200 yards.
The following table gives t h e maximum penetration of a single pointed
rifle bullet into various materials. I t does not allow for a number of bullets
hitting on or near t h e same spot. To be bullet-proof under service conditions,
(he thickness of all material, must be about 50 per cent, greater than that given
in the table :—
Material.
Steel plate, ordinary mild or
wrought iron
Shingle
Maximum
penetration.
inches.
*
Coal, hard
Coal, small kitchen
Brickwork, cement mortar
Brickwork, lime mortar
Chalk
;.
Sand, confined between boards,
or in sandbags
9
15
9
14
15
18
Sand, loose
Earth, free from stones (unrammed)
Sawn timber:—•
Hardwood, e.g., oak
Softwood, e.g., fir
.Green t i m b e r : —
Logs 12 inches diameter and
and over
Poles 4£ to 6 inches in diameter
Clay
..
30
40
Dry turf or peat
Snow
..
..
56
• 24
36
60
Remarks.
N o t larger t h a n 1-inch ring
gauge. .
Between 1-inch boards.
Between 1-inch boards.
"With dry sea or desert sand,
this m a y be reduced to
12-inches.
Ramming earth reduces
resisting power.
its
I n timber, the penetration is
much less in r o u n d logs, t h a n
in. scantling, owing to fch^
deflection of the bullet, b u t
caTe m u s t be t a k e n to fill t h e
interstices.
Varies
greatly.
This
is
m a x i m u m for greasy clay.
80
Varies greatly.
3 feet of
rammed frozen show, well
consolidated with water, will
stop a bullet, but the power
of resistance will decrease as
the temperature rises. _ Soft
snow u n r a m m e d has little
power of resistance.
04
C h a p . 4 , S e c . 20,
MACHINE-GUN F I R ® .
4. A t ranges beyond 300 yards, t h e penetration of machine-gun fire may he
t a k e n t o be equal t o t h a t of concentrated rifle lire. At distances undsr
300 yards, owing t o t h e cumulative and shattering effect produced b y a
number of shots striking rapidly in succession over a small area, penetration
is effected more rapidly and with a fewer n u m b e r of rounds t h a n by rifle fir©.
ARTILLERY F I R E .
5. Protection is given in three degrees :—
i. Shrapnel-proof.—This
will keep out shrapnel, indirect M.G. Are and
small splinters.
ii. SheU-proof.—To keep o u t all shell from guns, howitzers and mortars
u p to 6-inch.
ill. Bomb-proof.—To keep out aeroplane bombs with delay-action fuzes,
and all shell from guns, howitzers and mortars.
Shrapnel-proof.
6. Shrapnel-proof protection is given by 12 inches t o 2 feet 6 inches of e a r t h .
E a r t h is n o t shell-proof until some 20 to 30 feet is used, and anything moro
t h a n 2 feet 6 inches only increases the explosive force of the shell. A bursting
course of broken bricks, stones, Ac., is always a useful addition t o shrapnelproof cover, b u t the depth of the whole roof covering should n o t exceed
2 feet 6 inches.
Shell-proof.
7. The cover required t o give full protection from shells up to 6-loch
Is as follows :—
i. Burster. This t u r n s t h e nose of t h e shell and causes it to burst
before it has penetrated too far.
ii. A cushion t o absorb shock.
iii. Distributing course. This spreads the stresies caused b y the explosion
over a lfirge area of the roof.
iv. A second cushion. This acts as a buffer between t h e distributing
course and the roof.
v. A thin layer of h a r d material immediately above the roof, to stop
splinters.
(a) A burster of non-rigid material—broken bricks, stone Rets, or hard
chalk—about 2 feet thick, has been found superior t o slabs,rails, concrete, Ac.,
for, although it m u s t be thicker, it is less susceptible t o permanent damage
b y shell, and is more easily replaced and repaired.
The burster m u s t be carried well over the f r o n t and sides, so as to protect
t h e m as well as t h e roof.
(ft) The cushion should be made of t h e spoil obtained f r o m t h e excavation
of t h e dug-out. I t should be about 3 feet thick.
(c) The distributing course should consist of logs, rails, Ac., tied together
with s t o u t wire, so as to f o r m a m a t . The material should be laid touching
and, if possible, in two layers.
(d) The second cushion m a y be similar t o t h e first.
(e) The inner layer may consist of 6 inches of bricks, stone or concrete,
laid on boards or corrugated iron.
Bomb-proof (tunnelled dug-outs and cellars).
8. Complete protection against shells of large calibre (8-inch and over)
can seldom be gained without descending t o impracticable depths. Generally
speaking, all underground work should be provided with sufficient head cover
to exclude 6-inch howitzer and mortar shell fitted with delay action fuze.
The thickness of cover required in these circumstances will be as
follows:—
feet.
feet.
Made earth
..
..
35
Gravel
25
Clay
30
Chalk
25 t o 20
Hard rock
,,
..
,.
15 feet.
|
65
,Chap. 4, S e e s . 20 and 21.
In clialk, economy in timber may often be effected by sinking slightly
deeper than necessary for cover to reach hard sound chalk in which it is
not necessary to timber galleries and chambers.
9. Cellars.—Pull use should" be made of cellars for providing shell-proof
accommodation, but unless the roof of the cellar is of brick or concrete, it is of
no value, except as shrapnel-proof cover. If it is of brick or concrete, it must
be well shored up, with stout pit props. In well-built houses, existing walls
or roofs act as bursters, and as these are knocked down the covering of the
cellar is automatically increased, but it is safest to provide shell-proof protection to the roof from the first. Three feet six inches of reinforced
concrete is shell-proof.
In all cases, cellars should be provided with two entrances and should be
made gas-proof.
10. Tunnelled dug-outs have the following advantages over concrete and
cul-and-cover dug-outs :—
i. Their construction involves less labour in proportion to the accommodation given and affords more immediate results.
ii. They give complete protection, both from actual penetration and
serious concussion effects.
iii. Their exact position can, as a rule, be better concealed, although
the soil removed from them may indicate their existence in a
particular locality.
The disadvantages of tunnelled dug-outs are :—
i. Difficulty of exit owing to the depth at which they have to be made.
ii. Ventilation, lighting and drainage are often very difficult problems.
iii. The nature of the strata may prevent a deep dug-out from being
made in the best tactical position.
iv. Unhealthy and tend to weaken morale.
11. Entrances.—It is essential to prevent entrances to shelters and dug-outs
from becoming sumps for the drainage of the trench. Tor this reason they should
never start from the bottom of the trench. Flooding is best prevented by
commencing the incline at the end of a short trench of such a length as to
allow 5 feet between the side of the trench and the step at trench board level.
The short trench should be made weatherproof (not shrapnel-proof) and
camouflaged.
12. Defence against gas.—The entrances to all dug-outs, shelters and mine
shafts should be provided with gas-tight doors or curtains of anti-gas material,
fitted so as to give a good joint at the sides and bottom of the doorway. If
two curtains are used with a space between them, complete protection is
given.
Plate X X I I shows constructional details of gas curtains.
The distance between the curtains should be not less than 3 feet, and
must be increased for dressing stations to allow stretcher cases to be brought in.
13. Air bombing protection.—Splinter-proof >valis of earth, shingle, &c.,
should be constructed round huts, tents, &c., and to increase the protection
afforded by these, the floors of huts should be kept as low as possible.
Stables are particularly vulnerable to this form of attack, and in the case of
long stables they should be divided by splinter-proof walls into compartments
for 20 horses.
21. D E F E N C E OF
A
POSITION
1. The object of the defending troops is to inflict the maximum loss on the
enemy at the least expense to themselves and so wesr down his fighting
power while maintaining their own, that they will be able at a suitable time
to resume the offensive and complete his defeat. Therefore, everything
possible must be done to economize man-power in the defence, in order t h a t
the maximum power may be available for eventual offensive action.
The defence can be assisted by making the best use of the natural ground,
reinforced by the artificial aid of field works,
(b 28/332)Q
I
96
!
i
, ;
!
;
!:
!1
:
j
J :,
;
I,
|
|
I
,
i
;
;
I
I. •
Chap. 4 y S e c . 2 1 .
2. Considerations affecting the choice of a position.
i. The defensive battle should be fought in advance of localities, the
retention of which is vital to the defender.
ii. The framework of the defence will be the artillery and machine
guns. The position should, therefore, permit of good ground
observation and concealment for the guns, whilst denying these
advantages to the attacker. The foremost defences should be far
enough in advance of the localities selected for artillery observation to ensure t h a t the eyes of the defence will not be blinded
by the capture of these localities, as the result of a minor attack
by the enemy.
iii. So far as the ground permits, the position should be protected
by natural tank obstacles interposed between the defenders
and the enemy The important point is to make full use of
obstacles wherever they exist, both for the protection of the
infantry and so as to set free a greater number of anti-tank
weapons for the most vulnerable parts of the position. Freedom
of movement and concealed localities for the defenders' tanks
are necessary. These localities should be sufficiently far back
to be comparatively immune from serious shell fire.
iv. The extent of the position should not be too large for the number
of troops available for its defence.
v. The flanks should be naturally.strong.
vi. Surprise is just as important in the defence as in the attack. The
position should, therefore, afford facilities for concealing the
defender's dispositions from air and ground observation, and
permit of covered movement within and in rear of the position.
vii. There should be ample room and good accommodation within, and in
rear of the position for manoeuvring the reserves, and the ground
should afford facilities for local counter-attack.
viii. There should be no localities outside the area t o be defended, the
occupation of which by the enemy would exert an unfavourable
effect on the defence of the position.
3. Organization of a position.—
i. Select the genera] line, in front of which it is intended to stop the
enemy.
ii. Site defences for the immediate protection of t h a t line. These
defences will usually take the form of a chain of localities, which
mutually support each other by frontal, flanking or enfilade fire,
and from which the defenders can best develop the fire power of
their weapons. These localities are covered by the fire of the
longer range weapons echeloned in depth behind them.
iii. Make full use of any natural tank obstacles w tich may exist for
the protection of the infantry garrison.
iv. Organize in depth the machine-gun and artillery defence, arranging
t h a t the most likely avenues of approach are adequately covered
by fire.
v. Organize a system of observation posts both for infantry and
artillery throughout the position.
vi. Divide position into sectors (Divisional, Brigade, Battalion).
vii. Select positions for H.Q. and Signal Centres.
viii. Site all defences at the outset with a view to the necessity of occupying
the position for a prolonged period.
This is necessary both for the forward defences and for those in
rear.
Ix. Organize a system of communications throughout the position,
x. Arrange for a protective screen to be thrown oat in front while
the position is being prepared for defencc.
4. Priority of Work.—
i. Siting of weapons and O.P. (artillery, M.G-. and infantry posts)
and marking their positions by pickets, tapes, or spit-locking the
ground.
ii. Constructing O.Ps. and M.G. positions (see Plate XYU).
•
E3
CO
Jr
PLATE
SECTION
OF
XVI.
BREASTWORK
or
IN W E T
SOIL,
brvSflwood
N O T E . Depth of bottom to very according
to ground. Set frames &s low as possible
save breastwork
Drainage 3t grade of /IOO Co lower ground
essential.
PLATE
MINIMUM
TYPES
DIMENSIONS
XVII.
OP N O R M A L M.G.
O P M.G. E M P L A C E M E N T — I N
PLAM
EMPLACEMENT.
OPEN
secno/f
GROUND.
A.B
To follow plate
XM.
Plato
XVJR.
SANGAR PIQUET POST.
Inner
PLAN
Wall.
•Fighting
•uter
Trench,
Wall.
FIG. I.
section
k>|
*kf[
Stones on t o p of Wall
About+6* normally
vt2to3
normally
Tie tent wells to stones* The- wall of the tent
is placed on the inside of-the inner woll to catch
bombs & ensure bombs not rolling into fighting trench.
view
o f
piquet.
Top of tent coloured to prevent
silhouetting
FIG. 3.
SECTION ON
SLOPING
GROUND.
[To follow plate
PLATE
XIX.
NORMAL SECTION OF F I R E
TRENCH.
F I G . 1.
O R D E R OF W O R K .
F I G . 2.
SECTION OF COMMUNICATION TRENCH.
(Unri vetted).
F I G . 3.
SHELL SLITS.
TO <3tYE
QUICK
IMPROVISED
ursSTRUTTEO
SHELTER
XVIII.
Chap. 4, S e c . 21.
97
jil.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Erecting obstacles.
Digging fire positions, 3 feet deep.
Clearing and improving field of fire.
Improving and marking roads and tracks.
Completing fire positions, and connecting t h e m b y shallow communication trenches.
viii. Cover for H.Q. and Signals.
ix. Completing communication trenches and avenues.
x. Dug-outs.
NOTE.—ii., iii., iv., v. and vi. would probably he carried out concurrently.
DETAILS OP TRENCHES, &O.
5. Infantry posts consist of short lengths of fire trench capable of holding
one section, allowing 5 feet for each man, with a minimum field of fire of
150 yards, sited to make the best use of weapons, and connected b y short
communication trenches to form platoon and company posts. These posts,
at first 3 feet wide and 3 feet deep, can, as time permits, be widened and
deepened to the section shown in Pla+p X I X , Fig. 1. They must be concealed
as far as possible, and be capable of all-round defence.
6. Drainage.—If trenches are n o t drained t h e y will, in wet weather, become,
uninhabitable and impassable. Care should be t a k e n in siting t h e m to arrange
for drainage into natural drainage channels, if practicable, and special
trenches to carry off water from low points should be provided. If drainage
into n a t u r a l channels is impracticable, sumps may, as a last resort, be provided. When trenches are to be occupied for a long time, t h e y should be
floored with trench boards.
7. Fire- trenches should be sited in irregular lines with fire bays n o t more
t h a n 30 feet long and traverses not less t h a n 15 feet thick. A bcrm, 18 inches
wide, must be left clear from t h e top edge of t h e trench t o t h e t o p of the
parapet or parados, to prevent t h e collapse of the side of t h e trench from
the weight of the earth.
Parapets must not be undercut t o form unlined shelters,
Eire trenches must have fire steps a t intervals a t t h e back of the trench
and m u s t be provided with frequent exits consisting of well revetted steps
both to f r o n t and rear.
Breastworks are made when it is impossible t o dig trenches (Plate X V I )
8. Revetments.—The upper p a r t of a trench is most exposed to shell fire
and should n o t be revetted unless absolutely necessary; when it is necessary
sandbags are t h e most suitable material.
Fire steps should be revetted as soon as possible. Short " A " frames
(Plate XVI) with brushwood or expanded metal are best for this purpose.
9. Loopholes.—Overhead
cover is never used in a n y trench which is t o be
occupied as a fire trench. Loopholes are only necessary for observers and
snipers. The chief points to be observed in building loopholes a r e : —
i. The alignment must be sited and marked out b y day.
ii. The work must be completed in one night, and ail signs of new work
must be obliterated before daylight.
iii. The maximum amount of protection must be given t o t h e firer. The
service steel loophole plate is t h e best f o r m of loophole a t close
quarters.
iv. The recess must give sufficient room to allow t h e firer t o use his rifle
obliquely through the loophole f r o m either side.
v. Loopholes m u s t be conccaled from the f r o n t a n d are, therefore, best
set obliquely in the parapet.
vi. Curtains m u s t be hung at t h e back of t h e loophole so t h a t its position
is n o t disclosed by light showing through it.
10. Observation posts.—The observer requires a shelf-rest in f r o n t for his
elbows, field glasses, &c.
The post must not be too dark, otherwise t h e eyes of t h e observer are
strained whenever he t u r n s from t h e daylight t o t h e darkness within.
The bottom of t h e slit should be 5 feet 6 inches above inside floor level
and high enough above outside ground level to avoid view being obstructed b y
growth of weeds, &c.
98
Chap. 4, S e c . 21.
The slit itself should he of irregular shape, not less than 3 inches long and
6 inches deep, and not less than 6 inches of headroom above the top of the
slit must be allowed.
The floor area should be as small as possible, with a minimum of 36 square
feet, for artillery work ; accommodation for 2 telephonists may conveniently
be provided below the O.P.
D E F E N C E OF H E D G E S , WALLS, &C.
11. Hedges.—To conceal the fact t h a t the hedge is occupied, the back of
the hedge should be cleared so that the upper branches may form a screen
against aeroplanes, &c., and the front of the hedge may need clearing so t h a t
the defender can see and fire through it without being seen (Plate X X , Figs.
1 and 2).
12. Walls.—It is rarely advisable to occupy walls if the enemy's artillery
is efficient. Machine-gun fire would usually enforce the use of loopholes.
I n any case, men occupying walls or buildings should be protected against
falling debris by overhead cover (Plate X X , Figs. 3 to 5).
13. Embankments, cuttings.—Fire positions are easily made by cutting
" D " and " T " heads into the bank, making provision for protection fi'om
the back burst of shells. A " D " head should be 30 feet long, so that both
entrances cannot be destroyed by one shell.
14. Sangars should be built of the largest stones available and " bonded "
like a revetment wall. If time is available, they should be 6 feet high, with
a Are step 18 inches high. The base must be broad enough to ensure that the
top of the wall is bullet proof (minimum 14 inches). The top of the wall should
not be left level. "When time is limited, large stones of irregular sizes (some
being two or three times the size of a man's head), if available, should be
placed on the wall at irregular intervals; if more time is available, regular
embrasures of stones can be made on the top of the wall, or box loopholes •
inserted.
15. Sangared posts (Plate XVIII) may be of any shape conforming to the
tactical features of the site. They must be most carefully sited and strongly
wired. Two small bastions at opposite corners are often useful for flank
defence.
D E F E N C E OF BUILDINGS.
16. Buildings exposed to artillery fire are readily penetrated by shells
of light calibre, and may be destroyed by a comparatively short bombardment.
I t will, therefore, seldom be worth while expending time and material on
elaborate defensive measures on such buildings : it will usually be preferable
to hold outlying hedges, walls, &c., and to strengthen the cellars for use as
dug-outs. Buildings not exposed to artillery fire (see Plate X X I ) may be
of great defensive value. Preparation for defence will include the following :—
i, Clearing the field of flre ; this may include demolition of walls,
outlying buildings, &c., but the debris must not afford cover.
il Completion of the defensible enclosure by barricading of doors and
ground-floor windows. Doors required for use require special
treatment.
iii. Construction of fire positions. Loopholing of doors, windows and
walls. Provision of flanking fire, and bombing posts.
iv. Construction of obstacles and strengthening of existing obstacles.
Illumination to be provided at night where possible.
v. Improvement of communications within the building.
vi. Arrangements for storing ammunition, provisions and water.
vii. Medical and sanitary arrangements.
viii. Fire-fighting appliances.
ix. Visual signalling arrangements.
In addition, if the building is large aud strongly built, and if it be required
to make a protracted defence, a small portion should be specially fortified
as a " keep to be held as a last resource.
PLATE X X .
ADAPTATION OP HEDGES AND
FIG. I.
FIG.3.
FIG.
FIG. 4.
WALLS
2.
F I G .
5 .
PLATE
DEFENCE
XXI.
OP
A
HOUSE,
N O T EXPOSED TO ARTILLERY
FIBE.
l/GH7fi?AM£Hm
Two
To ACT AS BOMB
KNIFERESTS
STAMPING ON END BYDAY
SCREEN
•& FOLDED DOWN AT NIGHT
^STEEL
\LOOPHOUZ
PLATE
LOOP HOLED WJNDOW
COVER/NO ENTRANCE
BULLETPROOF
/N ENTRANCE
FIG. I
TRAVERSES
HALL
FIG: 2
•
STOCKADE
AROUND
o
DOOR
FIG. 2
SECTION
A - B .
To follow plate
XXI.]
PLATE X X I I .
GAS-PROOF
CURTAINS
FIG. I.
OPEN
Curtain
Rolled
Shelf
9"Overlap of
curiam on ground
FIG. 3. DETAILS
CURTAIN
Curtain'
OF
LATHS
KEEPING
STRETCHED
,
Frame r *
Frame
W
Cur fair
Rear lath
f 0°shorter
than front
b clear framt
Laths
nailed
Lathsfakeep
curiam stretched
22 Chap. 4 , S e c . 24.
22. O B S T A C L E S ,
IMPROVISED ROADS
AND
T R A C K S
OBSTACLES.
1. Obstacles.—Should he laid out in irregular, hold zigzags, with their outer
edge a minimum of 30 yards and a maximum of 100 yards from the trench.
They should be concealed from direct observation as far as possible, in folds
of the'ground, behind and in hedges, in ditches, below banlts, and in woods
They should not afford cover to the enemy.
0 nd crops.
Gaps should be left in all lines of obstacles, except those in the front
line in which only small concealed openings, for the passage of patrols, should
be provided.
Gaps for infantry every 100 yards, and for artillery every half mile. They
should be clearly marked, so as to facilitate the movements of our own troops.
2. The double apron fence or spider wire, is the best pattern of entanglement. For very rapid work over long lengths the back apron may be omitted.
3. Spider wire consists of a series of four-strand fences placed so as to
divide up the ground into a series of compartments; on account of the
area covered it is difficult to destroy with artillery fire.
4. Preparations for wiring.—The rapidity of construction of an obstacle
depends very largely on careful preparations beforehand. The following
points are essential;—
i. The line of entanglement must be t a p e d ; if this is not done, the
party will probably lose direction, the natural tendency being to
come nearer and nearer one's own trench.
ii. Dumps of wiring material should be made in convenient positions
close to the work.
iii. Tapes should be laid from each of these dumps to the flank of the
tasks for which it supplies materials.
iv. All stores should be tied in man-loads and prepared for use. (See
Sec. 29, 2, ii.)
5. Wirer—The plain wire securing a coil of barbed wire must be cut, and
a piece of sandbag or white cloth tied t o the end of the coil in order that there
shall be no difficulty in finding it at n i g h t ; any tin on the wooden drums
must be broken off to prevent noise.
' Any temporary lashing t h a t may be required for the transport or carrying
of materials should be of twine, so that it can be cut easily in the dark.
6. Drill for double apron fence. (9 horizontal wires.)
' Party : 1 N.C.O. and 10 men.
Fall in and number : 1 to 10.
Stores for 50 yards double apron fence.
20 long screw pickets
40 short screw pickets
7 coils of barbed wire (approximate 130 yards each)
Man-loads
..
..
..
5
5
7
.,
17
First Duty (Stores).
Nos. 1 to 10; All numbers carry out all stores and dump at the end of
task (two journeys).
Second Duty (Pickets).
Nos. 1 to 5, long picket. Nos. I, 2, screw in long pickets three paces apart
(7 feet 6 inches) along the tape.
. Nos. 3, 4 and 5 lay out pickets in position, and then help 1 and 2 to screw
them in.
Nos. 6 to 10, short picket. Nos. 6,7, screw in short pickets opposite the
intervals between long pickets, and 6 feet from the fence on each side.
Nos. 8 , 9 and 10 lay out pickets in position, and then help 6 and 7 to screw
them in.
100
Chap. 4 , S e c . 22.
Third Duty (Wire).
Nos. 1 to 6, horizontal wire. Nos. 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, r u n out and
secure three horizontal fence wires, then three horizontal f r o n t apron wires
then three horizontal back apron wires.
'
Nos. 7 t o 10. Nos. 7 and 8 , 9 and 10, r u n out and secure t h e f r o n t diagonal
wire and rear diagonal wire, respectively, commencing a t t h e t o p of t h e
first picket and finishing a t the t o p of the last picket.
NOTE 1.—9 and 10 m u s t give t h e horizontal fence wire Nos. a s t a r t .
NOTE 2.—As each pair reach the f a r end of their tasks, and secure their
wires, t h e N.C.O. with his wire cutters, will cut t h e wire beyond the fixing, and
the pair will t h e n r e t u r n with the remaining wire on t h e reel to the near end,
and either carry on with their next t a s k or deposit t h e coil in t h e d u m p for
other numbers to use.
NOTE 3.—Time will be saved in t h e actual construction of t h e entanglement
if t h e wire can be specially coiled beforehand into two coils, 130 yards long,
and nine half-coils each 65 yards long.
Where t h e circumstances make it advisable for t h e men t o work only, on
t h e side of the wire away f r o m t h e enemy, the following should be substituted
for t h e Third D u t y
Nos. 1 to 4. Nos. 1 t o 4 r u n out and secure f r o n t diagonal wire.
Nos. 5 t o 10. Nos. 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 and 10, run out and secutc three
horizontal wires on f r o n t apron.
Nos. 1 t o 6. Nos. 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, r u n out and secure t h r e e
horizontal wires on fence.
Nos. 7 t o 10. Nos. 7 to 10 r u n out and secure rear diagonal wire.
Nos. 1 t o 6. Nos. 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, r u n out and secure three
horizontal wires on rear apron.
IMPROVISED ROADS AND TRACKS.
7. These are of t h r e e kinds—for men, pack animals, and horse t r a n s p o r t .
All trades must be reconnoitred, pegged out, roughly levelled, drained and
clearly marked b y posts or notice boards.
Batteries and conspicuous points which draw fire should be avoided.
8. Trench board tracks for men.-—These should be laid out in long curves or
zigzags.
Width should be 3 feet, and " u p " and " down '' tracks should be provided.'
Trench boards should be laid on 3-incli b y 1-inch transoms bedded in t h e
ground. Trestles raised 6 inches to 12 inches f r o m t h e ground m a y be used
instead of transoms in swampy soil. *
To prevent slipping, stout wire netting (trench weaving) should be fixed
to t h e t r e n c h boards. Failing this, No. 8 or No. 10 S.W.G. wire may be
used, well stapled down in a diamond-shaped pattern, 6-inch to 8-inch mesh.
I n sandy soil, a quickly made and efficient t r a c k m a y be obtained by
spreading out rolls of wire netting (£-inch to 1-inch mesh) directly on the
ground and pegging firmly down.
When brushwood is available marshy ground may be crossed b y means of
brushwood mats made of 1-inch rods.
Permanent t r a c k wardens must be appointed t o repair damage.
9. Tracks for pack animals.—These
should be made a t the same time
as tracks for men, and consist of earth formation on the best ground available,
going around shell holes or craters, and choosing the route which involves
t h e least e a r t h work.
The formation should be 4 feet to 5 feet wide for single, and 8 feet t o 10 feet
wide for double traffic.
Surface drainage m u s t be provided by means of a ditch on each side of the
track.
F o r crossing boggy ground t h e following m a y be u s e d : —
i. Fascines, with a laver of earth on t h e m t o prevent shoes being pulled
oS.
ii. Hurdles.
iii. Corduroy of logs.
iv. Timber slabs laid on longitudinal rounds.
10. Tracks for horse transport.—These can be used in fine weather only, and
are similar to tracks for pack animals, b u t require a formation width of
18 feet.
PO FCUX PAGT 1 0 0 . ]
PLATE X X I I I .
FORWARD
SHELL
F1SJ
ROADS.
HOLES
Cut the shell-hole square rammmq
the bottom of the bote
then fill
the shell-hole unfa sandbag*
Pr0Perly- onfo*to?of/he sand beat
the roadway ts now made in the usus/*'
kWIWMCT
K
' ^
i it it must
filled
be pumped dry before >t9
flQ
3
ROAD REPAIR
,
Section of road fo be repaired. foundations eorHpfafefg^
**Cuts at interval
Doffed line shows
camber
cut for
FIG
.
how road is cleared,
new
foundation
CORDUROY
OR SLAB
.r^ron or Slabs J
4.
drained
. ..
and
ROAD
« BERNi* 4
if necessary in wet
ground
Runner^ at 3'centres
'Centre runners dogged toejelher
Chap. 4, S e c .25and26.
101
11. Roads.—The object of a road Is to present a hard, even surface for
traffic. This can he obtained by using hard stone or hard wood.
To present an even surface, the road must have good foundations.
The surface must be kept d r y ; this is done by making it higher in the
centre, i.e., providing camber, and by providing longitudinal side drains.
Every road requires a maintenance party to keep it in repair.
12. Corduroy roads are constructed as follows (Flatc X X I I I ) : —
i. Peg out centre line.
ii. Mark out side drains, well clear of road ; an earth berm of 4 feet
is desirable.
lii. Excavate and throw earth into centre of road, and ram ; the roadway must be above the general surface of the ground.
lv. Excavate for the reception of the outer ends of sleepers.
v. Lay sleepers at proper slope, allowing an initial camber of 4 inches
to 6 inches.
vi. Lay longitudinal runners, and dog the two centre ones together
in the case of a double road.
Spike all runners to sleepers, augering the holes for spikes to
prevent splitting. Fill in between runners with earth, and ram.
vii. Lay corduroy, close, round side up ; auger the holes and spike to
every runner, filling gaps with sand.
viii. Lay ribands with gaps of 1 foot at each end to let water run away.
Auger the holes and spike on. dogs to corduroy and pickets.
ix. Pickets should be fixed when Tunners are laid, or may be added
later.
On hard ground, or for lighttrafflc, the sleepers may be omitted, but the
runners must never be omitted. Fascines may be used instead of sleepers,
and a preliminary layer should be used In addition to the sleepers in
swampy ground.
Corduroy runners and sleepers may all be of the same size, 3 inches to
4 inches thick, and generally in 10-foofc lengths, giving either a 10 toot or
20 foot roadway.
Itibands should be 6 inches by 6 inches or 6 inches diameter.
Turning places must be provided where wagons have to turn, and passing
places on a single-width roadway.
Time for construction.—In favourable cases, 1 lineal yard of road 10 feet
wide may be constructed by one man in an 8-hour day, working by daylight.
Where beech slabs are used and auger holes largely dispensed with, construction is more rapid. Where circumstances are unfavourable and men unpractised, longer tunes must be allowed.
A suitable party for slab road construction requires skilled labour (R.E.
or Pioneers), in the proportion of 1 to 4 unskilled. As the men become more
practised, the proportion of skilled labour can be reduced. Parties should be
divided up into gangs of about 50 under a skilled N.C.O. for the laying of the
roadway. Large parties (unskilled) may be employed in the early stages
levelling and digging side drains.
13. Craters.—First construct a deviation around crater for traffic (Plate
XXIII).
To fill crater :—
i Remove sludge or water.
ii. Fill to within 1 foot 6 inches or 2 feet of the surface with alternate
courses of sandbags and rammed dry earth, or fill with rammed,
dry chalk. Hard material should be reserved for the top layers.
iii. Lay slab roadway, or cover with expanded metal and 3 inches to
4 inches of road metal.
To fill a crater 40 feet diameter and 20 feet deep requires about 400 man*
tasks, organized in reliefs (say 4 reliefs of 4 hours). First relief? have smaller
number of men. Fifty barrows are required.
The time is exclusive of formation of roadway.
(B 28/332)Q
k
102
Chap. 4, S e e s . 2 2 a n d 23.
TABLE OF CUBIC CONTENTS OF CRATERS.
Width.
Depth.
Cubic contents.
20 foot
30 ,,
40 ,,
50 „
60 „
70 ,,
80 ,,
7 feet
13 ,,
20 „
26 ,,
34
42 „
50 „
26-5 cubic feet.
113-5
310-5
630
1,197
1,996
8,104
„
23. C A M O U F L A G E
1. Owing to the use of photography for reconnaissance purposes,'it is
necessary for the protection of important points in a defensive system t h a t
they be rendered difficult of recognition in an air photograph, as well as
Inconspicuous to air and ground observation.
2. The principal methods of achieving these objects are:—
i. Covering over small works, dumps, &c., with semi opaque materials
which tone in with surrounding ground.
ii. Breaking up outlines.
iii. Providing dummy works, tracks, &c., to mislead the enemy.
If overhead camouflage is to be erected it is essential t h a t this should bo
done before the soil is disturbed.
3. The principal materials available for these purposes are:—
i. Wire or fish netting. This material is the foundation of all overhead
covers and for spreading over dumps, spoil heaps, &c.;.
to
2-inch mesh is the most suitable,
ii. Canvas strips (12 by 2 inches), grass, &c. These are used woven into
the mesh of the netting to render it semi opaque. They should be
painted in a suitable tone to harmonize with the ground surface,
l e n g t h s of canvas can also be used to imitate tracks, <fcc.
Hi. Expanded metal is useful for concealment of blast marks of guns,
one sheet gives appearance of sparse grass and three of very thick
grass.
iv. Branches of foliage are useful in the construction of screens and to
cover up the litter round gun emplacements, <fec.
v. Paint is only effective to a small degree in deceiving the camera, but
is useful against visual observation.
Top surfaces should be covered with rough-textured materials and painted
a dark tone. Vertical surfaces may either be assimilated to their background
by breaking the outline and painting in harmonizing colours, or alternatively
be " dazzled " by painting in bold blotches of colour designed to break up
the outline and neutralize shadows. These should be on a large scale, three
blotches are generally sufficient. The former method is useful with small,
fixed objects close to a solid background, and the latter with moving objects
or against a more distant background.
4. Defensive works are usually recognizable in air photographs by the
following:—
I. Spoil heaps.—The subsoil being different in tone from surface soil
shows up light in an air photograph. It should therefore be spread
and covered with turf or fabric.
Chap. 4, S e e s . 2 3 and 24
103
ii. Development of tracks, cable trenches, <fcc., round and leading up
to objects,
Traffic should be strictly confined to existing tracks; where
this is impossible new tracks and cable trenches should lead along
natural features and past the object to some definite point which
would give a reason for their existence.
iii. Regularity.—Regularity in nature invariably denotes the prescncc
of man.
An irregular layout should therefore be adopted, and outlines
should be merged in the background by gradually thinning cover,
iv. Shadows.—Air photographs of any solid erection taken when the
sun is low show long shadows which enable the height and shape of
the erection to be estimated. Advantage should therefore be
taken of existing shadows of trees or buildings or, if in the open, the
whole shadow area should; if possible, be covered with netting.
v. The fiat top cover, which consists of a practically opaque centre,
thinning out towards the outer edges, helps to merge any
shadow created into the background.
Camouflage.
Nature of Ground, &c.
Strips of green painted canvas, knotted on foundations.
Large irregular islands of scrim painted earth
colour, surrounded by canvas knots.
Large irregular islands of scrim, mud colour, in
centre. Smaller patches towards edges.
Black and white canvas strips alternating with a
preponderance of black.
Red, white, and brown strips.
Darkened coir nets on irregular framework.
Grass country
Grass and earth
Shelled area
Mining districts
Ruins
Gorse and heather
24. K N O T S , CORDAGE, B L O C K S , T A C K L E S ,
A N C H O R A G E S , A N D U S E OF S P A R S
KNOTS.
Thumb
Figure of 8
to prevent its slipping through a block; the thumb knot or the figure of 8.
(b 28/332)Q
k 2
104
Chap. 4, S e c . 24.
Iteef
Single Sheet Bend
Hawser Bend
2. To join two ropes together—
Same size (dry) . . . .
Different sizes (dry)
,i
,, (wet ropes)
,,
,, or large cables .
Double Sheet Bend
Seizing
Iteef.
Single Sheet Bend.
Double Sheet Bend.
Hawser Bend.
Bowline on a Bight
Bowline
3. To form a loop or bight on a rope which will not slip. The bowline for
a loop at the end of a rope, the lotvline on a bight for a loop in t h e middle,
with a double of the rope.
Chap. 4, S e c .25and26.
105
4. To secure the ends of ropes to spars or to other ropes.—2 Half Hitches,
Clove Hitch, Timber Hitch, Bound Turn and 2 Half Hitches, Fisherman's
Bend.
Lever Hitch.
Man
Harnets-HUch.
100
Chap. 4, S e c . 106.
swimming horses.—Draw hitch.
Seizing
Stopper Hitch.
Cablt
8. To transfer the strain on one rope to another.—Stopper Hitch.
COKDAGE.
9. Hemp.—Strongest and most reliable.
Manila.—Stands exposure best and does not kink, but is liable to cut
where knotted.
Coir.—Weakest, but floats in water and does not rot, ..(Coir can be recognized as being the material used for cocoanut matting.)
For field purposes the safe working load in cwts. for different materials
may be taken as under, where " c " is tlie circumfercncc measured in inches
Steel wire rope
9c2.
Cordage . . . .
..
. . c'3. 2
Cordage, new, white, selected . . 2c2 .
c
Coir rope . .
..
..
.. - j
10. The strength of a lashing round two objects may be taken as four-fifths
of the number of times the lashing passes from one object to the other multiplied by the unit strength of the lashing, e.g., a cordage square lashing with
4 turns' has a holding power of i x 10 x strength of lashing.
For wive lashings take 3/5ths instead of 4/5ths.
To find the numbef of returns required to lash a block to a spar, multiply
the total stress on the block in cwts. by 1} (to allow for the angle tlie returns
make with the directon of the pull), and apply the above rules. Tiius the
number of returns of 2 inch cordage required 2to lash a block liaving a pull of
1 ton to a spar i s l x l i x 20 divided by ± 2 , i.e., 10 returns or B complete
turns.
\
107
Chap. 4, S e c .25and26.
BLOCKS AND TACKLES.
11. I n any system of two blocks, if P be the power required to raise a
weight W, Gr the number of returns at the movable block, and N the number
of sheaves (Including snatch block if used) then P = ~ (1 + / N), where
/ is an allowance
for friction varying from 1/10 for tackles in good condition
to 1/5 f ° r those in moderate condition.
Precautions to be observed when using tackles:—
i. Tackles should not be allowed to twist.
ii. They should be clean, well oiled, and in good condition.
iii. Standing end must be property made fast.
iv. The position of the men should bo such that, in the event of an
accident, no one will be injured.
v. Jerking should be avoided.
ANCHORAGES.
12.—i. A picket holdfast consists of one or more pickets driven into the
ground. The usual combinations of pickets are 1-1, 2-1, 3-2-1. The safe
stress may be taken as 6 cwts. a picket when driven 3 feet into good ground.
ii. A baulk holdfast may be made by driving a row of pickets in front of
a baulk placed at right angles to the pull, and lashing the tops of these pickets
to the ground level of another row driven in behind the baulk.
iii. Buried logs.
U S E OF SPARS.
13 Standing derricks should'not be allowed to heel over more thai? a third
of their height.
With swinging derricks the weight should be lifted vertically from the end
of the swinging spar.
Sheers.—The distance apart of the legs should not be greater than a third
of the length of the legs from butt to the crutch ; nor should the sheers be
heeled over more than a third of their effective height.
Gyn.—The distance between the legs should not be more than half the
effective length of a leg.
14. The stresses in, and the size of, the various members may be ascertained for average cases from the Tables below:—
Stresses are stated in terms of the weight to be lifted.
Allowance has been made for weight of tackles, &o.
15.
STRESSES IN DERRICKS, SHEERS AND GYNS.
Standing Derrick.
Spar
Hack guy
Other guys
..
..
Sheers.
2 0 W.
-7 W.
-3 W.
Gyn.
Spar with leading block..
OtlieT spars
..
..
l e g with leading block
Other legs
..
..
Back guy
. . 1-2 W.
. . 1 • 0 W.
• 7 W.
Swinging Derrick.
'6 W.
4W,
Upright spar . .
Swinging a r m . .
Struts
Connecting tackle
Guys
..
..
..
. . 2 • 2 W.
. . 1 • 4 W.
1 • 0 W.
. . 1 - 6 W.
1 • 25 \Y.
In the case of the swinging arm, the length of the upright spar and the
swinging arm are assumed to be about equal and the angle between them not
greater t h a n 75°. Any alteration in these proportions will affect them. The
sjzes of spars and guys can he found from the graph shown in Sec. 25,17,
Chap. 4, S e c . 24.
108
25. B R I D G E S A N D B R I D G I N G
EXPEDIENTS
1. Tactical requirements will determine the locality for a military bridge
but the nature of the banks and approaches, the nature of the bed, width to
be bridged, depth of water, strength of current, and the probability and
extent of floods are important from a technical point of view. If a tidal
river, the rise and fall of the tide should be ascertained.
2. The approaches at both ends of a bridge are most important, Easy,
access and a difficult exit are liable to cause crowding on the bridge, which
may lead to an accident. Approaches should be metalled or timbered up
to the beginning of the bridge.
3. Bridging expedients.—For tactical reasons it is often important to pass
men, horses and artillery across water at the earliest possible moment, and
some expedient must precede work Qf a more deliberate nature.
A few of these bridging expedients are given below:—
i. I n shallow water, carts or wagons may be used to form the subs t r u c t u r e ^ a bridge.
ii. Small gaps may be filled up with bundles of brushwood, channels
being left for the passage of the water,
iu. Barrels make buoyant floating piers for bridges or rafts, but arc
heavy to launch. A useful catamaran type of foot-bridge is
shown on Plate X X V I I I .
Iv. Bafts or even piers for bridges may be made of waterproof material,
such as tarpaulins, ground-sheets, &c., stuffed with hay, straw,
heather, ferns, &c. (see Plate XXVI).
A raft consisting of four 18 feet by 15 feet tarpaulh s stuffed
with hay will carry a load not exceeding 24 cwts. The best method
of filling each tarpaulin is to make a light framework of poles
6 feet square by 2 feet 6 inches high, on the ground (a hole of
similar dimensions will do almost as well). Then place two
lashings about 24 feet long across the framework each way, and
over these the tarpaulin, well soaked. Fill the tarpaulin with hay
and trample it well down. The ends and sides of the tarpaulin
are then folded over the hay, and the whole made into a compact
bundle by securing the lashings across the top.
The stores required are :—
Tarpaulins .
..
..
..
4
Hay, <fcc. (tons)
Planks
..
.. '
16
Spars (average 4 inch diameter), four 16 feet,
four 14 feet and two 12 feet
10
Lashings, 1 inch about 3 fms. long
..
..
40
,,
inch about 6 fms. long
..
..
16
Ropes, 2 inch, length according to width of river
2
Punting poles
..
..
..
..
..
2
Smaller rafts can similarly be made by stuffing ground-sheets
with hay or straw ; 24 of these made into a raft will support a load
of 1,800 lbs. I t is essential for the sake of stability that, unless
the buoyancy is much in excess of t h a t actually required, the
length of each pier of a raft should be twice the width of the
p l a t f o r m of t h e r a f t . I F THE RAFT IS FORMED OF ONE PIER ONLY,
THE PART OF THE PLATFORM LOADED SHOULD ONLY BE THE
CENTRAL QUARTER.
v. A rough boat can be made by covering the body of the Mark I X
G.S. wagon with its tarpaulin cover. Any projecting points of the
wagon must be covered with hay to protect the tarpaulin, and any
holes in the wagon should be filled in the same way. The tarpaulin
must be kept close to the wagon body by lashings. If sufficient
lashings are available, one should be tied right round the wagon
two-thirds of the way back from the front, while a second should
be lashed round the wagon half way up its side, passing through
the eyelet holes in the cover. Four to six men may be carried
sitting down in this boat.
Rough boats may be made in a similar way by fastening tarpaulins over a light framework of planks nailed together.
PLATE
XXIV.
PLANK INFANTRY
<—-
/ 8 "
FOOT-BRIDGE.
>
J3'*/2
, V//////////////M
W/M/W//W/M
Section
along
*/i
P/anAs
'
Bridge
Plan ha bolted or lashed
together iv/th ui/re
/3 * /z * /£
Section
across 3ridge
PLATE X X V .
KAPOK ASSAULT BRIDGE.
FIG.I.
s t a n d a r d
Transom
type
with
Plate
7'.3.xi£'
Leather Strap.
LIGHT BRIDGE
K A P O K F L O A T S - p i e r s 8'. O" c e n t r e
Jrench boards /.'
Metal
ELEVATION
TO c e n t r e
fixing.
Kapok Float
6'6'.'xT.9x9".
a
S-
b
ft
p l a n
.L/i !
K
1
7" -
MMf
!
--7"-
! ]\j
k—
PLATE
FIG.
XXV.
2.
_ LIGHT FOOT BRIDGE —
— IMPROVISED ASSAULT BRIDGE _ _
USING
PETROL
TINS SI STANDARD
...
!<-
, s l
E R 5
. .
5
!
METAL
T
-
C E N T R E
FA>STEN/NGS
f ^
1
TE—IZ'—>K-
n
*
GJ
BOARDS
9-JIS—/2-->I
J
16 PETROL
TINS
I*/2*I3I"7RANSOMPLATE
ELEVATION OF PIER
^
TIOLEFOF)
,
|
B O A
r/txifMOfmcE
r*k*
W
METHOD OF
.JOINING TRENCHBOARDS
i'n"Fillets
SIDE PLANK
LASHING E'o"
v
li'Rdm
HANDLE.
6*4x7-3'
B,
T
J5i'*4i'*-li~BlQO<
5txSkli"BUOO<S
'PETROLT/NSTOPPERS
P L A N OF PIER
METAL
f j
FIXING
PETROL
TINS
SECTION
ETROLTIN „
LASHING 6-6"
A-8
p e t r o l
piers 8'centreto centre-weight
t i n
o f
a s s a u l t
pier
'
Transom
+2'-l0 x 33/*
bridge.
iip l b s . w e i g h t o f
fig.3.
3 • 2"x 7'x I'/z
t r e n c h
b o a r d
48
l b s
[ T o foUow
Plate
XX
V, fig. 3,
PLATE X X V I .
BRIDGING
Tarpaulin
EXPEDIENTS.
/8xIS'stuffed
with
&c
straw
FIG. H
^-vdwiiii,,
Vu. fr. It
Raft
of
four
Tarpaulins
as
T
M
W
W
*
,
Fij!
•orojll
FIG.
£.
Raft
of
tZH grouna
sheets
as Fig 3.
To follow Plate.
XXVI.]
PLATE
XXVII.
LASHED SPAR
TRESTLE.
Diameter
Height pL
I inch for aici
6ft of height.
Diameter.
HJ-m
plus
Diameter
Height
of spars given
a 15 feet heiqht
FOR
of distance between transom & ledger- j
OTHER
of
for
every
suitable
for 10feet
2 feet
lighter
minimum.
th$'ft
fot 6 ffft
bay
bay increase
increase
LEGS : Reduce fe inch for every
6 inch
.uo
obstruction.-^
end
tfeiGnr-3:
TRANSOM: tO"diamefer
diameter
are
.
lo clear
trestle•
&
SPAMS
sufficient,
{hot
inch
m span of
decease
bay.
in height
With span of JO feet legs can be'^zan
with
IS feet
spahs.
with
inch
Chap. 4, S e c . 25and26.
109
vi. Plank bridges as shown in Plate X X I V will take infantry in single
file.
vii. The standardized assault bridge (see Plate XXV, Fig. 1) consists
of Kapok floats (an article of store), transom plates, trench boards
and metal fixings (an article of store, which is used for fixing the
trench board to the transom plate). Improvised floats, e.g.,
petrol cans, cork floats, &c., can be used with the above superstructure, which with the use of the metal fixing can readily be
made up in the field.
Plate XXV, Fig. 2, shows an improvised petrol-tin assault bridge
using the standardized metal fixings : Plate XXV, Fig. 3, shows a
totally improvised type of petrol-tin assault bridge.
The roadway can consist of light trench boards interlocking
and fixed to the saddle of the pier.
4. Bridges.
i. The typo of bridge will vary according to the materials available, the
traffic expected, and the nature, breadth, depth, &c., of the span
t o b e b r i d g e d ; b u t WHATEVER ARM OF THE SERVICE A LRIXGE
IS CONSTRUCTED TO CARRY, IT SHOULD BFILCAPABLE OF CARRYING
THAT AR3I WHEN CROWDED.
The most usual forms of bridges are trestle, cantilever and
floating. Other methods sometimes employed are suspension,
frame and crib work.
ii. A bridge t h a t will carry infantry in fours crowded will carry field guns
and 4-5 inch howitzers and most of the ordinary wagons t h a t
accompany an army in the field.
To prevent it being improperly used, a signboard should be placed
where the approach road leaves the mainroad, stating the greatest
permissible load, thus :—
" Bridge to carry infantry in fours."
" Bridge to carry infantry in file."
" Bridge to carry guns not heavier than 60-pdr."
" Not for animals, tfce."
ii!,- The normal width of roadway is 10 feet between the ribands ; 8 feet
will suffice for infantry in fours, or cavalry in half sections ; 6 feet
for infantry in file, cavalry in single file and field guns passed over
by hand ; 1* to 3 feet for infantry in single file. "A type of trestle
is shown on Plate XXVII. Planks
t o 2 inches thick are sufficient for light traffic. Handrails 3 feet above the roadway should
be provided.
iv. For horse traffic the sides of the roadway should be screened ; and
straw or other material spread on the planking.
6. Assault bridging.
i. Forcing the crossing of a river or canal is a tactical operation for
which the commander of the infantry who are to force the crossing
is responsible. It is for him to decide the sites for the bridges and
where they are to be put together, having due regard to technical
considerations as represented by his technical adviser, the
engineer commander.
il. Surprise is the essence of success in such operations ; the enemy
must therefore be kept in ignorance of the points of crossing.
All previous preparation must be carefully concealed, reconnaissance parties must move with the greatest caution, and every
effort must be made to deceive the enemy. Obvious crossing
places which can be easily and quickly bridged may be more
difficult to cross on account of the enemy's fire than wider and
le?s obvious ones.
The actual crossing will probably be carried out at night or
under cover of smoke screens, but some light is essential.
In
the case of tidal rivers the time of high or low tide may be th*
ruling factor.
iii. As far as time permits, information must be obtained on the points
mentioned in para. 1 and also f-n the possibility of deployment
of attacking troops on the far bank, cover for bridging material
on the near bank, positions or covering fire by rifles and machine
guns.
(B 28/332)q
h
100
Chap. 4, S e c . 110.
Tills information will be obtained from large-scale maps, aeroplane photographs aud ground reconnaissance.
I t is essential t h a t officers belonging to the troops who are to
cross the assault bridges should accompany the U.E. officer on
his reconnaissance for bridging sites.
iv. Covering parties should be in position before the bridges are pushed
across. I n the event of their having to open fire to protect the
launching of the bridges or the passage of the assaulting troops,
they must open the heaviest volume of fire possible. Flanking
and overhead fire from Lewis and machine guns will be of great
value and should be supplemented by artillery fire against any
points from which the enemy can bring direct fire on the crossings.
Smoke produced by artillery and rifle grenades may assist by
mystifying the enemy as to the exact points of crossing.
v. The method of crossing depends on the width and nature of the
channel. "With narrow rivers and canals assault bridges can
be pushed across. With wide rivers it may be advisable to send
forward a covering party on rafts on a wide front just before '
launching the assault bridges.
vi. The number of bridges will depend on the width of the channel,
the material and labour available, and the tactical situation.
vii. Tapes must be laid from the forming-up iiue to the crossings, either
beforehand or as the bridging parties advance at the time of the
assault. Illuminated signs should be provided on the forming
up line by night.
viii. The leading troops detailed to cross by the assault bridges (unless
they are the carrying party) should remain under cover until the
assault bridge is Becured on the far bank and ready for crossing ;
they should then cross as rapidly as possible. I n no circumstances
should the assaulting troops follow the carrying party so closely '
t h a t they have to halt on the bank and wait for the bridge to be
launched,
ix. The importance of traffic control cannot be over-emphasised.
During assault bridging operations congestion is very liable to
occur especially on the near bank. To obviate this, a carefully
arranged system of control posts and connecting flies is necessary
so as to ensure that the forward movement of troops can be
properly regulated and, if necessary, temporarily stopped altogether. One infantry officer should be detailed for each assault
bridge to ensure that troops do not bunch near the bridge before
crossing.
I n addition, a staff officer should be detailed for each brigade
series of crossings to control the advance of units towards the
bridges.
The officer commanding the engineers must arrange for all
engineer personnel to clear away from the bridge as soon as it has
been launched.
x. I n order to keep bridges in action, spare material on a 50 per cent,
scale and adequate maintenance parties must be provided. A
party must be detailed to keep watch above the highest upstream
bridge to bring to the bank floating objects such as mines and
debris, which would damage the bridges down-stream.
fl* Bridging material carried in the field.
i. Each division will carry in the Meld Park Coy., R.E., 2 steel trestles
and 3 spans of medium bridge superstructure (each 21 feet long).
ii. Each Corps will have a Pontoon Bridge Park containing 3 medium
pontoon bridges each 126 feet long and 4 heavy pontoon bridges
each 105 feet long, which can, with the additional items which
are carried, be made up into 6 heavy pontoon bridges each 105 feet
long.
ili. Steel stock-span girders for super-heavy bridges will be held in the
Base Engineer Store Depot.
iv. 36 standardized Kapok float assault bridges, each 80 feet long, will
be held for an Expeditionary Eorce in an Engineer Store Depot.
Ill
Chap. 4, S e c . 25.
7. Weight of troopst guns and materials.—The maximum dead weights
brought on a bridge by the passage of troops in marching order are:—
Infantry in file, crowded at a check
2£ cwts. (For each lineal foot of the
,,
fours,
,,
,,
5
,, J bridge irrespective of
Cavalry in single
file
Ii
,,
| the width, provided the
,,
half sections
..
. . 3^ ,,
I formation is preservtd.
Armed men, in a disorganized mass, may weigh 11 cwts. to each square foot
of standing room.
8. The maximum load on one axle for the diflerent vehicles likely to be wif h
an army in the Held are:—•
1 • 36 tons.
G.S. wagon
2-00
Pontoon wngon
118-pdr. gun
.
1-0
Ammunition wagon and limber
1-34
4-5 howitzer
1-2
Ammunition wagon and limber
2-6
30-cwt. lorry
• X 5-5
3-ton lorry
3-15
Armoured car (Peerless)
3-0
,,
(Rolls Itoyce)
2-2
Motor ambulance (heavy) . .
6-5
60-pdr. gun, Mark IV
5-0
Motor bus
8-0
Foden steam lorry
3-63
lorry
6 inch howitzer (26 cwt.) with F
4-15
9*2 inch howitzer
Track.
Weight (loaded).
Length on ground. Width.
Tons.
29
0' 11"*
20J
Tank M t . V
19*
0' 11"*
20{
„ Med. C. . .
9' 8"
9}
13"
„ Light Mk. I.
9' 4"
12
13"
„ II7
9' 88""
11"
Dragon Mks. I I and I I I
9. Tlu: weights on a bridge by certain animals are:—
Camels loaded
15 cwts.
Camels loaded (weight on one leg)
..
. . 10 ,,
Pack bullocks
..
..
..
..
..
,,
Pack bullocks (weight on one leg) . .
..
..
3J- „
Elephants loaded
.,
..
..
..
.. 44 ,,
The weight of earth 1 inch thick may be taken as 10 lbs. for eachsquare
foot covered ; and of soft timber 40 lbs. for each cubic foot.
FOKHUI.TR FOR CALCULATING SIZE OF ROADBEARERS, TllANSOMS AND
CANTILEVERS.
10. Rough formulte for calculating the sizes necessary for roadbearers
and transoms, &c., are given below. The formulee include a factor of IS for
live load, in addition to a factor of safety of 3 ; they also allow for a normal
weight of superstructure.
i. For unselected rectangular beams supported at both ends :—
bd*
W =ii. For unselected round spars supported at both ends :—
d>
W = ,»- x j ;
(B)
The formula for strength of cantilevers are as follows : iii. For unselected rectangular beams fixed at one end :—
bd*
W = } x T
(C)
Iv. For unselected round spars fixed at one end
W = i x
X-J-
(J3)
* Minimum bearing surface due to track being unsprung.
(b 28/332)q
T-j 2
112
C h a p . 4, S e c . 25.
In the above formulae—
W B actual load on one beam In cwts. evenly distributed (without
superstructure).
b
breadth of beam iu inches.
d
depth of beam in inches.
{ l e n g t h of beam in feet between points of support for (A) find
(B).
length of cantilever in feet from point of support for (G) and
( D ) ; or, if loaded at one point only (see below), length from
point of support to position of load.
I n the case of round spars b and d are identical, and their strength is only
about six-tenths t h a t of square beams of the same depth.
11. To use these formulae for a concentrated weight, such as a gun, the
total weight on the gun wheels must be multiplied by two to convert it to
the equivalent distributed weight, when it can be substituted for W. When,
as in the case of a transom, the load is applied at several points, it can be
taken as distributed.
12. "With several baulks under a roadway, the two outer carry only half
as much of any weight as tlie inner ones.
13. Rectangular beams should always be used on edge, In order to obtain
the maximum of rigidity and strength. I n calculating the sizes of beams
by the formula in para 10, i. and ii. above, if b and d are unknown, d should
be considered equal to 26.
A tapering spar, when supported at both ends and overloaded, will break
in the centre.
1 4 . TABLE GIVING SIZES o r R O U N D ROADBEARERS AND TRANSOMS (SUPPORTED
AT THE ENDS ONLY) FOR VARIOUS LOADS AND SPANS.
Loads on
Bridge.
Round Spars
required.
Infantry In file
3 Koadbearers each
Transoms (7 feet unsupported)
6
7
71
81
9
0}
7
71
71
8
8}
8}
3 Koadbearers each
Transoms (7 feet unsupported)
6}
6
7
71
8
81
6
61
7
7
7}
71
Infantry
In
fonts and Cavalry In halfsections
5 Koadbearers each
Transoms (11 feet
unsupported)
6
7
71
8}
9
9}
HI
12
12}
Q.E. 13 - pdr.
gun
(-982
ton)
5 Koadbearers each
Transoms (11 feet
unsupported)
Q.F. 18 - pdr.
gun
(1 • 629
tons) or 4-5
inch Howitzer
(1-343 tons)
5 Hoadbearers each
Transoms (11 feet
unsupported)
6 inch Howitzer or 60-pdr.
gun, Mk. IV
(4-134 tons)
5 Koadbearers each
Transoms (11 feet
unsupported )
9
01
HI
11}
Spans In feet
10
12
C a v a l r y In
single file
Mean Diameter in Inches.
10
101
11
6
61
71
71
7}
61
7
81
81
51
61
7
71
8
8
7}
7}
8
8
81
81
9
9
10
10}
11
11)
HI
11}
12
12
14
16
18
20
Other timbers not affected by length of bay :—
Ledgers and handrails, mean diameter, 4-6 inches.
Braces and ribands, 3 inches at tip.
7
113
C h a p . 4, S e c . 25and26.
15. The depth (d) and breadth (6) of rectangular timber of equivalent
strength to tlie round spars given in the above table can be found from the
formula tdl = X%D3; where D is the mean diameter in inches given in the
table.
SIZE OF TIMBER FOR TRESTLE LEGS, DERRICKS, SHEERS, i t o .
16. From t h e following table the size ol round spars required can be
found. I t allows for factor of safety and for factor for live load, so t h a t the
actual load applied should be taken:—
2
3
" - 5
MEAN
e
7
a
9
DIAMETER
10
II
OF
12
13 14- IS
SPAR
IN
16 17
18
INCHES.
BaUic fir.
Safe crushing stress taken as 1,000 lbs. per sq. inch.
19 20
114
TABLE
Chap. 4, S e c . 2 5 .
OP T I J I E
AND M E N REQUIRED FOR THE EXECUTION
BRIDGING OPERATIONS.
OF CERTAIN
17. Tt is assumed t h a t : —
i. The work is being carried out by day, under fair weather conditions.
ii. The labour is trained U.E, personnel (except where otherwise stated).
iii. Material is ready at site.
iv. The current does not exceed 3 knots.
v. The banks and bed present no exceptional difficulty.
Operation.
Party.
Time.
Construct a petrol-tin pier
for a n infantry assault
bridge
4 men
1 hour
Construct a barrel-pier of
54-gallon casks
16 men
40 mins.
Erect a steel trestle
12 men
\ hour
Bridge a 50-yard river
with
(«) Light timber trestle
bridging
(0) I n f a n t r y
assault
bridging
60 men
8 hours
50 men
20 mins.
CO men
16 hours
Assembly and launching
steel stock-span bridge
(Martel box girder) 96
feet, 4 girders.
Hem arks.
R.E. or I n f a n t r y
Pioneers.
Depth of water not exceeding 10 feet.
Includes carrying complete
bridge
600
yards and launching.
Bridge assumed to be
assembled . beforehand.
2 men for each pier.
R.E. or I n f a n t r y
Time necessary for abutment and foundations
depends on local circumstances.
1 8 . TAIILK OF SPANS AND LOADS FOR MAKTEL BOX GIRDER BRIDGE (WITH
HORN BEAM).
2 Girder
Bridge.
3 Girder
Bridge.
4 Girder
Bridge.
Load.
Span in feet. Span in feet. Span in feet.
i. Medium loads (5£ ton axle) . .
ii. Heavy loads (16 "ton axle) . .
iii. Super-heavy loads (26 tons) . .
80
48
96
64
64
104
80
80
Weight of one section = 12i cwts. Overall length = 8 feet 6j} inches
Width = 2 feet 4 inches. Depth = 4 feet.
NOTE.—Super-heavy and henvy loads must cross bridges singly.
C h a p . 4, S e c . 25 a n d 26.
115
JToBMtriai FOR CALCULATING IUJOYANCY.
19. I n using closed vessels such as casks for floating piers, the safe buoyancy
for bridging purposes may be taken at nine-tenths the actual buoyancy.
When calculating the buoyancy required for a r a f t or pier for a floating
bridge, it is necessary to work to the actual weight of the load to be carried,
plus that of the superstructure. The superstructure of the actual roadway
of a bridge of normal width to carry infantry in fours may be taken at
120 lbs. pe r foot run, up to 15 feet span.
20. The buoyancy of closed vessels can be determined with sufficient
accuracy by the following methods :—•
i. "When the contents are known—
Multiply the contents, in gallons, by 9, this will give the safe buoyancy,
in pounds.
ii. When the contents are not k n o w , measure the capacity in cubic feet
ns accurately as possible and multiply by 54 to give safe buoyancy
in pounds..
26. D E M O L I T I O N S
(See Sec. 33, 17.)
1. Wet guncotton m issued in tin cases containing 141-lb. slabs, each 0 inches
by 3 inches by
inches.
Dry guncotton in boxes holding 6 tin tubes each containing 10 primers.
2. Dynamite.—A plastic explosive, in various forms, not a service explosive,
but largely used commercially and issued in 2-oz. cartridges, wrapped in
parchment paper and packed in 5 lb. to 50 lb. boxes.
Dynamite, if frozen, is dangerous to use and cannot be completely detonated,
it freezes at 40* F. Thawing out dynamite is a dangerous operation and
should be left t o experts ; dynamite is also dangerous after exposure to damp.
3.Detonators,—Wo. 8 service detonator is used with safety fuze.
No. 13 electric detonator is similar to the No. 8 but provided with wires for
electric ignition
Commercial caps, similar to the No. 8 detonator, b u t usually weaker, and
' of various sizes. No. 6 commercial corresponds in size to the No. 8 Service
detonator, and although only half the strength i t is sufficiently strong to fire
a service primer.
4. Fuze.—
i. Safety fuze coloured black, and made to fit the No. 8 detonator. I t
will burn under water and burns at the rate of about 2 feet a
minute. Packed in boxes containing 8 fathoms. It is difficult
to light with a flame. To l i g h t ; the head of a match should be
inserted in the end of the fuze and lighted by another match or
rubbed with the match box.
Ii. Faze instantaneous detonating, consists of a tin tube filled with high
explosive.
Ita action is practically instantaneous if detonated. It will not detonate
if lighted.
The method of detonating is shown on Plate XXTX. Two primers and
a No. 8 detonator with safety fuze are required.
The explosive deteriorates on exposure to the air; before using, therefore,
cut off about 6 inches of the open end. If the ends of fuze, detonating,
instantaneous, are to be left in a charge for a long period a good method of
protection is to cap them with a No. 8 detonator.
Junctions in Fuze, instantaneous detonating may b e made by using a
junction box filled with ammonal or S detonators tied together at the junction.
5. Metkod of connecting up charges.—A charge of guncotton is connected
up for detonation as follows :—
The fuze is cut to the required length. The end to be ignited is cut on a
slant to expose as much of the composition as possible. The end to be inserted
in the detonator is cut straight across. The straight cut end Is then gently
inserted into the open end of the No. 8 detonator. This end of the detonator
is then pinched to make it grip the fuze and so prevent it from, being withdrawn.
116
/
Chap. 4, S e c . 26.
The primer, having been tested, as below, t o receive the detonator, is
placed in .one of the holes in a guncotton slab in the charge, and, if several
charges are to be flred simultaneously, the fuze detonating instantaneous
to be used is passed through a primer in each charge and connected to the
safety fuze.
For a single charge, the closed end of the detonator Is gently inserted into
the hole in the primer so as to fill the entire length of the hole. If the hole
is too large, a piece of paper or grass must be wrapped round the detonator
to matte it fit tightly. If too small, it must be enlarged with a rectifier or
piece of wood, but not with the detonator.
The charge must be in close contact with the object to be demolished, and
each slab must be in contact with those next to i t ; timber packing and clay
are often useful to ensure the former, see Plate X X X , Figs. 1 to 3.
The charge must extend across the whole of the object to be cut.
Dynamite charges are fired by detonating a commercial cap or detonator
in the charge. A guncotton primer is not required.
6. Method of lighting fuze.—The simplest method itf to use matches ; the
match head should be held against the powder in the end of the fuze which
has been cut on a slant, and Ignited by striking the box on it. I n dry weather,
when a large number of charges have to be fired, as in blasting a road, an
easy method which ensures quick lighting is to split the safety fuze and
insert a thumb nail flake of dry guncotton primer.
7. Times for demolitions.—The length of time required to effect any demolition depends mainly on the time necessary to clear away any material used
as filling over the part of the structure which actually bears the load. For
instance, it will take much longer to prepare a masonry bridge for demolition
than a railway girder bridge, since in the former there is always a quantity
of hard filling over the actual arch ring which bears the load, while in the latter
the girders are generally accessible.
8. Calculation of charges.—i. The weight of explosive (uhtamped) in pounds
required for various demolitions can be calculated from the formula in the
table in para. 10. They are equally applicable to guncotton, ammonal
or dynamite. The table also gives the approximate time and labour required.
I n these formulae-:—
B = length to be demolished in feet.
T = thickness to be demolished in feet.
t — thickness to be demolished in inches, in the case of steel or iron
plate only.
c = circumference of cable in inches.
Masonry includes concrete, stone or brickwork. Tamping will increase
the effect of the charges. Charges placed hurriedly under conditions, e.g.
close proximity of enemy, where they cannot be examined properly after being
fixed, should be'incrcased by a percentage (say, 60 per cent.) to allow for bad
contact, &c.
Example of calculation for demolition of a girder with guncotton (Plate
XXX, Fig. 1).
Note.—To allow for the fact t h a t the charge is not placed continuously
along the flange and for the additional explosive required to cut the thick
uortion of the web at the junction with the flange, the charge arrived at from
the formula must be doubled in the case of the flanges.
(а) Web.—Thickness of web
£ inch, i.e., under 1 inch.
Therefore one slab per 6 inches will suffice.
Length of slab between angle irons = 27 inches.
. •. No. of slabs required for web = 5.
(б) Top flange.—Maximum
thickness t — i inch (flange) -f i inch
(angle iron) + £ inch (rivet head) =
inches.
15
Breadth B = j g
3
3 15
/3\«
,
. - . g B P - g X j g X (g) = 4 • 2 lbs.
Charge required = 8-4 lbs. or 9 slabs.
4
PLATE
XXIX.
DEMOLITIONS—USE OF FUZE INSTANTANEOUS
EULJ.
l"sfon£weaas\
Insfyn&r
Delbnarinq
- m i l
Time
IW
DETONATING.
Fase\
8-Detonator
FIG.
Fuse
Instantaneous
\
n
Delbnarinq
plashing
tDeTonaTor
h-rimer
FIG
FIG.
3.
r
c
f
Detonaror
Fuse
'h
.
6
9
packed
3
Instantaneous
Datonati,
to make
e
G
C
it
proiecf
5 r a b
/
77n filled uj/th
zmrponal.
Holes
pierced in sides fa
admit' ends of Fuze
Caped w)rh N?6
Oe /one for
Charcje
Charqe"
PLATE
XXX.
DEMOLITIONS.
9 Jims
G.C
•CLAYPACK)^JG
piece OF BOARD
WOODEN STRUT
5 SLABS 6. c.
10 SLABS G C.
K
15"
•ANCLES
~
u - 1
M
THICKNESS OF RIVET HEADS
FIG.
4I*4JXI
a
I'THROUCHOUT
2.
±.
fr.---.t5"--.>!
2"*B0SsmP
ANGLES
7
AY
[9 SLABS GUNCOTTOFJ
'PLICE OFBOARD
'OLE POROETOFJATOR&C
|
WOODEN STRUT
WOODEN STRUT
"o
HOLE FOR DETONATOR
PIECE OF BOARD
ANCL'ES
ro SLABS OUNCONC
CLAY
PLATE
XXX—conlinuei.
DEMOLITIONS—continued.
FIG 3
5 SLAB GC^
CLAV PACKING
%
VSQODEN STRL
SPUN YARN
ANt
l£S(4z"x4i'x.t"
"
- Jif
6SLABSG.C,
THICKNESS OF RIVET HEADS I "THROUGHOUT
'/ILUIJC,
BACKING
PWMC/N&
ABUTMEHT~
A
B
C
E
H
'
CHARGE AT CROHW
CHARGES AT HAUNCHES
CHARGE AT ABUTMENT
i BREADTH OF BRIDGE
{DEPTH OF CHARGE AT
C)-lie
117
C h a p . 5, S e c .27and28.
(c) Bottom flange.—Maximum thickness t = 1 inch (flange) + t
(angle iron) + i inch (rivet head) = 1 | inches.
Breadth B —
15
inch
Jeet.
3
3 15
/13\2
•••2B(2=2X12>< U ) =6lbl.•. Charge required will be 10 lbs.
Arrange charge as in Plate X X X , Fig. 1.
For smaller girders less than 2 feet total depth, the total charge should be
divided into, two parts in proportion to the metal in the upper and lower
halves of the girder (often equal) and placed in the diagonally opposite angles
formed by the junction of the web with the upper and lower flanges.
9. Demolition without explosives.
Railways:—
Sever OT block main lines of rails •, remove technical tools and personnel;
destroy signals, points and crossings, and water supply,.
Locomotives:—
Take off injector, piston or safety valve. Fire rifle bullets through
boiler.
Rolling stock:—
Burn or remove springs. Trains may be run against each other, or a
rail turned to block a line temporarily.
Telegraphs:—
Cut down or break poles, cut up and twist wires.
Guns:—
Close breech, then withdraw hand lever about 1 inch, and with handspike or pick beat down lever until hinge-joint is distorted. A
few shots fired at carrier would jam mechanism still more. (See
also instructions in the Gun Drills).
Arms:—
The best way is first to break off the butts and then to destroy the
barrels. For the latter the rifle barrels with parts of the wood
still on them should be well heated over Are in a trench, after
which they can be smashed up with heavy hammers. A party
of 6 should be able to destroy 25 rifles in half an hour.
Ammunition to be destroyed should be placed in a deep pit and burut
(See also instructions in "Magazine Regulations" and " Regu-.
lations for Army Ordnance Services.")
10. TABLE OF CHARGES AND TIMES.
Time.
3
Type of
Btructure.
Charge in
lbs. of
guncotton.
1
2
Iron or steel plate 3 B (2
2
(a)
(6)
Preparation of the
structure t o
receive charge.
Preparation
of charge.
—
L2
£ to 1 hour
Steel
railway
15 D.
girder bridges,
L
=
length
of
20 feet to 80
girder in feet
feet span
D = total depth
of girder in feet
This allows 50
per cent, extra
for emergency
conditions.
A
—
„
Party
required.
Remarks.
4
5
—
t is in Inches.
For all girder bridges, charges may
be calculated as shown in example
below.
i an hour to 10 to 20 U.K... 1. This formula is applicable to
" 1 hour
girder bridges, taking a single line
of standard railway, and gives
charge for one girder.
Where one girder has t o bear the
whole weight of a line of railway,
e.g., two girders carrying a double
line, or a centre girder carrying
half of two single lines, double the
charge given by the formula.
Attack main girders near abutments.
If time is available, lay mined charge
under one abutment.
Time for preparation then required : 2 to 3 days, but the
demolition is much more effective.
Stone or brick
arch bridges—
Depends on nature of i hour to 8 to 20, depend If time and explosives are available,
lay mined charges under abut1 hour
ing on width
roadway,
usually
mets.
of roadway
hand filling and c o n and size of Attack crown if time is short.
crete cover arches and
Dig trench to back of arch ring.
of
charge
must be cleared. Allow
Charge must be continuous across
in
2 to 4 hours.
width of bridge.
12 to 20 R.E. Dig trenches to back of arch ring as
4 to 6 hours
Ditto
above. (See Plate X X X , Fig. 4.)
(as above)
t-BT2
12 to 20 R.E. Attack pier where thinnest, if
4 to 8 hours
1
to
B = breadth of
possible
cut groove.
Tie charge
(as
above)
hours
to board and fix against pier.
pier in feet
Time depends on accessibility of
T = thickness of
pier. If pier is in deep water and
pier in feet
staging required to gain access,
increase time. (Coin. 3 (a).)
£BT2
B = breadth
roadway
feet.
T =s thickness
arch ring
feet.
ii. Haunches Ditto.
i. Crown . .
iii. Piers
JBT2
Masonry wall over
2 feet.thick
Suspension bridge. C2
Steel wire cabie 24
Houses
..
of
in
—
i-hour to 1 hour
10 lbs. a room . . i hour to 1 hour
1
—
—
Continuous charge. The length of
breach B not to be less than
height of wall. Walls under 2 feet
thick require 2 lbs. for each foot
run.
J-hour to 1
hour
4 to 8 R.E
. . . Attack cables at tops of piers if
possible. Cables under 5 inches
require 1 lb.
i hour
4 to 8 R.E.
. . Close all doors and windows and
block chimney. Put charge in
centre of each room, and fire
simultaneously.
10. TABLE OF CHARGES AND T I M E S — c o n t i n u e d .
Time.
3
Charge iu
lbs. of
guncotton
Charge in lbs.
=
inside
diameter
side in feet,
plus 5
Guncotton,
50
lbs.
3
inch (field)gun use 2 lbs.,
double charge
for each inch
increase
in
calibre
ia)
Preparation of t h e
structure to
receive charge.
i to 1 hour
Preparation
of charge.
Party
required.
Remarks.
5
£ hour
4 to 6 R.E.
. . Place charge in hole 2 feet to 3 feet
deep in centre of floor, t a m p
•well.
Charge on ground or h u n g o n nail.
Load with a shell; pack in charge ;
add sods, earth, &c., to keep it in
place and t a m p it. Close breech
as f a r as possible.
A shell is n o t absolutely necessary,
b u t charge m u s t be tamped.
HOTES.—Total time for preparation = total of (a), plus (b) in column 3 above.
If unlimited explosive is available, f r o m a neighbouring store or dump, t h e times given above m a y be considerably shortened.
F o r emergency purposes BT 2 is effective with all classes of ruasonry and Bi2 for all steel work. A guncotton slab will
cut its own thickness of steel plate.
Q
•S
JO
a
o
121
CHAPTER
V
27. T R A N S P O R T
TRANSPORTATION SERVICES.
(See Chap. X V l i , F . S . R . , Vol. 1,1923, and Chap. X I I , F.S.R., Vol. I I , 1924.)
1. The Director of Transportation (or D.G.T. if appointed), under the
direction of the Q.M.G. a t H.Q., is the head of railway, inland waterway and
dock transportation services. Sea transport is under the Board of Trade.
All arrangements for movement by these services are co-ordinated by the
Q.M.G/s Branch of the staff through the Head of the Transportation Service
or through the representative of the Director of Sea Transport, who are
responsible for tjie carrying out of movements by these means required
by the army in the theatre of operations.
MOVEMENTS BY SEA.
1. General.
{See Sec. 129, F.S.R., Vol. I, 1923, and Sees. 147-148, F.S.R., Vol. II,
L924 ; also Sees. 66-67, Man. of Movement (War), 1923.]
2. The control, provision and despatch of the sea transport of military
forces is the d u t y of the Board of Trade, but the Admiralty is responsible
for their protection while a t sea and for their oversea communications. The
military requirements are notified to the Board of Trade representatives by
the Q.M.G., except in the case of embarkations and landings in the presence
of the enemy, when the General Staff is responsible for the arrangements.
The general division of duties between the sea transport authorities and.the
array is dealt with in the Manual of Movement (War).
Conveyance is provided by :—
Transports (ships wholly engaged for Government service).
Freightships (ships in which conveyance is engaged for troops, but not
necessarily wholly at the disposal of the Government).
DIMENSIONS OF VESSELS.
3. SHIPS,
Draught, length and breadth in relation to tonnage.
Draught.
Feet
15
19
21
23
25
26
27
28
28
29
length.
Feet
230
280
330
360
390
420
440
450
460
470
(b 28/332JQ
Breadth.
Gross
Tonnage.
Feet
S3
39
44
48
51 *
53
55
57
58
59
Tons
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
Net Tonnage.
•Average 67 per
cent,
of
the
gross tonnage.
Chap. 5, S e c . 27.
122
4 . BARGES
The following are types of sea-going barges :—
Across Channel {AC) Barges.—
Length between perpendiculars
Breadth
Moulded depth . .
..
Draught, light
..
Draught, when loaded with 200 tons d.w.
Draught, light
..
Feet. Inches.
124
0
16
4
7
9
2
0
6
0
2
0
These vessels can safely be loaded up t o 180 tons avoirdupois for journeys
such as thode across the English Channel, and to 280 tons for inland waterways.
Port-Discharge (PD) Barges.
Feet, Inches,
Length between perpendiculars
^
..
..
180
0
Breadth
..
31
0
Moulded depth . .
13
9
Draught, light, 3 feet forward, 3 feet 7 inches aft.
Draught, loaded, 10 feet forward, 11 feet 0 inches aft.
These barges can safely be loaded to 1,000 tons for cross-Channel or long
Bea haul.
TONNAGE DEFINITIONS AND CALCULATIONS.
5. Gross tonnage is the total cubic space below deck and the total cubic
contents of closed spaces above deck in hundreds of cubic feet.
Net tonnage is the gross tonnage minus all spaces not available for freight
and after deducting accommodation for the crew and space occupied by
engine rooms, coal bunkers, &c., in hundreds of cubic feet.
Shipping tonnage is a measure of cubic capacity. (Freight is paid for by
the freight-ton of 40 cubic feet of cargo space, or 20 cwt. avoirdupois, whichever is to ship's advantage.)
6. I n making calculations as t o the gross tonnage required b y a body of
troops, 2 tons for each man and 8 tons for each horse should normally be allowed
for short voyages, and in emergencies 5 tons for each man and 19 tons for each
horse for ocean voyages. For an ocean voyage when troops are conveyed
in transports fitted up in accordance with the sea transport regulations, the
tonnage required for troops may be 8 tons for each man, but the figure varies
with the nature of the ship. For short voyages, no fittings for men would be
provided, and only the simplest fittings, consistent with security, for the
horses.
7. As regards the tonnage required for guns, vehicles, &c., the stowage of
such articles depends solely on clear floor space. I n some ships the hold?
may be only just deep enough to take the highest vehicles, while in others
there may be 9 or 10 feet to spare, yet only the same number of vehicles can
be stowed in each. A cargo ship of 4,000 gross tonnage will usually take
about 50 heavy lorries. The space required for the various vehicles in common
use can be obtained from the tables given in Sees. 29, 1, and 32, 20 and 21,
whilst the table in para. 8 gives particulars of freight tonnage of various
supplies and stores.
Chap. 5, S e c . 27
and
28.
123
8 . DEADWEIGHT AND SHIPPING TONNAGE CONVERSION TABLEP.
Article.
Deadweight.
2.
1.
Aeroplanes (in cases)
Aeroplane engines
Ammunition (filled shell)
Ammunition (S.A.A.) . .
Building material and other stores . .
Barrows, stable
fCheese . .
Clothing
Coal
"..
Coke
Flour
Furniture
Hay (steam pressed)
Hay (hydra ulically pressed) ; .
Mails
Heat—
Beef . .
• Mutton
Mechanical transport vehicles
Miscellaneous M.T. stores
Miscellaneous other stores
Oats
..
. . . .
Other rations
Ordnance stores
Petrol and lubricating oil
Potatoes
Bails
Sugar
Timber
Tyres (pneumatic)
„
(solid)
Wagons (in components)
Large Nissen H u t Sections for each 60
feet by 20 feet hut
Small Nissen H u t Sections for each 30
feet by 16 feet h u t
tons., cwts.
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Equivalent in
shipping tons,
at 40 cubic feet
to the ton.*
3.
4.
tons.
19
1
cubic feet.
20
—
27
—
1
1
i3
1
3
1
2
1
17
4
2
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
12
4
2
2
2
2
1
2
6
5}
16
3
0
—
14
20
30
—
5
—
10
—
5
10
—
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
— .
20
—
13
20
—
1
3
5
2
2
—
—
—
—
20
7
—
* The figures in columns 8 and 4 are explained by the following example:—
1 1 ton avoirdupois, of cheese, measures 70f.c., so that its shipping measurement, or freight tonnage, would be 1 ton (of 40 f.c.) and 30 f ,c., or
freight
tons.
POINTS I N INSPECTING SHITS.
0.—i. Accommodation.—Officers, warrant officers and staff-serjcants, other
ranks, sick, prison, state of hammocks and bedding, state of troop decks,
places for kits and accoutrements, mess utensils, arm racks, magazines,
baggage space, cooking galleys.
ii. Water.—Amount, quality, arrangements for issue.
iii. Provisions.—Quality, sufficiency.
iv. Sanitary.—Latrines, urinals.
v. Boats.—Condition.
Number. Life-saving apparatus.
vi. Animals.—Pens, fittings, forage, places for saddlery, harness, «tc.,
space for transport wagons, hoisting appliances.
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) Q
M
2
Chap. 5, S e c , 27.
124
vil. Derricks should be numerous and well fitted, with clear leads for whips
and guys, and with rapid running winches to each hatch.
viii. Hatches should be free from obstruction.
Ail hatches and decks to be worked during disembarkation should be
well lighted.
ix. Numerous boat ropes and rope ladders should be available, also accommodation ladders at each gangway.
TROOPS ON BOARD
SHIP—EMBARKING.
10.—i. Embark complete units on one ship, if possible.
11, Remember to embark last what is wanted first on disembarking.
iii. Men must be told off to their messes.' (Better if done in consultation
with first officer of the ship.)
iv. Stow sea-kit bags over mess tables.
v. Stow kit bags and waterproof bags in men's kit room.
vi. Stow rifles (without slings), properly labelled, in the armoury, if there
is one, and the ammunition in the magazine.
vil. Take over the bedding and utensils.
'
viii. Instruct men how to roll bedding and sling hammocks.
ix. P u t ship's halters on horses and unsaddle and unharness.
x. See to stowing of saddlery and harness. (Put together in sets and
label.)
xi. See to safe stowing of vehicles.
xii. Leave 5 per cent, spare animal accommodation, half on each side.
xiii. Troops are generally told off into guard (detailed daily), swabbers, «tc.
Tell off troop deck serjeants, sanitary Serjeant, police, stable guard, <fec.
xiv. Tell off troops to collision, Are, and boat stations, in consultation with
ship's authorities.
xv. Acquaint troops with ship's orders, fire signals, Ac.
BUGLE CALLS ON BOARD SHIP.
11. Standfast
Continue
Itetiie
4 Gs
4t Gs. and double
Charge
Lights out
Fire Alarm
Alarm
..
..
..
..
..
..
''
..
Silence ; Man overboard, everyone to
remain still. Those below will
.remain there,
Carry on. (Continue your business.)
Everyone off upper deck but the sunrcl,
Sweepers.
Swabbers.
Permission to smoke.
Stop smoking. .
1 "Fire ("Troops,
a t t h e i r as detailed, fall in
r
respective stations,
j collision ^ A ] 1 Q f c h e r s r e m a i n q u i e t <
SHIP'S SIGNALS.
12.—i. Several short blasts on siren or whistle, or the sounding of gongs or buzzers where these are
fitted
..
. . Collision
ii.. Ship's bell rung violently, strokes in quick succession
. . Fire.
At these signals, all buglers will sound the necessary calls by order of the ship's
officer on the bridge.
iii. Eor man overboard. At the cry of man overboard the siren or whistle
is sounded, alternate long and short blasts. At this signal the bugler on
duty near the bridge will, if ordered by the ship's officer of the watch, at once
sound the " stand fast."
C h a p . 5, S e c . 2 7and28.
125
SLINGING HORSES ON TO A SHIP.*
13. Horses should be unsaddled and unharnessed ; ship's halter under headcollar, bridoon reins loose but knotted.
Do not let horse's head loose, fasten with double guy, one end being held
on shore or in the boat, and one on the ship. Horses may fall backwards
out of slings, but will never fall forward.
Five men required,, one at head, one at each side, one at the breast, and
one behind.
Pass one end of sling under belly, both ends being brought up to meet
over back ; one man passes his loop through the other loop, and it is received
by the man on the other side, who hauls it through, hooking the tackle to
it, both men holding the ends of the sling till taut. Men at the breast and
behind then bring their ropes round and make them fast to grummets, and
the man who holds the horse's head makes fast the guys to the ship's headcollar.
Fasten the breech band and the breast girth securely.
Blindfold timid or restive horses.
Two or three men must be at the hatchway and between the decks to guide
the horse when being lowered.
Provide a mat or straw for the horse to alight on, and select a reliable
man to hold the head firmly to prevent struggling on first reaching the deck.
HORSES ON BOARD S H I P — P O I N T S TO BE ATTENDED TO.
14.—1. Sufficient and good water and forage.
ii. Fittings good, sound and up to date.
iii. Animals properly sheltered.
Iv. Stores good and sufficient.
v. Ventilation good, windsails and fans in good order.
vi. Feeding. Average Tation, V and £ ; at first few oats and much bran,
gradually increase oats. Full ration of hay all through.
vii. Clean ship frequently. Exercise on deck in fine weather. Cinders
spread will give horses foothold.
viii. Put horses next to each other who are accustomed to each other.
ix. Hand rub horses' legs regularly.
x. I n rough weather, sacks filled with anything soft will often preserve
horses from injur}'.
SLINGING CAMELS ON TO A SHIP.
15. Camels about to be slung should be provided with a head collar with rope
attached (a rope fastened round the neck so as not to form a slip knot and
then a loop taken round the jaw, will answer equally well). This prevents
the men from hanging on to the nose-rope to steady the animal when first
taken off its feet—a practice which is likely to tear out the nose-rope and cause
great suffering to the animal.
Camels should be made to kneel down under the crane. The man holding
the nose-rope then blindfolds the animal; two other men stand, one on
each forearm, to prevent its rising; others slip the sling under the belly.
Vicious animals require to have their mouths secured, and forelegs tied with
a rope passing over the neck from one leg to the other. If necessary, two
men stand one on each hock, to render the animal powerless.
CAMELS ON BOARD S H I P — P O I N T S TO BE ATTENDED TO.
16. Large-sized camels should be accommodated in.tlie lower hold, mediumeized camels on the upper deck, small camels between decks ; those on upper
• If a ship is alongside a quay, horses can be more rapidly embarked by
walking them on board by means of brows.
126
Chap. 5, S e c . 27;
decks heads outwards, those between decks and in holds heads inwards •
8 feet 6 inches between decks is sufficient to enable camels to stand up.
'
On board, camels should be ranged side by side, round the sides of the
ship and made to sit, with their forelegs tied. No animals should be stowed
amidships.
The decks should be covered with at least 6 inches of sand, and there
should be i ton sand for each camel, in addition, for a voyage not exceeding
15 days.
Every camel should be fitted with harness, secured to rings or spars lashed
on to the deck, to prevent the animals from shifting their positions.
In fine weather the leg ropes of a few at a time may be cast off and the
animals allowed to rise ; and, if space allows, they should be exercised.
During the voyage great care should be paid to the bend of the knees,
and hocks. The sand the animals lie upon works into these parts, and if
they be kept sitting for long periods, it causes irritation and the formation of
ulcers.
SLINGING GUNS AND VEHICLES.
17. For slinging guns and limbers, the following method has been found
to work well.
Two 4-inch slings are used, one round each axle tree, and a hook-rope hooked
into the trail eye. The bights of the sling placed on the tackle hook, to which
the end of the hook rope is also made fast.
Limbers have their poles removed and are slung in the same way as guns,
the hook rope in their case being made fast to the tackle hook from the trail
hook.
G.S. wagons and pontoon wagons can be slung by four chain slings connected
to a common link at one end and provided with hooks at the other j these
four hooks are then secured to all four wheels of the vehicle.
Vehicles will, as a rule, be embarked loaded on their wheels, all loose
articles being stowed within the wagons, the poles and shafts being removed
before slinging. If the wheels are removed, special care must be taken t h a t
the linch pins and washers arc put away. Those carriages first required
on disembarkation should be stowed away last.
MOVEMENTS BY RAIL.
See Sec. 36, F.S.R., Vol. 1,1923, and Sec. 162-164, F.S.R., Vol. 11,1924 ; also
Sees. 78-102, Manual of Movement (War), 1923.
GENERAL R U L E S .
18. Arrangements with the technical railway authorities are made by
officers of the movement control staff (railway branch) termed Railway Transport Officers, acting as intermediaries on behalf of the troops.
The duties of movement control staff officers in connection with railways
are:—
i. To ascertain daily the transport requirements of formations, services
and departments.
ii. To combine the demands into such a form as can be acted upon by
the technical railway officials and will make the least tax on the
railway's resources, and to present the demand to the proper technical authority.
iii. To arrange with the technical authorities when and where empty
conveyances will be ready to be loaded, and at what times they
will leave the loading points, and to notify the indenting formations and services accordingly.
iv. To ensure that every consignment is despatched to the destination
named by the indenting authority and to keep any records required
in connection with payment for transport.
C h a p . 5, S e c . 2 7and28.
127
v. I n the case of moves of personnel and animals:—i
(a) To have a representative present at the entrainment to be a
medium of communication between the troops and the
technical services, and to advise the 0 . 0 . as to the actual
entrainment;
(b) To arrange for any necessary halts for rest, food, water, &c.,
en route, and advise meal stations of the time of departure
and probable time of arrival.
vi. To t advise the destination stations of all departures with the probable
time of arrival, and to advise the local staff and representatives
oi services of anticipated arrivals.
vii. To.see t h a t the working of the railway is not hampered in any way.
viil. Generally to see t h a t the most effective military use of the railway
iB made in accordance with the principles laid down in the Manual
of Movement.
19. The following are some of the points t h a t have to be observed by the
troops :—•
i. Railway arrangements must not be interfered with except for essential
tactical reasons.
ii. All rolling stock must be unloaded with as little deljty as possible.
iii. Troops must not occupy railway buildings or use the railway water
supply without the authority of a movement control staff officer.
Iv. Troops must not take tarpaulins, coal, wood or other railway property,
v . Staff officers and advance parties should be sent ahead of formations
to make arrangements for the troops in the area to which they
are moving.
ROLLING STOCK FOE TROOP MOVEMENTS.
20. I n Great Britain coaches are normally used for the conveyance of
personnel, and cattle trucks for animals ; on the Continent covered vans are
normally used for the conveyance of men and animals alternatively.
Consequently, on the Continent, trains required for strategical moves can
be limited to one or two types capable of carrying conveniently and without
undue waste of accommodation the various units to be moved.
I n Great Britain, however, the usual practice is to give the railway authorities the actual composition of the units in officers, other ranks, animals, distinguishing between H.D. and other types, four-wheel vehicles, two-wheel
vehicles, tons of baggage or stores, and also particulars of any special loads
such as guns, dragons or tanks.
The railway officials then marshal their trains so as to suit each particular
unit to be conveyed.
21. For emergency schemes, however, in order to simplify the railway arrangements and to shorten the notice at which a move can commence or the time
in which a succession of moves can be carried out, it may be advantageous
to hold ready trains of certain types one or other of which will accommodate
the majority of units or their sub-divisions. Any units which do not accord
with the accommodation on the type of trains must be split up or amalgamated
so as t o be fitted into these trains, or trains of special composition must be
marshalled for t h e m ; consultation with the railway authorities will be
necessary to ascertain which of these alternatives will best meet the military
requirements.
TYPES OF TRAINS, GREAT BRITAIN.
22. Limiting the number to 4 types, the following are the trains of British
rolling stock best adapted for War Est., 1923, Parts XXIILA and XXIVA.
Accommodation is not included for M.T. details, as it is assumed t h a t they
will generally move by road.
128
Chap. 5, S e c . 27.
Wo. of
Trains of
each type
for a
8
2
20
10
9
Cavalry
Division.
Vehicle Trucks.
6
Infantry
Division.
Cattle Trucks.
58
2 140
s Infantry Battalion
24
.,
2 124
' Div. H.Q., H.Q. Div. It.A. and"
Engrs.
1 Inf. Bde. H.Q. and Bde. Sig.
Sec.
J Field Battery, I t . A .
| Pack Battery, B.A. . .
i No. 1, 2'or 3 Sees., D.A.C.
No. 4 Sec., D.A.C.
1 Field Coy., B.B.
1 Div. Sigs. (less Bde. Sees.)
! Div. Train (H.T. ech'.)
i Cav. Div. Train (H.T. ech.)
. 1 Field Ambulance
54
6
49
14
Total Wheels.
Compartments.
1
Brake Vans.
Train Type No.
Composition.
Typical train loads.
3
20
21
3
2 136
' C a v . Div. H.Q. and Provost"
Sqn.
1 Cav. Bde. H.Q. and Signal
Troop
Cav. Begt., £ H.Q. and H.Q.
Wing
. Cav, Begt., 1 Squadron
4
16
17
9
2 144
Battery,
A.
..
I | Amn. Coin., R.H.A. . .
i Field Sqn., It.E.
..
JCav.Div.Sigs.(less Bde.Troops)
L1 Cav. Field Ambulance..
J
Total trains per division
..
78
09
23. Troops trains must not be much larger than the above on British rail
ways, or they will not be capable of being readily handled. Even the above
trains may be too heavy or too long to be worked over certain limited sections
of the line, in such case t h e railway companies will advise as to t h e expedients to overcome t h e dtfiiculty.
These railway train tables are based on the following data, which are the
average figures for British rolling stock:—
6 officers to each compartment, 4 in the case of corridor stock.
8 men to each compartment, 6 in t h e case of corridor stock.
8 horses or mules or 6 heavy draught to each cattle truck.
3 staff officers' chargers t o each horse box.
1 four-wheeled vehicle, or 1 gun and limber to each open truck ; 3 two
wheeled vehicles or the equivalent to each open truck, except that
2 trucks are allowed for each 60-pdr. gun and limber; 5 t o 8
compartments to a coach; and 3 trucks to 2 pontoons.
C h a p . 5, S a c . 27.
129
24. The miJitary authorities will usethe'trains as best suits theirrequirements
e.g., it may be necessary to put men into cattle trucks or brake vans, or bicycles'
Ac., into compartments.
'
• Should it be necessary to put men in trucks, allow 5J square feet to each
mau, but lor journeys over 8 hours' duration 7 square feet to each man Bhould
usually be allowed. "When journeys exceed 8 hours or when rolling stock is
not scarce, only 75 per cent, of the numbers of personnel given above should
be allotted to each compartment. Horses are allowed 7 feet 2 inches ; width
saddled, 2 feet 6 inches, unsaddled or unharnessed,- 2 feet 3 inches. If-time
permits, and the movement of troops is to continue over a long period on long
journeys abroad, covered trucks can be fitted with the required ventilation,
and with removable planks resting on wood chocks, which form an upper tier
of sleeping-berths. The compartments of passenger coaches can be similarly
fitted. This may be necessary in climates where the men travel in open trucks,
or hammocks may be slung. In passenger coaches on British railways men
will not be able to sleep with the accommodation allowed.
HUBOPEAN CONTINENTAL BOLLING STOCK.
25. Covered van carries
..
..
..
36-40 men, or
6 H.D. horses, or
8 L.D. horses or mules.
AMERICAN OK CANADIAN ROLLING STOCK.
26. Passenger car carries (day coach)
Ordinary stock car carries . .
Fiat and Gondola cars (37 feet by 8J feet) .
Baggage cor (70 feet by 8 feet by 6 feet) .
60 to 70 men.
20 horses unsaddled, or
16 ,,
saddled.
30 tons.
30 tons.
SOUTH AFIIICAN STOCK.
.27. (On South Africanraiiways the length of trains for men Is usually limited
to about 8 to 10 vehicles, and 30 short trucks in a goods train.)
Normal Accommodation.
Passenger Stock
First class
, 6 compartments. Sitting, 36, or Lying, 24.
.
6£
compartments.
Sitting, 52, or Lying, 39.
Second class
("First Class. Sitting, 18,or Lying, 12.
Composite saloon . ' \ Second class. Sitting, 27, or Lying, 21.
•Third class . .
. 71 compartments. Sitting, 60, or Lying, 15.
Other Stock
Long bogies
60 to 80,000 lbs. \ These are not suitable t o
Short bogies
;
22,000 lbs.
J accommodate men.
(-Short sheep
22,600 lbs. or 8 horses, or 10 mules or 20 men.
Bogie cattle truck.
40,009 lbs. or 16 horses, or 20 mules or 40 men.
Short cattle truck.
22,000 lbs. or 8 horses, or 10 mules or 20 men.
Horse boxes
Seldom available. Accommodate 2, 3 or 4 horses
with proportion of attendants.
* For short coaches, calculate half this accommodation. This type is
being eliminated. I t is intended eventually to adopt the long coach as a
standard type.
t Not procurable on Natal lines,
•
130
Chap. 5 , S e c . 27;
GAUGES.
28. Great Britain, the continent of Europe other than the countries mentioned below, Egypt,* Canada, U.S.A., Roumania, f t .
Finland and a part of Latvia. . .
..
..
..
..
4
Russia
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
5
Ireland
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
6
Ceylon
..
..
6
J a p a n ..
..
.,
..
,.
..
..
..
. 3
Australia, N.S. Wales
..
3 ft. 6 ins. and 4
,,
Victoria and South Australia ..
..
..
..
5
,,
Queensland and W. Australia
3
Hew Zealand
3
Spain and Portugal ..
..
..
..
..
..
..
6
Asiatic Turkey
..
..
..
..
4 ft. 8^ ins. and
3
India
2 ft. 6 ins., 3 ft. 3f ins., and
5
S. Africa
8
Width of roadway required for a single line (4 ft.
in. gauge) 12
„
„
,,
double „
23
ins.
8$
0
8
6
6
3
6
6
6
.6}
6
6
0
0
GENERAL R U L E S FOR ENTRAINING.
29.—i. Send an officer ahead to ascertain facilities for entraining.
ii. Tell off parties to entrain horses, guns and wagons.
iii. Entrain baggage, horses, guns and wagons simultaneously, before
troops arrive, if possible.
iv. Detail men in charge of trucks containing horses or vehicles.
v. Pack guns and wagons, fully equipped, and fasten securely to trucks.
Occupy spare space with gear, kits, &c. Pontoon wagons may require an
empty truck between pairs of trucks.
vi. Guns or vehicles should be in the same trains as their teams; and horses
in the same train as the men who ride or drive them.
vii. Inflammable stores should be at the rear of a train, and risk of fire
should be guarded against if in open trucks.
viii. Water carts should be filled before entraining.
ENTRAINMENT OF HORSES OR MULES.
30. Under active service conditions, horses will be entrained saddled or harnessed, pack saddles only being removed, unless orders to the contrary are
issued.
i. On long journeys under peace conditions, saddlery and harness may be
removed at the discretion of the officer under whose authority the orders for
the movement, are issued. The risk of animals being separated from their
equipment, or of causing delay in the service of trains, must be taken into
account.
ii. The closer horses are packed the quieter they travel. If there are not
sufficient horses to fill a truck they should be closed up to one end and a
sliding bar used to secure them.
iii. Horses' heads should all face in the same direction and be fastened
by headropes to the rings or bars, leaving about 9 inches of slack, whether the
horses are harnessed or not. If watering or feeding is to be carried out
on the journey, the animals should be entrained so as to face the platform at
which they are to be watered or fed. It. is immaterial whether the horses'
heads face the second line of rail.
iv. To prevent delay at places where horses are to be fed, nosebags should
be filled before starting. Hay or straw should be loaded up separately and
covered for fear of fire.
* Also 3 feet 6 inches.
C h a p . 5, S e c . 2 7and28.
131
LOADING OF VEHICLES.
, v. On British railways there are facilities for end-loading and unloading
at most important stations. On some railways, however, side-loading is
preferred as being quicker if a large number of vehicles have to be handled
and the platform accommodation is adequate to permit of simultaneous
work.
vi. When side-loading is to be done, and the platform length is insufficient
or the trucks provided have fixed sides and drop ends, it can be performed as
shown in Fig. 12, provided that there is at least one side and end-loading truck
on the train.
Fia. 12..
Lo^d. Truck^Cnd
Load?
rruck^^^eiEnd-^Load^uck,
WmMm^Mm.
If trucks have fixed ends and falling sides, so that each has to be loaded
singly, the wheel tracks of a G.S. wagon would be as shown on truck A in
Fig. 12, with the rear wheels in front.
The wheel track should be taken as close to the end of the truck at x
(Fig. 12) as possible.
When side-loading guns on to short trucks, singly, load the gun first and
push the wheels up against the front end of the truck with the muzzle pointing
to the front. There is then room' to bring the limber, with its pole fixed,
on to the truck, and by working the pole about to get the off wheel round
the trail of the gun. A drag rope should be made fast to the tip of the pole
whilst manoeuvring the limber to prevent its going over backwards. The
trail should then be drawn back under the limber and the pole lashed to the
gun.
vii. I t m a y happen t h a t when vehicles have to be side-loaded a considerable difference in height will be found to exist between the levels of the
truck floor and that of the platform.
This may be got over as shown iu Fig. 13 by the use of a whole sleeper (6)
and a second sleeper (a) sawn or split diagonally lengthwise.
I n this case it is best to back the vehicle on to the truck so t h a t the larger
pair of wheels leads.
FIG. 13.
132
Ohap. 5 , S e c . 2 7 ;
vili. Some railway companies have fixed hinged loading plates on each of
their end-loading trucks.
. If- they have not, either loading plates have to be provided, or a sleeper
or the cross bars of the truck may be laid across the buffers.
Vehicles with large wheels will cross a considerable gap on emergency.
TIMES FOR ENTRAINMENT OF U N I T S .
31. Under favourable conditions, i.e., high-level platforms and other
facilities, the time required to entrain i battalion infantry with regimental
transport, or a squadron cavalry, or £ battery artillery, is about 45 minutes.
I n the absence of high-level platforms, portable or improvised ramps will
have to be used for the entrainment of animals and vehicles, and the above
times wi|l have to be at least doubled in the case of portable ramps and trebled
for improvised ramps.
If trains have to be broken up for loading, and then reformed before
despatch, at least half an hour must be allowed between time of completion of
entrainment and time of despatch."
••
R U L E S FOR DETRAINING.
32.—i, Ascertain arrangements, for detraining and clearing the railway
station before troops leave carriages.
ii. Detail unloading parties for animals, vehicles and baggage.
iii. Detrain animals, guns, vehicles and stores simultaneously when possible.
iv. All personnel, animals and vehicles to be moved clear of the station
and immediate approaches as soon as possible to the place of assembly outside.
INLAND WATERWAYS AND DOCKS.
General.
33. i. Inland water transport.—The head of this service will command and
administer all military personnel employed in the working of waterways and
their machinery, and on running repairs to craft and plant, and will be
responsible to the Q.H.G. through the D.G.T. for the operation of inland
waterways. When the extent to which I.W.T. can be employed does not
necessitate a separate organization, this service will be amalgamated with
the railway service.
ii. Docks,—.A docks service will be constituted overseas to provide for
the transit of stores through the dock area. The head of this service will be
responsible to the Q.H.G. through the D.G.T. This service will not ordinarily,
be concerned with the disembarkation or re-embarkation of personnel, or
aniriials, which will remaiu the duty of the movement control staff.
The docks service will arrange with the sea transport staff for the most
convenient berthing for store ships, and with the railways, inland water
transport or other transportation agencies for passing stores through dock
areas.
The head of this service will command and administer all technical military
personnel employed in the operation and running repairs of cranes, conveyors, &c., b u t will obtain unskilled labour from the Controller of Labour,
or the commander of the base sub-area.
DOCK WORKING.
34. Rate of discharge of ships.—An out-turn of 10 tons a crane an hour is an
average rate for all classes of cargo, whilst 26 tons a crane an hour should be
reached With cargo such as grain in sacks.
Cranes mounted on rails are preferable as they give more latitude than
fixed cranes. An average of one wharf crane for every 100 feet of quay is
desirable, this would usually allow one crane for each hold, and is a satisfactory
equipment.
Floating cranes in addition may be required for special purposes.
C h a p . 5, S e c . 2 7 a n d 28.
133
35. Discharge of British Army traffic at French ports in 1917 and 1918 :—
1917.
1918.
Tons an hour. Tons an hour.
i. Each vessel an hour in port
..
..
20
30
ii. Each vessel a working hour. Average for
all traffics
33-45
47-62
Ammunition
..
..
..
60-76
60-76
Bulk oats
42-59
65-119 (by
pneumatic
elevator)
Coal
27-61
40-80
Engineer stores
18-28
30-45
Pood supplies
..
..
..
42-57
48-60
Hay
40-51
46-74
Ordnance stores
23-41
27-42
iii. For each stevedore an hour discharging.
All traffic
1-05-1-25. 1 - 1 0 - 1 ' 6 0
iv. For each shore labourer an hour. All
traffic
..
..
..
...
. . 0•48-0•67
0*59-0-68
v. 1 to 1*2 tons discharge for every lineal foot of quay for each shift
represented the average of a good working day for all ports used
for the British Army.
BOOK LABOUR.
36. i. Double handling.—As a rule stores have to be moved from the quays
to transit sheds or dumps before they can be loaded in railway
wagons for despatch to depots.
ii. Shifts.—It has often been found most economical t o unload or
load for only one shift per diem of 8 t o 10 hours duration according
to the pressure. The remainder of the 24 hours a t the quays
and the transit sheds or dumi>s is taken up by the railway staff in
moving the rolling stock which has been filled or emptied and
replacing it.
iii. Individual performance.—On an average a dock labourer can handle
2 tons of stores per diem.
28. R O A D
TRANSPORT
(See Note " A " on page iii)
(See Chap. XVIII, F.S.31., Vol. I, 1923.)
1. The D.S.T. is responsible to the Q.M.G.
i. That in the absence of special instructions, all available transport is
allotted in the manner best calculated to further the C.-in-C.'s
intentions.
ii. As regards horse transport of R.A.S.C. units, t h a t complete turnouts (vehicles, harness, animals and drivers) are available for the
prompt replacement of all deficiencies.
iii. As regards M.T., for the provision, maintenance and technical inspection of vehicles other than those belonging to the H.A.F., tanks.
track and semi-track vehicles, and vehicles peculiar to fighting
units ; and for maintaining in the theatre of war such reserves of
vehicles, equipment and stores as may be necessary to replace
wastage.
2. Transport is allotted to units as shown in War Establishments, and this
will not be departed from without authority.
134
Chap. 5 , S e c . 27;
HORSED TRANSPORT.
Ge n eral funct ions.
3. i. Horsed transport is principally used for the first line transport of units
(see para. 7 el seq). A company of horse transport is included in the War Establishment of divisional trains. Its functions are to deliver food or S.A.A. to
divisional units which, owing to the nature of the ground, <fcc., cannot be
reached by lorry. Auxiliary horse transport companies are used for the
carriage of blankets, or, when not required for this purpose, may be utilised for
general duties, where distances are short or roads are unsuitable for M.T.
ii. The light draught horse should draw a weight of about 1,200 lbs. and
the heavy draught one of a^out 1,600 lbs. for approximately 20 miles a day.
The light draught horse walks about 3 miles an hour and trots at an average
rate of 6 miles. He requires a space of 3 feet by 9 feet standing, and, at sea,
a measurement space of 9 tons.
MECHANICAL TRANSPORT.
General functions.
4. i. Mechanical transport, which includes.wheeled tractors for the haulage
of heavy guns, armoured cars, steam and petrol-driven lorries (including
those carrying technically fitted bodies), motor cars, motor omnibuses, motor
ambulances, motor vans, water tank lorries, and motor cycles, may be either
formed into M.T. companies or allotted as first line transport to various units
and services according to the nature of their duties and the manner in which
they are required to move and operate.
ii. Normally, M.T. lorry companies work from a railhead either to a point
as close to the troops whom they are to supply as road conditions and,tactical
considerations will permit, or to a point at which their loads are transferred
to a divisional train. In a theatre of war devoid of, or ill-equipped with
railways, tlicy may form a link between the base and the troops, or between
two other natures of transport, as circumstances may render necessary,
iii. For continuous daily work of this nature, M.T. lorries when operating
in convoys should not, except in an emergency, be required to travel more than
fifty miles a day.
iv. Although M.T. is allotted for a special purpose (e.g., for the conveyancc
of supplies, ammunition, ordnance stores, &c.), it may frequently be found,
especially in position warfare, that other means of transport such as light
railways and horse transport can be utilised, thus allowing M.T. to be used
for general purposes, or to be held in reserve.
v. For all troop movements by M.T. a " M . T . programme" should bo
drawn up.
ORGANIZATION.
6, M.T, companies are divided into four classes :—
i. Divisional train companies for the carriage of baggage, supplies and
S.A.A.
ii. Field M.T. companies, for specific duties in connection with the
supply of food, ammunition, stores an 1 mails to units or formations,
iii. Reserve M.T. companies, allotted by G.H.Q. to formations for general
duties or to meet special services, as the Q.M.G. may decide.
W- L. of C. M.T. companies, for general transport duties in L. of 0. areas.
Chap. 5, S e c .27and28.
135
6. The duties and allotment of M.T. companies and divisional trains are
as follows:—
G.H.Q.
M.T.
Army
M.T.
troops,
Coy.*
troops,
Coy.*
Conveyance of supplies, baggage One Coy. to G.H.Q. and
one to each army.
and stores for G.H.Q. and
army
headquarters,
and
such units directly under
these headquarters which have
no transport specially allotted
to them for these services.
Corps troops,
M.T. Coy.*
Similar to above and also for One to each corps.
the carriage of ammunition for
non-divisional units of Corps
Cavalry, field brigades R.A.,
and for A.A. artillery and
R.A.]?.
Cavalry divi- Carriage of ammunition, sup- One for each cavalry
division.
sional M.T.
plies, ordnance stores and
Coy.*
mails from railhead to refilling One for each division.
Divisional
points, or to units first line
M.T. Coy*
transport if so required, and
distance from railhead permits refilling points to be
dispensed with.
cavalry
Carriage oi baggage for troops, One in each
division and
division
and of S.A.A. and supplies
respectively.
from refilling point to first
line transport of units, or, if
distance from railhead permits
refilling point to be dispensed
with, from railhead, working
on double echelon system with
cavalry divisional and divisional M.T. Coys., respectively.
artil- Carriage of supplies, baggage One to each corps.
and ammunition from railM.T.
head to forward dumps or to
battery transport vehicles or
to the guns.
Cavalry divisional train*
Divisional
train.*
Medium
lery
Coy.*
Tank
Corps,
M.T. Coy.*
Reserve
Coys.
M.T.
Water
tank
M.T. Coy.
Transport
of
ammunition, One for each group of twosupplies and stores, including tank battalions, and two
A.C. Coys.
spare parts for Royal Tank
Corps units.
Allotted to armies and
General duties.
corps as G.H.Q. may
decide.
These companies have no
supply personnel included
in their establishment.
Sterilization and carriage of Divided into sections comwater.
posed of lorries carrying
chemicals, sterilizing and
laboratory plant, and
lorries fitted with water
tanks. Includes R.A.M.C.
personnel for technical
water duties.
Chap. 5, S e c . 27;
136
Nomenclature.
Duties.
Ke'marks and Allotment.
Motor ambu- Transport of sick and wounded Allotted to armies and
corps as necessary.
lance
convoys.
Auxiliary Am- Transport of sick and wounded Allotted to L. of C. areas
bulaucc Car
as necessary.
in L. of C. areas.
Coys.
N.B.—AIL the above marked * are Field M.T. companies.
The lorries of the above units, when not fully employed on their normal
duties, are available for general transport duties.
TRANSPORT ALLOTTED TO F I E L D UNITS.
7. The transport of field units is divided into two classes :—
i. First-line transport which is an integral part of the war organization
of fighting units, without which they cannot perform their tactical
functions, and by which they must at all times be accompanied.
Under certain circumstances it may be advisable to divide the
first-line transport into two portions, one of which accompanies
the unit whilst the other moves brigaded in rear of the formation.
First-line transport may include horse-drawn or mechanically
propelled vehicles or both, gun carriages, ammunition wagons,
pack animals, limbered or G.S. wagons or carts carrying ammunition, tools, machine guns, technical stores or medical equipment,
telephone wagons, water carts, travelling kitchens and mess
caTts.
ii. Second-line transport which is essential to the war organization of
field units, but by which they need not at all times be accompanied.
I n the case of fighting units of cavalry divisions and divisions,
this transport is described as " Train transport," and is concentrated in, and operated by, transport units designated Divisional
Trains.
TRAINS.
(See ateo para. 12.)
8. i. A train is allotted to each cavalry division and division for carrying
S.A.A., explosives, grenades, baggage, stores and supplies, and, in the case of
cavalry divisions, horse rugs when ordered.
A divisional train consists of headquarters, two M.T. companies and one
horse transport company. Ho. 1 company (M.T.) carries S.A.A. and baggage.
No. 2 company (M.T.) carries supplies. Both Nos. 1 and 2 companies are
divided into four sections.
No. 1 section serves divisional troops ; Nos. 2, 3 and 4 sections each serve
a cavalry or infantry brigade.
No. 3 company is a reserve of horse-drawn vehicles intended to function
on occasions when first line transport of units cannot be reached by M.T,
This company can carry, as a maximum, rations and forage, excluding hay,
for three infantry brigade headquarters and twelve battalions, or three
cavalry brigade headquarters and nine cavalry regiments. Alternatively, it
can be used for carriage of baggage or S.A.A.
ii. Regulations concerning the supply of ammunition are given in Sec. 33.
iii. The O.C. the divisional train is responsible to the divisional commander
for all executive duties in connection with transport.
While the responsibility for the care and efficiency of the personnel, animals,
vehicles and equipment of all first liue transport rests with unit commanders,
tfie O t C, divisional train will render assistance in the technical supervision
Chap. 5, S e c .27and28.
137
of the first line transport of dismounted units other than infantry as directed
by the divisional commander.
iv. When circumstances permit, each company of the divisional train will
march complete with baggage and supply sections. Occasions will arise,
however, when it is necessary to fix the positions of refilling points some
distance in rear of the fighting troops, and in these circumstances the supply
sections may have to march separately. The transport of each brigade
group marches in the same order within its train unit as the group, &c.,
which it serves.
v. When there is no likelihood of encountering the enemy, the smaller the
distance that intervenes between the troops and their transport the better.
In such' circumstances, the baggage and supply sections of the train may
march in rear of their respective infantry brigades and of the artillery.
When there is a possibility t h a t the enemy may be met, transport must not
follow the main body of the troops so closely as to hamper its movements
or those of neighbouring formations, and it should, as a rule, march grouped
in rear of the column, the supply sections in advance of the baggage sections.
TRANSPORT
FOR
SAVAGE
WARFARE
AND
COUNTRIES.
OPERATIONS
IN
TROPICAL
9. i. Packmules, camels, donkeys, ox wagons and other vehicles suitable
to the country, may have to replace the normal systems. Reindeer and dogdrawn sleighs have been used, and carrier transport is commonly employed
in bush warfare.
Under such conditions the available means must be organized into suitable
units, as soon as a force is ordered to take the field.
ii. Carriers.—Carriers are organized into gangs of 20, 1 headman to each
gang; 4 gangs to a section; 1 conductor to a section ; carriers are numbered
and registered and given a disc with number.
(B
28/332)Q
9
S p 3 ^ p'
a
" ^ S
^
td5
*
3
p
^
?
Is £
<3
coO
O
e.
'ft
M bd
o cu
o C>
t
w '
w H-
Cart, Maltese.
Cart,
Cart,
Cart,
Cart,
Officers'
Officers' mess.
tool, E..E.
water tank.'
Wagon, limbered, G.S.
Cart, ambulance, horse.
Cart, water tank. •
Kitchen, travelling.
Wagon, ambulance.
Wagon, limbered, I'd. Arty.
Wagon, limbered, G.S.
Wagon, telephone.
Gun or How. with limber.
Wagon, Amn„ with limber.
Wagon, cable.
Wagon, limbered, G.S.
8-Horsed.—Gun or How., with
limber
to
Spare horses.
Pack animals.
Ambulance.
Car.
Car, armoured.
Lorry, heavy or light.
Lorry, water tank, 150 gals.
Van.
Motor cycle.
Bicycles.
en M C5 c
'83 '
O 0
S
'S
DEITO
881
Chap. 5, S e c . 28.
. 00 CD tO OS r-l M rH
HriHiflH
•ao
HH^ H
•e
^
.a
r-i I-It* P-t
<»•
-a -
i
M
. -M -M
®
•
rl
•5
O
to
St
t>.
o
o
o ° WOB c
•dS^II
16
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) 0
N i!
5
M J J H ^ H K ' t-0'
H»
*
O
oo
. .
. . ,
. . ^ h-> M . • .
rfx M W • ' « • •
'.
. •. •.
•. •. M
CO h-1 . . .
« oo^oco. « •
.
• O
00 IP to GO |<5 Wi • CO •
OJ
Unit.
Non-Divisional.
1. Car Coy
Horse Transport Coy.
. Field Bde. H.Q.
Fd. 18-pdr. Bty.
..
„ 4 -5-in. How. Bty
„ Total Bde.
,, Bde. Amm. Col.
Med. 60-pdr. Bty. ..
„
6-in.ch How.
Bty. (H.D.)
6-inch How.
Bty. (T.D.)..
„
CD •
'.
Cart, Maltese.
3*
O
Cart, officers' mess.
©
ft '
Cart, ambulance, horse.
Wagon, G,S.
§ ro
CO
Cart, water tank.
Kitchen, travelling.
Wagon, limbered. G.S.
Cart, tool, 11,13.
Kitchen, travelling.
Wagon, ca ble.
Wagon, amn., with limber.
ft
Wagon, limbered, F d . Arty.
Wagon, limbered, GS.
Wagon, telephone.
Gun or How., with limber.
Wagon, amn., with limber.
02 OS
ft
Wagon, limbered, G.S.
Wagon, cable.
8-horsed.—Gun or How. with limber.
Spare horses (b).
Car.
Car, armoured.
Lorry, heavy or light.
Lorry, tractor.
Lorry, trailer.
Trailer, bridging.
Trailer, kitchen.
oo
M
OS M MCo' ' ' • • ©1
'8Z
"O0S> ' S "CFE^O
Trailer, water tank.
Van.
Fighting.
Company Commanders.
Wireless.
Salvage.
Towing.
Motor cycle.
Bicycles.
jn
H
S
Ef
„
„
Total Bde.
„
Survey Coys.
Engrs.Army Troops Coy.
2
2 2
8
*8
14
8 17 3
1
2
"5
4
1.
„
E. & M. Coy.
„
light bridging park.
M.T. Coy. Cav. Div.
„
„ Corps Troops
„
., Divisional
„
,, Med. Arty.
,,
„ Tank Corps
Signals, corps
„
A.A. Coy.
Tank Coy. . .
„ Total Bn.
„ Salvage Coy.
(a) Boring rigs.
3
2
4
2
6
1
6
2
1
1
1
(b) Wot including spare riding horses.
34 8 c 8
1
'7
121
2 3
4
1
20
7
10
48
20 4 ai
32
95
103
117
68
62
23
13
5
1
1 3
1 5
1 3
1 3
2 3
22
3
1 4 16 1
4 18 64 4 5
4 4
"s ' i
15 34
2
14
10
13
9
14
43 30
30 28
4 2
20 8
14
13
1
1
1
1
9
1
4
(c) Howitzer carriages -with limbers.
4
4
7
16
O
6"
•s
03
to
03
12. TRAIN TRANSPORT.
2-
Motor.
horse.
Unit.
2
Cavalry. Divisional
Train
Train H.Q.
Ko. 1 (M.T.) Coy. for baggage and S.AA.
Coy. H.Q
,,
Sec for D i r . Troops
,,
Sec. for Bde.
No. 2 (M.T.) Coy. for supplies and forage
Coy. H.Q
,,
Sec. for Div. Troops
,,
Sec. for Bde.
S o . 3 (H.T.) Coy
"
Additional for horse rugs, when ordered
„
for Great War (for Divisional
employment troop)
85
18
1
103
7
18
26a
124
6
16
25
31
218
Divisional
Train
12
56
6
28
3S b
96
6
57
11
56
(a) Includes 6 for S.A.A. and 1 for grenades,
Unit.
M.T. Coys.,
11
245
1
148
Train H.Q.
No. 1 (M.T.) Coy. for baggage and S.A.A,
Coy. H.Q
Sec. for Div. Troops
Sec. for Bde.
No. 2 (M.T.) Coy. for supplies
Coy. H.Q
Sec. for Div. Troops
Sec. for Bde.
No. 3'(H.T.) Coy
Car,
heavy.
Car,
light.
Lorries,
. heavy.
I
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
90
112
96
61
44
(b) Includes 12 for S.A.A. and 2 for grenades.
Lorry,
store.
Lorry,
workshop.
Trailer,
field
kitchen.
Trailer,
water
tank.
Vans,
heavy.
Lorry,
petrol
tank.
Motor
cycles.
Motor
cycle
with
sidecar.
1
1
1
1
3"
9
10
7
6
9
5
S
3
3
5
R.A.S.C.:
Cavalry Div.
Divisional
Corps Troops
Medium Arty.
Tank Corps
..
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
3
3;
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
5
3
3
29. D E T A I L S O F V E H I C L E S I N C O M M O N
USE
1 . VEHICLES.
Q.F. 13-pdr. gun, carriage and
limber
Q.F. 13-pdr. ammunition wagon
and limber.
Q.F. 18-pdr. gun and limber on
Marks T* to I I carriage
Q.F. 18-pdr. gun and limber on
Ma-k HIt carriage
Q.F. 18-pdr. gun and limber on
Marks TV carriage
Q.F. 18-pdr. guu and limber on
Mark V carriage
Q.F. 18-pdr. ammunition wagon
and limber
Q.F. 3 • 7-inch howitzer
Q.F. 3-inch 20-cwt. A.A. gun on—
(a) Motor lorry . .
(b) Travelling platform
Q.F. 4-5-inch howitzer carriage
and limber
Q.F. 4 • 5-inch howitzer wagon and
limber
B.L. 60-pdr. gun and limber on
Mark 1 carriage
•Weight,
equipped
without
load.
Weight,
equipped
with load.
cwts. qrs. lbs.
cwts. qrs. lbs.
32
3 14
_
Length
Width,
(exclusive
maximum. of shafts
or pole).
ft. ins.
6 3
ft. ins.
17 2
Height,
maximum.
f t . ins.
4 Site)
32
3
23
6
3
.42
3
13
6
3
18
9
4
8f(a)
42
1 25
6 8
20
2
4
8(a)
42
1
19
6
8
20
2
4
8(a)
45
2
12
6
8
21
7
4
8
38
3
17
6
3
12 11
5
o
15
0
25
6
et
10 10
4
183
0
0(c)
7 10
18 11}
9
126
41
2
0
S
Q
7 5(d)
6 H
19
16
8*
8
40
2
2
6
Si
14
3
106
2
1
6 6i
28
6
12
9
5
0
Remarks.
(a) Travelling position,
sights, removed.
(b) Height of limber.
sill
1A
10(a)
lli(i>)
0
4 Hi
5
8(a)
t With shield.
(c) Includes, driver gun
crew, fuel and ammunition.
{d) Wheel tracks.
ii.L. (iO-pdj. gun and limber on
Mark I I I carriage
B.L. 60-pdr. gun and limber on
Mark IV carriage
B.L. 60-pdr. ammunition wagon
and limber
B.L. 6-inch 26-cvrt. howitzer,
carriage and limber
B.L. 6-inch Mark X I X gun,
carriage and limber
B.L. 8-inch howitzer, carriage and
limber
B.L. 9-2-inch howitzer, carriage
and limber, transporting—
Bed
Body and cradle
Wagon, transporting, howitzer . .
Cart, ambulance, horse
dart, Maltese, Marks V* and VI . .
Cart, officers, mess . .
., tip, G.S
Cart, tool, R.E., Mark I I , .
Cart, water, tank, Mark IV
„
„
Marks V and V*
Mark VI
Mark VII
Kitchen, travelling, Mark I
,. I I
Wagon, airline
Wagon, ambulance. Mark VI
Wagon, ambulance, light, Mark I—
With No. 159 wheels
...
46
Wagon, cable
6 7
24
8
0
24 S
m
6
Si
18
9}
8
7 10
22
6
54(a) (/) To top of bale hoops.
8
82
6i
li
0
4(a)
3(a)
8 0
9
9
9
6
6
6
§
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
3
9
19 8
16 6
8
5
10(e)
;20
1
1
10
2i
2j
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
6 S
6 5
6
(e) Includes shafts.
4
a
14
14
16
12
12
l i ( . 0 (g) Chimney down.
3
11
10
10
11
11
(A) Hood folded.
5to)
5 (g)
4
5(A)
9 (i)
(i) Roof lowered.
7 1 (£-)
7 1(h)
4 8
body
(jfc) Cover and hoops
5 8
removed.
^limber
7
S
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
7
9
7
9
•«P
in
to
<0
1. VEHICLES—continued,
Weight
equipped
. without
load.
Wagon, G.S., Mark V i n . .
„
VITI» . .
„
VIII**
„ '.IX
..
„
X
..
„
X*
..
Wagon, light, spring, R..E.
Wagon, limbered, G.S.
Wagon, limbered, F.A.
Wagon, limbered, A. or S.
Wagon,
limbered,
wireless
telegraph— ,
Wagon
..
'..
Limber
Wagon, poncuon, Mark VIX
Wagon, telephone
„
Wagon, W / T , 120 watts
..
!.
Weight
equipped
with load.
cwts.
17
18
18
17
17
17
10
13
13
13
qrs.
0
0
1
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
lbs.
5
5
27
5
5
7
7
21
21
21
22
' 8
24
0
3
0
7
0
0
13
. o
0
cwts .
47
48
48
47
-47
47
21
43
43
43
qrs. lbs.
0
6
0
5
1 27
2
5
0
5
0
7
7
0 21
0 21
0 21
}44
0
0
61
3
0
(Light bridge
load)
17
0
0
Length
Width,
(exclusive
maximum. of shafts
or pole).
It. ins.
6
6 2 it
6 ii
6 2i
6 2*
0 4"
6 i
6 4
6 4
6 4
Height,
maximum.
ft. ins.
12 10
13 6
14 1
13 9
13 6 i
13 6 i
10 7"
13 9
13 9
13 9
ft. ins.
7 5
7 5
7 5
7 7(1)
6 11©
6 11(1)
6 5(fc)
4 8
4 8
4 S
<s 3
6 8
16
16
0
6J
7
5
6
4
14
2
7
3
13
9
0
1
n
ft
J body
1 5 6
1 limber
9 5
Remarks.
(1) Without spare wheel
fitted.
2. liOAMUQ TiBXJES FOB. VEHICLES,
i. Ammunition.
a
v
H.T. Vehicles.
M.T. Vehicles.
Nature.
8-cwt.
15-cwt.
30-cwt.
(a)
3-ton.
G.S.
Wagon.
200
100
24
50
3 • 7 inch howitzerf
Rounds
216
108
48
24
3 ioch-20 cwt. gun
624
312
156
84
6-pdr. Q.F
224
144
144
76
36
13-pdr. gun (in boxes of 4)
224
112
108
60
28
18-pdr. gun (in boxes of 4)* . .
120
66
66
30
16
4 • 5 inch howitzer (in boxes of 2)*
80
' 40
40
20
11
60-pdr. B.L. gun
52
25
25
12
7
6-inch howitzer
40
24
24
12
7
6-inch gun . .
26
14
12
3
" 7
8-inch howitzer
18
10
9
2
5
6-2-inch howitzer
14
9-2-inch gun . .
5
12-inch howitzer
6
J.2-incli gun
3
1
14-inch gun
.:
2
1
13-Inch howitzer
210
450
225
117
54
3-inch mortar . .
100
50
50
25
14
6-inch nlotrar
224
112
56
30
Grenades (No. 36) (boxes of 12)
187
84
47
25
Cartridges, signal, 1-inch (boxes of 150)
„
small arm, -303-inch ball, charger and
bandolier packed (boxes of 1,000
rounds)
..
..
••
••
small arm, -303-inch ball, btmdle
80
II
packed (boxes of 1,248 rounds)
384
50
pistol, webley, ball (boxes of 276 rounds)
+ Pddfe animals of the 3 • 7-inch howitzer carry a load of 8 rounds for 3 • / -inch howitzer.
df The 30-cwt lorry will take half the load of a 3-ton lorry except where shown above
* i m m m i t t a darrfed m Battery and D.A.C. for each gun, for Q.F. 13-i>dr. and 4-5-mch howitzer.
L.G.S.
Wagon.
60
180
112
100
60
26
16
16
72
40 .
22
22
•6
2, LOADING TABLES FOR VEHICLES—continued.
Battery—
13-pdr. . .
18-pdr. . .
4 -5-inch
Rounds
14
20
H.E.
101.
40
32
10
i2
Bounds
24
14
18
20
~6
H.E.
101.
30
24
24
20
16
46
32
" A " Echelon
L.G.S. Wagons.
" A " Echelon
Ammunition Wagons.
D.A.C.—
18-pdr. . .
4-5-inch
3-7-inch
H.E.
106.
2 wagon bodies
(4-5-inch Howitzer = 2}).
| Shrapnel.
H.E.
106.
Smoke.
2 wagon limbers
(4-5-inch Howitzer = 2£).
Gun Limber.
Shrapnel.
|
Ammunition—continued.
Shrapnel.
i.
10
30
1,080
4
10
H.E.
106.
H.E.
101.
30
2S
48
16
32
Total.
176
172
132
" B " Echelon
3-ton Lorries.
16
20
24
10
64
6
20
128
168
1,080
a
ii. Ordnance and Engineering
Stores.
One-Man Load.
Vehicles.
Articles.
No.
" A " frames (small)
Axes, pick, 4 i lbs., complete..
,,
,,
with heads and helves separate
Bags, picketing (in bundles of 25)
Bags, sand, common (in bales of 250)
Board, trench . .
..
..
..
. . 6 feet long
Blankets (in bales of 25)
„
(in bundles of 10) . .
..
..
Canvas, Hessian, roll . .
3 feet wide, 110 yds. in roll
Canvas, rot-proof, roll
5 feet wide, 120 yds. in roll
Cement, cask . .
..
..
..
400 lbs.
Chalk, sand, gravel
Earth
..
..
Felt, roll
..
..
3 feet wide, 25 yds. in roll
Guns, Lewis, in chest with spare parts and 20 magazines . .
Guns, Vickers, in chest (less tripod) with 16 boxes of belt
ammunition (each belt 250 rounds), and 1 spare parts
box
Grenades, hand or rifle No. 36
boxes
Iron, corrugated, 6-feet sheets
Width, i feet 2 inches
„
„
7-feet sheets
..
,,
,,
„
,,
9-feet sheets
..
„
„
Joists, steel, rolled, 9 feet by 5 inches by 3 inches 100 lbs.
Kettles, camp, 12-quart (in cradles of 5)
Metal, expanded, sheets (6 feet 6 inches by 3 feet)
in cases of 20 sheets
I
I
Weight,
lbs.
3-ton. (a)
lorry.
30
32
120
960
31
5,400
15,500
120-150
1,050
L000
35
50 yds.
30 yds.
32
i Sand Bag.
I Sand Bag.
10
35
li
1
28
32
27
40U
14
2 i cub. yds.
21 cub. yds.
22
20
350
300
200
56
430
a ,xr
G.S. Wagon.
n
40
300
350
7,500
35—40
325
500
27
14
5
2 cub. yd.
•:l cub. yd.
66
8
120
100
70
19
. 140
70
40
224
280
3,000
20
200
180
20
14
4
$ cub.
i cub.
22
6
2 . LOADIKG TABLES FOE VEHICLES—continued.
ii. Ordnance and Engineering
Stores—continued.
One-Man, Load.
Vehicles.
Articles.
No.
•Nails
Pegs, picketing, with rope loop
Pickets, angle, long . .
..
..
. . 6 feet long
,,
medium
..
3 feet 6 inches long
,,
short . .
..
..
. . 2 feet long
Pickets, brushwood, long 5 feet long, 31 t o 4 inches diam.
,,
,,
short
2 feet 6 inches long, 2} t o 3 inches diam.
Posts, screw, wire entanglement, T y p e - " A , " long
,,
,,
,,
" B , " short
Prop, pit, 9 feet long . .
..
..
6 inches in diam.
Prop, pit, 9 feet long . .
..
..
9 inches in diam.
Rifles, boxed, with bayonet and scabbard (boxes of 20)
boxes
Rifles, loose
Ropes, picketing, 4 feet 9 inchcs (in bundles of 10)
Rugs, horse, large (in bales of 10) . .
,,
,, small (in bundles of 5 ) . .
Sheets, ground (in bundles of 5)
Shelter, steel, corrugated, large
,,
,,
„
small
Shoes, horse (in boxes)
..
..
..
. . boxes
Shovels, G.S
tStaples, NO.YS.W.GV
V.
'.'.
'.'.
S.A.A. (charger packed in canvas bandolier)
'.'.
'.'.
rounds
4
8
4
3
4
10
10
7
500
Weight,
lbs.
38
36
30
34
34
37
35
i-ton.(a)
G.S. Wagon.
Limbered
G.S. Wagon.
400
700
1,350
1,125
150
250
500
200
1,000
130
200
400
150
1,800
650
1,640
75
600
390
980
. 25
12
500
200
550
600
20
650
4,500
670
730
1,920
1
5
84
1,500
1,050
8
250
2,000
230
300
700
-1
1"
40
400
220
180
1,400
120
90
400
i
24
300
140
O
fcr
p
•s
S.A.A. (bundle packed in sandbags)
Tapes, tracing
Tents, C.S.L. (complete)
„
Marquee
Timber, 4 inches by 2 i n c h e s . .
..
9 inches b y 3 i n c h e s . .
480
in 50-yard rolls
12
22
9 lbs. per f t . r u n
. . coils
Wire, barbed, coils (28 lbs. each)
..
„ entanglements (French) (bundles)
weight of coil about 19£ lbs.
„
„
,,
80
2,250 f t .
run
600 f t .
run
240
400 coils
or
80 bundles
21 lbs. per f t . r u n
„
(French) spikes
..
..
100
„
(French) staples
. . boxes of 300
galvanized, iroD, coil . .
..
No. 14 S.W.G.
netting, roll
..
3 feet wide, 50 yds. in roll
2fi yds.
35 boxes
100 coils
70
28
8
750 f t .
run
200 f t .
run
120.
150 coils
or
30 bundles
6,000
12 boxes
40 coils
24
(a) The 30-cwt. lorry will t a k e half the load of a 3-ton lorry.
.
» Nails, 1 inch = 800 t o 1 l b . ; 2 inch, 122 t o 1 l b . ; 3 inch, 52 to 1 l b . ; 4 inch, 30 t o 1 l b . ; 5 inch, 20 to 1 l b . ; 6 inch,
14 t o 1 lb.
t Staples, No. S S.W.G., 50 to 1 lb.
2 . LOADING TABHES FOR VEHICLES—continued
ill.
Supplies.
M.T. Vehicles.
H . T . Vehicles.
Articles.
Biscuits (66-lb. cases)
Bran (sacks of 112 lbs.)
Grocery rations (cases weighing 46} lbs. = 46
rations)
H a y (bales of 156 lbs )
Meat, preserved (56-lb. ases)
Oats (80-lb. sacks)
..
„ (100-lb. sacks) . .
Petrol tins (filled) (cas ;s of 4 two-gallon tins,
weighing 100 lbs.) . .
Petrol tins, empty
Hum, cases of 2 one-gallon jaxs, weighing 52 l b s . . .
Salt (80-lb. bags)
Sugar (80-lb. bags)
..
8-cwt.
15-owt.
3-ton.
(a)
G.S.
Wagon.
Limbered
G.S.
Wagon.
Cases
Sacks
13
6
24
10
06
40
50
20
24
10
Cases
Bales
Cases
Sacks
19
4
16
11
9
36
12
30
20
16
144
30
120
34
67
72
16
60
40
36
40
8
40
26
24
12
200
17
11
11
22
250
33
21
21
90
720
134
84
84
48
187
67
42
42
26
102
33
30
30
t)
Cases
Cases
Bags
(a) The 30-cwt. lorry can take half the load of a 3-ton lorry.
Chap. 5, S e c .27and28.
30. M E T H O D
153
OF P A C K I N G AND W E I G H T
OF
AMMUNITION
Nature of package and contents.
Size of package in
inches.
Weights,
Length.
Width.
Q.F., 3-pdr., 2-cwt.—
16 rounds, A.P., in Box, Ammunition, C. 176A
12 rounds, A.P., in Box, Ammunition C. 181
24-6
15-7
13 7
20-5
14-75
10 75
Q.F., 6-pdr.—
12 rounds, powder filled shell, in box
23' 0
14-4
11 6
127
8
Q.F., 13-pdr. gun—
4 rounds, H.E., Shrapnel or Star, in
Box, Ammunition, C. 5,3 Mk. I l l ,
A or B
25-125
10-375
9 3
86
0
29-0
10-0
10 025 112
0
29'0
10-0
10 625 109
0
27'125
10-562
10 562 120
0
Q.F., 3-inch, 20 cwt., A.A. gun—
4 complete rounds, H.E., in Box,
Ammunition, Q.F., 3-inch, 20cwt., C. 147
32-5
12-05
11 90
Q.F., 3-7-lnch Howitzer—
2 shell, H.E., in Box, projectile,
P. 16
10 cartridges, 9 ozs., in Box, cartridge, C. 27
16-5
10-876
7 0
40 0
25'9
11-9
7 0
45 0
17'75
19-625
17-75
12-625
8 375 120 0
7 75
82 0
23-4
13-125
7 5
56 0
21-0
5-76
5 75
24
0
19-6
6-26
60
0
140
0
Q.F., 18-pdr. gun—
4 rounds, H.E., Shrapnel, smoke,
in 'Box, Ammunition, C. 151
- 4 rounds, H . E . or Shrapnel, reduced
charges, in Box, Ammunition,
C. J51
4 rounds, H . E . stream line in Box,
Ammunition, C. 159
Q.F., 4-5-inch Howitzer—
3 shell, in Box, projectile, P. 30
2 shell, in Box, projectile, P. 10
10 cartridges, 15 ozs. 14 drs., in
Box, cartridge, C. 19
5 cartridges, 15 ozs. 14 drs., in
Carrier, cartridge
B.L., 60-pdr. gun—
1 shell (fitted with grummets)
10 cartridges, 9-ibs. 7 ozs. in Case,
(
powder, M.L., whole, C. 118,
'
Mk. IV
10 cartridges, 9 lbs. 7 ozs., in Box,
cartridge, C. 125
12 cartridges, 6 lbs. 6 ozs., in Case,
powder, M.L. whole C. 118,
Mk. IV
(B
28/332)Q
Depth. Lbs. ozs
134
0
99 0
123 0
17-0
17-6
21 6
23-0
18-125
16- 125 131 10
17-0
17-6
21- 6
126
0
154
[Chap. 5, S e e s . 30 a n d 31.
Nature of package and contents.
BbL.,6-inch gun—
1 shell (fitted with grummets)
y 1 cartridge, 23 lbs., in Cylinder,
cartridge, No. 44 . .
B.L., 6-inch, 26-cwt. Howitzer—
1 shell (fitted with grummets)
25 cartridges, 4 lbs. 11 ozs. 8 drs.,
in Box, cartridge, C. 1, Mk. I a . .
20 cartridges, 4 lbs. 11 ozs. 8 drs.,
in Box, cartridge, C. 140
20 cartridges, 5 lbs. 12 ozs., in Box,
cartridge, C. 1, Mk. 1
20 cartridges, 5 lbs. 12 ozs., in Box,
cartridge, C. 1, Mk. 1A . .
B . L . , S - k i c h Howitzer—
1 shell (fitted with grummets)
4 cartridges, 17 lbs. 8 ozs., in Box,
cartridge, C. 141
2 cartridges, 17 lbs. 8 ozs., in
Cylinder, cartridge, No. 50
Size of package in
inches.
Length.
Width.
Weight.
Depth. Lbs. ozs.
23' 25
7-5
100
0
20'7
6-75
34
0
100
0
23-5
7-5
26-875
17-625
17-0
158 12
28-375
20-5
11-75
135 H i
24-75
17-1
17-0
134
0
26-875
17-625
17-0
134
0
200
0
31-25
9-5
31-9
13-375
32-5
9-75
34-0
10-75
32-5
8-75
•303-inch—
1,000rounds,Mk. VII, in bandoliers
or charger cases, in Box, A.S.A.
(or signal cartridges), H. 1
1,248 rounds, Mk. VII, in cartons in
Box, A.S.A., H. 13
17-0
8-5
10-85
75 8
17-0
8-6
10-85
85
0
•455-inch, pistol—
2,160 rounds, in Box, A.S.A. (or
signal cartridges), H . 1
276 rounds, bundles, In Box, A.S.A.,
Pistol, H . 9
17-0
8-5
10-86
120
8
8-9
6-7
4-8
B.L., 9-2-inch Howitzer—
1 shell (fitted with grummets)
1 cartridge, 23 lbs. 12 ozs., in
Cylinder, cartridge, No. 50
SMALL ARM
13-25
113 12
48 12
—
200
0
37
4
CARTRIDGES.
17
8
I
YL-
31. C O N V O Y S
(See Sec. 16, 20.)
SYSTEM OF CONVOYS.
1. i. Horsed convoys may be worked on any of the three following
systems :—
(a) Through convoys.
(b) Staging.
(c) Meeting.
ii. The through convoy system consists in the same animals and vcliicles
being employed from the' start of the convoy until its arrival at its destination.
C h a p . 5 , S e c .27and28.
155
iii. The staging system consists in the division of the road into stages,
the same section cf the transport working over the same ground, proceeding
laden and returning empty.
Iv. The meeting system is that by which two sections, one laden and the
tofcher unladen, meet daily at a fixed point between two stages, when loads
are transferred or vehicles exchanged, each section returning .t.oMJa respective
stage. (In this case it must be remembered that, to transfer loads, hi hour
is required, and, to exchange vehicles, animals, harness, Ac. must be similar)
v. The through convoy system is generally adopted in front of the advanced
depot, and the staging or meeting systems on the lines of communication.
SHORT R U L E S FOR CONVOYS ON THE MARCH.
2. 1. Do not load till necessary
ii. Keep strict march discipline, no straggling or opening out.
iii. Pace of a column is the pace of the slowest animal, which must lead.
iv. If possible, do not put animals of different paces (e.g., mules and camels)
In the same convoy.
v. "With pack animals each driver must lead his own animals (usually
three). Xong strings are prohibited.
vl. No man will be allowed to ride on transport vehicles, Brakesmen will
march clear of the vehicles except when operating the brakes.
vii. Keep some spare animals and vehicles in rear of the column.
viii. Remove breakdowns from the roadway.
ix. Do not make long halts unless animals can be outspanned and paclis
removed, but take advantage of every facility for watering.
x. Halt on the far side of a defile or obstacle.
xi. Do not t r o t to make up lost ground.
xii. If the whole or part of a convoy is in danger of falling into the enemy's
hands it should be destroyed or made unserviceable.
xiii. When paths are narrow, certain sections of the path must be kept for
certain definite hours for convoys moving i i a given direction.
xiv. I n laager leave space (5 yards) between wagons and line occupied by
troops.
xv. Cooking places and latrines outside laager; no fires near wagons.
xvi. All ranks should be warned of procedure to be followed in event of
an air attack.
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 )
Q
156
4
CHAPTER
VI.
32. S M A L L A R M S A N D
GUNS
1. RIFLES, SHOUT, MAGAZINE, LEE-ENFIELD, MARK I I I .
Weight, without bayonet
with
„
Length, without
,,
,,
with
,,
..
..
..
..
8 lbs. 10£ ozs. (MK. I l l * = 9 lbs. 0 ozs.)
9 lbs. 11J- ozs. (Mk. I I I * = 1 0 lbs. 1 oz.)
3 feet 8A- inches.
5 feet
inches.
RIFLES, MAGAZINE, '303-INCH, PATTERN 1 9 1 4 , MARK I * W ( T ) . .
(FOR SNIPING PURPOSES ONLY).
Weight, without bayonet
with
„
Length, without
,,
,,
with
,,
..
..
..
..
9 lbs.
ozs
10 lbs. 11£ ozs.
3 feet 10J inches.
6 feet 3J inches.
SIGHT, TELESCOPIC, MODEL 1 9 1 8 .
Weight, without case . .
,,
with
,, . .
..
..
15 ozs.
1 lb. 11£ ozs.
PISTOL, REVOLVER, •455-INCH WEBLEY, 6-INCH BARREL, MK< V I .
v
Weight
Length . .
..
Length diagonally
Depth
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
2 lbs. 6£ ozs.
l i t inches.
12£ inches.
5g Inches.
MARK V I I -303-INCH AMMUNITION.
Cartridge.—Weight 381-5 grains (20 rounds in chargers, about 20 ozs.);
[ length, 3-037 inches.
Bullet.—Length, 1 -28 inches ; weight, 174 grains.
Charge.—Cordite M.D.T., about 37-5 grains.
Muzzle velocity.—2,440 feet a second.
MARK Y I I z •303-INCII AMMUNITION.
. Cartridge.—Weight, 385 grains (20 rounds in chargers, about 20 ozs,);
length, 3-037 inches.
JiuUet.—Length, 1 - 2 8 inches ; weight, 174 grains.
Charge.—N.C.(Z.), about 41 grains.
Muzzle velocity.—2,440 feet a second.
MARK I
-455-INCH AMMUNITION.
Cartridge.—Weight, 337-5 grains (12 rounds in carton, about 10 ozs.).
Bullet.—Length, -875-inch; weight, 265 grains.
Charge.—Cordite
about 6-0 grains.
Muzzle velocity, 610 f/s.
NOTES ON THE USE OF THE RIFLE,
2. Dangerous space decreases as the range increases.
E x t e n t of dangerous space- depends o n : —
i. Firer's position.
ii. Height of object Area at.
Ui. Flatness of trajectory,
iv. Conformation of ground.
The nearer the rifle is to the ground
..
,,
The higher the object fired at . .
..
,.
. . I the greater is the
The flatter the trajectory
dangerous space,
The more nearly th« slope of the ground conforms to |
the angle at which the bullet falls
,,
C h a p . 5, S e c .27and28.
157
3. The accuracy of the short magazine L.E. rifle is generally affected by
fixing the bayonet, and the following table will be found useful when bayonets
ore fixed:—
Range.
Adjust Sights t o
Aim.'
100 yards
200 yards
200 yards
200 yards
1 foot helow figure.
1 \ feet helow figure.
300 yards
200 yards
1 foot below figure.
There may be slight differences with different rifles, so the above is only
A gi\ide.
4. More elevation is required;—
When the weather is cold,
l e s s elevation is required:—
i. When the weather is hot.
ii. High up above sea level.
iii. Piring up or down hill.
5. Rifles are sighted for the following conditions
Barometric pressure 30 inches (sea level).
Thermometer, 60° Fahrenheit.
Still air.
A horizontal line of sight.
6. The following rule for correction in case of variations in barometric
pressure is approximately correct:—
For every inch the barometer rises above or falls below 30°, add, or
deduct,
yards for every 100 yards of rango.
Tims a deduction of some 30 yards in 2,000 yards range would be required
if the barometer stood at 20 inches.
The barometer falls about 1 inch for every 1,000 feet of altitude. Therefore, at an altitude of 5,000 feet, it would, in normal conditions of weather,
stand at 25 inches, and for 2,000 yards range the elevation required would
be 1,850 yards only.
Every degree which the temperature rises or falls above or below 60°
necessitates the subtraction or addition of about one-tentli of a yard for
each 100 yards of range.
7. Ranges of objects are over-estimated:—
When kneeling or lying.
When both background and object are of a similar colour.
On broken ground.'
When looking over a valley or undulating ground.
I n T avenues, long streets, or ravines.
W hen the object lies in the shade.
When the object is viewed in mist or failing light.
When the object is only partially seen.
When heat is rising from the ground.
8. Ranges of objects are under-estimated:—
When the sun is behind the observer.
I n bright light or clear atmosphere.
When background and object are of different colours.
When the intervening ground is level or covered with snow,
When looking over water or a deep chasm.
When looking upwards or downwards,
When the object is large.
Chap. 5, S e c .
158
27.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST GAS.
9. Preventive measures in anticipation of gas attacks.—
i. Gas defensive measures will be incorporated frequently in all exercises
involving the use of all small arm weapons without exceptions.
I n framing competitions for weapon training on service lines, tho
importance of efficiency in gas defensive measures combined with
the use of the weapon should be taken into account.
The chief constituents of poison gas exert a strongly corrosive
action on metals. The following precautions must therefore be
taken to protect rifles, machine guns, and ammunition from the
effects of gas.
Machine guns and rifles must be carefully cleaned and well
oiled. Arms generally, the metal parts particularly, must be
carefully protected by greasing them, and whenever possible,
by keeping them completely covered. A mineral oil must be used
for this purpose. I n damp weather arms may rust or Corrode so
badly as to refuse to act.
ii. The effects of corrosion of ammunition are even more serious than
the direct effects of gas upon the arms themselves.
iii. S.A.A.boxes must be kept closed, and be made as gastight as possible.
Vickers belts should be kept in their boxes until actually required.
Wooden belt boxes are comparatively gastight, but the metal
boxes should be made so by inserting strips of flannelette.
Lewl3 gun magazines should be kept in some form of box,
the joints of which are made gastight by inserting strips of
flannelette.
A recess should be made for storing ammunition and guns.
A blanket curtain, hung over the opening and moistened with
water, will greatly assist in keeping the gas out.
10. Remedial measures after gas attacks.—
i, After a gas attack rifles and guns must be cleaned and re-oiled. The
oil coating is, however, only a temporary preventative and is
effective for not more t h a n 12 hours ; corrosion continues slowly
even after oiling, and may ultimately put the gun out of action.
Guns should, therefore, be stripped on the first available opportunity, and all working parts cleaned in boiling water and a little
. soda.
II. Ammunition must be carefully examined and all rounds affected by
gas replaced by new ones. The old rounds should be cleaned and
expended aa soon as possible.
Hate of firing during gas attacks.—
Sapid fire does not disperse gas clouds.
A slow rate of fire from rifles and occasional short bursts from machine
guns lessen the chance of jamming and tend to steady the men.
RANGE CARDS.
11. Any available method such as Tange-flnding instruments, maps, information from Lewis or Vickers machine gunners, field artillery, &c., should be
made use of for obtaining the correct ranges.
12. Attack range card.—The successive steps are as follows :—
1. Ranges to be taken in direct line of advance.
ii. Draw parallel lines and fill in starting point and objective.
iii. Take or estimate range to the objective and write in right-hand
column.
iv. Select some object about half way to the objective a n d e n t e r i t s range
in right-hand column. Select and take ranges to other intermediate objects, choosing those which will be easily recognised
when reached and which appear to be near a probable fire position.
V. A simple subtraction sum will give the range from each successive
object to the objective. Enter the ranges so obtained in left-hand
column and strike out those in the right-hand column.
C h a p . 5, S e c .27and28.
0
100
700
000
1300
1700
Objective (described)
159
»t
«,
k»
Small Wood
Ruined Farm
Mound, Bush on Top
I/inc of Poplars
Starting Point (described)
..
..
1700
1600
1000
800
400
0
13. Defence range card.—The succcssive steps are as follows :—
i. Mark off on the card the position from which the ranges are taken.
ii. Describe position accurately.
iii. Select an unmistakable object and draw a thick setting ray to it.
iv. Draw two semicircles representing 600 and 1,000 yards, respectively.
v. Select objects to range on, e.g., positions which the enemy may
occupy or have to pass ; obstacles; a bridge; a gap in a thick
hedge; barbed-wirefenccs.
vi. Keeping the card on the setting ray. draw range rays to show the
direction of objects and of lengths corresponding t o the distances.
vii. Write short descriptions in horizontal block lettering or draw representations.
viii. Write the distance to each object against the description.
Notes.—(a) Avoid too many rays, which are apt to become confusing.
(6) When possible, make one ray do for more than one object.
FIG. 14.
RANGE CARDS I N DEFENCE.
Li
I500"
CHURCH
" A " taken from right end of York Trench. V,y B. & S. llange-finder.
Made out by Sjt. Brown. 21/3/17.
Chap. 5, S e c , 27.
160
14. Fig. 14 shows an example of a range card made for use in defence.
The ranges in this case are supposed to be taken from the point A. The
direction line from A to the church is drawn thicker than the other lines to
facilitate " s e t t i n g " the range card in the same manner in which a map is
set. When the card is set for the point from which the ranges are taken—
which is noted on the card—by pointing the thick direction line on the church,
the other direction lines will indicate the direction and the ranges of the other
points marked on the card.
15. The point from which the ranges are taken should always be described
clearly on the card to facilitate setting it.
MACHINE GUNS.
16. '303-inch Vickers Machine Gun, Mark I,
Weight 31 lbs. (including muzzle attachment 1 lb.) and 41 lbs. with
water in casing. Rate of fire normal, 500 rounds a minute. Weight of gun
and mounting (less water, 10 lbs.) = 84£ lbs.
Mounting—Tripod -303-inch M.G., Mk. IV—constructed for 13 degrees
elevation and 25 degrees depression, or 43 degrees elevation and 65 degrees
depression, according to the position ol the legs and the height of the axis
of the gun from the ground.
Range, 2,900 yards at 11 degrees 15 minutes elevation.
Muzzle velocity with Mk. VTI ammunition = 2,440 f.s.; bullet = 174
gra'na ; charge — 38 grains cordite.
•303-tncft Lewis Machine Gun, Mk. I.
Weight of gun, about 26 lbs.; length, 50\ inches ; barrel = 26J inches ;
rifling, right-handed ; number of grooves = 4. Gas-operated and air-cooled.
Weight of gun and mounting:—
Mount field Lewis, -303-inch M.G., Mk. I l l = 28J lbs.
Mounting tripod A.A., Lewis or Hotchkiss, •303-inch M.G. and holder
43 lbs.
Weight of magazine (empty) =
lbs., full (47 rounds) = \ \ lbs.
Weight of set of carrier, pouches, magazine and braces = 3 lbs. 14 ozs.
Mounting. Field, Mk. I l l = 2J lbs.
•803-tra/i Hotchkiss Machine Gun, Mk. I* (with butt). ,
Weight of gun, about 27 lbs.; barrel, 11 lbs.; length of gun =
inches;
barrel = 2 3 £ inches. Gas-operated and air-cooled.
Weight of gun and mounting :—
Mounting tripod, Hotchkiss, • 303-inch M.G., Mks. I* and II* = 31* lbs.
Mounting tripod A.A., Lewis or Hotchkiss, '303-inch M.G. and holder =
44f lbs.
Weight of 30-round strip (empty) about 4£ ozs., full (30 rounds) = 1 lb.
15 ozs.
Weight of leather carrier full (300 rounds) = 26 lbs., tripod = 4 lbs.
GRENADES.
17. Grenades in use—
No. 36 (or 3&M), Mark I—Weight, filled, about
lbs.
Note.—The new Mark I No. 54 percussion grenade, for use in a 2-inch
discharger, weighs, filled (without safety cap), 17 ozs.
INSPECTION, PRIMING AND STORAGE OF GRENADES.
1. Inspection.
N o . 3 6 (OR 3 6 M ) , MARK I .
(a)
(&)
(c)
(d)
(e)
N e c w a r v to guard agamst " f a i l u r e s " and "prematures."
Examine Pin—Wax—Spring—striker way. All tested by striker test.
Examine outside of body.
Examine filling screw.
Inside (i) Striker with 2 nipples and gas slot clear.
(ii) Obstructions in sleeves,
(iii) Crack in wall between sleeves.
Chap. 5, S e c .
27
and
28.
161
IGNITER SETS.
(/)
(p)
(/)
(i)
(j)
ii.
Necessary to guard against "failures '* and "prematures.'*
Examine cap .and gas escape.
See t h a t fuse is sccure in chamber.
Examine fuse and crimping.
Examine luting.
Priming.
N o . 3 6 (or 3 6 M ) , MARK I .
(a) Kemove base plug.
(b) Take detonator set, press cap chamber and fuse together with finger
and thumb.
(c) Insert detonator in small sleeve, cap chamber In large sleeve, press
home with thumb.
(d) Screw on base plug and tighten with key.
(e) Screw on gas check.
iii. Storage.
(ff) Stacked in small groups not exceeding 5 feet in height—Should have
air space between groups and be raised from ground on battens.
(b) Store should be a t least 50 yards from roads or houses.
(c) Smoke grenades to be stored away from other material.
(d) Detonators, detonator sets, burster Bets to be stored In a separate
compartment.
(e) Signal grenades, cartridges, illuminating 1 inch (Very lights), and
rockets to be stored in a separate compartment.
(/) Care to be taken t h a t all stores are kept dry and well ventilated.
(g) No smoking or striking of matches near a store containing explosives.
DISCHARGER.
(WEIGHT 2} IDS.)
Gas Port—
Yards
Full open gives
Three-quorters open gives
Half opbn gives
Quarter open gives
„.
..
..
..
Closed gives
..
..
,.
..
..
N.Ii.—Adjusting screw must be thoroughly eleaned after
seizing.
IUinge.
80
110
140
170
200
firing to prevent
MOKTARS.
18. 3-inch Light Mortar (Stokts):—
Length, 51 inches; weight of barrel, 49 lbs.; -weight ol base plate,
29 lbs.; weight of mounting, Mark I I = 40 lbs.; bomb = 10 lbs.
11 ozs.; fuzes, percussion, No. 146 or 148 ; charge = 95 grains ballistite with 125 grains N.C. (Y) in the form of rings ; maximum range
— 700 yards : number of rounds carried in a G.S. limbered wagon 108 (in boxes); the new bomb (with vanes) weighs 10 lbs. filled and
fuzed.
i-inch Mortar :•—
Length of barrel = 51 inches ; weight of barrel = 3 qrs. 21 lbs.; weight
of stand, Mk.II, 1 qr. 12 lbs.; weightofbase plate,Mk.V,2qrs.41bs.;
weight of bed (wood) used with base plate, 2 qrs. 14 lbs.; weight of
bomb filled and fuzed, 25 lbs.; fuzes, time, No. 31 D or 70 ; charge =
95 grains bailistite with 250 grains N.O. (Y) in the form of rings.
Q-inelMedium
Mortar:—
Length,:57 inches; weight. 1 cwt. 1 qr. 24 lbs.; means of firing, primer
percussion (or for missfires " Igniter, Emergency ").
Weight of bed, 3 cwt. 3 qrs. 19 lbs.; weight of cast-iron bomb (H.E.):
mean weight filled and plugged = 50} lbs. d: 1 l b . ; Fuzes, Percussion, No. 110 Charge = Cordite flake 5 ozs., or Guncotton Y a m
4 ozs. The new cast or forged steel bomb weighs 33 lbs. when filled
and fuzed.
1 9 . DETAILS EEOAEDING F I E L D GUNS AND HOWITZEBS.
Q.r.
Particulars.
Q..F.
13-pdr.
Q.F. 18-pdr.
Marks I
to II.
Q.r. 18-ridr.
Marks I I I
to V.
Muzzle velocity (range-table)
..
f.s.
Calibre . .
..
..
..
. . inclies
Weight of projectile, fuzed . .
. . lbs.
„
complete round approximate „
No. of rounds in limber
.
..
..
„
,,
wagon
„
,, ' wagon, limbered . .
No. of rounds on gun lorry . .
„
„
3-ton lorry
„
„
light lorry
Maximum elevation (mounting)
„
range, H.B.
..
. .yards
1,700
3
12J16J
24
38
38
1,615
3-3
18J
234
24
38
38
1,615
3-3
1S4
23i
20"
38
38
973
3-7
20
°5
16°
6,200
16°
7,100
37° 30'
9,300
40°
5,800
6,200
6,500
6,500
*
„
range, Time Shrapnel
..
„
3 • 7-inch
Howitzer.
Q.F.
4 * 5-inch
Howitzer.
1,010
4-5
35
40
12
32
16
45°
7,000
Q.F. 3-inch
(20-cwt.)
A.A.Gun,
Mark I .
2,000
3
16
24?
24
216
108
90°
18,000(6)
7,000 (c)
a
o
DETAILS REGARDING F I E L D GUNS AND H O W I T Z E K S — c o n t i n u e d .
Particulars.
31uzzle velocity (range-table)
. . f.s.
Calibre
inches
Weight of projectile, fuzed . .
..
lbs.
,,
complete round, approximate ,,
No. of rounds in limber
„
„
-wagon
„
,,
wagon, limbered . .
No. of rounds on gun lorry
„
„
3-ton lorry
„
,,
light lorry
Maximum elevation (mounting)
„
range, H . E .
..
..yards
„
range, Time Shrapnel
. . ,,
B.L. 60-pdr.
Marks I
t o I**
B.L. 60-pdr. B.L. 6-inch
26-cwt.
Marks I I
Howitzer.
and I I *
2,130
5
60
70
2,130
5
60"
70
24
16
24
16
21° 30'
12,300
12,300
35°
16,100
15,100
1,400
6
86 (o)
93
. t
45°
10,800
(а) 100-lb. projectiles are also used.
(б) Height in feet.
(c) Horizontal—yards.
.
B.L. 6-inch
Mark X I X
Gun.
B.L. 8-inch
howitzer.
B.L. 9-2-inch
Howitzer.
2,350
6
100
123
1,500
8
200
2171-
1,500
9-2
290
317
26
14
45°
12,300
is
10
50°
13,084
38°
19,000
lo,S00
2 0 . D E T 2 J I 6 OF AKTILLERY EQUIPMENT.
Particulars.
Q.F. 13-pdr.
c.
Weights:—
Gun and Carriage . .
Gun. Carriage and Limber
Carriage and limber transporting :—
Bed
Body and cradle
Wagon, transporting howitzer
Width:—
Maximum width
Wheel t r a c k - ..
Carnage and limber transporting :—
Bed . .
. . . .
Body and cradle
Wagon, transporting howitzer
Length :—
Carriage with gun
Limber without pole
CLr.
lb.
19 2
32 3
16
14
Q.F. 18-pdr. Q.F., 18-pdr.
Marks HIT
Marks
and IV
I* to n
Carriages.
Carriages.
e. qr. lb.
c. qr. lb.
27
42
28
42
0
1
27
27
2
3
14
19
Q.F. lS-pdr.
Mark V
Carriage.
c. qr. lb.
31
45
1
2
7
12
Q.F.
4-5-inch
Howitzer.
Q.F.
3 • 7-inch
Howitzer.
c. qr. lb.
c. qr. lb.
26
40
15
3
2
14
27
0
35
B.L.
8-inch
Howitzer.
c. qr. lb.
179 0
201 2
0
15
.,
ft.
6
5
ins.
3i
3
ft." in.
6
3i
5
3
ft.
6
5
in.
8
9
ft.
6
5
in.
8
9
ft.
6
5
in.
31
3
it. "in.
4
6
4
0
ft.
S
7
„
..
..
12
5
o
3
13
5
8
4J
15
5
4
H
16
5
7
4
12
5
3
7
10
10
in.
0
4
22
6
0
4
DETAILS o r ARTILLERY EQUIPMENT—continued.
Particulars.
B.L.
9-2-inch
howitzer.
Q.F. 3-inc.h 20-cwt.
Mark I gun and Mtg. on
c. qr. lb.
Weights :—
Gun and Carriage
Gun, Carriage and
Limber
Carriage a n d limber
transporting:—
Bed
Body and cradle
Wagon, transporting
howitzer
Width:—
Maximum width
Wheel track
Carriage and limber
transporting:—
Bed
Body and cradle
Wagon,
transporting
howitzer
Length:—
Carriage with gun . .
Limber without pole
c. qr lb.
56
112
131
0
3
Travelling
Platform.
Motor
Lorry.
2
B.L.
6 0-ndr.
Mark I
Carriage.
c. qr. lb.
0
o
B.X.
60-pdr.
Mark I I I
Carriage.
B.L.
60-pdr.
Mark IV
Carriage.
c. qr. lb.
c. qr. lb.
B.L.
6 inch
26-cwt.
Howitzer.
B.L.
6-inch
Mark X I X
Gun.
c. qr. lb.
c. qr. lb.
88
0
1 100
0
21 110
0
14
72
2
22 203
2
106
2
0 122
1
0 124
3
0
82
2
22 229
1 17
0
20
21,
131 1
6
f t . in.
9
1
8
0
20
19
9
8
16
6
ft.
7
6
in.
6
Oh
ft." ' m .
5
4
7
5
f t . -in.
6
7
5
3
ft.
6
5
in.
7*
3
ft.
8
6
in.
0
7
21
6
o
5
25
7
I
ft
7
6
in
10
7
17
5
6
9
ft. - i n .
8
1J7
4
*
}18
iii
19
8j|
21
7
7
1
27
8
10}0
166
Chap. 6, S e e s . 3 2 and 33.
2 1 . DETAILS OP AMMUNITION WAGONS.
"Weights.
Length.
Wagon.
Without
Limber.
Q J . 13-pdr. , .
Q.F. 18-pdr.
..
Q.F. 4 • 5 - inch
howitzer
B.L. 60-pdr. . .
With
Limber.
cwt. qr. lb. cwt. qr. lb.
17 1 12 32 3 23
19 3 17 38 3 17
24
31
1 21
3 0
40
55
2 27
1 0
Maximum
width.
ft. ins.
0
6
3}
66
3|
Without
Limber.
With
Limber
and
Pole.
f t . ins.
8 4
8 5
f t . ins.
21 4
21 6-5
9 10
9 8}
23
22
0
8-25
The weights given in this table arc inclusive of a spare pole.
The approximate weight of a pole for Q.F. 13-pdr,, 18-pdr. and 4 -5-inch
howitzer is 50 lbs.; for the B.L. 60-pdr., 64 lbs.
33. S U P P L Y O F A M M U N I T I O N
I N
T H E
AND
EXPLOSIVES
F I E L D
(See note 2 on page iii.)
(See Chap. X X I , F.S.U., Vcl. I , 1923, and Chap. XV, F.S.It,, Vol. I I , 1924.)
General Principles.
1. Ammunition must be passed systematically from rear to front t o replace
t h a t expended in battle. Troops in action should never have to turn their
backs on the enemy to fetch further supplies.
2. Early reconnaissance of the lines of ammunition supply and of A.R.Ps.
is necessary.
3. Each echelon must be constantly aware of the position of, and be in
communication with, the echelon next in front of it, so that the quantity and
nature of ammunition wanted can be sent forward promptly to the points
required.
4. All expenditure from ammunition echclons must be replaced immediately.
5. Preparations for an attack on a large scale may include the placing at
the guns of no more ammunition than it is estimated 'will be tired from the
initial gun positions. Dumps may also be formed at A.R.P.s.
Distribution of Ammunition.
6. The work of replenishing ammunition is divided between :—
i. Units with divisions, cavalry divisions and corps troops.
ii. Units working on tlic L. of C., which are responsible for the delivery
of ammunition at ammunition railheads.
7. The distribution of ammun ion reserves for the fighting troop? in the
va T ious ammunition echclons in front of railhead {see plate X X X I ) is as
follows;—
PLATE
X X X I .
FIG.
1.
A M M U N I T I O N
A
CAVALBY
HORSE ARTY B°¥
ill ill ill ijl ijl ijl
S U P P L Y .
DIVISION.
CAVALRY
neat
||l ||l
|(
if if
\LGSWAO
'
DELIVERY POINT
'S"WAOONSTAKE
OVER)
MG.
lamu on
RCOKRESCRVL
KESEf
\MEETINC POINT
\LRVDIV.
, JIWQHSOR y.1/l</V. COL/t H.A.
PMWMCOl.
METBYBTy
IR.HA
REPRESENTATIVE)^.
tawanwoEpemi)
lA R-Pt
MEETING
[MT.CXM
fCAVD/V.MTCmi
POINT
(IF REQUIRED)
CZSiAAJEC
CAV.DM. TM1N
i hoMitsar
\ mCAV.Dtv. ARENO&MM
^(if Utqu:rcu)
TRAIN
BQfRESERVE
PLATE
X X X L
F I G . 2.
AMMUNITION
A
MEDIUM
BRIGADE R . A .
NOT
SUPPLY.
AND H E A V Y B A T T E R I E S I t . A .
PERMANENTLY
BRIGADED.
Plate X X X I , Fig. 3, will be issued with the Amendments
referred to in Note 2, on page iii.
Ami.
Unit.
Cavalry
Regiments
Infantry
Battalions
Artillery
R.H.A.
brigades
Tanks
,
Nature of
ammunition.
S.A.A grenades
and light signals
Mobile echelons.
S.A.A. sections
of cavalry divisional train
Cavalry divisional M.T. company
Ditto.
S.A.A. sections
of div. train
Divisional M.T.
company
13-pdr. gun
Ditto. '
Ammunition
column, R.H.A.
Cav. div. M.T.
company
Div. field
brigades
18-pdr. gun
4-5-inch how.
Ditto.
Div. aran.
column
Divisional
M.T. company
Div. pack
brigades
3 • 7-inch how.
Ditto:
Ditto.
Non-div. field
brigades
18-pdr. gun
4 • 5-inch how.
Ditto.
Field amn.
column
Corps troops
M.T. company
Medium
brigades
60-pdr. gun
6-inch how.
Ditto.
Nil. -
Medium arty.
M.T. coy.
Heavy
brigades
6-inch gun
8-inch how.
9 -2-inch how.
Ditto
Nil.
A.A. brigades
3-inch (20 cwts.)
S.A.A
Ditto.
Nil.
Corps troops
M.T. coy.
Battalions
S.A.A. & 3-pdr.
(or 6-pdr.) gun
Ditto.
Nil.
Royal Tank
Corps M.T. coy.
Armoured car
companies
S.A.A
Ditto.
Nil.
Ditto.
Regimental
reserves in first
line transport
1
\
Notes.
Units of engineers and
signals have regimental
reserves of S.A.A. for
dismounted men only.
S.A.A. reserves carried in
the train are available
for issue to any unit in
the formation for which
specific provision is not
otherwise made.
n
S*
,2
.
qj
gj
®
?
q
CP
Ditto.
.
Heavy artillery
M.T. coy.
One section of the M.T.
company serves each
brigade R.A. or tank
unit, and should be
transferred with it
I should it move to
f a n o t h e r formation.
Brigade
ammunition
columns will usually
be attached to a divisional
ammunition
column.
Ditto.
The scale oil which provision is made in each echelon is shown in para. 14 below.
J
a*
168
O h a p .5,S e c . 27;
8. Indents for ammunition arc not required. Ammunition receipts only
are necessary and will be prepared by the officer handing over the ammunition.
They will be signed by the officer receiving them, who is responsible foi
seeing t h a t he gets what he requires. I n the case of supply by M.T. the number
of rounds handed over should always be specified.
9. The It.A. at the H.Q. of a formation, after consultation with the genera1
staff, will estimate the quantity of ammunition required on a given date oi
for a given operation.
The delivery of the ammunition then becomes the duty of the Q.M.G's.
branch of the staff, as far forward as the divisional A.R.Ps. In the case of
light artillery ammunition, S.A.A.. grenades, light signals, &c.; and as far
as the corps heavy artillery re-filling point in the case of anti-aircraft medium
and heavy artillery ammunition.
10. S.A.A. for infantry and machine guns is carried in brigade sections of
No. 1 Coy. of the divisional train. The supply of S.A.A. will be conducted
on principles similar to those of artillery ammunition.
11. Gun ammunition for the horse artillery batteries of a cavalry division
will be carried by a column R.H.A. which is organized on similar lines to a
divisional ammunition column,
12. The horse artillery brigade commander is responsible for the control
and supply of ammunition from the ammunition column to the batteries.
13. The supply of S.A.A. for cavalry and machine guns with a cavalry
division is organized similarly to that of a division.
14. The scale on which provision is made in each echelon is shown in the
following tables:—
i. APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF ROUNDS PROVIDED IN THE F I E L D (EXCT.USIVR
OF L I N E OF COMMUNICATION RESERVE) FOR EACH MAN ARMED WITH A
RIFLE.
"Wit ^ unit.
For each rifle of
Cavalry (c)
R.A
R.E
Signals
Infantry
R.A.S.C
B.A.V.C
R..A.O.0
R.E. Postal Services
On the
soldier.
90
50
50
50
<10 70
20
50
20
20
Tn the
. S.A.A.
In
Section,
regimental divisional
train.
reserve.
110
(a)' 50
(a) 50
80
90
Total
in
advance
of
railhead.
In the
divisional
M.T.
Coy.
60
s
75
"ns
"
350
50
100
100
230
20
50
20
20
(a) For dismounted men only.
(b) To bo increased to 120 rounds before going into action.
(c) For purposes of calculation the number of rifles in the Infantry Battalion
and Cavalry Regiment have been taken as 700 and 450, respectively.
Chap. 5, Sec.27and28.
169
ii. APPUOXEMATE NUMBER OP ROUNDS PROVIDED IN THE F r f a n (EXCLUSIVE
OF L I N E OF COMMUNICATION RESERVE) FOR AUTOMATIC WEAPONS.
With units.
a
0
^
0
to <s
Detail.
iU)
£
&
13
O)
S a>
- a
•at
ak.> Ifi
a> tf\ 0
s f
O
H
t>
a
.3
8
!? IH !
For each Hotchkiss gun with—
Cavalry regiment
Cavalry regiment
Battery R . H . A . . .
..
..
(ground) 2,20S
900
. .(A.A.)
1,200
480
(A.A.)
1,200
..
1,200
1,200
Ammunition column R.H.A.
Pack battery R.A,
Field Squadron, R.E
Tank battalion—
In Medium C tanks . . .
In Mark V male tanks
In Mark V female tanks
In Mark V* male tanks
In Mark V* female tanks
Armoured car coy., Tank Corps,
equipped with " Peerless " type
Cavalry divisional train
900
1,500
0,108
900
1,200
480
1,200
1,200
1,200
1,800
1,425
2,350
1,950
2,700
450
375
60P
500
700
2,250
1,800
2,950
2,450
3,400
4,000
600
2,000
(1,000
600
1,500
For each Lewis gun with—
Field battery R.A
Divisional ammunition column
Field ammunition column R.A. (nondivisional)
Medium brigade with 60-pdr. gum or
0-inch, howitzers
..
..
.,
Anti-aircraft battery
Field Coy., R.E
Infantry battalion
..
(ground)
. .(A.A.)
Di visional train ..
Ordnance mobile workshop
1,128
1,128
1,128
1,128
1,128
1,128
1,128
564
470
1,561 1,248
470
470
470
•r
1,290
1,898
1,128
1,188
470
6,000
470
470
470
5,000
3,500
3,000
2,000
3,000 18,000
1,000 11,000
624
For each Vickers gun with—
Cavalry regiment;
Infantry battalion
Armoured Car Coy., Tank Corps,
equipped with Rolls-Royce type
iii. APPROXIMATE
8,090
7,000
4,500
4,000 12,000
NUMBER OF i t o u N p s PROVIDED IN THE F I E L D FOR
EAC!I PISTOL.
For each pistol a total ol 80 rouuils is carried in the Held, viz., 31) round?
on the man, 12 rounds iu regimental transport, and 12 rounds In the 3.A.A.
Section divisional train,
(B 28/332)Q
p 2
O h a p .5,S e c . 27;
170
iv. APPROXIMATE NUJIBER OF GRENADES PROVIDED IN THE F I E L D (EXCLUSIVE OF L I N E OF COMMUNICATION RESERVE) FOR EACH UNIT.
Detail.
Cavalry (for each
regiment)
Infantry
With S.A.A.
Section,
Divisional
Train.
With Cavalry
Divisional
M.T.
Company.
None carried.
240
200
384
a battalion.
5,400
a division.
I n Regimental
Reserve.
—•
V. NUMBER OF ROUNDS PROVIDED IN THE FIELD FOR EACH GUN*
•g
a
o
!|
Nature of Gun.
i i
c4
w
6-pdr. gun
(a) 100
3 -7-in. howitzer . .
114
13-pdr. gun
170
18-pdr. gun
(b) 178
4-5-in. howitzer
132
60-pdr, gun
100
6-in. howitzer (horse or tractordrawn)
100
3-in. (20-cwt.) anti-aircraft gun,
on lorry
..
..
240
8-in. (20-cwt.) anti-aircraft gun,
on travelling platform
216
90
224
(c) 124
168
—
11
" 3 2a,
© tra
H
(«) 100
204
400
300
300
100
at* >>
ooa
•aaa
£ s* oo
as
•i'H
S
•
(«) 50 (a) 150
66
270
150
550
100 • 400
100
400
200
300
—
100
50
150
—
240
180
420
216
180
396
(a) For each gun, in t a n k units.
(b) 172 with Mark I I I carriage limber,
(c) 128 "with Mark I I I carriage limber.
SUPPLY OF EXPLOSIVES.
15. Normally, explosives to replace wastage will be supplied in the same
manner as S.A.A., i.e., through the S.A.A. sections of the divisional train and
divisional and corps troops M.T. company.
10. In the event of explosives being required by units other than those
which normally carry them, also in the event of abnormal wastage by the
latter being anticipated.it is the duty of the Q.M.G's. branch of the staff, in
consultation with the C.R.E. or C.E./to make arrangements for the additional
supplies required.
%
EXPLOSIVES.
17. Explosives (Demolition) authorized in War Equipment Tables to be carried by units in the field.
Detail.
With
each
Field
Company,
R.E.
With
S.A.A.
Section
Divisional
Train.
Total
with
Division.
With
Field
Squadron,
a.E.
With
S.A.A.
Section
Cavalry
Divisional
Train.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
720
540
2,700
480
480
728
546
2,730
1,120(a)
1,120(a)
400
300
1,500
400
400
200
150
750
400
400
224
1,600
168
1,200
840
6,000
192
1,600
416
312
1,560
624
Guncotton, dry primers, field, 1 oz.
Guncotton, wet slabs,
field, 16 ozs.
Detonators, No. 8 . .
Detonators, electric,
No. 13
Fuze, safety, No. 11
fms.
Fuze, instantaneous,
detonating, ft.
Matches, vesuvian,
boxes
Total
with
Cavalry
Division.
7.
With Army
Troops
Company,
With
With
R.E. and
Corps
Divisional
Cavalry
Divisional
Troops,
M.T.
Company.
M.T.
M.T.
Company. Company,
R.A.S.C.
(each).
8.
9.
240
240
720
280
560
448
800
150
200
300
800
75
200
200
192
1,600
384
3,200
84
600
96
800
192
1,600
624
1,248
156
312
208
960
2,240
'
,
10.
(a) Until present stocks of boxes, guncotton. wet, field, No. 2, W.32, containing 16 slabs, are used up, the scale will be 1,152.
172
O h a p .5,S e c . 27;
34. R A T I O N S , F U E L A N D F O R A G E
(See Note "A" on page iii.)
1 . DETAIL OF RATIONS, F U E L AND FORAGE CARRIED IN THE F I E L D WITH UNITS,
AND IN DIVISIONAL TRAINS OR IN DIVISIONAL AND OTHER M . T . COMPANIES, DETAILED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF SUPPLIES.
Field Ration.
Bread
and
Meal Ration.
How carricd normally.
On the soldier
In vehicles for cooks or
travelling kitchens
In divisional trains or in
divisional and
other
M.T. companies, detailed
for the carriage of
supplies
I n divisional and other
M.T. companies or at
supply railhead ready
for loading
Total
Grocery Ration.
Iron
Ration.
1 lb. fresh or £ oz.Tea, 3 oz. 12 ozs. (1 lb.
nominal), prefrozen,
or
sugar, 2 ozs.
served meat,
12 ozs. (1 lb.
jam, £ oz.
1 lb. biscuit,
nominal) presalt, i f a oz.
£ oz. tea, 2 oz.
served meat,
pepper,
sugar.
1 lb. bread
oz. mustard,
or 12 ozs. bis2 ozs. cheese,
cuit or flour,
1 oz. butter
3 ozs. bacon.
or margarine,
1J ozs. condensed milk.
f(«)
l<
i f 0
IW
1
1
1
1
3(c)
3(c)
1(d)
1(d)
(a) The day's bread and cheese ration issued the previous evening, lee3 any
portion consumed. I n the case of arms other than infantry, this ration
may be carried in the vehicles for cooks.
(b) The day's ration (except bread and cheese) issued the previous evening,
less any portion consumed.
(c) Less any portion consumed of the ration carried on the soldier and iu
the vehicles for cooks.
v U) A second iron ration may be carried when so ordered by the G.O.C.-in-C.
Chap. 6, S e c . 34.
oflgs
o o w •OOHHIH
U fci-S- t> ift ifl ^• oo O IA oo oo
O ' S g - «h
:s :
•5 a
3• tO..as
• (j 9J • B o
£ W
o
o
00
oj
% t
•ao ° o < 3 o o O
o-moimi
S^-do
O te en tn c
O ^ d rt eS «
ort vcJM
as a
Hi O U « B
oocH
3
o a>
51 : : : : : :
a> a
ag'S
M i l
oS
«H
:
M
lis&<.
SSSHHO
>Q t> 00
* '
a '
> ajS-SS .
rH U5(M COMw 34 tc1-1©00Oso^00
^ CI
lb|lH<H<H
O O © O O^ § © o © ©*S
»R U
OW
K) ;
Cq] ri
Q ej
oomoo
• • '.aM ^ ss
111
•S.H
i'SS
b
JO hd cg oSoSdSB
So
Siting
O h a p .5,S e c . 27;
174
NOTES.
i. No fuel will be carried normally except for mechanically propelled
vehicles ; the wood of the ration boxes will be issued for kindling purposes,
and be supplemented by fuel obtained locally.
ii. Fresh "vegetables will be issued when available.
iii. Lemon juicc, rum and tobacco to be issued as detailed in Allowance
Regulations, but not carried normally in Divisional Trains or in Divisional
and other M.T. companies detailed for the carriage of supplies.
3. FORAGE.
Corn ration.
How carried.
On the horse or on 1st line vehicles..
In divisional trains or in divisional and
other M.T. companies, detailed for the
carriage of supplies..
In divisional and other M.T. companies
or at supply railhead ready for loading . .
Hay ration.
1(0)
1 (a)
1
1
1
1
3(b)
3(b)
(a) The day's ration issued the previous evening, less any portion consumed.
(b) Less any portion consumed of the ration carried on the horse or on
1st line vehicles.
RATIONS.
4. In case of active operations in the field a special scale of rations, dependent on the climate and the circumstances of the expedition, will b:> fixed by
the G.O.C. and reported to the War Office, but the scale shown in Sec. 3 4 , 1 ,
will, as far as possible, be adopted as a guide.
EQUIVALENTS.
5. "When it may be necessary or in the opinion of the G.O.C. expedient to
depart from the normal scale of rations, equivalents may be issued, based,
as far as possible, on similar calorific and financial value.
MEAT AND VEGETABLE RATION.
6. This consists of 9 ozs. meat, about 8 ozs. vegetables, and 2 or 3 ozs. gravy
put up in a convenient sized tin, gross weight about 1 lb. 10J oz3.
EXAMPLES OF NATIVE RATIONS.
7. Egyptian camel drivers and labourers :Native bread
..
..
2 lbs.
Rice
(or Biscuit, l})bs.)
Onions
Salt . .
.
Meat
..
..
..
3 ozs.
"Wood
Lentils or beans , .
..
4 ozs.
Cooking oil
East African natives :—
Meal
..
..
Rice
..
..
..
Meat
..
..
..
Beans
..
..
..
Gur
10 ofcs.
10 ozs.
8 ozs.
4 ozs.
2 ozs.
Cooking oil
Salt
Vegetables
(when procurable)
Tobacco (per week)
2
4
I
8
1
ozs.
ozs.
ozs.
ozs.
oz.
2 ozs.
*oz.
6 ozs.
^
2 ozs.
Chap. 6, S e c . 34.
175
FORAGE E A T I O F .
8. The ordinary ration for animals in camp is :—
Glass of animal.
Heavy draught horses
Officers' chargers and all riding horses of 15 hands 1}
inches (inclusive) and upwards
Biding horses (other than officers' chargers) under 15
hands 1} inches, and pack horses
Light draught horses
Heavy draught mules (according to War Establishment)
Light draught mules
Fack mules
Hay.
lbs.
15
lbs.
16
12
10
10
12
13
10
7
10
10
16
10
9
These rates may be varied on service by authority of G.O.C.
FOBAGE EQUIVALENTS.
lbs.
1
1
Barley
„
Beans
1
Bran
n
Gram
i
Linseed . .
All equivalent of each other.
i
Linseed cake
t
Maize
i
Hay
2
Green forage
6}
Oats
1
A mixture of 5£ lbs. maize and 2 i lbs. beans = 10 lbs. oats.
Compressed forage, 18 lbs. = 10 lbs. oats and 12 lbs. hay.
Forage cake,
20 lbs. = 12 lbs. oats and 12 lbs. hay.
UIM
OOW<H
No of men or horses.
<OM
MOOCHMHMHO
OOO
MM
HH
MM
to to o M oo cji to uuo © ©
S"
.
S
Bacon and sugar (each).
W
OLYI-GMFFIACIAWMKHO
|_I
M
M
OOOOCOMO^OOWO^COTI
TS
.
©
f
Biscuits or flour (a), meat,
preserved, and
vegetables, fresh (c) (each).
TN M
OOCXM
©OOO^OOO^CJCRT^GOTO*- 1
CO
w
5
Bread (a) and meat, fresh
(b) (each).
M
C
M a» W O O © O O O © © © O
M
<=>
Butter or margarine.
MMFLLHHMOOOOOOO
MMM
to © GO CJ
Cheese and jam
tobacco <£/).
oo CD T^ to o
to
f
P1
TTTIIL'OOOOOOOOOO
M M M M MM
l^M
°
(each),
Milk, condensed.
O
u*-
CN M
©©OCO-ACSVI^CJTOM
Mustard and pepper (each).
0
©
o ©o ©
o©
o o© o© o© ©
© Oo Oo O
©
1 H O O O O O O O O O O O
$
M M
RT
W © to to tO to MM M M © © ©
2
.
Salt.
©MHOOOOOOOOOO
MM
«
OO^INOSAIYIF.MMTOI-'MO
tO tO UL CO O M
to 5JI Q
Tea.
oo oo oo oo oo oo oo co oo oo oB oo .N
MMOOOOOOOOOO
CN TO TP M
Lemon juice (d) (f).
«
,lO_C}
©OO-JClOi^COtOM
OJ O) G> CJ OJ © O) OJ © OJ OJ OJ OJ
00 M
WOJ'JOMMMMM^
G0£._G0
to © 00 OJ 4k to
WMHHMMM
N.
to to to to to to to to to to to to
tn COM
5*
©©CnCOtOtOtOMMM
Vt
©OOO-J^-MCOOrtOOOSW
©M
^
© tO OJ MM
c
OOOWOIOCOMO^MtiH <n
©OOOCDOS-i'lOOCOOS^rO '
tn M
_
©©W M
o"
©OQ©«DOO
CO to M to
©©5©©©©©©©©©© •
OtM
©©VM
•
©OCOtOCD-qc&in^WtOM
- o a s 'g -dBqo
g
E3
1=1
e.
B"
M0©©©©©©©©©0©
©©.©^^^^OJ^J^-WTOM
"W'W W W WW OJ W W"W~C3L3~C3
to
to ^ K> to to to to to to to to
O©©®©©©©©©©©©
B
Rum («)(/).
W
Matches, boxes of (g).
Wood.
Oats (A).
H a y (A).
No. of men or horses.
9il
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(/)
(jr)
(A)
BEMABKg.
In lieu of biscuits.
In lieu of preserved meat.
Issued when obtainable.
Issued when fresh vegetables are not supplied, or at the discretion of the G.O.C. on t h e recommendation of the medical officer.
Issued at the discretion of the G.O.C. on the recommendation of the medical officer.
Not carried normally in divisional train or M.T. companies.
Weekly issue.
This scale is increased for heavy draught hdrses and decreased for cobs and small mules (see Sec. 34, 8).
O
&
3
r
C>
CO
®
-4
178
Chap. 6, S e c . 35,
35. N O T E S
ON
SUPPLIES
CATTLE, SHEEP, &C.
1. Oxen should be between 2 and 5 years old. Should yield 600 lbs. dead
meat fit for issue.
Cows should be between 2 and 4 years old. Should yield 400 lbs. dead
meat fit for issue.
2. To estimate age of cattle:—
By the teeth. Incisors (front of lower jaw) are complete at 3£ years.
At two years the two centre ones are well up. After incisors are
complete, estimate must be made by amount of wear. Gums
recede with age.
3. To estimate weight:—
Pass animals over weighbridge and then take 50 to 60 per cent, for dead
meat.
Use this formula
L (in feet) x 10 x G2 (in feet)
. . . . „
—1
= weight in lbs.
L = length from hollow on crop (forepart of shoulder-blade) to root of
tail.
G = girth close behind the shoulder.
4. Cattle in health should have :—Eye bright, muzzle cool and moist,
dung normal, coat glossy. Should stretch on rising and should chew the
cud.
5. Ram is male sheep, wether is castrated male sheep, ewe is female after
she has lambed.
Sheep out of health have:—Loose wool, dropping ears, arching back,
legs drawn together under body, no fatty secretion under skin.
6. Sheep should yield 50 to 80 lbs. dead meat fit for issue and shonld not
be more than 5 years old. If it is possible to weigh a few, 50 or 60 per cent,
of the average live weight may be taken as the amount of meat to be expected.
To estimate age of sheep :—
By the teeth. Teeth come up about 6 months earlier than those of
cattle.
7. Pigs should yield about 100 lbs. dead meat fit for issue.
Note.—Animals should be deprived of food 12 hours before being
slaughtered.
Meatloses when hung per cent, in 24 hours (in temperate climates).
;
,,
2
„
48
„
„
„
2±
,,
72
„
,,
,,
More would be lost in hot, dry climates.
BREAD.
8. Bread should be light, flaky and elastic; not acid; creamy white.
Crust should be brownish yellow and not burnt.
Biscuits should be light yellow, crisp, and not burnt.
Army biscuit weighs 2 ozs.
Flour should be pale cream white.
100 lbs. wheat produces 70 lbs. flour.
Flour is bought and sold by the sack of 280 lbs.
100 lbs. flour produces 130'lbs. bread.
FORAGE.
9. Forage includes all articles of food consumed by animals used for military
purposes.
10. Hay should smell sweet and should not be damp or dusty.
An acre of grass gives 1 to 2 tons of hay.
Chap. 6, S e e s . 35 and 36.
179
In England a;truss of hay, old, should weigh 56 lbs.
,,
,,
new,
,,
60 ,,
A load of hay is 36 trusses, A ton of hay is 40 trusses.
The weight of hay per cubic yard in the stack varies from 112 to 300 lbs.,
depending on the nature of the liay, its age, the size of the stack and the part
of the stack taken. 200 lbs. is a fair average.
11. Straw should be long, stout, clean, sweet, dry ; wheat straw best.
Straw weighs 36 lbs. to truss. A load of straw is 36 trusses.
12. To estimate contents of stack of hay or straw :—•
Dimensions in yards—
Height = distance from ground to eaves -f half the distance from eaves
to ridge.
,
„
height x breadth x length
Hay — —
- — = tons of hay.
x breadth x length
.
Straw height
—5
5— _ t. o n s 0f, straw.
lb
Circular stack—
2
TT0 31
Hay
- i X radius
— x height
5— = tons of hay.
Straw
3V x radius 2 x height
,
e t
Jq
= tons of straw.
Height = distance from the ground to eaves + one-third the distance
from eaves to apex.
As a rough guide in making calculations 9 men should cut from the stack,
weigh and tie 15 trusses (840'lbs.) hay in an hour. Half an hour extra should
be allowed for preparations, e.g., uuroofing the stack.
13. Oats should be free from dirt, sweet, thin husked, hard.
Oats should weigh from 38 lbs. upwards to the bushel.
Squeeze an oat—the kernel should leave the husk.
An acre of oats yields 40 to 60 bushels and
tons straw.
Substitutes for oats are maize, barley, grain.
14. Acre of barley yields about 40 bushels (50 lbs. to the bushel) (1 ton
straw).
Acre of wheat yields about 25 to 30 bushels (60 lbs. to bushel) ( H ton3
straw).
15. Bran is composed of the two outer envelopej of the wheat grain, and
should be dry, clean, sweet. Dry it is astringent, wet laxative.
16. Beans should be hard, dry, sweet, sound. Should be split before
being given to animals. Weight, 60 lbs. to the bushel.
17. Peas should be dry, sound. Weight, 60 lbs. to the bushel.
18. Compressed forage, is a mixture of hay and oats. Ton occupies 45
cubic feet. Bales weigh 40 lbs. net and 80 lbs. net.
19. Linseed should be clean, round, large, plump. I t is the seed of the flax
plant. Is soothing and laxative.
>
20. Green foods are rye grass, lucerne, sainfoin, clover.
Acre of potatoes yields about 8 tons.
,,
carrots
,,
10 to 20 tons.
,,
cabbage
,,
35 to 40 ,,
36. S U P P L Y
ARRANGEMENTS
(See Note 2 on page iii.) (See Chap. X I X . F.S.R., Vol. I , 1923.)
1. The director of supplies and transport (D.S.T.) is responsible for .the
provision of food, forage, Ac., for a force, and is assisted by the assistant
directors of supplies. He receives instructions from the Q.M.G's. branch of
the staff.
2. When troops operating in a civilized theatre of war are not wholly
subsisted in billets by the inhabitants, nor dependent upon supplies
180
Chap. 7, Sees.37and38.
requisitioned either in advance or in their immediate neighbourhood, the
means of supplying them will normally bo by rail, whence M.T. companies
collect and deliver, either to R.A.S.C. units designated Divisional Trains
or in certain instances direct to units.
Plate No. X X X I I illustrates the system to be adopted.
3. Supply Depots.—Main supply depots will be established at advanced
bases or at convenient positions on the railway ; they will be filled up by
rail, according to the stocks authorized, from the oversea base or from supplies
collected from the country.
Field bakeries and butcheries will be established at the advanced base3
or at convenient points on the railway line other than the regulating station.
It may be necessary to establish field butcheries in advance of the railway.
4. Regulating Station.—All supplies drawn from the L. of 0. will be
despatched by rail, as required, from main supply depots to a regulating
station, where railway trains will be marshalled, and thence despatched daily
to railheads conveniently situated for the supply of the troops.
5. Railheads.—At railheads th« supplies are transferred to Divisional and
Corps troops M.T. Companies, and conveyed ma rendezvous to selected, refilling points.
By the time these M.T. companies have delivered their load and returned
to railhead, the total distance covered should not normally exceed 50 miles.
0. Where it has not been possible to fix supply refilling points in advance,
M.T. companies will be ordered by corps H.Q, to proceed to a rendezvous,
where each M.T. company will be met at a fixed hour by an officer from the
formation it serves. This officer will guide the M.T. company to the formatiou
supply re-filling point.
7. Non-divisional units, with the exception of certain units forming part
of corps troops, have no horsed transport or M.T. definitely allotted to them
wherewith to draw supplies. For these units, supplies, after being divided
up at the supply re-filling point for detailed distribution, are deliyered direct
to units by vehicles of the M.T. company (usually the corps troops M.T.
company) detailed to serve non-divisional units.
8. In t b s case of a cavalry or iuia.itry division, assuming t h a t their
divisional M.T. company reaches the supply re-filling point on the same day
as it leaves supply railhead, the following alternative methous may be adopteJ.
The supplies may:—
i. Remain in the divisional M.T. company overnight and be taken
over by the supply officers of the divisional train early next
morning.
ii. Be unloaded and taken over by these officers on arrival of the divisional
M.T. company.
I n the case of (ii) the. supplies may be distributed to the representatives
of units and loaded on to the train lorries the same evening, or, if the military
situation permits, they may remain on the ground and be distributed and loaded early on the following morning.
9. Divisional or other M.T. companies will return to railhead or quarters
as soon as they have been unloaded.
Any change in railhead will be notified t o the officers commanding M.T.
companies by corps H.Q. in sufficient time for the necessary orders to be
given.
10. The number of refilling points required for a division will depend on
the manner in which it is distributed when halted. Under favourable
conditions one refilling point ccntrally situated may suffice. Separate
refilling points may, however, be fixed for brigades or divisional troops. Tliis
will often be necessary in the case of cavalry.
11. The supply lorries of the train, having refilled, proceed by the routes
ordered to " meeting points " fixed by divisional H.Q., where all units will be
ordered to send their representatives to guide the supply lorries to their
delivery points. At the latter the supplies will be transferred to the first line
transport of units and the empty supply lorries will return t o their train
company.
*
12. Mobile reserve of supplies.—Reserve M.T. companies to carry two or
more days' preserved supplies may be allotted to formations, when it fa
desired to have such a mobile reserve in case of emergency. They do not
normally exist as such, but would be found from Reserve M.T. companies to
meet special circumstances.
'
To face page, 180.
Plate x m i
system o f supplies.
n o r m a l s y s t e m o f f o r w a r d i n g
supplies
f r o m t h e l i n e s o f communication t o
t h e
t r o o p s o f a c a v a l r y a n d infantry division.
UNITS.
Delivery
Point.
SUPPLIES TRft NSFERREO TOj
FIRST LINE TRANSPORT OF
UNITS A NO FIELD KITCHENS.
II
t
>~0-Si
I:
Meeting Point
Supply Lorries met
by Units
guides.
Halting Points or
Advanced Halting Points as
may be necessary.
-
-
SUPPLY
— Fixed by DM. H.Q.
<$>
^
Supply Reffilling Point orPoints. — j
RENDEZVOUS, (if necessary and
vhen notpossible to fix Supply
—
refilling points in advance.
— Fixed by Divl. H.Q.
Q&
- Fixed by Divl. H.Q.
y—Fixed by Corps H. Q.
$
RAILHEAD.
- Fixed by G. H.Q.
i
Regulating
Station
(if
necessary)
ADVANCED,OR
8ASE
SUPPLY DEPOT.
\
> >y - Fixed
by 6. H.Q.
J
(See Note '2" on page iii).
Mfllby &Sofis,i.;th.
Chap. 6, S e c . 34.
181
H I N T S ON THE SELECTION OF LOCALITIES AS REFILLING POINTS.
13. "Wide open spaces having a hard level surface and solid foundations form
ideal sites, but these are rarely available.
I n selecting a locality as a
refilling point the following factors should be borne in min£:—
i. The supplies in the lorries of the Divisional M.T. companies having
been dumped on the ground, and taken over by the Supply
Companies of the Divisional Trains, Tequire to be divided u p and
distributed on a " Unit basis " before being loaded into the lorries
of the train.
ii. There should be suitable ground alongside the halted lorries of the
Divisional M.T. Companies on to which the supplies may be
dumped.
iii. I t will usually be preferable for the supplies t o be dumped and the
lorries of the Divisional M.T. Companies to move away from the
immediate vicinity of the refilling point before the supply lorries
of the train commence to load,
i v. I n order to avoid congestion, traffic along the line of lorries in position
should be permitted in one direction only.
REQUISITIONS.
14. Requisitions can only be made for the needs of the army.
The quantity of food t o be left in the possession of inhabitants must be
decided by the commander ordering the requisition. The usual practice
is to leave at least 3 days' supply of food for a household, and rather more
than t h a t at outlying farms or villages.
The details of the requisitioning service will be arranged under the direction
of the Q.M.G. at the outbreak of hostilities.
15. As a general principle, only officers of the administrative service or
department concerned, detailed for the duty, are authorized to requisition,
but in cases of emergency, e.g., when troops are on patrol duty or where
no officer of a service or department or duly appointed requisitioning officer
is available, requisitions may be carried out by the commander, the circumstances being reported without delay to superior authority. Indiscriminate
requisitioning and granting of requisition receipt notes are strictly forbidden.
16. Authority to requisition will not be delegated to any but a commissioned officer, and requisitioning on the part of warrant officers, N.C.Os.
or men will be treated as plundering under the Army Act, unless the case
is one of extreme urgency and no commissioned officer is present.
Requisitions will generally be made by a demand on A.F. F 780, which may
be altered to suit local conditions.
- 17. Except when payment is made on the spot, the requisitioning officer
will give to each local civil authority a requisition receipt note, A.B. 361
(see below), for all goods or services rendered.
"When payment is made on the spot no acknowledgment for the goods
or services will be given by the requisitioning officer, but a receipt for the
amount paid will be obtained.
18. When, in exceptional circumstances, requisitioning has to be carried
out direct, i.e., without the agency of the civil authorities, it will not be
necessary to present a demand : but, except when payment is made on the
spot, a requisition receipt note will be given to the owners for goods or services
rendered.
19. Requisition receipt notes will in all cases be made out in triplicate,
but the original note only will be given to the civil authority (or owner in the
exceptional circumstances when requisitioning has to be carried out direct).
The duplicate note will be sent direct to the Central Requisition Office by
the representative of the administrative service or department concerned,
or, if no representative is attached to the force, by the commander.
The triplicate note will be sent as soon as possible by the representative
of the administrative service or department concerned to the officer i/c of the
depot f r o m which supplies, &c., are next drawn.
20. The original requisition receipt note will In no circumstances show
the rank, unit or force of the requisitioning officer, but this information will
In all cases be inserted by that officer on the duplicate and triplicate of tfie
no^,
Chap, 6, S e c . 36.
182
Unless special orders are issued to the contrary, face values will not be
entered on requisition receipt notes. A requisition receipt note'is merely
a record of the transaction shown thereon. The quality of the articles should
be indicated in each case by one of the words, " G o o d , " "Average," " I n different."
21. If goods are taken for protection and not for the use of the troops
a statement to t h a t effect will be written by the requisitioning officer on
the duplicate and triplicate of the requisition receipt note.
22. All authorities or persons to whom requisition receipt notes are given,
will be directed t o send them at the earliest possible date to the officer in
command of the nearest British garrison. This officer will give an acknowledgment and will at once transmit the notes to the Central Requisition Office.
23. Should requisition receipt notes be presented for payment, such payment will on no account be made until the notes have been forwarded to
the Central Requisition Office and the authority of that office to pay obtained.
A r m y Book 361.
REQUISITION R E C E I P T NOTE,
(Not negotiable.)
Date
No
Requisition from (full name)
Address
Articles or Services requisitioned.
Signature of Requisitioning Officer.
Quantity,
Quality
(good, average,
or indifferent).
183
c h a p t e r
37. P A Y
VII
ARRANGEMENTS
IMPREST HOLDERS.
(See Sec, 225-227,
F.S.IT,, Vol. I , 1923.)
1. F u n d s required for all services will be drawn on imprest f r o m the base
cashier, or a field cashier, indents being made only for such amounts as are
required for immediate use. Officers receiving imprests will be held responsible for all money so advanced to them until it has been satisfactorily
accounted for.
2. No officer will be exempted f r o m receiving an imprest of public money
for t h e purpose of making a p a y m e n t which cannot conveniently be made
through another channel.
3. Officers holding imprests from a paymaster charged with the receipt
of and accounting for public money will usually account for the same on
A . F . N1531A, which will be rendered monthly, or as may be arranged, to the
paymaster i/c clearing house at the base. Informal accounts, if unavoidable,
owing t o t h e conditions of active service, will, however, be accepted ; b u t , in
such case, t h e source and date of each receipt and particulars and date of
each p a y m e n t m u s t be clearly si]own.
4. A company, &c., commander will t a k e special care to ensure t h a t the
total expenditure charged in his accounts in respect of issues of pay t o the
individual soldier is in agreement with t h e amounts shown by him on the
acquittance rolls forwarded t o t h e paymaster.
PAYMENT OF OFFICERS.
6. Officers who receive their pay through a r m y agents will remain in the
p a y m e n t of their agents on proceeding on active service abroad. Officers
who receive their p a y through command paymasters will be transferred
to t h e p a y m e n t of t h e command paymaster at t h e base from the date of
embarkation,
6. Advances of p a y will be made t o officers b y t h e field cashiers of their
formations on Officers' Advance Books (A.F. "W3241). The maximum
amount of t h e advance and the number of advances which may be m a d e in
a calendar m o n t h will be determined by the G.O.C. (in consultation with the
Financial Adviser where one is appointed), and published in G.R.O. First
issues of Officers' Advance Books will be demanded by officers commanding
units f r o m the field cashier of the formation in which the unit is serving.
7. Officers are only entitled to an advance if a t the time t h e r e are funds
to their credit with their agents to meet it, and t h e y will be held responsible
t h a t t h e a m o u u t of t h e advance ia met w h e n p r e s e n t e d f o r p a y m e n t . Officers
will be warned as to the importance of safeguarding books issued t o t h e m .
8. I n t h e event of an officer becoming a casualty the advance book will be
disposed of as follows :— .
I. If an officer dies, the book will be kept with his effects and dealt with
by t h e Committee of Adjustment.
ii. If an officer is wounded, the book, if found in his kit, will be sealed
up and despatched with the kit.
iii. If an officer is transferred out of the theatre of war, he will retain the
book in his own possession.
(ii 2 H / 3 3 2 ) Q
Q
184
Chap. 7, S e e s . 3 7 a n d 38.
PAYMENT OF TEOOPS.
9. The pay accounts of soldiers on active service in the field will, as may be
decided by the C.-in-C. under instructions from the Government concerned,
be compiled by the paymaster for regimental services at the base, or the paymaster at the station at which the records of their units are kept. •
10. From the date, of embarkation, inclusive, issues of pay will be recorded
in the acquittance roll and soldier's pay book and charged by the paymaster
responsible for the compilation of the war pay account.
11. The duty of making cash payments to the individual soldier will
devolve upon company, etc., commauders. All such payments will at once
be entered on the acquittance roll (A.F. N1513) and in the soldier's pay book
(A.B. 64). The acquittance roll will, immediately after payments have been
made, be forwarded to the paymaster i/c clearing house at the base. A copy
of the acquittance roll will be retained by the company, &c., commander
concerned.
12. Issues of pay to the individual soldier will be based upon the net rate
of pay shown in his pay book (A.B. 64), Part I I and will not be made more
often than is necessary. If the pay book be lost, a new book will be issued,
but no cash issues will be made in respect of any period prior to the date on
which the loss was reported by the soldier ; pay ultimately found to be-due
for any such period will be issued on final settlement with the soldier.
13. Temporary additional emoluments claimed by a soldier will not be
issued until a notification is received from the paymaster, showing that the
sum claimed has been placed to the credit in the soldiers' pay account. All
terminal claims, such as for gratuities or deferred pay, will be paid by the
paymaster, and a company, &c., commander will not make cash advances
in respect of them.
14. If a soldier dies before the conclusion of a term of active service the
O.C. unit will forward his A.B. 64 (Parts I and II) to the D.A.G., 2nd echelon.
38.
C L O T H I N G
1. The arrangements for the clothing and equipment of an army in the
field are controlled by the director of ordnance services, under the instructions of the Q.M.G.
2. i. On active service the clothing allowance issued to soldiers during peace
ceases, and clothing and necessaries are issued free to replace losses
not caused by negligence,
ii. Every officer and soldier proceeding on active service is provided with
two identity discs (1 green and 1 red), fitted with cords, for wear
around the neck, also with a field dressing which is carried in the
skirt pocket of Ills jacket.
3. Change of underclothing, lor sea voyages
In order to piovide a change of underclothing in the event of a long sea
voyage to the theatre of operations, when specially ordered, each m a n will
take the following articles of clothing in a sea kit bag, which he will carry
personally to the entraining station and from the train on board ship :—
1 pair drawers.
1 pair socks.
1 shirt.
1 towel.
On the completion of the voyage, the dirty clothing in the sea kit bag will
be returned to the Ordnance Department at the port of disembarkation.
Chap. 8, Sees.44and45.
185
39. FIELD
KITS
(This table applies primarily to i n f a n t r y ; certain alterations are necessary
in the case of other arms, and are prescribed for in Equipment Regulations.)
1. MOUNTED OFFICERS.
Detail.
No. Approximate
Weight.
.Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
A.—CLOTHING WORN BY TIIE
OFFICER.
Boots, ankle
..
... pair
Braces
..
..
..
,,
Cap, service (or bonnet, tam-o'shanter) with badge
Discs, identity, with cord
Leggings . .
..
. . pair
Socks
..
.„
..
,,
Spurs
Suit, service dress (jacket and
riding breeches)
Underclothing
..
. . suit
1
1
2
0
11
4
1
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
9
0}
13
4
12
1
1
4
3
13
0
13
n
1
2
15
1
1
1
1
1
. 1
0
0
0
0
6J3}
9
2
1
7
li
1
1
0
0
2
2
1
1
0
I n wallets.
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
I n wallets.
1
0
6
2
1
3
4
13
4
1
0
Total (A)
B . — O T H E R PERSONAL EFFECTS.
Binoculars* .
Books—
A.B. 155
Field Service Pocket Book . .
Cap, comforter
Compass, prismatic (in case) . .
Dressing, field
Greatcoat,t waterproof coat or
waterproof sheet
Grease or vaseline
..
tin
Handkerchief
Holdall, containing hair brush
and comb, tooth
brush,
shaving brush and razor
Knife, clasp, with ring and
swivel
Map
Matches
...
... box
Soap
..
..
— piece
Socks
...
..
. , pair
Towel
..
. . . .
Watch (in wrist strap)
Whistle and lanyard
Total (B)
(B 28/332)<j
0
0
0
0
0
0
16
* Slung f r o m left
shoulder.
I n pocket of greatcoat
t Rolled 26 inches long
behind saddle.
In wallets.
2*
13
Q 2
O h a p .5,S e c . 27;
186
1. MOUNTED OFFICERS—
continued.
Approximate
weight.
Detail.
Hem arks.
lbs. ozs.
c.—ACCOUTREMENTS
PATTERN).
(SEALED
Bag, ration
Beit, Sam Browne, with S
shoulder belts and frog
Bottle, water, with carrier
Box respirator
Case, pistol, Wcbley
Helmet, steel
Pouch, ammunition, pistol
ft word knot
Tin, mess
Wrb equipment—
Attachments, brace . .
Belts, waist
Braces, with buckle . .
Haversack
Pack with supporting straps
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
0
2
0
0
1
6
15
7
2
4
n
4
2
1
2
1
1
0
0
0
1
8
14
10
3
11
1H
2
2
0
9
1}
9^
5
4
1
12i
0
0
12
3
1
1
0
2
0
0
5
8
5
12
Total (C)
In train transport.
Cavalry only.
In trs.in transport.
D.—ASMS.
Pistol (no special pattern, but
must carry Government ammunition)
Sword (cavalry only)
1
1
1 ,
Total (D)
/
On near shoccaso, edge
to rear.
E.—AMMUNITION.
Cartridges,
Webley
A., ball, pistol,
36
F . — R A T I O N S AND WATER.
Bread ration (uueonsumed portion)
..
..
. . say
Cheese
•Iron ration—
Biscuit
Preserved meat (nominal)
1-oz.1
Tea
2-oz.
Sugar
Water
, pints
Total (F)
2
* Normally one iron
ration will be carried,
and a second iron
ration when specially
ordered.
The components of these rations will be distributed
in the officer's equipment as found most
convenient.
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
187
1. MOUNTED OFFICERS—continued.
Detail.
No. Approximate
Weight.
Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
G.—*SADDLERY,
PICKETING
GEAR, STABLE NECESSARIES,
&c.
Bag, nose, G.S., with 6 lbs. cornf
Brush, horseg
—
Net, h a y § . .
~
Pad, surcingle
~
Peg, picketing)! ...
Ropes—
Heel|| . .
~
Picketing
_
Rubber, horse§
Saddlery, complete, with bridle
and head ropet
. . set
Shoes, horse, one fore, one hind,
and nails (in shoe cases)
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
12
11
4
7
2
11
13
43
0
2
12
Total (G)
TOTAL WEIGHT CARRIED ON
THE HORSE.
A.—Clothin g
B.—Other personal effects
C.—Accoutrements
D.—Arms..
..
E.—Ammunition
F.—Rations and water . .
G.—Saddlery, picketing gear,
stable necessaries, &c.
H.—Rider
..
. . say
Total on horse
13
15
11
5
1
5
57
150
2*
13
i n
4
12*
12
0
0
7i1f
* In addition to this
list, officers may, a t
their own discretion,
provide A despatch bag
or a saddlc-bag. If an
officer is allowed more
t h a n one horse, the
saddle-bag
can
bo
carried on the spare
horse.
t When empty, on the
off shoecase fastened
to the baggage strap.
When oats are carried,
the s t r a p of the nosebag must be fastened
to the back arch of t h e
saddle.
§ The method of carrying the h a y
net
horse brush and rubber is left t o t h e
discretion of the O.C.,
except t h a t these articles are not to be
carried in the nosebag.
|| Heel ropes are allowed
for use with restive
horses on a scale of 25
per cent.
An additional peg is issued
with each lieel rope.
The picketing peg is
strapped on the sword
scabbard.
The heel
rope when carried, is
folded flat and placed
between the cantlc of
t h e saddle and greatcoat.
% Excludes weight of
saddle blanket.
Saddle
blankets
for
officers' horses
arc
carried in transport
vehicles on t h e march,
USay 18£ stone.
188
C-hap. 7, S e c . 39.
1 . MOUNTED OFFICERS—continued.
CARRIED IN TRAIN TRANSPORT.
The following list is drawn u p as a general guide, and the articles in it may
be varied, but the total weights of 50 lbs. for a commanding officer, or 35 lbs.
for other officers, m u s t not be exceeded :—
No. Approximate
Weight.
Detail,
Remarks.
lbs. ozs,
A.F. B 122 (cover and pad).
Field conduct sheets* ..
A.B.
6 (cover) A.F.N. 1513
Acquittance roll*
Boots, field
...
•—, paiiBucket, canvas
Housewife
Lantern, collapsible, with talc
sides
Portfolio with writing materials
Shoes, canvas
..
— pair
Socks
..
..
,,
Suit, service dre83
Towels
Underclothing . .
. . suit
Valise, Wolseley (or other pattern)
Total
„
1
0
11
1
1
1
0
4
1
0
15
2
0
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
4
1
3
12
0
5
4
13
10
0
1
11
3
29
5
„
Blanket, G.S.
..
...
Greatcoat, waterproof coat or
waterproof sheet
1
4
8
1
7
1*
* Unit
commanders
only (not included in
total).
N\B.—Officers m a y leave at the base a bullock t r u n k packed with 100 lbs.
of personal baggage. This reserve baggage will be forwarded only when it
may be. deemed convenient t o the service by the C.-ln-C,
2 . WARRANT OFFICERS, N . C . O S . AND M E N ,
(Mounted.)
This table applies primarily to cavalry. Certain alterations in arms, accoutrements and ammunition (prescribed in Equipment
Regulations) are necessary in the case of mounted men of other arms.
Detail.
No.
Approximate
weight.
Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
A—Clothing, Necessaries, &c., worn by the Soldier or carried
on the Horse.
pair
Boots, ankle
Braces
Cap, service dress, "with badge
Discs, identity, with cord
pair
Drawers, cotton
Gloves, worsted (a)
Greatcoat, with metal titles (5 lbs. 15 ozs ) ; cap comforter (33
ozs.); and pair of socks (4£ ozs.) in pockets
Jacket, service dress (c), with metal titles and field dressing
Knife, clasp, with marline spike, tin opener and lanyard
Pay book (in right breast pocket of service dress jacket)
Pantaloons
pair
Puttees
Shirt, flannel
Socks, worsted..
..
..
.•
••
..
- - pair
-Spurs, jack
—
Waistcoat, cardigan (a)
1
1
1
2
1
1
(b)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
0
0
(1
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
1
0
()
1
6
6*
0*
13
3
7
7
2
7
Hi
H
ills
7
(a) Winter months only.
(b) Carried in baggage lorries.
(c) Troops wearing khaki drill sent OD
active service from a warm to a temperate
climate will be supplied with service dress
jackets as soon as available.
•2. WARRANT OMICEKS, N . C . O S . AND M E N
Detail.
No.
A—Clothing, Necessaries, &c.—cont.
In haversack—
Holdall (2 ozs.), containing laces (£ oz.), tooth brush (J oz.),
razor and case (24- ozs.), shaving brush (1 oz.), comb
oz.),
knife (2£ ozs.), fork (2£ ozs.), spoon
ozs.)
Housewife, fitted
Soap
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. . piece
Towel, hand
Spare underclothing (d)—
1 pair drawers (13 ozs.), shirt (1 lb.
(4£ ozs.) (in wallets)
(mounted)—continued.
Approximate
weight.
lbs. ozs.
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
13J
2*
3
S
ozs.), 1 pair socks
Total (A) . .
2
331
19
12*
8
4
14
11
13
9
B — A r m s (e).
Rifle, with oil bottle, pull-through and sling (/)
Sword, scabbard and sword-knot (/)
..
Total (B)
1
1
„
•
..
C — A m m unition.
Cartridges, S.A. ball, • 303-inch (/) ...
..
_
rounds
90 (g)
5
10
Remarks.
(d) Spare underclothing will be carried
only by personnel riding horses and for
whom wallets are allowed in Equipment
Regulations.
Where an organization exists for t h e
supply of clean clothing to the troops, thespare underclothing and wallets will n o t
be carried.
This does not apply to an Eastern
theatre of war.
(e) Rifles of drivers of limbered G.S.
wagons, water carts and travelling
kitchens will be carried in the clips provided on the wagon for t h a t purpose. On
vehicles not specially fitted the rifles will
be carried on wagon footboards.
The lance will form part of the war
equipment of lancer regiments only.
Lance flags will not be carried. Lances
will be carried in rifle buckets when men
dismount.
(/) Personnel armed with a pistol will
carry the following articles in substitution
of rifle, oil tin, bandolier and '303-inch
ammunition:—
Waist belt, 2 pouches (pistol amn.),
pistol and case, 36 rounds • 455-inch
amn.
D—Accoutrements, (ft)
Bag, ration
Bandolier, 90 rounds (/)
Bottle, water, enamelled, with carrier and shoulder strap
Box respirator
Cover, breech
Haversack
Mess t i n and strap
..
..
..
..
. . .
Sheet, ground
Helmet, steel . .
..
..
..
..
Tins, oil, ^th-pint filled ( / )
(g) This is the maximum scale, but is
reduced to 50 rounds for various personnel
detailed in Equipment Regulations.
(70 Warrant officers, staff-serjeants and
Serjeants have each a cavalry whistle and
lanyard.
Total (D) (h)
E—Rations and Water.
Bread ration (unconsumed portion).
Cheese . .
..
. . . .
Iron ration (i)—
Biscuit
Preserved meat, nominal
Tea, %
Sugar, 2 oz
Water
Total (E) .
\ iu 1
/ tin /
pints
(i) One iron ration will be carried normally in the haversack; if a second ironration is ordered to be carried, it will be
distributed in the man's equipment as
found most convenient.
2. WARRANT OFFICERS, N . C . O S . AND M E N
Detail.
No.
E—Saddlery, Horse Furniture, Stable Necessaries and other
Articles carried on the Horse.
Bags—
Nose, G.S. (empty)
Nose, G.S., with 6 lbs. corn
Brush, horse
Bucket, water, G.S., canvas
Net, hay
Pad, surcingle . .
..
..
..
..
..
Peg, picketing ( j )
Hopes—
Heel ( j )
Picketing
Rubber, horse
Saddlery, with saddle-blanket, head-rope, rifle-bucket and
wallets
..
..
..
..
..
..
. . set
Shoes, horse, one fore, one hind (in shoe cases)
Total CF)
Total Weight carried on the Horse.
A—Clothing, necessaries, &c.
B—Arms
C—Ammunition
D—Accoutrements , . .
E—Rations and water
F—Saddlery, &c
G—Rider
..
Total on horse
„
say
(mounted)—continued.
Approximate
weight.
Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
12
12
11
0
4
7
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
11
13
S
1
2
40
2
0
12
55
12
19
13
5
14
5
55
150
12i
9
10
8
12
12
0
264
154
say 19 st.
(j) Heel-ropes are only issued to 25 per
cent, for use with unruly horses. An
additional picketing peg is issued with
each heel-rope.
C h a p 7, S e c . 39.
193
3. DISMOUNTED OFFICERS.
(This table applies primarily t o i n f a n t r y ; certain alterations are necessary
in t h e case of other arms, and are prescribed for in Equipment Regulations.)
No. Approximate
weight.
Detail.
Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
A.—CLOTHING W O R N BY THE
OFFICER.
11
Boots, ankle
..
. . pair
Braces
..
..
..
,,
Cap, service dress (or bonnet,
tam-o'-shanter) with badge . .
Disc, identity, with cord
pair
Puttees
Socks
Suit, service dress*
suit
Underclothing
4
13
4
13
0
Total (A)
* For officers of kilter
regiments add 4J lbs.
for kilt and aproo,
kilt.
B . — O T H E R PERSONAL EFFECTS
CARRIED BY THE OFFICER.
Binoculars
10
A.B. 153
Field Service Pocket Book
Cap, comforter
Compass, prismatic (in case)
Dressing, field
Handkerchief
Knife, clasp, with ring and swivel
Map
Matches . .
..
. . box
Watch (in wrist strap)
Whistle and lanyard
_
Total (B)
C.—ACCOUTREMENTS
PATTERN).
3*
2
6
2
1
4
2*
_
15*
(SEALED
Bag, ration
Belt, Sam Browne, with
shoulder belts
Bottle, water, with carriage
Box respirator
Case, pistol, Webley
Helmet, steel
Pouch, ammunition, pistol
Tin, mess
Web equipment:—
Attachment brace
_
Belt, waist, special
Braces, with buckle
Haversack
2
6
7
2
4
0
8
0
0
1
14
10
3
11
10
I n train transport.
Pack, with supporting straps
Total
_
^
In train transport.
15
194
Detail.
No. Approximate
weight.
D.—ARMS.
lbs.
Remarks.
Pistol (no special pattern, but
must carry Government ammunition)
13.—AMMUNITION,
Cartridges, S.A., ball, pistol,
Webley
..
rounds
36
12 i
3T.—R ATIONS AND W A T E R .
Bread ration, unconsumed portion
..
...
. . say
Cheese
•Iron ration—
Biscuit . .
..
..
,.
Preserved meat (nominal)
Tea
..
. . l - o z . l in 1
Sugar . .
. . 2-oz. f tin J
Water
..
...
. . pints
12
3
Total (F)
* Normally one iron
ration will be carried,
and a second iron
ration when specially
ordered.
The components of these rations will be distributed in the officer's
equipment as found
most convenient.
TOTAL W E I G H T CARRIED ON
THE PERSON.
A.—Clothing
B.—Other personal effects
C.—Accoutrements
D.—-Arms..
E.—Ammunition
F.—Rations and water . .
Total carried
12
5
11
2
1
5
H
15}
10
9
m
12
40
n
CARRIED IN TRAIN TRANSPORT.
The following list is drawn up as a general guide, and the articles in it may
be varied, but the total weights of 50 lbs. for a commanding officer OT 35 lbs.
for other officers (exclusive of greatcoat) must not be exceeded:—
Detail.
No. Approximate
weight.
Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
A.F. B 122 (cover and pad)
Field conduct sheets* ..
A.B 6 (cover) A.F.N151Z
(pad)
" Acquittance roll*
Belt, Sam Browne, with
shoulder belts
Boots, ankle
..
. . pair
Bucket, canvas
Carrier, greatcoat and ooat strap
Grease (or vaseline)
Holdall (containing hair brush
and comb, tooth brush, shav
iag brush and razor) , .
11
IS
6
11
0
9
2
• Company
commanders only (not included
in total weight),
195
Detail.
Housewife
Lantern, collapsible, with talc
sides
Pack, with 2 supporting s t r a p s , .
Puttees
..
..
. . pair
Portfolio, with writing materials
Shoes, canvas
..
. . pair
Soap
..
..
-.. piece
Socks
.. - .. '
. . pairs
Suit, service dress
Towels
Underclothing
..
. . suit
Valise (Wolseley) or other pattern
Uo. Approximate
weight.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
4
1
3
1
11
3
33
14
7
n
Total
Grcatcoat, waterproof coat or
waterproof sheet
1
Remarks.
lbs. ozs.
4
0
12
11
13
0
5
3
8
13
10
0
Note.—Officers may leave at t h e base a bullock t r u n k packed with 100 lbs.
of personal baggage. This reserve baggage will be forwarded only when it
m a y be deemed convenient to the service by the C. in-C.
4. WARRANT OFFICERS, N . C . O S . AND MEN (DISMOUNTED).
(This table applies primarily t o infantry. Certain alterations in arms,
accoutrements and ammunition are necessary in the case of men of other arms,
and arc prescribed for in Equipment Regulations.)
Detail.
A.—CLOTHTNG, <ftc., WORN BY
THE SOLDIER.
Boots, ankle
..
. . pair
Braces ( a ) . .
..
..
,,
Cap, service dress (or bonnet,
tam-o'-shanter) with badge .
Discs, identity, with cord
Drawers, woollen (a)
. . pair
Gloves, worsted (c)
..
,,
Greatcoat
Jacket, service dress (6), with
metal titles and field dressing
Knife, fork and spoon
Knife, clasp, with marline spike,
t i n opener and lanyard
Pay book (in right breast pocket
of S.D. jacket)
Puttees . .
..
. . pair
Shirt
Socks
pair
Trousers, service dress (a) (b) .
Waistcoat, cardigan (c) . .
Total (A)
Approximate
weight.
Remarks.
(A) F o r kilted regiments
substitute:—
lbs. ozs.
Apron, k i l t . . 0 12£
Kilt . .
. . 3 13
Carried in train t r a n s port.
Carried in haversack.
(i>) Troops
wearing
khaki drill sent on active service from a
warm to a temperate
climate will be supplied with service dress
jackets and trousers as
soon as available,
(c) Winter months only.
275
Chap,
6,
S e c . 36.
4. "WARRANT OFFICERS, N . C . O S . AND MEN (DISMOUNTED)—eont.
Detail.
No.
Approximate
weight.
13.—ARMS (d).
Rifle, with oil-bottle, pullthrough and sling
Bayonet and scabbard (e)
14
9
Total (B)
C.—AMMUNITION.
Cartridges, S.A., ball,-303-inch
rounds . .
—
Remarks.
(d) R.S.M.,
rangetakers, Nos. 1 and 2 of
Yickers guns, Nos. 1
and 2 of Lewis guns
and pipers are armed
with pistol. Men leading pack animals will
carry their rifles slung.
(e) R.Q.M.S., N.C.Os.
armed as staff
Serjeants and N.C.Os.
and men armed with
pistols have no bayonets.
Pipers wear
dirks.
Sword bayonets, scabbards, frogs and waist
belts are now withdrawn from
Field
Squadrons R.E (Regulars).
See Sec. 33, 14, i.
D.—ACCOUTREMENTS.
jiag, ration
Box respirator
Breech cover
Steel helmet
tVaterbottle, with carrier
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
0
2
1
Veb equipment, pattern 1908—
Belts, waist (a)
Braces, with buckle
Carriers, cartridge, 75 rounds
(«)—
Left
B ight
..
. . • ..
Frog (a)(b)
Haversack (19 ozs.) with knife
(2£ ozs.), fork (2i ozs.) and
spoon
ozs.)
Pack, with supporting straps
(2)
Total (D)
_
1
15
3
2
6
14
10
15
14
11
13
7*
(а) For personnel armed
with pistols substitute :—
Belt, waist, special 1
Attachments, brace 2
(1 only for Nos. 1
and ^ of Lewis
guns).
Pouches, ammunition, pistol
..
2
(1 only for Nos. 1
and 2 of Lewis
guns, who will
also carry one
cartridge carrier,
right.)
Case, pistol, TVebley
..
. . 1
(б) For N.C.Os. andmcn
armed with a bayonet.
Chap. 7, S e c . 39.
Approximate
weight.
Detail.
Remarks.
E.—ARTICLES CARRIED IN THE
PACK.
Cap, comforter
Holdall (2 ozs.), containing laces
(t oz.), tooth brush (J- oz.),
razor and case (2£ ozs.), shaving brush (1 oz.) and comb
(ioz.)
Housewife, fitted..
Mess-tin and cover
Sheet, ground
Socks, worsted ..
... pair
Soap
..
..
. .r piece
Tin, oil, £th pint
Towel, hand
Total (E) (c)
..
(c) Exclusive of weight
of iron ration, which
is accounted for in
" F " below.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
0
61
2V
4
12
4J
3
3
8
G
152
P . — R A T I O N S AND "WATER.
Bread ration (unconsuined portion)
..
..
.. say
Cheese
Iron ration—,
Biscuit
Preserved meat (nominal) . .
Tea
..
. . | oz. 1 in \
Sugar
2 oz.j t i n /
Water
—
..
.. pints
Total (F)
TOTAL WEIGHT CARRIED.
A.—Clothing worn
B.—Arms
C.—Ammunition..
D.—Accoutrements
E.—Articles in pack
F.—Rations and water .
Total (d)
n
7
14
10
4
13
6
5
3
7i
15J
12
55
01
(d) This is the normal
weight carried by a
private, but exceptions occur in the case
of machiue gunners,
Lewis gunners, signallers, vange-takers, etc.,
detailed in Equipment
Regulations.
The above arrangements
allow of the soldier
having normally with
him the whole of iiis
e quipment,
exc ep t
greatcoat; but in certain circumstances the
commander may decide to increase the
amount
of
S.A.A.
carried on the person,
and to discard temporarily certain articles of equipment, e.g.,
pack and contents. '
198
Chap. ?, S e e s . 3d a n d 40.
B. HOUSED TRANSPORT.
Tabic showing the method of carriage of certain articles on horses of transport N.C.Os. and drivers :—
Riding
Horses.
Articles.
Draught
Horses.
Near
horse.
Bags, nose, G.S., each with 6 lbs. corn (a)
Brushes, horse
Harness
..
..
..
..
. . sets
Net, h a y (a)
Pads, surcingle (or breeching supporting strap)
Pegs, picketing, with rope loops (a) . .
Hopes, picketing (a)
Rubbers, horse
Saddlery, complete, with saddle blanket and
liead-rope
..
..
..
. . sets
1
1(«)
'i
l
l
l
(a)
2
1(a)
1
(a)
1
1
1
(a)
on
horse.
'i(a)
(a)
(a)
1
1
(a)
1
Rifles of drivers of vehicles will be carried in the clips provided on the
wagon for t h a t purpose. On vehicles n o t specially fitted, the rifles will be
carried on wagon footboards,
(a) See note below regarding these articles.
NOTES.
Saddle blanket.—Under t h e riding or pack saddle. Saddle blankets for off
horses are carried in t h e vehicle.
Heel ropes are allowed for use with restive horses on a scale of 25 per cent,
and for mules on a scale of 100 per cent. An additional peg is issued with
each heel rope.
Picketing gear (or a n y p a r t of it) may, a t the discretion of t h e commanding
officer, be carried in t h e 1st line transport vehicles. A proportion of mallets,
heel peg (about 1 to 20 horses), will be carried on 1st line transport vehicles.
Nets, hay.—The h a y n e t of the riding horse will be carried on the f r o n t
arch of saddle, and of draught horses will be carried in the vehicle.
Nose bags.—The nose bag of the riding horse will be carried on the near
side of the rear arch of saddle, and of draught horses on t h e near horse, one
bag o n f ither side of Tear arch of saddle.
Horse bruxh and rubber.—-The method of carrying U left to t h e discretion
of Os.C., except t h a t these articles are not to be in the nose bag.
Surcingles and pads of off horses will be carried in the vehicle.
40. MEDICAL
SERVICE
(For detailed instructions on this subject, see F.S.R.,
R.A.M.C.
Training.)
Vol. 1,1923,
and
GENERAL ORGANIZATION.
1. The D.G.M.S. or, if the strength of the force is limited to one army,
the D.M.S. is the head of t h s Medical services and as snch is the adviser"of
t h e Commander-in-Chief on ail mcdical and other matters affecting the
health of the troops, and is responsible to h i m for the medical and health
services of the force.
2. The D.G.M.S. of a force is represented in lesser formations and areas by
directors, deputy-directors and assistant directors of medical services, who
199
Chap. 6, S e c . 34.
bear the game relationship to their commanders as he does to the Com
mander-in-Chief. These administrative medical officers also command the
It.A.M.C. in their respective formations and areas, aud receive their instructions from the appropriate branch of the staff.
HYGIENE
ORGANIZATION.
General.
3. The importance of measures whereby the health and effective strength
of the army arc maintained cannot be over-estimated. A high standard of
health and a low incidence of sickness are important signs of efficiency, and
to achieve these the co-operation of every individual is necessary. I t is
therefore essential t h a t every officer, warraut officer, IT.C.O. and man should
have a knowledge of the principles of sanitation and the best means of maintaining health.
In a Formation.
4. The commander of every formation is responsible for the health and
well-being of the troops under his commaud and for applying all measures
necessary to t h a t end, and for the prevention and mitigation of disease.
He is also responsible for the sanitary condition of the area occupied by
his command,.irrespective of the period for which i t may bo occupied, and
for seeing t h a t officers and other ranks obey all orders regarding health and
sanitation.
In the Medical Service.
5. Ill an army the Hygiene Directorate is represented in the field by an
assistant director of hygiene at Army Headquarters, and by a deputyassistant director of hygiene at each corps headquarters, and at the headquarters of each base and lines of communication, sub-area. In a division
and cavalry division the D.A.D.M.S. is the sanitary officer.
These officers will:—=
i. Act as technical advisers of the administrative medical officers of
the formations and sub-areas to which they are allotted, and will
furnish skilled technical advice to unit medical officers and others
when necessary.
ii. Either alone, or in conjunction with their administrative medical
officers, supervise, inspect and report on health conditions and all
sanitary measures in the units and areas for which they are
responsible, and at once bring to notice any culpable neglect of
sanitary measures, and make recommendations for remedying
defects.
iii. Immediately investigate the cause of any outbreak or unusual prevalence of disease among the troops or local inhabitants, and
recommend suitable measures for dealing with the sapie.
iv. Advise on the selection of sites for camps and bivouacs, and on
questions relating to the sanitary condition of towns, villages or
buildings about to be occupied, and to this end they should
accompany the officers charged with the selection of billets, camps
and bivouacs.
v. Advise regarding the purification and distribution of water for >
drinking purposes.
6. A sanitary section is allotted to each division'and cavalry division, and
to corps, army, base and L. of C. areas as required. They are under the
direct control of the Senior Administrative Medical Officer of the formation or
area to which they are allotted.
,
The personnel of a sanitary section act as sanitary police and perform
duties corresponding to those of sanitary inspectors in civil life. They supervise labour employed in the removal aud destruction of excreta and refuse,'
also the construction by units of sanitary works and appliances, and advise
regarding the best types and methods.They carry out sanitary measures requiring skilled knowledge beyond t h a t
possessed by regimental personnel, e.g., disinfection, disinfestation, bulk
purification of water supplies, supervision of baths, &c., and they are available
to give instruction to units in technical sanitary matters.
(b 28/332)Q
R
CJiap. f, Sec. 40.
200
The existence of a Sanitary section in a formation or area in no way relieves
unit commanders of their essential responsibility in regard to sanitation, nor
is it the function of a sanitary section to carry out for unit? any sanitary
measures within the capaoity of regimental personnel.
They do not as a rule construct elaborate sanitary appliances, such work
being allotted to the l l . E .
Hygiene laboratories for the scientific investigation of disease prevention,
and other problems affecting the health of the troops, are allotted to forces in
the field and located in forward and rearward areas as required. A 3pecial
mobile hygiene laboratory is allotted to each army.
REGIMENTAL.
7. Commanding Officer.—Every unit commander is responsible for the
cleanliness of his men, for the sanitary condition of the area occupied by his
unit, and for taking all measures necessary for the well-being and the preservation of the health of those under him, and for ensuring that all-orders in
regard to health and sanitation are rigidly carried out by the troops under his
command.
War Establishments provide, for the majority of units, a medical officer,
and specially-trained personnel for water duties and for sanitary duties.
Special arrangements are made for units which do not possess this personnel
ns part of their war establishment.
Officer in Medical Charge of a Unit.
8. Advises the C.O. 011 all matters relating to the preservation of the health
of the troops under his command and the prevention or reduction of disease.
He is responsible to the C.O. for the efficient performance of their duties by
the regimental water duty and sanitary personnel. I n technical matters I10
is under the direct control of the Senior Administrative Medical Officer of the
formation or area.
Trained subordinate personnel.
9. Water duties.—Personnel specially trained in methods of purification
and protection of water supplies. They have chargc of the water carts and
of any apparatus or chemicals issued for sterilization of water.
Where special purification apparatus additional to normal allotment is
provided, two men for each company, or corresponding unit, in excess of the.
normal water duty personnel will be detailed for the purpose of working the
apparatus, if required. (See Sec. 173, 4, F.S.R., Vol. I I , 1924.)
10. Sanitation.—Personnel
specialty trained in sanitary duties to act as
sanitary police, and to perform all sanitary duties in the unit, e.g., disposal of
excreta and refuse, construction of latrines, urinals, soak pits, &c.
11. Chiropody.—One specially trained man is allotted to certain dismounted
units for the care of the men's feet. His duties are to teach men how to look
after their own feet, and to treat such minor disabilities as corns, ingrowing
toe nails, blisters and sweaty feet.
All these trained subordinate personnel perform their duties under the
orders of the officer in medical charge of the unit. Trained reserves should
be maintained in the unit.
T H E MEDICAL U N I T S OP A FOHCE IN THE F I E L D .
12. i. The Medical Establishment with units.—Battalions and similar units
have a medical officer attached. He is provided with a limited medical
equipment carried in a Maltese cart. A lance-corporal and one man of the
unit are provided to assist him. When an action is imminent the regimental
stretcher-bearers are placed under his orders.
ii. Field Ambulances, three to each division; three cavalry field ambulances to each cavalry division. Duties, to collect sick and wounded from
regimental aid posts, to provide treatment for slight cases, and to evacuate
to casualty clearing stations those requiring further treatment.
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
201
iii. Motor Ambulance Convoys.—Army units. One for each corps. Duties,
to collect sick and wounded from field ambulances and to convey them to
casualty clearing stations or from casualty clearing stations to ambulance
trains or barges.
Ambulance Car Companies, R.A.S.C., are employed at the base to convey
patients from general hospitals to hospital ships.iv. Casualty Clearing Stations.—Army units, one for each division. Duties,
to receive sick and wounded from field ambulances and local units, to provide
surgical treatment and to evacuate casualties to general hospitals.
v. Ambulance Trains, one for each division of a small force, fitted to carry
about 400 lying-down cases and to furnish any treatment required on the
journey. Used to convey patients from casualty clearing stations to general
hospitals,
vi. General Hospitals of 600 and 1,200 beds located at the base or in L. of C.
area. Number calculated to afford beds for 10 per cent, of the force. Duties
t o provide any medical or surgical treatment and to evacuate selected cases to
home territory.
vii. Convalescent Depots.—Capacity 2,000 men, located near general hospitals, for men who do not require any further active medical or surgical
treatment, but who are not fit to return to the front till they have gone
through a course of hardening exercises.
viii. Base and Advanced Depots of Medical Stores.—Base depots receive
medical supplies in bulk from the home territory ; they are located near the
port of disembarkation. Base depots replenish the advanced depots, usually
three to an army. Advanced depots issue supplies on indent to medical
units. Regimental medical officers obtain their supplies from the nearest
medical unit of their formation.
ix. Laboratories.—One mobile hygiene and two mobile bacteriological
laboratories are attached to each army, for the scientific investigation of
disease prevention and for the study of disease in the field.
x. Hospital Ships have a capacity of about 700 beds ; smaller ships may
be used for short voyages. Are fitted out to afford all necessary treatment
during the voyage.
EVACUATION AND TREATMENT.
13. Sick are seen by theM.O. of the unit and arc, if necessary, detained at the
regimental aid post (which is usually at unit headquarters) or sent to a field
ambulance for treatment or evacuation. If evacuated from the divisional
area they are struck off the strength of their unit.
A wounded man is attended to by the M.O., stretcher-bearers, • or
medical orderly of the unit, and (unless able to walk to the collecting post
for walking wounded) is carried back by the regimental stretcher-bearers
to the regimental aid post, and is removed thence by the bearers of the nearest
field ambulance to the advanced dressing station, or direct to the main
dressing station of the ambulance. Erom the field ambulance he is transferred
by means of motor ambulance convoys to a casualty clearing station, where,
if the military situation permits, all necessary and urgent treatment of his
wound is completed before he is evacuated further. If the wound is not
of a nature to require his retention, or as soon as he is able to travel, the
wounded man is transferred down the L. of C., generally b y ambulance traiu,
to a general hospital, and when no further treatment is required, to a
convalescent depot.
If sent back to this country he proceeds in a hospital ship; thence he i3
transferred to a military hospital.
Should he require no further activo
treatment, although still unfit for duty, he is transferred to a convalescent
depot; from this lie may proceed on sick furlough. When recovered, he is
discharged to a military depot for training and hardening until fit for
duty again.
DENTAL TREATMENT,
14. Army Dental Corps personnel for the provision of dental treatment are
attached to field ambulances, casualty clearing stations, general hospitals
and convalescent depots.
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) Q
R
3
202
Chap. 7, S e e s . 4 0 a n d 41.
F I R S T F I E L D DRESSING.
16. Every officer and man carries in the field a dressing which is placed in
the pocket of the right side of the skirt of the frock. I t consists of a packet
of khaki cotton cloth containing in a linen cover two dressings, each composed
of
yards of bandages, some gauze and a safety pin. Simple instructions
as to the method of using it.are printed on the outer and inner covers. The
first field dressing of the wounded: man himself and not that of a comrade
should always be used;
Field dressings should be inspected frequently, and all ranks instructed
and tested periodically by the medical officer in their knowledge of the
application of the first field dressing.
TREATMENT OF CASES OF EMERGENCY.
16. Gassed cases,—Men who have been exposed to gas, even slightly, should
not be allowed to walk or otherwise exert themselves, but should be carried,
or at least assisted (if no form of ambulance transport can be procured for
them), to the nearest aid post or dressing station. Care must be taken that
they do not attempt to remove their gas masks so long as there is need to
wear them.
17. Bleeding.—Every care should be taken to check loss of blood from
wounds.
18. When internal bleeding is suspected, skilled medical assistance must be
obtained with the utmost speed. Do not give stimulants.
To treat external bleeding, cut away clothing, expose the wound, and
without attempting to wash, apply first field dressing and bandage moderately
firmly. Next raise the wounded limb and keep it at perfect rest. If bleeding
should still continue, apply steady firm pressure with the hand outside the
dressing..
Should smart bleeding still continue, apply direct pressure between the
wound and the heart with the hand ; if this is unavailing, resort should be
had to some form of tourniquet.
19. A tourniquet can be quickly improvised by tying a handkerchief or puttee
around the limb between the wound and the h e a r t ; and then by introducing
a stick or bayonet underneath and twisting, the constriction can be increased
until the bleeding ceases. The stick is then secured to prevent untwisting.
20. A tourniquet should only be used as a last resort. If wrongly applied
it tends to increase the bleeding ; if left on too long, the limb below the constriction will die. Consequently, all cases so treated must be got under medical
enre as quickly as possible. Apply a tourniquet as low as possible to the
stump of a limb which has been blown off.
If the wound is in the neck, direct pressure by the hand outside the first
field dressing must be relied upon, taking care t h a t the pressure is not so great
as to interfere with breathing.
41. M A I N T E N A N C E
OF
HEALTH
(For fur liter details of the subjects dealt with in this section, see Manual of Military
Sanitation or Manual of Military Hygiene.)
General.
1. A war cannot be waged successfully unless due regard is paid to the
maintenance of the health of troops. There are many examples in history
where neglect of this precept has led to disaster.
Cleanliness.
2. Cleanliness of person and of clothing is of great importance. By means
of the organization detail d in para. 4 a hot bath may be arranged for
all ranks at least once every ten days, and at the same time clean underclotliing should be issued and outer clothing disinfected, the soiled underclothing being collected for disinfection, disinfestation and washing.
203
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
3. When the situation permits, units should make local arrangement for
more frequent baths. A sharp watch must be kept for the appearance of lice
and for scabies impetigo and other skin affections. These conditions, which
are the most fruitful cause of inefficicncy and wastage in war and;which are
directly or indirectly attributable to dirt, are most easily and conveniently
detected by careful inspections a t bathing parades. The condition of t h e
hair and teeth should receive attention at the same time.
4. The following provision will be made for disinfestation, bathing and
washing of clothes :—
i. F o r troops other t h a n those on L. of C.:—
(a) Di-s infestation.—Each
unit will be provided with a " s a c k " 6r
other easily portable type of disinfector, which will be operated
b y the sanitary personnel 'of the u n i t and carried in t h e
Maltese cart or some other vehicle of 1st line transport.
(b) Bathing.—" Six-spray " shower b a t h apparatus will be provided
on t h e basis of one per brigade or body of 5,000 troops
employed. These will be held under corps control and will
be sent forward as and when required.
(c) Laundry.—Mobile laundries will be provided on t h e basis of one
for each 20,000 troops. They will be held on L. of C. and sent
forward on demand by army and corps for allotment t o
divisions as the tactical situation permits,
ii. F o r troops on L. of C.:—
(a) Cleansing unit.—A cleansing u n i t composed of t w o sections will
bs provided for these troops.
(&) Laundry.—One mQbile laundry will be provided for L. of C. troops.
Care of the Feet, Hands and Face.
5. The chief causes of sore feet are ill-fitting boots and socks, combined
with uncleanliness.
The feet should be washed a t least once a day, as retained sweat and dirt
damage t h e skin and render the feet more liable to injury. If washing is
impossible, the feet should be wiped over with a d a m p cloth, especially about
t h e toes.
t). Excessive sweating may be relieved b y bathing the feet in water,
coloured a bright pink with permanganate of potash, and after drying they
m a y be dusted with a foot powder. Weak solutions of formalin m a y also
be used.
When a pair of clean socks is not available for change, those worn should
be t a k e n off, stretched and aired, and worn on t h e opposite feet when n e x t
p u t on. Relief m a y be obtained by soaping the socks both inside a n d outside.
7. In t h e absence of a chiropodist, blisters should be t r e a t e d as follows :—
Paint with iodine ; with a clean needle pierce the skin just outside t h e margin
of the blister, passing t h e needle through t h e thickness of the skin ; squeeze
out contents ; paint again with iodine, and firmly place a piece of sticking
plaster over the collapsed area.
Boots should be kept pliable and soft b y t h e frequent use of dubbin or other
grease.
8. To protect the hands and face from frost'ite.—Smear
t h e m with vaseline,
whale oil or other greasy p r e p a r a t i o n ; wear mits or woollen gloves and ear
flaps. I n t h e event of frostbite, t h e p a r t affected should on no account be
warmed a t a fire, b u t should be well rubbed t o re-establish the circulation.
9. Snow blindness.—To prevent snow blindness coloured glasses should
be worn, and failing these, a mask m a y be improvised.
CA.MPS.
10. I n all camps and bivouacs the utmost care will be taken t o prevent
fouling of ground b y excreta and refuse. Urinals and latrines will be made
immediatelv on arrival a t a camp or bivouac, and, if of a temporary nature,
should be filled in and the site marked a t the last possible moment when the
unit leaves camp.
If the camp is to be re-occupied at an early date, and-urinals, deep
fly-proof trench or bucket latrines have been made, they should be left in situ
ready for use b y the incoming units.
204
C-hap. 7, S e c . 39.
Great attention must be paid to camp kitchens. If the halt is of short
duration, kitchen slop -water should be filtered into pits through brushwood
or straw, which is subsequently burned. F o : longir periods grease traps
should be installed (see PLATE XXXIV, Fig. 4).
11. Carcases of animals should be disembowelled, the internal organs buried,
and the remainder burned. Stuffing the interior with oily tow or other
material assists combustion.
12. To keep tents dry they should be trenched ; flies of tents should be rolled
up daily, and blankets and kits aired.
13. Latrines, urinals, refuse pits, horse and cattle lines, and slaughtering
places must be placed as far as possible from the kitchens, horses or food
stores, from any source of water supply, and to leeward if possible. Slaughtering places should not be near horse lines.
The position of all old latrines should be marked with the letter " L "
made with stones.
14. Disinfection.—For general use cresol solution, in the proportion of
ozs. of cresol to 1 gallon of water, is the most suitable disinfectant.
Nuisances, however, should be removed rather than masked by the use of
chemicals. Clothing is best disinfected by one of the processes employing
steam, but in emergencies boiling may be used for small quantities. Dry
heat is the most economical for the destruction of vermin in clothing. This
may be utilised in ovens, hot-air huts, &c. For small quantities of clothing
careful ironing (especially of the seams) will serve the purpose.
15. Precautions against diseases conveyed by food and drink.—The important
diseases in this class are diarrhoea, dysentery, cholera, and the various forms
of enter lea.
The most effective measures against these diseases are—
i. Prevention and destruction of flies.
ii. Complete and rapid disposal of excreta.
iii. Food cleanliness.
iv. A sufficient supply of safe drinking water.
v. Inoculation.
vi. General hygiene.
No N.C.O. or man with a history of admission to hospital for dysentery
or enterica, typhoid or paratyphoid fever will be employed on any duty
involving the handling of food, or in connection with the purification or
storage of drinking water.
Destruction of flies in cookhouses, dining or other places must receive
continual attention.
16. Measures against flies.—Flies carry germs of disease to any uncovered
food, liquid or solid, and the fly dauger can be controlled only by energetic
measures directed against their breeding-places, such as :—
i. Horse manure and stable litter.
ii. Human excreta.
iii. Collections of decaying vegetable and other refuse.
iv. Against the adult insects b y : — ( a ) trapping, poisoning, and other
\
methods of destruction ; (b) preventing access to food.
17. Disposal of manure and camp refuse.—All manure must be removed
daily from the lines and suitably disposed of within 48 hours. "Where burning
cannot be carried out, the manure will he collccted in piles and packed tightly
by beating down with the back of a shovel. Fermentation in such a heap
results in a temperature sufficient to kill practically all the maggots. When
fresh manure is added to a heap, it will be buried under at least one foot
(preferably three feet) of the fermenting manure. "Whenever maggots are
seen on the surface, t h a t part will be turned over so as to bury the maggots
in the hot fermenting part. When
a heap is completed, it will be earthed over,
t h e surface of the earth being wrell rammed down and moistened with heavy
oil, and a drain cut round the base of the heap. This drain should be treated
with oil for the following week or ten days.
^
18. I n very hot weather, with the approval of the sanitary officer concerned, the manure may be spread in thin layers over the ground so that it
will dry before flies can breed in it.
19. Manure used for agricultural purposes must be dug iu immediately
after removal from the lines or, if collccted for later use, treated as detailed
jn para, 17 above.
PLATE XXXIII.
LATRINES.
F I G . 1.
-HINGEDCOVER 13*10 TO
CLOSE AUTOMATIC ALLY
A-Excavated
Earth.
B-Shove/s or Scoops for applying
to
excreta
earth
T Y P E OP T E M P O R A R Y T R E N C H LATRINE.
E r a . 3.
BUCKET
TYPE
docket . in Stat & hd Postfton of
position u/ith raised for j est 6 Iid
9ea)~ & (id removal of when Bucket
dated,
Bucket
is 'amoved.
ELEVATION
NOTE.
SECTION
The guides S stops /o Buckefe should be so arranged that the seats
9 hdt fit accurately over the Bucket's end should be fly proof
s IG. DWOOD COVERED
WITH G A L V A N I Z E D I R O N
WIRE G A U Z E S T R A I N E R
SECTION THRO'
SOAK
PIT
To follow Plate X X X I I I , Fig 6.]
PLITB
REFUSE DESTRUCTOR,
//icJies
O
-+<-+-1
12 6 o
/
1
2
1
J
1
1
J
1
i3c/II.E
e
-r
1—I
a
1
.1
o f
j
T u / y or
9
1
Stones
1
Mud
•Air
Centre
Air
/o
Feet
I——__
VERTICAL
—<$'—
I.
Wa//ing
INCINERATOR
inlet"
in/elr^--^rtomZQNTAL
XXXIV.
AND GREASE SALVAGE TRAP.
Feed/n^
doa'n.
SECTION'S
Iron
C/ear/njg
flashing
ofoori-
Walhng
ur/red
Iron
Feeding
top
p/ate
doQr
<joen
o f C/ayf/7/eJ
b/scu/t
together,
or 9 "brick
&
4
C/ns
mortar.
mud
Mre
/0 W/am.
Fine
bars
2. "<3part
on
a L /rorts
irin/ei"
SECTIONS
C/)tmneiy.
fcj/ne
FIG. 3.
TEMPORARY
High
ground.
INCINERATOR.
A
c
High ground.
Bank.
Lotv
ground.
Incinerator
dug out of side of
bank.
Refuse
fed at top of incinerator
from
end drawn
from passage
cut out of bank
higrhground
side.
GREASE SALVAGE TRAP,
- 4'-7
O/oerunifs 7'io/i
at eacTt «
Oim»njioti$4 7 X 2 O A ! 9
CdnikJt
V
Strainer
Tuj/ne.
• Oi/
Drum
Mr
Grdue/
J*
Stones
-'trW-o^r^ S O A K A G E
PIT
PLATE
XXXV.
MOSQUITO PROOF " DUG-OUT.'
F j g .
" A
9
/.
Outside
//he
of nal'l'm
d
if
S
"
Roof of
mosQuito
nem'ng ^
°\r
I
I
f y
Linen
brathnds
with
sandpoc/rel$<
^^ ^
VXv'
/
•
Bene,
W'VK^afI
fe'vi'v
>
PLAN
•/•'ft up
(B
28/332)Q
entrance
s
F/g. 3.
Runm'nd
find,
J9u/n to
tape
"i
u <
LIFT
UP
_
Bunk 1
SECTION BB
% Xi':F/oor
i .
M M M ^ '
1
Chap. 6, S e c . 34.
205
20. Refuse must never be left in open i>its. If pits have to be used the
contents should be covered daily with a thick layer of earth. Covered
receptacles, water-tight and fly-proof, must be used whenever possible, and
the contents (with the exception of waste fat, if to be collected for manufacturing purposes) must be burned daily (see P l a t e XXXIV, Figs. 1, 2 and 3).
Where burning is impossible, refuse must be buried deeplyi
21. Flies in huts, tents, cookhouses, diuing shelters, dug-outs, &c., may be
killed by spraying with a fluid obtained from the nearest sanitary section.
Spraying should be done in the evening or in the early morning when the
flies have settled on roofs and walls, and much execution may be done by
means of fly-flappers. After spraying, the flies should be swept up and
burned, as all may not be killed outright.
22. Flies may be trapped by fly-papers, wires or tapes coated with " tanglefoot," or in " balloon " fly traps. Large flytraps are of use if placed outside
cookhouses, messes, &c. Tliey should be placed in the sun, out of the wind,
and baited with jam, stale beer, vinegar, lentil paste, meat, &c. Designs
can be supplied by hygiene officers.
As a general rule every camp or quarter, mess or cookhouse, can keep the
fly danger under control.
23. Disposal of excreta.—In no case will open trench latrines be used where
it is possible to construct either of the following types :—deep trench
latrine (PLATE X X X I I I , Fig. 1), or bucket latrine (Figs. 4 and 5). The choice
between these two types depends upon local conditions and orders.
24. Deep trench latrines must be :—
i. Sited so t h a t there is no possibility of contaminating water supplies.
ii. Dug as deep as possible, with the back wall of the trench sloping
outwards from the bottom,
iii. Fly-proof, i.e., provided with boxed-in seats and automaticallyclosing lids, the number of seats being in the usual proportion
of five per cent, up to 100 men, and three per cent, for larger
numbers.
iv. Filled in when the contents come to within two feet of the ground
surface.
"When filling in the trench the earth must be well rammed down, the upper
6 to 9 inches being puddled if the nature of the soil permits, or moistened with
heavy oil. Deep trench latrines cannot be used where t h e level of the subsoil
water is high.
25. Bucket latrines must have—
i. Fly-proof covers to all receptacles.
ii. Boxed-in seats with automatically closing lids, wherever possible.
iii. Three inches of cresol solution (1 in 360) in each bucket.
iv. Daily removal of contents and cleansing of receptacles, the inside of
the drums or pails being wiped with heavy oil.
The contents of the receptacles will be disposed of by incineration (which
is the better method) or by burial in a pit as deep as possible. Each daily
deposit will be covered with a layer of earth 18 t o 24 inches thick, moistened
with heavy oil and beaten down hard. All proposed sites for burial of night
soil will be approved by medical officer before use. Incinerators for destruction of excreta will be constructed according to designs to be obtained frorc
a sanitary section.
Open trench latrines (PLATE X X X I I I , Fig. 2) will only be used for short
halts or for camps not lasting more than a day or two. They should be three
feet long, two feet deep, and one foot wide.
26. Urinals.—The best type of field urinal, for day and night use, is made
of plain galvanized iron, and is in the form of a trough with a high back and
with a pipe leading from the lower end of the trough to a closed soak-pit (see
PLATE X X X I I I , F i g . 6).
Whatever type is adopted all surfaces exposed to urine and the inside of
all tins will be painted daily with a thin coating of heavy oil. The outsides
of troughs or drums will be whitewashed so as to be more visible at night.
Orders should be issued forbidding the dumping of refuse in urinals.
27. I n all types of latrine or urinal:—
i. The floor when not of concrete will be of broken stones or gravel
wellTammed down.
il. The seats will be scrubbed daily with cresol solution (1 in 360).
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) Q <
S
2
206
C-hap. 7 , S e c . 39.
iii. Covered boxes will be provided for latrine paper.
iv. "Where shelter from, weather is provided, the structure must be well
ventilated and the walls whitewashed inside.
I t should never be possible to detect a latrine by sense of smell.
28. Food cleanliness.—All foodstuffs must be protected from flies and
dust, and all places where food is stored, cooked, or eaten must be kept
scrupulously clean.
29. Ply-proofing of cookhouses is unnecessary. A well-ventilated shelter
whitewashed inside, freely open, b u t with all foodstuffs strictly protected, is
the most useful type of cookhouse. If protection from dust is required, light
screens should be provided.
30. Cookhouse floors, if not concrete, should be well lammed down so as
to obtain as impervious a surface as possible. Shelves and tables should
be provided, being improvised if necessary;
31. Dish cloths should be boiled each evening and hung up to dry. Brushes
intended for use in cookhouses and dining places, i.e., in connection with
food, must not be used for any other purpose. The use of mud or unbaked
sand for cleaning knives, forks, kettles, mess-tins, or other utensils is forbidden.
Wood ashes from, the fire or baked sand may be used for this purpose.
"Washing-up must be done on a table, not on the ground, and a soakage-pit
with grease-trap is essential.
32. All drain gullies in connection with cookhouses or washhig-up places
should be cleaned daily, and treated by brushing with a mixture of heavy oil
aud paraffin. When flies are prevalent all grease-traps (and soakage-pits
if not permanently covered in) should be provided with fly-proof covers.
AU refuse m u s t be placed in covered receptacles, the contents Temoved daily
and burned.
33. Nothing unconnected with the preparation of food is permitted in
any cookhouse. Clothing or equipment must not be kept there.
34. Hea* safes should be provided in all units for the protection of food
from flies. These must be kept clean, placed in the shade out of the sun,
and contain nothing except food.
35. I n dining places and shelters, cleanliness and precautions against
contamination of food are as important as in the case of cookhouses. All
food should be covered or placed in fly-proof boxes or cupboards between
meals. After each meal the dining place should be thoroughly cleaned, all
refuse and scraps of food being swept up and removed. Tables—improvised
if necessary—must be used wherever possible, so t h a t no food need be placed
on the ground. These tables will be scrubbed daily.
36. Cleanliness of person and of clothing is essential in a cook. Canvas
or other special clothing and aprons are required, and washing accommodation (including nail brushes) for cooks should be arranged near the cookhouse.
37. Drinking water.-—In units t h a t have trained water-duty men, the
purification of drinking water is carried out by them, under the supervision
of the regimental medical officer. Tor other units, this is carried out by
sanitary sections. Trained water-duty personnel, employed as such, should
never be uBed for fatigue or general sanitary duties.
38. All receptacles for tho storage or carriage of drinking water should
be regularly inspected and cleaned, as follows :—
i. H a m storage tanks should be cleaned and disinfected when necessary
by arrangement with the engineer officers concerned,
i . All other tanks, also water carts, pakhals, or any receptacles used for
the conveyance or storage of drinking water should be emptied
and thoroughly oleaned twice a week. All receptacles except
those in whioh the actual chlorination of water is carried out,
should also be disinfected, after cleaning, by swilling out with
water to which has been added twice the quantity of bleaching
powder required for drinking water sterilization,
iii. All water-bottles should be disinfected once a week. A solution is
made by filling a water-bottle with water, adding to this the
number of measures of bleaching powder required for the water,
and mixing well. The bottles t o be disinfected are filled with
water, a teaspoonful of the above strong solution is added to each,
the bottles corked and shaken and allowed t o stand for half-anhour. Another method is to fill the bottles with nearly boiling
tea and allow to stand for an hour.
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
207
39. Inoculation.—The inoculation of every unit should show 100 per cent,
of all ranks protected by anti-typhoid inoculation during the previous twelve
months.
40. Commanding officers will use every endeavour to maintain t h e inoculation state of their units at the above standard, and are responsible that any
failure t o reach that standard is not due t o causes within their control.
41. "Whenever possible, as a routine measure after each Inoculation, men
should be excused duty for the remainder of the day and for the whole of the
following day.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST MALARIA.
42. Malaria results from the bites of infected mosquitoes. I t can be
acquired in no other way. The danger period for infection is f r o m one hour
before sunset until half-an-hour after sunrise. Protection during this period
can be afforded by the use of mosquito nets or mosquito-proof huts, shelters,
<TC. (see PLATE XXXV), for men who need not be outside, and by wearing
head nets and gloves or, in the case of men on duty outside, by smearing the
face, hands, <fcc., with anti-mosquito ointment.
43. If shorts aie worn they should have flaps t h a t can be turned down over
the knees aud fastened with the puttee BO that no part is exposed t o the bites
of mosquitoes.
* •
44. Mosquitoes breed in water, especially in stagnant or slow-moving
water, and in collections of water (e.g. fire buokets) in camps or quarters.
During the daytime the adult insects shelter in houses, barns, huts, orevices
in stone walls, tents, &c., or in bush or undergrowth. All water in and around
camps must be covered (if required for use) or drained, or otherwise abolished,
or oiled weekly if this cannot be done. TJndorgrowths should be cut down or
burnt. Quarters should, if possible, be whitewashed inside; should be
searched for mosquitoes in the early morning and at sunrise and any found,
killed at once. Special attention should be paid to dark corners, cupboards,
hanging clothes, &o.
46. The avoidance of camp sites likely to be malarious will always be
considered as second only in importance to tactical necessities. I n a
malarious country such sites are valleys, ravines, the neighbourhood of rivers,
streams, lakes and marshes, the proximity of woods or extensive undergrowth,
and the vicinity of occupied native villages. I n valleys, camps in the foothills are particularly liable to malaria attack. Camps for inhabitants employed
with the army should be sited at least three-quarters of a mile in a straight
line from army camps or quarters for troops.
46, Men insufficiently protected against the sun are predisposed to disease.
Helmets will be worn during the hours stated in local orders, Protection
from the sun, even by improvised umbrellas, will be arranged for sentries,
grazing guards, &c. All latrines should bo screened from the sun. Men on
duty Which necessitates continuous exposure to the sun's rays, should wear
spine pads or open coats.
47, I n h o t malarious countries it is advisable that, except for units actually
hi the front line or compelled by special circumstances t o commence work
at an early hour, reveille should not be before 0530 hours and work should
not commence before 0700 hours, breakfast being eaten during the interval.
If possible, the period of work should normally cease by mid-day, t h e
afternoon being available for reoreational purposes.
48, Precautions are necessary to prevent chill after exercise, or in the cool
of the evening. In some countries although the days may be excessively
hot, the nights arc cool or cold compared with the days ; in such circumstances
cardigan jackets should be worn in the evenings.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST PHLEBOTOJIUS F E V E R (SANDFLY F E V E R ) .
40. Phlebo'omus fever, like malaria, is conveyed from man to man by the
bite of an insect, the " Phlebotomus," a tiny midge about the size of the head
of ah ordinary pin. I t is never found at any distance from human dwellings.
When it is neccssary for troops t o occupy an area where phlebotomi exist the
following precautions should be taken :—
208
C-hap. 7, S e c . 39.
i. Make survey of area before advent of hot weather to locate probable
breeding places, and carry out necessary facing, pointing or tarring
of walls and embankments and ground surface, particularly the
lower three feet of the outside walls of the buildings and the ground
surface for twenty feet beyond the living quarters. The interior
of all rooms and huts should be limewashed.
ii. During the phlebotomus season daily swatting > and weekly spraying
with one per cent, cresol should "be employed to kill any phlebotomi which have entered,
iii. Free the ventilators from dirt and smear with paraffin.
iv. Remove all refuse and organic debris.
v. Once a week sprinkle crude oil over outlying broken ground for a
distance of fifty yards from occupied quarters.
vi. Utilise to the full natural air currents and electric fans .and punkahs,
if available.
vii. Supply each man with flue mesh nets of 46-mesh and 120/s cotton.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST TRENCH FOOT AND FROSTBITE.
50. True frostbite is caused by exposure to severe dry cold, especially in
mountainous regions. Trench foot is caused by long contact with cold and
damp, e.g., by prolonged standing in cold water or mud t or by the continued
wearing of wet socks, boots, and puttees. The onset of both conditions is
much more rapid when the blood circulation is interfered with, e.g., by tight
boots, tight puttees, or duties requiring men to stand or sit still for a long
time, especially in a cramped attitude.
51. These disabilities may occur behind the line as well as in the trenches,
for example, in men standing in cold mud or melted snow while signalling,
wiring, road-making, on stable guard, piquet, &c., and also in transport
personnel, exposed to cold and damp, on duties allowing little or no active
cxercise to stimulate the blood circulation.
52. Individual preventive measures.—When there is likelihood of trench foot
or frostbite occurring, boots must be in good repair and easy fitting, kept
water-tight by frequent application of grease or dubbin, not
be laced tightly,
and the laces must not be tied round the ankle.
Two pai r s of socks or inner
soles should be worn, and to allow of this when new boots are issued, they
should be large enough to admit of two pairs of socks, and these should be
worn at the time of fitting the boots.
53. Before going on duty in wet trenches or in exposed situations, or on
convoy, the legs and feet, and the hands also in the case of transport personnel,
will be washed and dried, whale oil will then be thoroughly rubbed in until
the skin is dry, and dry socks put on. Puttees must be put on loosely, and it
is a good plan to loosen them and the laces of boots one hour after putting on.
A dry pair of socks should be carried in the pocket. Boots, socks and'puttees
should be taken off at least once in 24 hours (oftener if circumstanccs permit),
the legs and feet rubbed dry, and the dry pair of socks put on.
54. When wearing gum boots, the socks may be supported by some form
of fastening such as a safety pin, but on no account will anything in the form
of a garter be worn.
55. The body must be kept as warm as possible by exercise. Transport
personnel and mounted men must take every opportunity of moving about
to encourage the circulation, frequently walking and leading their animals,
when circumstances permit. Should a man feel his feet becoming excessively
cold or numbed, he should move about and, if possible, take off his boots
and socks and rub his legs and feet till circulation is restored.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES IN U N I T S AND FORMATIONS.
56. Commanding officers will ensure not only t h a t facilities for these
measures are provided, but also t h a t they are systematically carried out.
57. When the onset of trench foot or frostbite is probable, the following
measures will be strictly carried out:—
i. Whenever practicable, before going on duty in exposed places, men
should be given a hot meal. Meals should be regular, and men
on duty should have hot food by night as well as by day.
Chap. 7> S e e s . 41 a n d 42.
209
ii. Tours of duty in exposed or wet situations should be short. As few
men as possible should be put in trenches t h a t are wet. Whenever
possible, braziers will be provided in the trenches or other positions
for the troops to warm themselves and dry their clothes, and
arrangements may be necessary for socks to he dried and re-issued
during the tours of duty.
iii. Feet inspection must be made daily by platoon and section commanders.
iv. Whenever the situation admits, men should sleep with boots and
puttees off, the feet being wrapped in blankets, newspaper, straw
or hay, <fec. In any case the boots must not be tightly laced.
v. At the end of a tour of duty men :hould be marched t o a specially
prepared rest station where briziers and fires can be arranged.
They should receive a hot meal and then strip, at any rate as
regards the legs and feet, and rub down, and while they are
wrapped in blankets their clothes are dried.
58. Dry standings should be provided in trenches and other localities by
means of drainage, by the use of pumps when they are available, or by
raising the foot-level by fascines of brushwood or straw with boards on top.
59. The lining of gum boots gets wet quickly. To dry them, they should
be hung in a drying room from racks, feet down, with upper portion kept
open by a piece of wood. If hung feet uppermost, the process is a much
more lengthy one.
60. Transport units will ensure that a shelter of some sort is available for
men on return from convoy in bad weather, to which they can go and get
warmed and dried, have a hot meal, change wet boots, socks, gloves, <fec., for
dry ones, and if necessary rub feet and hands with warm oil.
61. Similar arrangements will be made at rest camps to ensure warmth,
hot food and means for drying clothes for parties arriving in bad weather.
62. A warmed dry place should be provided in which the men of guards
and line piquets can rest when not actually on sentry.
42. R E M O U N T
SERVICE
(See Remount Manual (War) 1923.)
1. The unit of organization of the remount service is the remount squadron,
as laid down in war establishments. Squadrons may be grouped together
under a depot headquarters to form remount depots.
Field remount sections are small independent units organized to convey
hatches of remounts.
Remount depots comprise :—
i. Base .remount depots.
ii. Advanced remount depots.
Base remount depots are located at bases for the reception, training and
distribution of all animals received from overseas, purchased or requisitioned
locally and those discharged from veterinary hospitals for re-issue.
2. Remount accounts (animal account, A.F. B 2004) will be rendered at the
end of each month to the Director of Remounts, supported by vouchers.
These accounts will be transmitted to the local auditor for audit in due course.
3. Casualties are replaced on indent through the usual channel of divisional
and corps headquarters, the administrative remount officer of the corps or
of the army being responsible for the issue. Indents should usually be forwarded by divisions in a consolidated form, showing the classification and
arm of the service for which required.
I n the case of an emergency, units may indent direct on the remount directorate or on the nearest remount depot, sending copies of their indents to the
headquarters of their formations.
4. When practicable, captured animals will be taken charge of hy the
mobile veterinary sections for quarantine before re-issue i n the usual manner;
in no circumstances will they be sent to remount formations until they have
passed through veterinary units. For large captures special arrangements
will be made by the Q.M.G's. branch of the staff.
210
C h a p . 7, S e e s . 40 a n d 41.
5. No privately owned horses are allowed with an array in tlie field. An7
private chargers on the strength of units proceeding with horses to a theatre
of operations, will be taken over at a valuation by the remount department.
43. V E T E R I N A R Y
SERVICE
1. The veterinary service in war is under a Director of Veterinary Services,
who receives instructions from the Q.M.G's. branch of the staff. He is
assisted by deputy directors and assistant directors and represented in cavalry
divisions and divisions by officers commanding K.A.V.C. (A.Ds.V.S. and
D. A.Ds.V.S., respectively).
2. The veterinary service is organized with the view of securing the efficiency
and reducing wastage amongst the animals of the forces in the field:—
i. By preventing the introduction and spread of contagious disease.
ii. By reducing wastage amongst animals by means of prompt application of first aid.
iii. By relieving the field army of the care of sick and inefficient animals.
iv. By professional advice regarding the feeding and maintenance of
health of all animals.
v. By arranging for the recuperation of all war worn and debilitated
animals.
vl. By maintaining and replenishing specialized veterinary stores and
appliances.
vii. By arranging for the necessary veterinary supervision required
to control contagious disease among civilian-owned animals in
occupied territories, and providing, when necessary, a veterinary
organization for the care and treatment of these animals during
the period of military operations.
3. To carry out the foregoing duties, the veterinary organization is made u p
as follows:—
i. Veterinary personnel with units and formations.
ii. Mobile veterinary sections.
iii. Veterinary evacuating stations.
iv. Veterinary hospitals.
v. Veterinary convalescent depots.
vi. Veterinary laboratories.
vii. Depots of veterinary stores.
To carry out the duties specified in para. 2, i. and ii., veterinary officers are
detailed for duty with the various portions of the field army. To these officers
is confided the veterinary supervision and care of animals. I t is their duty
to bring to the notice of commanders any measures necessary for the health
and condition of the animals under their professional care, and to evacuate
to L. of C. (thorough mobile veterinary sections and veterinary evacuating
stations which are allotted to formations in the field), all animals which they
consider require hospital treatment.
i . A mobile veterinary section is allotted to each division and cavalry
brigade and acts under the orders of the divisional or brigade, commander,
as the case may be. Its functions are to relieve the units of all sick and
ineffective animals which hamper mobility, and to arrange for their necessary
treatment during transfer to veterinary evacuating stations or veterinary
hospitals on L. of 0.
"When troops are stationary, a mobile veterinary section may retain a
limited number of cases for treatment, but it must be prepared to clear
rapidly, and move at short notice.
5. Veterinary hospitals are established on the L. of 0. to which sick and
injured animals are sent for treatment. When fit for discharge, they are
transferred to the nearest remount depot or convalescent depot according to
the discretion of the O.C. hospital.
6. All captured stock should be passed through a veterinary unit before
being utilized by troops. Similarly, animals slaughtered for human food
should be examined by a veterinary officer before being issued to units.
7. Units will make their own arrangements for shoeing their animals, but
those who have no forges will be attached to other units for farriery purposes.
No charge will be made for shoeing public animals.
211
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
VETERINARY H I N T S FOR COMMON AILMENTS AND I N J U R I E S , WHEN
VETERINARY ADVIOB IS NOT AVAILABLE.
8. Bit injuries :—
Treatment.—"Work in snaffle or with bridle over nose; improvise
martingale if necessary. Rinse mouth out with clean water after
feeding.
9. Broken knees :—
Treatment.—Cleanliness, apply tincture of iodine and cover with clean
pad of lint, wool or tow, and bandage.
10. Bullet wounds :—
Treatment.—Observe cleanliness in all treatment of wounds. Dust
with boric acid and cover with clean pad of lint, wool or tow, and
bandage, which must not be applied tightly unless to stop bleeding.
11. Colic:—
Symptoms.—Horse looks round at his sides, tries to lie down and roll,
stamps with hind legs and kicks at belly.
Treatment.—Walk about, give cldoral hydrate ball, if available, or
2 ozs. turpeutine well shaken up, either with a pint of linseed oil,
or eggs and milk. If not relieved in an hour repeat the dose and
give in addition an aloes ball. I n the absence of drugs give half
tumbler of rum or whisky in a pint of warm water, or
pints of
warm beer with a teaspoonful of ginger mixed in it. Hand-rub
belly and give frequent enemas of soapy water.
12. Constipation:—
Treatment.—Soft and green food if available; regular work and
frequent enemas.
13. Coughs and colds :—
Treatment.—Steam head and apply liniment, or mustard mixed as
for the table, to throat from ear to ear, and leave on for 15
minutes. Give soft food. Keep body warm with rugs and bandages
and give plenty of fresh air. Any animal with a nasal discharge
should be isolated, and veterinary aid obtained as soon as possible.
14. Cracked heels and mud fever :—
Treatment.—Cleanse and dry (if greasy apply dry bran poultices), dust
on boric acid or powdered starch.
Prevention.—Do not wash legs when muddy, but leave until dry
and then brush dirt out.
IB. Cuts and tears :—
Treatment.—As for 9, bandage if necessary.
16. Diarrhoea:—
Treatment.—Dry bran.
Keep body warm with rugs and bandages.
17. Dirty sheath:—
Treatment.—Draw out penis and wash it and sheath with soap and
warm water or dirt will accumulate and maggots may appear.
18. Epizootic lymphangitis :—
Symptoms.—Sores similar to and in similar situations to farcy. They have a greater tendency to heal. They usually originate from
wounds, from which point cord-like swellings appear. I t is on the
course of these swellings that the sores form.
Very contagious.
Treatment.—Proceed as for farcy.
19. Exhaustion after hard work :—
Treaiment.—Give a carbonate of ammonia ball or pint of warm Deer,
or half tumbler of rum or whisky in a pint of water. Bug up and
bandage. Best and light exercise. Feed with bran mashes, steamed
oats, boiled linseed, oatmeal, gruel, &c., if available, in small
quantities and often.
212
C-hap. 7 , S e c .
39.
20. Farcy :—
Symptoms.—Skin form of glanders. Appears as a string of running
sores, usually on inside of hind legs, occasionally neck and face,
No tendency to heal.
Treatment.—Proceed as for glanders.
21. r o v e r :—
Symptoms.—Horse off feed, dull, temperature over 100 deg. Fah.
Treatment.—Isolate
and apply for veterinary aid. Give soft food,
and green stuff when available. Keep water always by and
change frequently. If procurable, give a handful of Epsom
salts in each bucket of water. Keep body warm with rugs and
bandages, and give plenty of fresh air.
22. Girth galls
Treatment.—If simply a swelling, lightly smooth over the swollen surface
with the hand in the direction of the hair, as if to smooth it out,
for 15 minutes at a time. If skin is chafed treat as • for wounds.
To work horse, strap girth back, tying it under the belly to
surcingle which should be placed over fans of saddle. "When
healed, place piece of sheep-skin under girth.
23. Glanders:—
Symptoms.—Thick gluey discharge from one or both nostrils, ulcers
on the membrane inside nostrils ; glands between lower jaws
enlarged, hard, and appear to be fixed to bone.
Procedure.—Very contagious. Rigid isolation of affected cases,
in-contacts and whole unit if.possible. On suspicion immediately
obtain veterinary aid.
Very contagious to human beings.
24. Heel-rope galls :—
Prevention.—Keep head rope short.
Treatment.—Grease when marching. On return to camp wash with
soap and warm water, thoroughly dry and apply bran poultice.
25. Mange :—
Symptoms.—Marked
skin irritation. Horse bites and rubs himself
against any available object. Hair comes off in patches and
skin becomes thickened and corrugated.
Treatment.—Prevention of spread. Obtain veterinary aidwitliout delay.
Very contagious. Isolate affected and suspicious cases with their
equipment. Men looking after them should not go amongst healthy
animals as they may carry infection in their clothing. Thoroughly
disinfect all stables, utensils, harness, &c. Clip, singe and wash in
hard soap and warm water, then dress all over with sulphur 1 part,
sperm oil 4 parts, mixed thoroughly together. Do not use linseed
oil. Rub in dressing thoroughly with a body brush, work it in with
the hands for 2 days, then wash thoroughly with hard soap and warm
water, taking great care to remove all dressing to prevent blistering.
Sweat and groom thoroughly daily after washing off the first dressing
and in 10 days repeat the dressing, washing, and grooming. In
cases where itchiness or other signs of the disease remain a third
dressing should be applied and a final washing, &c., carried out.
Daily exercise and a liberal diet are essential. If weather permits,
clothing should be withdrawn from any unit in which the disease
exists till the outbreak is over, as it is one of the main sources of
contagion. All gear, blankets, &c., should be thoroughly disinfected before being used again. Daily inspections of all animals
arc imperative until the unit i3 declared free from the disease.
1Q. .Ringworm:—
symptoms.—Hair falls out in circular patches.
Treatment.—Clip affected parts and burn clippings. Wash animal
all over with some disinfectant (i.e., Cresol, 1 part in 80 of water).
Apply tincture of iodine, paraffin, or soft soap to spots.
Disinfect harness, &e., Obtain veterinary aid.
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
213
27 Sand colic :—
Prevention.—Feed off blankets, <fcc. Clean food.
Treatment.—SMOG as for No. 11, Colic.
28. Sore backs and saddle galls.
Prevention.—Careful supervision and fitting of saddlery.
• Treatment.—If swelling only, treat as for " Girth Galls " or bathe
with cold, salt water. If skin chafed, treat as for wounds. Keep
saddle off back until healed.
29. Sore withers.
Treatment.—Keep arch of saddle well clear of withers.
If swelling only, treat as for " G i r t h Galls," or bathe with cold,
salt water. If skin brokeu, treat as for wounds.
30. Sprained tendons, &c.:—
Treatment.—Best.
Apply cotton wool and linen bandage and stand
in cold water ; or apply layer of soft clay. Renew when dry.
31. Strangles:—
Symptoms.—Swelling
at the back of or under the jaw, may be some
difficulty in swallowing.
Treatment.—Isolate and obtain veterinary aid.
Rest, soft food, rug up and bandage, plenty of fresh air and foment
swelling, when swelling bursts t r e a t as for wounds.
32. Thrush:—
Prevention.—Dry standings and pick out feet daily.
Treatment.—Clean frog, dress cleft with boric acid and then plug
with piece of tow. If severe, poultice or soak foot before applying
dressing.
Stand on driest ground available.
33. Ticks:—
Treatment.—Pull out taking care not to leave head in the skin ; or
touch with paraffin, turpentine, or carbolic acid.
34. To make :—
(a) Bran mash.—Put 2 double handfuls of bran in a bucket and pour
on as much boiling water as the bran will soak up. Cover bucket
with rug and leave till cool enough to eat.
Teaspoonful of salt improves.
(b) Steamed oats.—Substitute oats for bran and proceed as above.
Gruel.—Cook oatmeal as for porridge and thin down with water,
or m a y mix oatmeal with water straight away.
35. To shoot a horse.—Lift up forelock and place it under brow hand.
Place muzzle of revolver almost touching the skin where the lowest hair
of t h e forelock grow.
214
CHAPTER VIII
44. O F F I C E W O R K A N D P R I V A T E
CORRESPONDENCE
POSTAL
GENERAL R U L E S .
1. Office work in the field is to be restricted to what is absolutely indispensable ; no office work will be transacted with a unit on service in the field t h a t
can possibly be dealt with at a stationary office.
2. Equipment accounts will not be kept by units.
3. Routine work connected with the provision, pay and records of personnel
will, as far as possible, be dealt with by the D.A.G., 2nd echelon, and the
pay master-in-chief.
4. War diaries and documents, which contain anything of a nature likely
to prove useful when the history of the campaign is written, will, when no
longer required, be sent to the D.A.G., 2nd echelon.
5. A state is a report whereby a commander is kept informed of the fighting
condition of his command. Punctuality in rendering it is usually more
important than extreme accuracy.
A return is a document for statistical purposes, or to show the condition
of the forces more accurately than is possible in a state, Accuracy in their
compilation is essential.
A return (A.E. B 213) will be furnished weekly, on Sunday, by a commander
of a unit or detachment to the D.A.G., 2nd echelon, for all persons and animals
rationed by him the previous day.
6. The senior staff officer of each branch is responsible for the custody
of secret or confidential books, &c,, he will take necessary precautions to
prevent them falling into the hands of the enemy.
7. Letters in the field should be drawn up in minute form. The same rules
should be applied to them as have been given in Chap. I l l for orders and
messages.
8. Location.—The Q.lT.G's. branch in consultation with the general staff
branch will decide on the location of the offices of the various branchos.
The general staff, with artillery advisers and Q.M.G's. branch, will normally
be close together.
The signals office will always be close to the general staff branch.
Location of various offices should be clearly marked.
The appointment, and not the name, of each staff officer should.be on the
outside of his office.
9. Officer on duty.—In divisions and higher formations, there should always
be an officer on duty by day in each branch of the staff. By night, one officer
may represent two or more branches.
I n an office the position of the officer on duty should be marked by a board,
and all enquiries should, in the first instance, be made to him.
Subordinate staff officers, should, as far as practicable, prevent the senior
staff officer of their branch from being interrupted unnecessarily.
10. Duties at the base. The duties of the officer of the D.A.G., 2nd echelon,
are as follows :—
i. To relieve all units and formations in the field of the routine work
regarding the strength and record of their personnel which is
dealt with in peace time by the orderly-room staff.
ii. Verification and communication to military authorities of casualties
in the field, including followers and authorized civilians.
iii. Supplying reinforcements from the base to the forces in the field.
iv. Compilation of returns and statistics as regards personnel.
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
215
v. Custody of personal effects of deceased soldiers.
vi. Personal services, posting, transfers and promotion of other ranks.
vii. Deal with matters of detail, the policy of which is laid down in
regulations or has been decidcd by the C.-in-C.
viii. Questions affecting prisoners of war, personal effects of enemy dead,
ix. Custody and transmission of war diaries and other documents of
an historical nature.
11. The D.A.G., 2nd echelon, will maintain on the duplicate A.F. B 199a
(for officers) and on A.F. B 103 (for other ranks), a record of service for each
officer and other rank of the force, and also on a similar form for any enrolled
oivllian, labourer, <fcc., who is not employed and paid locally as a casual
labourer.
12. The D.A.G., 2nd echelon, corresponds direct with the H.Q. of formations
On all matters with which they are mutually concerned and with Os^C. units
in the field on questions regarding the records or whereabouts of officers and
other ranks. The office of the D.A.G., 2nd echelon, acts as the channel of
correspondence between units in the field and branches of the War Office
(for officers) and officers 1/c records (for other ranks).
W A K DIAUIES.
13. War diaries are secret documents. Their object is :—
i. To furnish an accurate record of the operations from which the
history of the war can subsequently be prepared.
ii. To collect information for future reference with a view to effecting
improvements in the organization, education, training, equipment
and administration of the army for war.
14. A diary will be kept in duplicate by :—
Each branch or section of the staff at G.H.Q. and at the H.Q. of an
; army, and of all subordinate commands, including garrisons and
posts, except intelligence sections of the general staff.
Commanders of permanent and provisional units, detachments from a
unit, and base depots, and the D.A.G,, 2nd echelon.
Directors and heads of administrative services and departments, and
their representatives and officers holding special and personal
appointments, from the first day of mobilization or creation of the
particular command or appointment.
The original copy will be forwarded on the last day of each month, unless
otherwise ordered, direct to the D.A.G., 2nd echelon, for transmission
t o the military authorities concerned. Duplicate copies of their
war diaries will be sent by units direct to the officer i/c record
offices concerned as soon as they cease to require them, at maximum
intervals of 3 months. Similarly, formations will send their duplicate
copies to D.A.G., 2nd echelon, for disposal.
15. I n so far as they apply to each case the following points should be
recorded:—
i. All important orders, despatches, instructions, reports and telegrams
issued and received, and decisions taken.
ii. Dally situation, i.e., arrival at, departure from, or halt at a place ;
all movements and dispositions on the march, in camp, bivouac,
or billets. With large units a march table should be given.
•
At places on the L. of C., arrivals and departures of officers and
men, animals, stores, transports, <fcc., should be given.
iii. All important matters relating to the duties of the staff under their
respective headings.
iv. All important matters relating to the administrative services and
departments under their respective headings.
v. Detailed account of all operations, noting connection with other
units in the neighbourhood, formations adopted, ranges a t which
fire was opened, &c. The hour at which important occurrences
took place should be entered with exactitude. The state of t h e
weather, condition of the roads and ground, and general description
of the locality should be recorded, supported by clear sketches
to amplify the report.
•
216
O h a p .5,S e c . 27;
vi. Changes in establishment or strength. As regards casualties, the
names and ranks of officers, and the number of other ranks and
followers, and animals should be noted.
vii. Nature and description of field works constructed or quarters
occupied.
viii. Meteorological notes.
ix. Summary of information received and of all matters of importance,
military or political, which may occur from day to day.
x. I n what respect organizations and regulations have stood the test
of war.
16. In all diaries writing will be on one side of the page only. A war diary
(A.F. C 2118) should be entered up daily or much of its value will be lost.
Each entry should be initialled by the officer detailed to keep it. Attention
is drawn to the instruction on A.F. C 2118, to the effect t h a t the extraction
and retention of appendices, maps, &c., from the diary is an offence under
the Official Secrets Act.
17. References to appendices, such as orders, reports, telegrams, sketches,
statements of evidence of spies and other persons, tabular statements, &c.,
will be made in the last column.
PRIVATE POSTAL CORRESPONDENCE.
18. Private postal correspondence of officers, soldiers, foreign attaches,
and civilians employed by or accompanying the army is permitted by means
of—
i. Printed post cards (A.F. A 2042).
ii. Ordinary post cards.
iii. Letters (unregistered) in the green envelope (A.F. \V 3078).
iv. Letters (registered or unregistered) in ordinary envelopes.
v. Parcels, including photographs and sketches, of private diaries.
All such correspondence, after censorshipf must be posted in boxes or offices
controlled by the army postal service. The posting of such correspondence in
ciml post offices is forbidden. The postage rates payable will be notified to the
troops through the usual channels.
19. Correspondence carried out under para. 18, ii, iii, iv. and is liable to
delay in transmission owing to the necessity for censorship. All ranks should
therefore, in their own interests, employ the printed postcards as far as
possible.
20. Postal orders are issued and paid when possible, and registered letters
and parcels received. All private correspondence must adhere strictly to
censorship regulations in force. Private letters and parcels (other than
registered) are carried at the sender's risk.
21. Private correspondence must be addressed with the addressee's number
(if any), rank, name, squadron, battery, company, regiment, battalion,
service, or appointment, or the unit or service to which he is attached. The
title of the expeditionary force and name of the country in which operations
are taking place should be added, but no town should be mentioned in the
address.
22. I n no circumstances is specific reference to be made on post cards, in
letters, on matter posted in parcels, or in private diaries sent from the theatre
of operations, to the place from which they are written or despatched; to
plans of future operations, whether rumoured, surmised, or known; to
organization, numbers and movements of troops ; t o the armament of troops
or fortresses ; to defensive works ; to the moral or physical condition of the
troops ; to casualties previous to the publication of official lists ; to the f
service of maintenance; or, in case the writer is one of the garrison of a
besieged fortress, to the effects of hostile firo.
Criticism of operations is forbidden, as are statements calculated to bring
t h e army or individuals into disrepute.
All correspondence must be in " clear." The rank and unit of the writer
will not be added to his signature.
C h a p . 8, S e e s . 4 4 a n d 45.
217
23. The green envelope (A.F. W 3078) is issued for the use of troops for the
transmission of letters relating to private and family matters only. These
envelopes may be posted uncensored by the sender's unit, but are liable t o
examination by the censor staff at the base.
Writers may enclose up to three of their own letters, in ordinary covers, iu
one green envelope, which should in this case be addressed t o the " base
censor." The contents will then be examined and despatched by the censor
staff at the base.
Green envelopes cannot be registered, and should not contain money or
other valuables.
45. CIPHERS A N D
CODES
1. A cipher is a secret means of communication.
A code is a non-secret means of communication by which messages can be
sent in shorter form.*
2. The following rules will govern the process of enciphering and
deciphering messages.
i. No cipher message will ever contain paragraphs partly in clear
and partly in cipher,
ii. Ciphers or deciphers will never be written on the same sheet as
t h e original message.
iii. Every cipher message will be checked before despatch.
iv. References to cipher messages will be avoided in code or clear
messages and in ordinary correspondence.
v. Replies t o cipher messages will be in cipher.
vi. If it is absolutely necessary to reply in cipher t o a code or clear
message reference to the code or clear message will be enciphered.
vii. Letter cipher groups will he written in block capitals.
viii. Figure ciphcr groups will be arranged in groups of five figures.
ix. All papers used in the process of ciphering and deciphering will be
destroyed.
x. If it. is necessary to give wide circulation to a cipher me?-age, a
paraphrase of it will be made for the purpose, and clearly
marked " Paraphrase."
xi. The method of enciphering and t h e " keywords " used will he kept
secret.
3. Ciphers for use in the field may be divided into two main classes :—
i. Field cipher books.
Ii. Field cipher systems.
By the former, words and sentences are represented by arbitrarily
chosen cipher groups of letters or figures.
4. The latter may be divided into two main systems :—
i. Transposition in which the position of the letters of the text is
altered according to some definite plan.
II. Substitution in which each letter of the text has substituted for it
another letter or a pair of figures.
5. Transposition cipher.
The following is a simple transposition cipher •—
i. A "keyword " must be provided t o operate this cipher, the length
of the keyword should vary between 12 and 24 letters, and will
be changed frequently if the cipher traffic is considerable. A
keyword may consist of two or more words, thus—
" COLONELCOMMANDANT."
• Certain naval codes prefixed " confidential" will be treated as secret in
the army.
1
2X8.
Chap. 8, S e c . 4 5 .
ii. Suppose the keyword is " T R A N S P O S I T I O N C I P H E R , "
iii. This keyword is numbered off to form the " key " in the following
manner:—
Under the first letter of the alphabet to occur, working from left
to right, p u t the figure X, under the second letter the figure 2,
and continue with all the remaining letters of the keyword. If a letter occurs more than once, to each subsequent repetition
(working from left to right) allot the next number In order of
sequence, t h u s : —
T R A N S
P O S
I T I
O N C I P H E R
18.14. 1 . 8 . 16.12.10.17.5. 19.6. 11.9. 2. 7. 13.4. 3. 15.
iv. Under this key the message must now be written, figures and
punctuations being spelt o u t : —
l e t the message to be enciphered be :—
" Before using any cipher book or system the instructions should
be carefully read."
This is written under the key as follows :—
18. 14. 1.
8. 16. 12. 10. 17. 5. 19. 6. 11. 9.
B
7. 13. i.
3. 15.
E
F
0
K. E
U
S
I
N
G
A
I T •Y
0
I
P
a
E
B, B
0
0
K
0
E
S
Y
S
T
E
H
T
H
E
I
N
S
T
R
XI
C
T
I
0
N" S
s
H
0
U
L. D
B
E
C
A
E,
E
F
U
L
L
Y
B
A
D
E
2.
v . The letters of the text of the message are then transposed as follows:—
Take the letters vertically beginning with the column under the
figure 1, viz., F 0 U F, followed by those under the figures 2, 3, 4,
&c., viz., Y T L, H N C, P I E , <tc. and write them down in groups
of five letters on the message form as below:— ,
F p t i F Y , TLHNcl PTElV
SEGTH
DCHDO
OCUNMI UUROY AEOEO
ILIEB
EBREE
SARKT
LSSNR , B R T R N
SSA*
vi. The last line of letters when written under the key as in iv. should
never be a complete line; if necessary dummy letters should be
added to make the frame irregular.
vii. The total number of letters in the ciphered message will be given
immediately before the first cipher group, thus, in the example
given above : 68 FOUFY TLHNC, <fcc.
6. To decipher.
i. Number off the keyword to form the key as described in para. 5, iii.
ii. Divide the total number of letters received by the number of letters
in the keyword, this will give' the number of complete rows and
the number of letters in the bottom row of the frame. I n the
example given 68 -r 19 = 3 complete rows of 19 letters -f 11
letters in the fourth or bottom row.
iii. Beneath the key then construct a frame containing 3 complete rows
of 19 spaces and a fourth row of 11 spaces, and write in vertically
the letters of the received text beginning with the column under
t h e figure 1, followed by the columns under the figures 2, 3, 4,
&c., until the frame is completely filled in.
* If t h e final letter group contains less than five letters never complete to a
five letter group.
Chap. 6, S e c . 34.
219
In.the example given above the frame with the first six five-letter groups
of the received text written into it would be:—
18. 14.
1.
8. 16. 12. 10. 17. 5. 19.
6.
11. 9.
2.
7. 13. 4.
3. 15.
1?
O
I
&
N
Y
C
P
H
O
O
Y
T
M T
H
I
N
TJ c
S
H
L
D
E
C
tr
E
D
I?
iv. The message is then read from the frame.
The above system becomes much more secure if the same process is repeated
a second time, a different keyword being chosen for the second transposition.
7. Substitution ciphers.
Substitution ciphers can be made by substituting a letter or a pair of figures
for each letter of the text. Simple letter substitution ciphers are made by
substituting a jumbled alphabet for a fixed alphabet. Sliding alphabet
oipliers are a form of simple substitution.
Figure substitution ciphers can be made by constructing a square 5 x 5
containing 25 spaces and writing into the square so formed either a straightforward alphabet from A to Z (I and J being counted as one letter), or preferably an alphabet arranged according to some prearranged keyword. Digit
from 0 to 9 inclusive, preferably jumbled, are written down the left side and
across the top of the square as below :—
0
5
9
3
6
7
2
4
8
1
Each letter in the square is then represented by the pair of figures to the
left of and above each letter in the grid.
8. No cipher system which consists of a single process only, as above, can
be considered secure against a civilized enemy, in fact, it must always be
assumed when fighting a civilized enemy that most double process cipher
systems are capable of solution by the enemy after they have been in use for
a certain period, though frequent changes of the " key " should render this
more difficult.
9. A cipher system which may appear to the uninitiated complex and
therefore secure, may easily yield its solution to an expert in cryptography,
and may therefore be of great danger to the force using it owing to the false
sense of security given by it. For this reason the cipher systems described
above will not be used where official cipher books or cipher machines
are available. They are only mentioned for use in case of emergency when
the proper cipher facilities are not procurable.
10. I n the solution of a cryptogram a knowledge of the comparative recurrence of the letters of the alphabet is very important. The frequency of
recurrence is practically constant for all messages, &c., of 10,000 letters or
over. The following table is applicable to military cryptograms for the
solution of which the ordinary table of frequency requires modification:—
(b 28/332)Q
T
220
Chap. 7, S e e s . 37 a n d 38.
TABLE OF PERCENTAGES.
Letter.
A
B
C
Ch.
D
E
I?
G
H
I
J
K
L
LL
M
N
n
0
P
Q
B
Er
S
T
TJ
V
W
X
Y
Z
English.
7-8
1-7
2-8
—
4-0
12-5
2-5
1-8
5-7
7-0
0-5
0-6
4-5
—
2-7
7-0
German.
5-0
2-0
2-5
Italian.
Portuguese.
8-0
0-0
3-2
11-7
0-6
4-5
140
0-6
3-4
3-7
18-0
1-0
1-05
0-6
7-0
0-3
3-1*
12-6
1-0
1-7
1-0
11-4
t
40
14-2
1 '2
1-0
1-0
6-9
0-5
5-0
7-2
3-2
30
7-2
3-0
6-6
4-6
4-8
French.
—
5-1
18-0
2-1
4-0
4-1
7-88
0-1
10
2-8
**
4-9
6-0*
2-9
2-0
8-8
4-3
4-5
1-5
**
01
0-06
0-4
0-1
0-8
0-4
—
—
—
—
7-5
2-0
0-3
6-5
3-0
0-8
tt
7-0
8-0
3-0
1-2
7-0
9-3
3-0
0-3
6*4
—
60
9-0
3-0
1-0
1-75
0-3
2-0
0-2
—
oG-75
6-0
5-1
1-0
1-5
tt
tt
1-4
.—
8-0
7-0
6-2
2-0
tt
0-3
0-25
0-1
13-4
1-6
40
0-2
4-9
13-3
0-8
1-3
0-5
6-6
0-4
4-9
0B
2-8
7-0
0-2
8-8
2-7
1-0
6-5
0-4
7-6
4-3
4-0
1-0
—
2-5
12-0
Spanish.
11-0
2-8
1-0
6-4
—
1-2
??? a d ? Vd J i d c o n f u s i ° n . the Spanish compound letters are suppressed.
•
J .?,
are interchangeable; therefore the individual percentages
assigned will vary more or less.
t Substitute the double " i " at the beginning, middle and end of word
Is an auxiliary only,
f t Occasional.
**,".?.". e 4 , l a l a " 0 " or " eh " ; " x " equals " s " or " ss", and '* yJ "
equals l. '
a " ss " ( " sz ") treated as two characters.
46. DISCIPLINE
P O W E R S OP A COMMANDING OFFICER.
. };„/}, commanding officer may, subject to the soldier's right to elect, previous
itsl
puntehments
™* court-martial, inflict the following summary
On a private soldier.
i. Detention not exceeding 28 days, but the power of awarding
detention exceeding seven days, except in cases of absencd without
leave, will not be exercised by a C.O. under the rank of field
officer.
i
ii. Field punishment not exceeding 28 days.
ill. Forfeiture of all ordinary pay under Section 46 (2) (i) of the Army
Act for a period commencing on the date of award and not exceeding 28 days.
C h a p . 6, S e c . 34.
221
iv. I n t h e case of drunkenness a fine n o t exceeding 40s.
v. Any deduction from ordinary p a y allowed under Section 138 (4)
and (6)-of the Army Act, except t h a t in t h e case of a soldier
who, by neglect or culpable mismanagement, loses or damages
any articles of his personal equipment or a n y other government
property, t h e approval of t h e Cr.O.C. must be obtained if t h e
amount proposed to be recovered f r o m a n y soldier exceeds £4.
On a Non-commissioned Officer,
vl. Any deduction from the ordinary pay'of a N.C.O. allowed by Sec.
138 (4) of t h e Army Act.
A commanding officer may also inflict t h e following minor punishments,
t h e offender having no Tight to elect trial b y a court-martial:—
Private soldier.
vii. Confinement t o barracks, n o t exceeding 14 days,
viii. E x t r a guards or piquets as punishment for minor offences or irregularities when on or parading for these duties.
ix. Admonition.
Non-commissioned
Officers.
x . Reprimand or severe reprimand.
xi. Admonition.
Notes :—
(a) Any N.C.O. or man holding any appointment or acting r a n k m a y be
ordered by his C.O. t o be reduced to his permanent r a n k or to a n y
intermediate acting r a n k or lance rank, but is n o t to be awarded
for the same offence any other punishment in addition.
(b) A C.O. has no power to award summary or minor punishment in the
case of any W a r r a n t Officer. Summary punishment in such cases
can only be awarded as laid down in Section 47, Army Act.
POWERS OF A COMPANY COMMANDER.
2. A company, <fcc., commander may award a private soldier punishment
n o t exceeding seven (7) days C.B. for minor offences, extra guards and
piquets, fines for drunkenness, and h e may deal with cases of absence without
leave, where p a y is automatically forfeited, and m a y award any punishment
within his ordinary powers for such absence. H e may admonish or reprimand,
b u t n o t severely reprimand, a N.C.O. below t h e r a n k of Serjeant (or the
appointment of lance-serjeant).
ARREST.
3. A w a r r a n t officer, N.C.O. or private soldier charged with a serious offence
will be placed in arrest. An officer will invariably be placed under arreat
if a charge is preferred against him. Arrest is either close or open, and, if
n o t described as open, means close arrest. A private soldier in close arrest
will be placed in confinement under a guard, and will be searched and deprived
of knives or other weapons. If drunk, he m a y be deprived of his boots, except
in cold weather. A private soldier in open arrest will n o t quit barracks,
billets, camp or other similar area. He will a t t e n d parades, b u t will n o t be
called on t o perform a n y duty other t h a n t h a t required to relieve him of his"
office or of a n y cash, stores, or accounts of which h e m a y h a v e charge. An
officer, w a r r a n t officer or N.C.O. in close arrest is n o t to leave his quarters or
t e n t , except t o t a k e such exercise under supervision as t h e M.O. considers
necessary. If in open arrest he is n o t t o use his own or a n y other mess
premises or t o appear in a n y public assembly, or in t h e case of a n N.C.O. to
enter a liquor b a r or corporal's room, b u t he may, u n d e r strict orders as to
his conduct, be directed t o proceed from one station t o another, or be permitted t o leave his station for a particular purpose.
(B 28/332)Q
T Z
47.
COURTS-MARTIAL
1. COTHTS-MAEIIAL TJ2TDER THE AEMY ACT.
Name of
Court-Martial.
Minimum
Number
of Members.
Minimum
Service
of
Members
in Years.
Maximum Powers.
Bank of President.
less
The King or G.O.C. by
warrant.
years Impt. H.L.
Reduction of N.O.O.
Discharge.
G.O.C. or other officer
having a warrant to
convene a D.C.M.
Same as G.C.M. (unless
less than 3 members)
O.C. Det. on service
where G.C.M. not possible, or no superior
authority.
General
„
5
3
F.O. (colonel if possible)
Dearth (and all
punishments)
District
„
3
2
F.O., but if a F.O. is
not available a captain may sit
2
3»
1
Same as for a D.C.M...
Field General
..
Convening Authority.
* Except that, if 3 officers are not available, the court may consist of 2 officers.
Note.—Officers can only be tried by G.C.M. or F.G.C.M.
Any court-martial may award field punishment for any offence committed on active service, and may, in addition to or without
further punishment, sentence an offender to forfeiture of pay for a period not exceeding 3 months commencing on the day of sentence.
C h a p . 7> S e e s . 41 a n d 42.
223
SUSPENDED SENTENCES.
2. Under Section 57A of tlie Army Act the execution of a sentence, on a
soldier, of penal servitude, imprisonment or detention, may be recommended
by the confirming authority to be suspended. Such suspension may be
ordered by a superior authority either before or after the soldier has been
committed. When suspension is ordered the sentence or remainder of such
sentence will not be operative until the soldier is subsequently ordered t o be
committed t o prison or detention barracks.
During suspension all sentences will be considered at intervals of not more
than three months, and, if the soldier's conduct has justified it, a remission
of part of the whole of the sentence may be ordered by the competent military
authority.
A superior military authority may, at any time, whilst a sentence is suspended, order, t h a t the soldier be committed to undergo such unexpired
portion of the sentence as has not been served or remitted.
F I E L D PUNISHMENT.
3. Rules for field punishment made under Section 44 of the Army Act.
i. A court-martial, or a commanding officer, may award field punishment
for any offence committed on active service, and may sentence an offender
to such punishment for a period not exceeding, in the case of a court-martial,
3 months, and in the case of a C.O., 28 days.
ii. Where an offender is sentenced to field punishment he may, during the
continuance of his sentence, unless the court-martial or the C.O. otherwise
directs, be punished as follows :—
(а) He may be kept in irons, i.e., in fetters or handcuffs, or both fetters
and handcuffs ; and may be secured so as to prevent his escape.
(б) Straps or ropes may be used for the purpose of these rules in lieu of
irons.
(c) He may be subjected to the like labour, employment and restraint,
and dealt with in like manner as if he were under sentence of
imprisonment with hard labour.
iii. Every portion of a field punishment shall be inflicted in such a manner
as is calculated not to cause injury or to leave any permanent mark on the
offender ; and a portion of a field punishment must be discontinued upon a
report by a responsible medical officer that the continuance of t h a t portion
would be prejudicial to the offender's health.
iv. Field punishment will be carried out regimentally when the unit to
which the offender belongs or is attached is actually on the move, but when
the unit is halted at any place where there is a provost-marshal, or an
assistant provost-marshal, the punishment will be carried out under t h a t
officer.
v. When the unit to which an offender under sentence of field punishment
belongs or is attached is actually on the move, such offender shall march with
his unit, carry his arms and accoutrements, perform all his military duties
as well as extra fatigue duties, and be treated as a defaulter.
48. P R O V O S T - M A R S H A L A N D
POLICE
MILITARY
1. The provost-marshal commands the military police. He supervises
!he duties of and is responsible for the organization, efficiency and general
distribution of the military police, subject to the general instructions of the
A.G.
2. Officers of the provost-marshal's service receive their instructions through
the A.G-'s. staff of the formation to which they are attached.
3. The military police units are under the immediate orders of the representative of the provost-marshal in the formation to which they are attached.
Where no such representative is appointed, or where personnel of the military
police are attached to formations, the military police are under the orders of
an officer of the A.G's. branch of the staff.
224
C h a p . 8, S e c . 48.
4. The principal duties of the provost-marshal's service are: —
i. To assist generally in the maintenance of discipline.
ii. To arrest unauthorized persona within the lines or persons found
committing offences of any kind.
iii. To assist in the collection and disposal of stragglers and prisoners of
war.
iv. To control the civil population in the theatre of war. To assist in this
duty the general staff employ field uecurity police, whose duties
include the prevention and detection of espionage, sabotage, leakage
of information, and attempts against the morale of the troops by
civilians or enemy agents.
v. To ensure a hearing to civilians bringing complaints against British
-troops. To protect the inhabitants of the country from ill-treatment by soldiers. To protect soldiers against frivolous complaints
by the inhabitants.
vi. Traffic control.
5. The closest co-operation between the provost-marshal's representative
and all branches of the staff of formations, area commandants, town majors
and the troops is essential.
6. I n case of emergency the military police may call on any troops to
assist them by supplying guards, sentries, or patrols, as may be necessary.
All persons belonging to, or employed by, the army are required to give
every assistance to the military police in the execution of their duties.
r
225
C H A P T E R
IX.
49. T H E
LAND
FORCES
OF
THE
BRITISH
DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES,
AND
MANDATORY
TERRITORIES , (EXCLUSIVE OF INDIA)
j
j
j
j
1. A summary ol the forces maintained in tlie British Dominions &c., over
the Seas other than in India is given in the following table ; the nature of
these forces and an outline of their organization are also indicated.
2. At the Imperial Conference of 1909 it was unanimously agreed t h a t
the organization of all the forces of the Empire should be assimilated as far
as possible. Canada, Australia, New Zealand and the Union of S. Africa
have organized their units on similar establishments to those of the Ilegular
Army with certain modifications in the case of S. Africa due to local
conditions.
3. The following abbreviations are used in this section:—
L.E.
= Lee Enfield.
M.E.
= Martini Enfield.
M.H.
= Martiui Henri.
M.L.E. = Magazine Lee Enfield.
M.L.M. =
„
„ Metford.
R.M.L. =s Hi fled Muzzle Loader (Guns).
K.A.R. = King's African Bifies.
W.A.F.F.= West African Frontier Force
J
j
4. LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—connitued.-.
Name of Dominion,
Colony, or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Term of
Engagement.
i . DOMINION OP CANADA.
Years.
Active Militia (permanent)
3
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Pixed
defences).
Organization.
18-pdr. Q 3 \ , S.M.L.E. rifles, Units of all arms and departments are raised
on a voluntary basis.
-303" Vickers and Lewis guns.
The permanent active militia consists o f : —
Headquarters Staff and Staff of Military Districts.
The E.C. Dragoons.
Lord Strathcona's Horse (B.C.).
The E.C. Horse Artillery.
The E.C. Artillery (C.A. and M.A.).
The E.C. Engineers.
The E.C. Corps of Signals.
The E.C. Regiment.
Princess Patricia's C. Light I n f .
The Eoyal 22nd Eegiment.
The E.C. Army Service Corps.
The E.C. Army Medical Corps.
The E.C. Ordnance Corps.
The E.G. Army Veterinary Corps.
The E.C. Army P a y Corps.
Corps of Military Staff Clerks
Canadian Small Arms School.
The strength is limited by the Amending Act of
1919 t o 10,000, b u t a t present the authorized
establishment is less t h a n 4,000. The duties
of the Permanent Active Militia are more
analogous t o those of the permanent staff of
the Territorial Army a t home t h a n of tlje
Eegular Army.
(j
p
si
'o
"
rr.
®
p
co
•-
Active Militia (non-permanent)
..
Q.F., 18-pdr., 60 pdrs.,8", 6', 5 ' The active militia (non-permanent) consists of—
and 4 • 5" Hows., S.M.L.E. rifles, Mounted Troops—
9 Brigade H.Q.
• 303" Yickers, Colts and Lewis
34 Regimental H.Q.
guns.
103 Squadrons.
Field Artillery—•
19 Brigade H.Q., 78 Held-Batteries.
19 Brigade Amn. Coins.
Heavy Artillery—
3 Brigade H.Q., 11 Medium and Heavy
Siege Batteries, 4 Heavy Batteries.
Garrison Artillery—
4 Regimental H.Q., 9 Companies, 3 AntiAircraft Sections.
7 Div. H.Q., 14 Held Coys., 2 Fortress
Coys., 6 Meld Troops.
Corps of Signals'—
4 Signal Battalions, 6 Signal Troops.
2 Fortress Signal Coys., 11 Signal Coys.
Infantry—
26 Brigade H.Q., 123 Bns.
Machine Gun Corps—
4 M.G. Bde. H.Q., 9 M.G. Bdes., 11 M.G.
Coys., 2 Motor Brigades, and 1
Machine Gun Sqn.
Corps of Guides—
10 Cyclist Coys.
Officers' Training Corps—
24 University contingents (38 Companies),
whose organization has been authorized by the Governor-in-Council.
These contingents are corps of the
Active Militia organized under the
powers conferred by the Militia Act,
but are not included as corps in the
organization for war.
The total peace establishment is 10,575 Qfl|C<ITS
and 113,028 other ra^ks.
' '•
C
If
•S
01
lO
to
ts
to
-a
4. LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
IN DI A)—continued.
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Term of
Engagement.
Years.
Reserve Militia
. ~
Air Force—
(a) Permanent
(&) Non-permanent
_
Aims and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
Organization.
Certain of the units enumerated above have
reserve formations which are quite distinct
from the reserve militia. The latter is at
present unorganized and consists Of all the
male population of Canada between the ages
of 18 and 60 not physically unfit or legally
exempt who may be called up in case of an
emergency under a Levee en Masse.
On completion of service in the Active Militia
men are not posted automatically to reserve
units. These units are recruited by specific
enlistment. The reserve consists of—
i. The Reserve of Officers (General List).
ii. Eeserve units to each unit of the
Active Militia. These are in process of organization.
iii. Reserve Depots.
The Royal Canadian Air Force consists of:—
i. A small permanent Air Force for
instructional and operational duties.
ii. A Non-Permanent active Air Force.
iii. A Reserve Air Force.
The Air Force is administered at National
Defence Headquarters as a Directorate under
the Chief-of Staff.
The control of civil aviation and the conduct of
flying operations for civil departments of the
Government are carried out by the personnel
of the Royal Canadian Air Force.
a
P
CO
The Department of National Defence, presided
over by the Minister of National Defence,
administers the forces.
Canada is sub-divided into eleven military districts. No higher organization than the
brigade at present exists. The proportion of
the various arms, however, is based on the
1
requirements of a field army, and it is the
intention ultimately to group them in divisions.
Royal Canadian Mounted Policc . .
3
M.L.E. rifles, Colt revolvers and Organized in 11 divisions and administered
Lewis guns.
by a Commissioner at Ottawa,
Allmalesbetweentheages of 18 and 60 who are British subjects are liable for service in the Militia in the
event of a lev£e en masse.
i i . COMMONWEALTH OF AUSTRALIA.
Permanent Force
••
..
5
18-pdr. Q.F., S.M.L.E. rifles
The permanent forces consist of the—
Staff Corps. R.A.
Engineers.
Corps of Staff Cadets. Army Service Corps.
Instructional Corps. Army Medical Corps.
Field Artillery.*
Army Veterinary
Garrison Artillery.*
Corps.
Ordnance Department.
* Royal Australian Artillery Regiment.
They are maintained to provide the staffs of
headquarters of various formations and
military establishments, to act as adjutants
and quartermasters and instructors to the
units of the Citizen Forces, and to provide
the garrisons of the defended ports. Enlistment is voluntary.
The Citizen force is raised on a universal compulsory basis.
The force is organized as
follows:—
2 Cavalry Divisions.
4 Divisions.
3 Mixed Brigades (can form a fifth div.)
Troops for the fixed defences and non-divisional
troops.
4. LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.-.
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Cit ; zen Force
Term of
Engagement.
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
Organisation.
Years.
18-pdr. Q.F., 4 - 5 " howitzers, Voluntary enlistment into the Citizen Force for
four years is permitted to officers and N.C.Os.
and S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers,
of t h e Australian Imperial Force, to warrant
Hotchkiss, Maxim and Lewis
officers and N.C.Os. of, and above, the rank
guns.
of corporal belonging to quotas senior to those
in training, and to all ranks of the cavalry.
By t h e terms of the Defence Act, all boys on
attaining the age of 12 years have to register
and undergo Junior Cadet training of ninety
hours each year for two years. They then
undergo training as Senior Cadets for four
years, which should comprise four wholeday, twelve half-day and twenty-four night
parades annually. I n July of the year in
which they attain the age of eighteen years
the Senior Cadets are passed into the Citizen
Force, in which they train (eight whole-day
parades and not less th&n eight days in camp
per annum) for seven years, and in t h e eighth
year are passedinto the Citizen Force Reserve.
The amount of training has been curtailed from
time to time, and owing to recent extensive
reductions in the Defence Estimate is now
(1924-25) as follows :—
(a) Junior Cadets (12-14 years). Physical
training carried out by the Educational Authorities of t h e various
States under the-supervisiOn of t h e
Defence Department.
O
tr
to
to
CO
(6) Senior Cadets commence their training
a t the age of seventeen years and,
train for one instead of four years.
They are obliged to register at the
age of fourteen years.
(c) .At eighteen years, Senior Cadets pass
into the Citizen Force, where they
train for two years at ten days per
annum.
Air Force (Hoyal Aust. Air Force)—
(a) Permanent
(6) Non-permanent
This is a permanent force controlled by an Air
Council and administered by the Air Board.
The present composition of the H.A.A.F.
is:—
Headquarters (Melbourne).
No. 1. Flying Training School, Melbourne.
No. 1. Aircraft Depot, Melbourne.
Experimental Section, Sydney.
No. 1. (Composite) Squadron, Melbourne
(mainly Citizen Force personnel).
No. 3. (Composite) Squadron, Sydney
(mainly Citizen Force personnel).
A Citizen Force Squadron, with an establishment of 26 officers and 155 other ranks, has
been authorized.
The forces are under a Minister of Defence.
A Council of Defence, presided over by the
Prime Minister, deals with and ensures continuity of the defence policy, and co-ordinates
the requirements of the Navy, Army and Air
Forces.
A Military Board, presided over by the Minister,
executes functions of administration and
command similar to the Army Council.
4. LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.-.
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Term of
Engagement.
i i i . DOMINION OF N E W
ZEALAND.
Permanent Force
Territorial Force
Reserve
«
Air Force—
(a) Permanent
._
„
—
•>
5
_
'1
3 J
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
Organization.
6 " (How.) 60-pdr., 3 - 7 " (How.), Permanent Force—
Staff Corps (Officers).
18-pdr. Q.F. guns, 4-5" Q.F.
howitzers, and S.M.L.E. rifles.
Permanent Staff (W.Os. and N.C.Os.).
Vickers, Lewis and Hotchkiss
Royal N.Z. Artillery.
guns.
Army Ordnance Corps.
Army P a y Corps.
(Enlistment is voluntary.)
Territorial Force—
The Territorial Force is raised on a universal
compulsory basis.
The Force consists of one Division, three
Mounted Rifle Brigades, one Medium
Artillery Brigade, two £ o a s t Artillery Batteries.
The peace strength of units is equal to full
war establishment in officers, warrant
officers and serjeants ; and about 75 per
cent, of war establishment in other ranks.
The reserve is composed of all men between 25
and 30 years of age who are not serving in the
Territorial Force.
This is a unit of t h e Permanent Military Forces
and consists of a nucleus of officers and other
ranks. They are in charge of the aerodrome
a t Canterbury, seaplane base a t Auckland,
and carry out instructional duties, with t h e
non-permanent Air Force. The force is
organized with a headquarter staff and one •
instructional unit.
O
t*
>5
m
<o
(b) Non-permanent
..
This is a branch of the Territorial Force and
consists of officers and other ranks who
have had experience in the R.A.F. and
Air Forces of the other Dominions. I t is
not as yet organized into units.
The Forces are commanded by a G.O.O., who
is assisted by a General Staff consisting of the
C.G.S. and a Direotor of Military Training and
Intelligence, Q.M.G. and A.G.
Under the Military Act all males between the ages of 17 and 55 are liable to be trained. Under tlie Defence Act of 1909
all youths at 14 years of age have to register, and between t h a t age and 18 years are trained as senior cadets. On attaining the age
of 18, all who are medically fit are posted to the Territorial Force and perform annual training with their units in training camps.
i v . UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA.
Permanent Force
...
—
3
(re-engagement
2 years)
18-pdr. Q.F., 4-5" Q.F., howitzers and S.M.L.E. Rifles.
The defence forces of the Union comprise Permanent Force, a Coast Garrison Force, a
Citizen Force, the Royal Naval Volunteer
Reserve and a special reserve.
The Permanent Force consists of the following :—
Staff Corps.
1 Regiment Mounted Riflemen.
3 Batteries Field Artillery.
Air Force.
2 Companies Permanent Garrison Artillery.
Naval Service.
Instructional Corps.
Engineer Corps.
Ordnance Corps.
Service Corps.
Medical Corps.
Veterinary Corps.
Administrative, Pay and Clerical Corps.
Enlistment is voluntary.
O
>8
CO
IPCS
4. LAUD F O E C E S OP THE BEITIEH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTOEATES, AND MANDATOEY T E E E H O E I E S (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Term of
Engagement^
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
Organization.
Years.
Coast Garrison Force
_
4
Citizen Force
_
4
M
The Coast Garrison Force, established for t h e
protection of the defended ports of the Union,
consists of the South African Garrison
Artillery and t h e Coast Defence Corps.
(a) The Garrison Artillery is organized in
divisions—
1st Div., designated t h e Cape Garrison
Artillery.
2nd Div., designated the Durban Garrison
Artillery.
(5) The Coast Defence Corps also consists
of two divisions, each division consisting of—
A Fortress Engineer Section and a
Harbour Control Section.
13-pdr. Q.F. gun, S.M.L.E.rifles,
Vickers and Lewis guns.
Tire Citizen Force comprises all persons
liable to render personal service in time of
war and who are not members of t h e Permanent Force, Coast Garrison Force, or
Royal Naval Volunteer Reserve.
I t consists of the following:—
(a) Active Citizen Force.—This force is
organized by units of t h e various
combatant arms and departmental
services, and comprises the. following :—
00
CO
bS
Reserves
Special Reserve
d
Mounted Troops.
20 Regiments and 3 Independent
Squadrons.
Dismounted Troops.
14 Regiments and 4 Squadrons of Independent Dismounted Rifles.
Field Artillery.
6 Batteries.
Infantry.
14 Battalions.
And ancillary services in proportion.
(6) The Citizen Force Reserve. - This force is
divided into two classes :—
Class A.—Citizens not past their 45th yeas
who have undergone their four years'
peace training, other t h a n those who
join the Permanent Force Reserve.
Class J?.—-All other citizens not past their
45th year and not members of Class
"A"
or the Permanent
Force
Reserve, who a,re serving or who have
served as members of a Rifle Associ^
tion.
(c) The National Reserve. This consists of all
citizens u p to the age of 60 who are not members of any other portion of the Defence
Forces and are liable to render personal
service.
The Special Reserve consists of:—
i. Reserve of Officers.
ii. Permanent Force Reserve.
iii. Coast Garrison Force Reserve.
iv. Veteran Reserve. This consists of
citizens who have "had war experience, or an adequate military training, and who engage t o serve in
time of war with the Veteran Reserve.
4.
LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Term of
Engagement.
i T . UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA—
Years.
continued.
Defence Rifle Associations,.
4
INDIA)—continued.
- .
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
Organization.
6 • 5 mm., 7 • 9 m m . and S.M.L.E.
rifles.
Rifle Associations were instituted in order t o
ensure t h a t all citizens liable to render personal service in time of war should, as far as
possible, be jwoficient in or familiar with
military weapons of precision. All citizens
liable to undergo peace training who, i n their
21st year, have not been posted for training
are required to serve in a Defence Rifle Association for 4 years. Other citizens liable to
serve in time of war m a y be enrolled as volunt a r y members.
Rifle Associations of each Military District are
grouped into commandos, to each of which is
appointed a commandant. The commandant
is responsible for t h e organization, training
and discipline of his command. The administration of each commando is carried out by
a committee consisting of t h e commandant
(as chairman), a d j u t a n t , quartermaster and
t h e senior officer of each Association.
Compulsory members of the Association have t o
attend four muster parades each year for
four years. These parades (of not less t h a n
6 hours' instruction) include drill (closeorder, skirmishing and field work) and rifle
practice. Voluntary members only have to
attend one muster parade each year.
Air Force
_
_
_
..
3
—
The Air Force forms part of the Permanent
Force of the Union Defence Forces.
I t is administered by the Air Section at Defence
Headquarters under a Director of Air Services, who is also the executive Commander
of the Air Force. The force is organised as
follows:—
Headquarters.
1 Aircraft Depot.
1 Flying Training School.
1 Squadron and a Reserve of Officers.
The Defence Forces are under a Minister of
Defence, who is advised by a Council of
Defence consisting of four non-departmental
members.
The permanent head of the Department of
Defence is the C.G-.S., who exercises the
functions of executive Chief of the Union
forces (including the Naval Service) and
Cadets. He is assisted by staff officers in
charge of " G , " " A " and " Q " branches. •
Every citizen between his 17th and 60th y e a T is liable to render service in defence of the Union in any part of South Africa,
whether within or outside the Union. The Defence Act provides for the registration of all citizens in their 21st year. A list is
prepared annually of,all registered citizens who have not volunteered for peace training, and if the numbers entered voluntarily
fall short of those" required to complete establishments of units, the shortage is made good by ballot.
v . N E W F O W D L A N D , CROWN
COLONIES AND PROTECTORATES
OTHER THAN A F R I C A N .
Newfoundland—
Constabulary
Bahamas—
Police (West Indians)
Barbados—
Volunteers ("West Indians)
Police (West Indians)
..
L.E.
rifles..
S.M.L.E. rifles
«
Civil organization.*
Civil organization.*
S.M.L.E.rifles, Maxim and Lewis 3 coys, infantry and 1 machine gun section.
guns.
S.M.L.E.rifles.
A civil organization comprising mounted and
foot detachments and harbour police.*
* Not liable for military service.
9
so
a
a
to
4 . LAND FORCES OP THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
TO
INDIA)—continued.
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Bermuda—
Militia (West Indians)
Volunteers (Europeans)
British Guiana—
Militia (Europeans, Creoles and
Natives)
Police (Creoles and West Indians)
Term of
Engagement.
Years.
6
4
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
6 " B.L. and 18-pdr. Q.F.guns. Permanent Staff, and 2 btys. of artillery.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickersand Lewis Permanent Staff, 4 coys, of I n f a n t r y and 1
guns.
Cadet coy.
S.M.L.E.rifles, Vickersand Lewis 1 artillery pi. and 2 pis. of infantry.
guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles and M.E. carbines A semi-military body organized in 6 divisions
with a mounted detachment and a European
staff. I t is available for service in defence of
the Colony.
British Honduras—
Territorial Force (Volunteers)
(Europeans and West Indians)
Police (West Indians) . .
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers, Maxim
and Lewis guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles
..
~
British North Borneo—
Constabulary (Sikhs, Mohammedans, Pathans, Chinese and
natives)
M.E. carbines, Maxim and Lewis
guns.
Ceylon—
Defence Force (European and
natives)
Organization.
12 coys, infantry.
A semi-military body, available for service in
defence of t h e Colony.
Organized in two divisions, (a) Military police.
(&) District police. The Constabulary is
liable for military service in or beyond the
limits of t h e State, and when on d u t y is
subject to the Army Act.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers and Lewis Permanent Staff.
2 batteries artillery.
guns.
2 sqns. mounted rifles.
2 coys, engineers.
4 coys. light infantry.
4 coys, and motor cycle section Planters' Eifle
Corps
O
JS
•5
to
2 companies Colombo Town Guard.
Out District Town Guard.
Supply and Transport Corps.
Medical Corps (1 Field Ambulance, 1 Sanitary
section, and 1. section tor garrison duty).
Cadet battalion.
The force is administered by a commandant of
volunteers; training is supervised by the
officer commanding the troops in Ceylon.
S.M.L.E. rifles
Reserves
(Europeans
and
natives)
Police (Europeans and natives)..
CYPRUS—
Police (Turks rod Greeks)
Falkland Islands—
Volunteers (British)
Fiji—
Defence Force (Europeans and
natives)
Constabulary (Fijians)
Gilbert and Ellice Islands C o l o n y Ocean Island-—•
Defence Force (British)
Constabulary (Native)
Hong Kong—
. Defence Corps (British) ...
Police (Europeans, Chinese and
Indians)
..
~
Civil organization.*
S.M.L.E. rifles
5-
S.M.L.E. rifles and M.E. carbines Civil organization.*
2
S.M.L/E. rifles, Maxim and Lewis 1 company infantry.
guns.
3
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . Permanent Staff and 3 coys, of infy., one of •
which is European.
S.M.L.E. rifles
„
Semi-military force, available for service in
defence of the Colony.
3
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . 25 all ranks.
S.M.L.E. rifles
-
A semi-military body, available for service ia
defence of the Colony.
4-5" Q.F. Hows., S.M.L.E. rifles, Permanent Staff.
Vickcis and Lewis guns.
1 bty. artillery.
1 mounted infantry section.
1 coy. engineers.
1 coy. infantry.
1 machine gun platoon.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Yickers and Lewis Civil organization.*
guns.
* Not liable lor military service.
4 . LAND FORCES oF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.-.
Name of Dominion
Colony, or Protectorate,
and Nature of Force.
Jamaica—
Militia (West Indians)
Term of
Engagement.
Years.
3
„
Volunteers (British)
„
Corps of Scouts (British)
Constabulary (West Indians)
.:
..
Leeward Islands—
Defence Force (Europeans and
Natives)
Police (West Indians)
Malaya—
(a) Straits Settlements—
Volunteer Force (Europeans
and Asiatics)
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
1 bty. artillery. On mobilization they supplement the Regular R.A.
1 coy. infantry
\ On mobilization forms
1 section (mounted) / p a r t o f t h e F i e l d F o r c e .
A semi-military body and is liable for military
service in case of invasion.
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns
S.M.L.E. rifles
Organization.
_
„
Small detachments in each island, comprising
1 coy. Mounted Infantry, 3 coys. I n f a n t r y
with Reserves.
A semi-military body available for service in
defence of t h e Colony.
4-5" Q.F. (Hows.), S.M.L.E. Singapore (Singapore Volunteer Corps).
Headquarters.
rifles, Vickers and Lewis guns.
1 battery Artillery (British Europeans). 1 coy. Royal Engineers (British Europeans).
1 Machine Gun Platoon (British Europeans).
6 coys. I n f a n t r y (3 British Europeans, 1
Eurasian, 1 Chinese and 1 Malay Company).
2 sections Field Ambulance.
Malacca (Malacca Volunteer Corps).
H.Q. and H.Q. Wing (British Europeans).
4 coys. I n f a n t r y (1 European, 1 Chinese,
Eurasian and 1 Malay Coy.).
1 signal section.
1 section Field Ambulance.
Police (Europeans
Asiatics)
and
(b) Federated States.
Volunteer Forces—
Malay States Volunteer
Regiment (Europeans)
Malayan Volunteer Infantry (Asiatics)
Federated Malay
Police (Asiatics)
States
(Penang and Province Wellesley Volunteer Corps).
H.Q. and H.Q. Wing (British Europeans).
5 coys. Infantry (2 Europeans, 1 Chinese, 1
Eurasian and 1 Malay Coy.).
Zdbudn (Labuan Volunteer Detachment).
Headquarters.
2 sections Infantry (British European).
The force is available for the defence of any
respective Settlement or the Colony as a
whole. When called out for such duty they
are subject to the Army Act. The force is'
under the orders, command and general
direction of the G.O.C., Malaya. The
executive command is vested in the Commandant.
l.M.L.E. rifles, M.E. carbines A civil organization.* I t is composed of
Europeans, Sikhs, Malays, Indians, Chinese
and Webley pistols.
and Eurasians. The Europeans are armed
• with Webley pistols and swords, Sikhs with
S.M."J/.E. rifles, and other races with M.E.
carbines.
S.M.L.E.rifles, Vickers and Lewis 5 coys, of Infantry (Europeans) in the Federated Malay States.
guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers and Lewis 3 pis. (Malays) of Infantry in Pahang.
7 pis. (Malays and Chinese) of Infantry in
guns.
Perak.
8 pis. (Malays and Chinese) in Selangor.
4: pis. (Malays) in Negri-Sembilan.
The force is available for the defence of the
Federated Malay States or any separate State.
The force is under the orders, command and
general direction of G.O.C., Malaya. The
executive command is vested in the Commandant.
S.M.L.E. rifles and "Webley re- Civil organizaton comprising European officers.
The men are either Sikhs, Pathans, Punjabivolvers.
Mohammedans or Malays.*
* Not liable lor military service.
IPCS
4 . LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.-.
Name of Dominion,
Colony or Protectorate,
and Nature of Forces.
Term of
Engagement.
Arms and Armaments
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
^Defences).
Organization.
Years.
(c) Unfederated States.
Johore Military Forces (Kegulars)—
Artillery (Asiatics) . .
I n f a n t r y (Asiatics)
Johore Volunteer
(Europeans)
Kifles
Staff (British and Malays).
7-pdr. K..M.L.
S.M.L.E. rifles
S .M.L.E. rifles and Lewis g u n s .
1 b t y . artillery (Pathans).
4 coys, infantry (Malays).
The Johore Military Forces are commanded by,
and are entirely under the control of H . H . the
Sultan, who is. t h e Colonel-Commandant.
The forces can only be called out for active
service by t h e Sultan.
1 company infantry.
Members are Europeans and can elect on enrolment to be liable for service in t h e state
of Johore only or in any part of the Malay
Peninsula. The corps can be called out for
active service by the governor of t h e Straits
Settlements, but in case of great emergency
in the State of Johore it may also be called
out b y t h e Sultan with the concurrence of the
General Adviser to the Johore Government.
The Corps is subject to t h e Army Act.
The G.O.C., Malaya, makes regulations as to
training and efficiency, and for t h e general
government and discipline of the Corps.
Johore Police (Asiatics)
M.E. carbines and revolvers
Kedah—
E e d a h Police (Asiatics) »
Civil organization comprising European officers.
The men are either Malays, Indians or Chinese.*
L.E. carbines
Civil organization comprising European officers.
The men are either Sikhs, Malays, Indiana
Chinese or Siamese.*
—
_.
Kelantan—
Volunteer Eifles (Europeans)
State Volunteers (Asiatics)
Police
Malay Police
M.E. carbines
S.M.L.E. rifles
M.E. carbines
JPerlis—
State Police (Asiatics)
L.E. carbines and revolvers
..
Trengganu—
State Police (Malayans)..
Mauritius—
Volunteer Force (Europeans and
others)
Police (Non-European) . .
Malta—
Boyal Engineers (Militia), Malta
Division
King's Own Malta Regiment . .
Police
..
„
_
Solomon Islands—
Constabulary (Natives) „
Windward Islands—
i. St. Lucia—
Volunteer
Corps
Indians)
13 all ranks (Europeans). Subject t o the Army
Act when on active service.
1 company (Asiatics).*
Civil organization comprising European officers.
The men aie chiefly Malays.*
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles
-
~
Civil organization
Siamese).*
(Malays,
Pathans
and
~ Civil organization under a European officer.
The men are Malays.*
o
V
B>
V
05
a
o
CO
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . Permanent Staff (Europeans).
1 bty. artillery (Europeans).
1 coy. engineers (Europeans).
3 coys, infantry (Europeans and others).
1 mobile infantry section.
1 section Medical Corps.
Civil
organization.*
M.E. carbines and Webley pistols
S.M.L.E.
rifles
„
1 Fortress Coy. (Maltese).
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . In process of reorganization.
Civil organization (Maltese).
Military on mobilization.
Aimed by the
•
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns „ A semi-military force available for service in
defence of the Protectorate.
(West
Police Force (West Indians) ,
Eoss rifles and -303 Maxim guns 1 section mounted infantry.
1 coy. infantry.
1 Machine Gun section.
S.M.L.E. rifles
Liable for service in defence of the Colony.
* Not liable for military service..
tK
CO
4. LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.-.
N a m e of Dominion.
Colony, or Proctorate.
and Nature of Force.
Term of
Engagement.
Windward Islands—cordd.
ii. St. Vincent—
. Volunteer
Corps • (West
Indians)
Police
(Force
(West
Indians)
iii. Grenada—
Police Force —
Years.
Trinidad and Tobago—
Volunteers (Europeans and
West Indians)
Constabulary (West Indians)
v i . AFRICAN COLONIES
PROTECTORATES.
S.M.L.E. rifles . _
S.M.L.E. rifles
_
„
„
Organization.
1 coy. i n f a n t r y .
„ Liable for service i n defence of t h e Colony.
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . Liable for military service in defence of t h e
Colony.
S.M.L.E. rifles and M.E. carbines, 2 troops light horse.
Vickers and Maxim guns.
1 coy. i n f a n t r y .
S.M.L.E. rifles and Maxim guns A semi-military body available for service in
defence of t h e Colony.
AND
Kenya Colony—
King's African Rifles
Reserve (King's African Rifles)
Territorial Force (Europeans) „
Police (Africans) .
3
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of fixed
Defences).
O
tr
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers and Lewis 2 Battalions—
guns.
3rd B n . K.A.B., 4 coys, (less 2 pis.) i n f a n t r y
and depot coy. (Africans).
5 t h B n . K.A.R., 3 coys, infantry, 1 coy.
mounted infantry and d e p o t coy. (Africans).
S.M.L.E. rifles
„
_.
Reserve t o 3rd a n d 5 t h Bns. K . A . R .
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . Liable for service within t h e limits of t h e
Colony a n d Protectorate (not yet established).
3.M.L.E.rifles,and Webley pistols Civil organization, b u t liable for military service in defence of t h e Colony.
•8
03
o
o
If
<0
ITyasaland—
King's African Bifles
«
Beserve (King's African Bifles)
Volunteer Reserve (Europeans)
Police
„
..
„
Somaliland—
Camel Corps, King's African
Bifles (Nyasaland Africans and
Somali)
Reserve (King's African Bifles)
Police (Somali) . .
„
Uganda.—
King's African Bifles
_
Beserve (King's African Bifles)
Volunteer Beserve (British)
Police (Africans) —
Tanganyika Territory—
King's African Bifles
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers and lewis 1st Bn. E.A.R., 2 coys':, 1 M.G. sec. and depot
coy. (for both 1st and 2nd Bn. K.A.R.)
guns.
(Africans).
S.M.L.E. rifles
Beserve to 1st and 2nd Bns. K.A.B.
S.M.L.E. rifles
Liable for service within the limits of the
Protectorate. The force is being reorganized.
S.M.L.E. rifles
Civil organization, but liable for military service in defence of the Protectorate.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers
Lewis guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.MX.E. rifles
„
„
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers
and Lewis guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles „
„
S.M.L.E. rifles „
_
3.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers
Lewis guns.
Beserve (King's African Bifles)
S.M.L.E. rifles
„
S.M.L.E. rifles
„
M
and
4th Bn. K.A.B., S coys, Machine Gun section
and Depot platoon (Africans).
„ Beserve to 4th Bn. King's African Bifles.
Liable for service within the limits of the Protectorate.
S.M.L.E. rifles and Maxim guns Liable, for military service in defence of the
Protectorate.
Police
~
and Begimental H.Q. (including 1 dismounted
Lewis gun team).
2 Camel coys. (3 troops and 1 L.G. troop).
1 Pony coy. (2 troops and 1 L.G. troop).
1 M.G. troop.
Beserve (1 company) to Camel Corps.
A semi-military body- available for service in
defence of the Protectorate.
„
6
and 2 Battalions—
2nd Bn. K.A.B., 1 M.G. section and 4 coys.
infantry (Africans).
6th Bn. K.A.B.., 1 M.G. section, 4 coys,
infantry and 1 depot coy. (Africans).
„ Beserve to 6th Bn. K.A.B, (Africans).
„
* Hot liable for military service.
A semi-military body, available for military
service in defence of the Territory.
4 . LAND FORCES OF THE BRITISH DOMINIONS, COLONIES, PROTECTORATES, AND MANDATORY TERRITORIES (EXCLUSIVE OF
INDIA)—continued.-.
Name of Dominion,
Colony, or Protectorate,
and N a t u r e of Force.
Term of
Engagement.
VI. AFRICAN COLONIES AND
PROTECTORATES—continued.
Years.
South Africa—
Basutoland—
Mounted Police (Europeans
and Natives).
Be chuanalan d —
Police (Europeans and Natives)
Northern Rhodesia—
Volunteers (British) —
Police (Natives)
~
Southern Rhodesia—
Volunteers (Europeans)
B.S.A. Police (Europeans and
Natives)
Swaziland—
Police (Europeans and Natives)
West Africa—
Gambia—
W.A.F.F. The Gambia Coy.
Police (Natives)
Arms and Armament
(exclusive of t h a t of Fixed
Defences).
Organization.
L . E . carbines a n d ' 3 0 3 Maxims
A semi-military body available for military
service in defence of t h e Territory.
S.M.L.E. and M.H. rifles, -303
Maxim and Lewis guns.
Liable for military service within t h e limits of
t h e Protectorate.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers and 1 coy. i n f a n t r y .
Lewis guns.
S.M.L.E.rifles, Lewis • 303 Maxim A semi-military force liable for military service.
and Vickers guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Vickers and
Lewis guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles, -303 and -450
Maxim guns.
8 detachments of i n f a n t r y . Liable for service
within t h e limits of t h e Colony.
Semi-military organization, liable for military
service within or without t h e Colony.
S.M.L.E. rifles and Lewis guns . . A semi-military body liable for military service
within or "without t h e Territory.
S.M.L.E. rifles, Lewis guns.
1 company i n f a n t r y .
S.M.L.E. rifles and 7-pdr. R.M.L.
guns.
Semi-military organization, a n d is liable f o r
military service within or without t h e limits
of Gambia.
O
s .
Gold Coast—
W - A - M . The Gold Coast Regt.
Reserve (W.A.F.F.)
...
Gold Coast Volunteers (Europeans and Natives)
Railway and Mines Volunteers
(Europeans and Natives)
Northern Territories Constabulary (Natives)
The Gold Coast Police (Natives)
Nigeria—
Nigeria Begiment (WA.F.F.
(Natives))
Reserves ( W A S J 1 . ) Police (Natives)
~
—
Sierra Leone—
W . A . H . The Sierra Leone Bn.
Eeserves ('W.A.I'.F.) „
Police —
—
~
S.M.1.E jifles, 3 • 7'Hows.Vickers Organized as a regiment—
Headquarters.
and Lewis guns.
1 Pack Bty. (3-7' How.)
1 battalion infantry of 8 coys.
Machine Gun platoon and Signal section.
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles, and -303 Maxim 4 companies of infantry, 1 gun section and 1
machine gun section, and 1 ambulance section.
gun.
Available for service within the limits of the
Colony and Ashanti.
M.L.E. rifles and carbines and 1 coy. and machine gun section with the same
liabilities
as the Gold Coast Volunteers.
Maxim guns.
S.M.L.E. rifles and Vickers guns Semi-military organization, liable for service
within or beyond the limits of the Colony or
Protectorate.
Civil organization, but liable for service in the
S.M.L.E. rifles.
Colony and Ashanti only.
3 • 7* Q.I\ how., Vickers and Lewis Organized as a regiment—
Headquarters.
guns, and S.M.L.E. rifles.
1 battery artillery (3 • 7* How.).
4 bns. infantry.
1 Signal School and one Depot.
S.M.L.E. rifles
„
A semi-military body, liable for military service
S.M.L.E. rifles
„
either within or beyond t t £ limits of Nigeria.
S.M.L.E. rifles Vickers and Lewis
Organized as an infantry bn. of 3 coys.
guns
S.M.L.E. rifles
S.M.L.E. rifles
..
~
Civil organization.*
* Not liable for military service.
SO. F O R E I G N
ARMIES
1 . NORMAL W A R ORGANIZATION o r THE F I G H U N G TROOPS.
Army Corps.
Division.
"3
<3 «
1
•a
a
&
CO
Machine Guns.
to
a
©
Battalions.
Argentina—
5 Divisions
36 12 36
2 Cav. Divs.
(Peace strength =
23,500)
(Trained men =
210,000)
a
o
•a
Field Guns.
J J
V
5
S
•S 2
5
Machine Guns.
Country and
War Strength.
Squadrons.
j
Cavalry
Division.
12
12
24
CO
Austria—
6 Mixed Brigades
a
3
o
• 2
K
72
Mixed Brigade.
1
7
<f)
75
16 guns
and
Howitzers.
Cavalry
Units.
Artillery
Units.
Infantry
Units.
Bde.
= 2 Eegts.
= 12 Sqns.
Kegt.
- 2 groups
= 4 Btys.
= 16 guns
Bde.
= 2 Eegts.
= 6 Bns.
= 24 Coys.
= 6,632 Rifles.
1 Cav. Sqn.
= 100 Sahres
Group
= i Btys.
= 16 Guns
and Hows.
1 Inf. Bde.
m
= 2 Eegts.
S
= 6 Bns.
o
= 6M.G.Coys.,plus I„
18 Inf. Coys.
£
= 2,650 Rifles.
n
y
s»
Belgium
61 136 32
(a)
m
e
24 256 188 Nil
(d)
12 +
IM.G.
Bifles
6,000.
120
48
(36 guns)
(12 Light
Hows.)
Army Corps Eegt.
Regiment.
= 3 groups
H.Q.
= 9 Btys.
1 Active Group = 36 Guns.
of 3 Sqns.
Div. Eegt.
(1 M.G.).
has 4 Groups,
1 Reserve
of which
Group of 3
" 1 Group = 12
Cyclist Sqns.
light Hows.
(1 M.G.).
1 Reserve Sqn.
of despatch
riders.
Eegt.
= 3 Bns.
= 12 Coys.
(3 M.G.).
M.G. Bn.
= 3 Coys.
Divisional
Regiment.
H.Q.
2 Groups each
of 2 Cav.
Sqns.
1 M.G. Sqn.
1 Beserve
Cyclist Group
of 3 Sqns. (1
M.G. Sqn.).
Bulgaria—
8 Ini. Kegts. '
8 Cav. Eegts.
5 Arty, groups.
Chile—
4 Divs
(Peace strength
= 20,800)
3 Cav. Eegt. = 5 groups of 12
12 Sqns.
guns
8
12
56
40
1
=
=
=
Bde.
2 Eegts.
8 Sqns.
800 Sabres
Bde.
= 2 Eegts.
= 4 groups
= 8 Btys.
= 32 guns
o unit above
regiment.
Bde.
= 2 Eegts.
= 6 Bns.
= 18 Coys.
= 1,400 Bifles.
a
1 . NORMAL W A R OKOANIZATIOS OF THE F I G H T I S G TROOPS—
fCzecho-Slovakia—
12 Divs.
2 Mountain Bdes.
10 Frontier Bna.
6 Arty. Bdes.
10 Cav. Regts.
Army Corps, •
£o
s
cS
s
w
|
13
-w
-W
cS
m
Machine Guns.
Field Guns.
Squadrons.
Country and
War Strength. •
Machine Guns.
Cavalry
Division.
Division.
n'
0
S
2
5
'
S3
o
u
a
-a
«3
'S
co
n
1
Denmark—
3 Divs.
Esthonia—
3 Divs. . .
1 Cav. Regt.
(Peace: 18,000).
continued.
vt
g
.3
s
Cavalry
Units.
Artillery
Units.
ilnfantry
Units.
1 Arty. Regt.
= 3 groups
= 9 Btys.
= 36 guns
1 Inl. Div.
= 2 Bdes.
— -1 Regts.
= 12 Bns.
= 12M.G.Coys,and
36 Inl. Coys.
= 5,616 Rifles.
•s
C3
12'
12
4
1
3
to
7
a
a
72 heavy
144 light
156
72
(Average)
s
9 Btys.
1 Cav. Regt.
36 Field
— 4 Sqns.
guns and
plus
Howitzers 1 M.G. Sqn;
48
Regt.
= 3 Sqns.
= 360 Sabres
Regt.
=* 6 Btys.
= 24 guns
Regt.
= 4 Bns.
= 1,040 Rifles.
16
1 Regt.
= 4 Sqns.
Regt.
= 4 Btys.
= 16 guns.
Division
(composition
varies.)
„
W
u
eu
to
Finland—
3 Divs. . .
1 Cav. Bde.
1 Bifie Bde.
(o)
(c)
(e)
CD
1 Bde.
2 Begts.
= 4 Sqns.
and M.G. Sqn.
Includes 5 cav. M.G. sqns. and 36 cvclist sqns. of which 18 are M.G. sqns. Sabres 3,600.
3 Cav. sqrs. (1 M.G.) and 3 cyclist sqns. (1 M.G.).
(<2) + 2 M.G. bns.
Including 60 Hows., 36 Medium and 24 Light.
1 Pioneer bn.
t I n process of re-organization.
I Begt.
| = 4 groups.
I = 8 Btys.
j = 32 guns
Rifles, 3,600.
7
Div.
3 Begts.
= 9 Bns.
= 27 Coys.
o
V
•s
(6) 8 Howitzers.
cn
o
1 . N o e m a i W A K ORGANIZATION OJ THE FIGHTING T R O O P S — c o n t i n u e d .
Cavalry
Division.
(Division
LegSre).
Country and
Peace Strength.
Division
(Division
de
Ligne).
Army "Corps of
2 Divisions.
m
«e
1
s
•rS© V
i
§
1U 01
h
a 5
J= o
o
TS
O
«3 i
"ec
>
5
a 03 M < e! 13
es
s
tn s S <
O n
s
France (exclusive of
Reserve formations)—
France: 13 Army 24* 97 24 37 1 + 10
(d)
Corps (a) =
TO(c)
26
Divisions,
4 Light (Cav.)
Divs.
Rhim:
3 Army
Corps
=
6
Divs., 1 t i g h t
(Cav.) Div.
-
£
s
©
a
2
J
1
ao fl 0V
J
•a a tCe3
o
s cs «3 i
ro
PP a o
18 360 168 1
(«) (f)
Tanks.
Cavalry
TJnits.
Artillery
Units.
Infantry
Units.
Light Tank
Regiments.
167 60 Division.
(</) = 3 Bdes.
= 6 Regts.
= 24 Sqns.
Approximate
strength of
a Regt. =
1,000 men.
Field Arty.
Begt.
= 3 groups
= 9 Btys.
= 36 75mm.
guns
Field How.
= 2 Groups
= 6 Btys.
= 24 -155
mm. Hows.
Division.
= 3 Regts.
= 9 Bns.
Battalion.
= 3 Coys.(h)
1 M.G. Cov.
(16 M.Gs:)
1 Section of
weapons for
close support (3 guns
37 mm. and
1
=
=
--
Heavy Tank'
Regiments.
22
1
Regt.
Details
of
organiza2 Bns.
tion
not
6 Coys.
yet avail48 tanks
able.
Corps Art.
3 Stokes
1 Regt.
Mortars)
= 4 Groups per Regiment
= 12 Btys.
= 48 guns
Approximate
strength of
a battalion
= 800 men
* 6 Regiments.
-1- Squadron.
0 Regiment.
(a) The normal army corps is composed of 2 divisions.
(&) 4 sections (8 guns) each regiment; 12 guns with the Cyclist Group and 37 guns in armoured cars.
(c) 2 groups of 3 batteries, 75 mm. field guns.
(d) 1 regiment of 4 squadrons, of which 2 are corps cavalry and 1 is normally attached to each division of the corps.
(e) Corps arty. regt. of 2 groups of 3 batteries 105 mm. (24 guns) and 2 groups of 3 batteries, 155 mm. (24 guns), and arty, of 2-divs.
( f ) See \i) above.
(<7) 3 groups of 3 batteries, 75 mm. (36 guns) and 2 groups of 3 batteries, 155 mm. (24 Howitzers),
(A) Each company has 12 " fusils mitrailleuses " (light M.G.).
O
• 0" •
•s-
cn
o
M
tO
or
w
1. KOEMAL WAK OE GAKTZATION or THE FJGHTIKG Tr.oors— conlinu-d.
Cavalry
Division.
Country and
War Strength.
§o
13
CS
3
cr
02
Germany—
7 Inf. Divs.
3 Cav. Divs
Greece—
12 Diva.
1 Cav. Div.
Reorganization in
progress.
Details, approx.
30*
20
1
©
0)
.a
A
i
Army
Corps.
Division.
CJ
2
. fei
s
o o3
C3
& «"5
m
<§
0)
a
?o
3
12
3
9
a
2
Is
h
24
12
heavy
3
no
Btys.
Ught
M.G.s
32
heavy
32
Ught
|
c
3a
to
N o r in a 11 y
3 D ivision s
io
g
o
s
m
<3
n
1
120
£a
1
9
a
a
a
o
53
a
s3
Cavalry
Units.
Artillery
Units.
Infantry
Units.
as
2
S
108
heavy
200
light
9 Bt\s. 1 Cav. Div.
3 T.M.
Coys. 36 = 6 Cav.
T.Ms
Begts.
36 Field = 24 Sqn.
guns and
S Btys.
Howitzers = 5,250
Sabres
72
Heavy
243
light
Nil
(24
Mountain
guns)
1 Art. Begt.
1 Inf. Div.
= 3 Begts. and
= 3 Arty.
3 T.M. Coys.
groups
= 9 Bns.
= 9 Btys.
= 9 M.G. Coys,
= 36 guns
and 27 Inf.
There is also a
Coys.
depot for each
Begt. (no guns = 6,900 Bifles.
12,000 rifles are
allowed).
allowed for the
luf.
Division
(all arms).
Cav. Div.
= Mountain
= 2 Bdes.
Arty. Begt.
= 4 Begts. = 6 Btys
•= 16 Sqns. = 24 guns
4 M.G. Sqns.
= 1,500
Sabres
Div.
= 3 Begts.
= 0 Batts.
= 27 Coys.
= 3,300 Bifles.
and 9 M.G.Coys.
Holland (1)—
4 Div. Groups
= 8 Divs.
2 Hussar Eegts.
2 Btys. Hoise
Artillerv
1 Cyclist Bo.
1 Light Bde
2
72
18 576
Light
108
Heavy
9
288
Light.
54
Heavy
36 and 18
Infantry
guns and
18 light
mo tars.
Mixed Brigade.
Hungary—
7 Mixed Bdes.
4 Hussar Eegts.
1 independentArty. Bde.
Italy—
10 Army Corps
3 Cav. Bdes.
each of 4 Beats.
(Peace st-cnsth
= 250,000.)
1
1
36 216
224
* Includes one depot squadron for each cavalry regiment,
f One pioneer battalion.
t7
28
Heavy
40
light
3 Btys.
12 Field
guns and
Howitzers
12
72
48
Begt.
= S Bna.
= 9 Btys.
= 36 guns
Begt.
= 3 Bns. and 1
Bty. Inf. Arty,
and 1 Bty.
L.T.Ms., each
of 6 pieces.
Bn. = H.Q. 4
Coys, and M.G.
platoon -of 6
guns.
Begt. = 2,700
rifles, 6 gucs,
6 L.T.Ms., 18
HeavyM.G.and
96 Light M.Gs.
1 Hussar .
Begt.
= 475
Sabres
1 Arty. Group 1 Inf. Begt.
= 3 Inf. Bns.
= 3M.G.Coys.
= 3 Btys.
= 12 guns and = 9 Inf. Coys.
= 1,310 Rifles.
4 T.M.
Cav. Div.
= 4 Bdes.
= 12 Begts.
= 48 Sqns.
= 5,700
sabres
Begt.
= 4 Groups . .
= 12 Btys.
= 48 guns
1 Div.
= 2 Bdes.
= 4 Eegts.
= 12 Bns.
= 36
(Bifle)
Coys. 12 M.G.
Coys.(72 M.Gs.)
= 9,000 Bifles.
0 Includes one depot battalion for each infantry regiment.
1.
NORMAL W A R OKOANIZATIOS oF THE F I G H T I S G TROOPS—
Cavalry
Division.
Army
Corps.
continued.
Division.
Cavalry
Units.
ao
a
es
g.
M
a
_o
'rt
PSQ3
c
s
U
V
a
"3
a
a
3
O
2
S
2
12
48
36
Bde.
= 2 Regts.
= 8 Sqns.
= 1160
Sabres
Regt.
= 3 Bns.
= 9 Btys.
- - 36 guns
1 Div.
«= 2 Bdes.
= 4 Regts.
= 12 Bns.
= 48 Coys.
+ 12 M.G.
Coys,
= 9,600 Rifles.
Latvia—
4 Divs.
5 Sqns.
1
6
36
Heavy
Light
(not
decided)
16
Regt.
- 5 Sqns.
Regt.
= 2 Divs.
= 4 Btys.
= 16 guns
Div.
= 8 Regts.
= 6 Bns.
- 12 Coys.
Lithuania—
3 Divs.
2 Cav. Regts.
1
9
54
20
Regt.
1 Regt
5 Btys.
= 4 Sqns.
20 guns
and
1 M.G. Sqn.
Country and
War Strength.
a©
•s
eS
P
C
CO
Japan—
17 Divs.
4 Cav. Bdes.
4 Med. Arty.
Bdes.
2 Mountain Arty
Regts.
2 Foitress Arty.
Regts.
5 Fortess Arty.
Bns.
4 Engineer Bns.
a"
3
O
.9
•§
$
S
3
a
2£>
S
§
I
eS *ffi
S a
CO
W
I
0©
G
1
1-
a'
a
2
S
Artillery
Units.
Infantry
Units.
Div.
= 3 Regts.
= 9 Bns.
= 27 Coys.
84
'
Heavy
and
Ligbt
72
Heavy
w o to
Poland—
30 Inf. Divs.
4 Cav. Divs.
5 Ind. Cav. Bdes.
w
to
.»|
Portugal—
8 Divs.
1 Cav. Bde.
to
<*<
Rumania—
7 Army Corps,
each of 3 Divs.
= 21 Divisions
1 Chasseur Corps
of 2 Divs.
1 Mountain
Chasseur Div.
•2 Cavalry Div.
w
eft
w
to
W
To he increased -i
t o 144 (Heavy) M
(D
CO
>-*
<©
to
CO
—h
as
w
o
to
t^
00
CO
I
H*
to
to
IP.
:
a»
to
-i
•
!
To he increased to
to 432 (heavy) g
»->
ei
OS
4
»%
(S
B
?
%%
fes •
tQ •
0
•2
P
£^
1 Div.
= 3 Bdes.
= 6 Eegts.
= 30 Sqns.
= 3,000
Sabres
24 M.Gs.
48 (Heavy)
24 (Light)
1 Bde.
= 3 Eegts.
= 12 Sqns.
= 2,400
Sabres
+ ii g
gf'S-
1 F.A. Bde.
= 2 or 3 groups
= 6 or 9 Btys.
= 24 or 36 guns
1 Div.
= 3 Eegts.
= 9 Bns.
= 27 E ifle
Coys, and 9
M.G. Coys. =
8,000 rifles 216
Light M.Gs.
72 HeavyM.Gs.
1 Div.
= 4 Eegts.
= 12 Bns.
= 48 Coys.
= 12,000 Kifles
Eegt-.
= 3 Bns.
= 9 Btys.
including
1 Bty. of 12c.m. Hows.
+ 2 Btys 10-5
C.M. guns
I I Ig
Div.
= 3 Eegts.
= 9 Bns.
= 27 Coys.
M WW?*
Op »
3*
1 Eegt. ."Field
Arty. "
= 3 Groups
= 9 Batteries
= 36 guns.
1 Eegt. Hows.
= 2 Groups
= 4 Btys.
= 16 guns
I I I g*
'OS ' O 0 S ' 6 " c f e q o
1 . NORMAL W A R OKOANIZATIOS OF THE FIGHTISG TROOPS—
Array
Corps.
18
18
"Us ually
2-3 Di visions
+ Co rpsTro ops
1
to
4
9
72
Heavy
1
12
48
©
•3
«
a*
m
3 Cav. Divs.
-
Cavalry
Units.
Artillery
Units.
Infantry
Units.
60
1 Cav. Div.
= 2 or 3
Bdes.
= 4 or 6
Regts.
Ind. Cav.
Bde.
= 3 Regts.
1 Div. (Field)
= 3 Btys.
- 6 Sections
- 12 guns
1 Div. (Heavy
and Hows.)
= 2 Bns.
= 4 Sections
= 8 guns
1 Div.
= 3 Regts.
= 9 Bns.
= 27 Coys.
= 6,000 Rifles
+ a t o u t 500
automatic
weapons.
72
1 Div.
= 3 Bdes.
= 9 Regts.
= 54 Sqdns.
(including
9 Sqns.
M.Gs. and
bombers)
= 7,200
Sabres
1
=
=
=
1
=
=
=
=
=
Eield Guns.
54
"22
Machine Guns.
12
Battalions.
36
2
Machine Guns.
24
s
Battalions.
1
EA
a
=3
C5
2
"2
PH
Squadrons.
Spain—
Machine Guns.
j
Russia (2)—
64 Divs.
(in peace)
13 Cav. Divs.
.(in peace)
Squadrons.
Country and
War Strength.
continued.
Division.
|
Cavalry
Division.
Regt.
2 Groups
6 Bns.
36 guns
Div.
2 Bdes.
4 Regts.
12 Bus.
48 Coys.
11,200
Rifles.
50
Field guns
and
Hows.
8 to 12
Mountain
guns
rH
oq
H
00
W
<N
i—i
II II H
<o rf
O S
M
<M
1 Cav. Div. 1 Regt.
= 2 Groups
= 3 Regts.
= 12 Sqns. = 7 Btys.
= 1,200 to
1,500 Sabres
= 24 M.Gs.
1 Bde.
= 2 Regts.
= 6 Sqns.
= 950
Sabres
1 Regt.
1 Regt.
32
— 3 Groups
Field guns = 4 Sqns.
= 12 Btys.
=
300
to
400
and
Field
Sabres = 32
Hows.
guns and
and
2
. Hows.
M.Gs.
Is.3
Turkey—
9 Army Corps
18 Divs.
3 Cav. Divs.
2 Irregular Cav.
Divs.
Switzerland—
6 Divs.
4 Cav. Bdes.
Sweden—
12 Divs.
1 Cav. Div.
1 Div.
= 3 Bdes
= 6 Regts.
= 18 Bns.
= 72 Coys.
= 15,000 Rifles
tor each Coy.)
each Bn.jWith
12 auto, guns
1 Div.
= 2 Bdes.
= 4 Regts.
- 12 Bns.
= 48 Coys,
(with 1 heavy
M.G. Coy. lor
Chap. 9, S e c . 5 0 .
259
^ « ®M o
i k
5
II II II °
CN-t^M
O <O
h
C-J
,
<£> O N
CD
i-i
1: NORMAL WAJR ORGANIZATION OF THE FIGHTING
Cavalry
Division.
Army
Corps.
to
as
o
Division.
Country and
W a r Strength.
United States (provisional)—
9 Divs.
2 Cav. Divs.
(Peace Strength
= 125,000)
TROOTS—COttfinuedj
.Xa
12
48
Yugo-SIavia—
17 Inf. Divs.
16
2 Cav. Divs.
each of 4 Regts.
(Peace strength,
109,000).
Cavalry.
Units.
ES
•a
Artillery
Units.
Infantry
Units.
1
=
=
=
=
Div.
2 Bdes.
4 Regts.
8 Sqns.
5,228
Sabres
1
=
=
=
=
Bde.
2 Regts.
4 Bns.
12 Btys.
48 guns
1
=
=
=
=
1
=
=
=
Div.
4 Regts.
16 Sqns.
2,000
Sabres
1
=
=
=
Bde.
2 Regts.
10 Btys.
40 guns.
1 Div.
= 3 Regts.
= 9 Bns.
* 36 Coys.
= 16,500
Rifles.
NOTES.
(1) (Holland).—A corps is called a divisional group (2 divisions).
(2) (Russia).—These are War Establishments which m a y not be realised in practice.
Div.
2 Bdes.
4 Regts.
12 Bns.
12,300
Rifles.
O
V
•g
CO
m
cn
o
Chap. 9, S e c . 50.
261
2. RIFLES.
•>
Country.
Name ol Rifle.
Mannlieher
Mauser ..
Mannlieher'
Shape*
Calibre. Loading System.
ol
Sighted
up to—•
Bullet.
t
Inches.
Clip, 5 C.
•315
Charger, 5 C . .
•301
Clip, 5 C.
•315
Mannlieher
Krag-'Jorgensen
Russian
British . .
Russian
Lebel
•315
•315
•300
•303
•300
•315
Mauser (1908) . .
MannlicherSchonauer
Lebel
Mauser
Mannlieher
Mannlieher
Mannlieher
Year 38 (1906)
Russian
German
British . i
German
Russian
Kiag-Jorgensen
French
•311
•254
•315
•311
•256
•315
•256
•256
•300
•279
•303
•279
•300
•256
•315
German
•279
•315
Austrian
Russian
•300
Italian
•256
Mauser•236
Yerguervo
Mannlieher
•315
Lebel
•315
Russian
•300
Majority Russian •300
3 line
Mauser
(1893 •276
model)
Mauser
•256
Sweden
Schmidt-Rubin
•295
Switzerland
Mauser
•301
Turkey
•3
United States Springfield
Mannlieher
•315
Lebel
•315
Mauser . .
•311
Clip, 5 C.
Charger, 5 C. .
„
5 „.
5 ,,.
5 ,,.
Tube lore end,
8 C.
Charger, 5 C. .
Clip, 5 C.
„ 5 „
„ 6 „
Clip, 8 C.
Charger, 5 C . . .
5 „..
„
5 ,,..
>,
6 „..
5 „..
5 „..
Tube fore end
8 C.
Charger, 5 C.
Clip, 5 C.
Charger, 5 C. . .
Clip, 5 0.
Clip, 5 C.
„ 5 „
Charger, 5 C. .
Charger, 5 C..
„
5 „.
5 „.
Clip, 5 C.
.. 5 „
Charger, 5 C. .
•S—Pointed; R—Roundnose; O—Ogival.
tC—Cartridges.
3 . MACHINE GUNS AND AUTOMATIC R I F L E S .
Pattern.
Country.
Calibre.
Inches.
Mounting.
Austria
Belgium
Schwarzlose
Hotchkiss
•315
•301
Bulgaria
Czechoslovakia
Denmark
Maxim
Schwarzlose
•315
•315
Tripod carriage..
Carriage, with re- Limber
movable tripod
Tripod mounting
Tripod carriage.. Pack
Madsen
•315
Portable
Esthonia
Finland
France..
Germany
Greece
Holland
Hungary
Italy . .
f Maxim (Russian)
Lewis
Hotchkiss
Maxim (Russian) also 7 • 62 mm
German Light M.G.
•315
Hotchkiss (only type
in use in the infantry,
cavalry and artillery)
r Heavy Maxim (1908) . . •311
•311
Light M.G., 'OSj'lb
..
(water cooled)
•311
Light M.G., '08/'15
..
I (air cooled)
St. Btienne.
Caucliat—
Gladiateur
(recent purchase)
r (a) Lights•256
Lewis
1
1 (b) Heavy—
•256
Schwarzlose
•303
Vickers
L
•305
Schwarzlose
•256
Fiat-Revall
}
Sighted to—
Transport.
Yards.
2,187
2,187
2,187
I n the cavalry, the gun is carried on the
saddle. In the infantry, it is carried
by hand, the ammunition being carried
by Iceland ponies.
2,187
—
Tripod and M.G. Wagon.
Tripod
"Wheeled carriage one horse, but pack for
mountain and colonial troops
2,187
2,187
Sledge, with 4 legs Limbered wagon or pack
Bipod
H a n d cart or pack
Tripod
„
Hand cart or pack
~
2,187
-
Portable
Hand cart
Tripod . .
Tripod ...
Tripod ...
Tripod „
H a n d cart
..
Handcart
Pack
..
..
Wagons—pack plan
M
_
_
..
M
—
..
2,187
Japan . .
Latvia
Lithuania
Norway
Portugal
Poland
Rumania
Russia
Spain
Sweden
Hotchkiss
Light M.G.
(1922 model)
Maxim (German Russ
ian and British)
Lewis, German
German
Russian
Heavy M.G.—
Hotchkiss
Light M.G.—
Madsen
Vickers
Lewis
(Heavy),
Hotchkiss,
Schwartzlose
&c.,
(Light) Chauchat &c.
German Austrian and
Cauchat
Giadiateur
(very
mixed,
no
conformity)
(Heavy) Maxims
(Light) Fedorou chauchat, Lewis, colt, &c.
Hotchkiss
Heavy M.G.—
Schwarzlose .
Hotchkiss
Light
M.G,
under trial)
Maxim . .
(still
Switzerland •{
I Madsen
Maxim
Turkey
Hotchkiss
United States •/ Maxim
Hotchkiss
Yugo-Slavia . Mostly German Maxims
(about 2,000 guns in
country)
•25C
•256
Tripod
Bipod
2,400
Pack
Cart or pack
Carts
1,100
Q
tr
Carts
Carts and pack
•256
Tripod
•256
•303
•303
Tripod
Pack saddle
Tripod
Wagon or pack
Tripod
Field Wagon
Mounting
One horse carts in Inf.
Tripod . .
Cavalry.
•s®
2,400
M.G. Wagon
2,400
2,900
2,000
Pack
W
en
o
in
Bipod
Various
Types
•256
Various
•276
•256
•256
•301
•300
•300
•300
Mostly in Droskeys
Tripod
Field Wagon or pack
Mounting
Tripod
Tripod
M.G. Wagon
Pack saddle
Tripod and Reff
carriage
Portable
Pack and man's back
Tripod .
Portable
On saddle . .
^Pack
Pack
On saddle
2,000
2,187
OS
CO
4 . APPROXIMATE RANGES OF FOREIGN GTTNB IN
Country.
Austria
Czecho-Slovalda
Denmark
Esthonia
Finland
France..
H.A.
F.A.
Field
Howitzer.
Heavy.
YAMS.
_ Limit of forward effect of shrapnel f r o m point
of burst in yards.
76
8,748
8,748
None
(Not yet decide d>
None
6.600
None
415 yards a t 1,100 ; 75 yards a t 4,500.
None
British, F rencb, Ger m a n and R ussian guns
of various types.
Russian
Russian
7,000
7,400
76 m m .
150 m m .
(6,000)
12,000
Guns.
16,000
19,500
.12,000
Field Artillery, 75 m m .
(Fixed Mountings.)
96 m m . (Model 1888)
120 m m . (Model 1878)
155 m m . (Model 1917)
100 m m . (Quiet firing)
240 m m . (Model 1884)
320 m m
305 m m . (Model 1896)
190 m m . (Model 1S93)
240 m m . (Model 1887)
305 m m . (Model 1896)
240 m m . (Model 1884)
105 mm. (Model 1913)
140 and 145 m m .
155 m m . (Schneider Mounting)
155 m m . ( " Grande Puissance Filloux " ) .
240 m m . (Q.F. on truck) . .
270 mm. (Model 1896 on truck)
340 m m . (Model 1912 on truck)
145/155 m m . (Model 1916 on field carriage)
Yards.
12,000
10,680
12,000
12,000
15,800
18,500
17,450
33,800
16,350
17,450
21,800
18,500
13,100
18,500
14,720
17,450
18,500
23,980
32,700
o
t*
P
«
M
a
o
at
o
Howitzers and Mortars.
155 m m . Court (Model 1881)
220 mm. (Model 1880)
155 m m . Court (Model 1912)
220 m m . (Model 1891)
Siege Mortar, 270 m m .
Coast Mortar, 270 m m .
Mortar, 370 m m .
120 m m . Court (Model 1890)
155 m m . Court'(Model 1890)
155 m m . Court (Q.E.)
155 m m . Court (Model 1915, St. Chamond)
120 m m . Court (Schneider)
155 m m . Court (Schneider)
280 m m . (Schneider)
200 m m . (on truck)
„
293 m m . (on truck)
370 m m . (on truck)
400 m m . (on truck)
520 m m . (on truck)
M
Germany
Holland
Hungary
Italy
„
10,936
10,936
None
218
6,600
6,600
10,936
Hows.—
12 c.m.
15 c.m.
6-inch
10 c.m.
(under
construction)
None
i c.m. guns
7,655
(6,560)
10 c.m.
guns
(13,132)
E x t r e m e r ange—
Time, f u z e = 6 , 5 0 0
7,600
Max- ele
- e,«o.
7,000
10,000
10,000
275
None
170
11,000
260
6,100
5,670
8,500
5,670
8,720
11,230
10,900
6,100
6,1005,450
10,680
8,720
12,970
12,000
12,530
13,100
21,800
16,350
19,620
O
•s
<p
U2
a
o
4 . APPROXIMATE RANGES OP FOREIGN GUNS IN Y A R D S -
Country.
Japan
Latvia
Lithuania
Norway
Portugal
Poland
Russia
a.
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland—
Extreme range—
Time fuze "
Perc Fuze
H.A.
F.A.
9,300
9,300
British, in 3
Regts,
al so British 4
British, R ussian and
6,562
7,900
5,400
5,400
French
75 mm.
Italian
75 mm.
Russian
3-inch
As F.A.
metres
8,600 ?
mountain
7,500 ?
5,400
. 8,600
5,400
7,000
6,100
7,000
Field
Howitzer.
T.inii! of forward effect of shrapnel from point
of burst in yards.
Heavy.
11,000
French 75 ram in one,
•5 How.
German.
7,900
7,120
-continued.
340
French
105 mm.
120 mm.
150 mm.
4-8" 7,500
metres.
6*,500
Mountain
gun
4,800
Different
Types
including
6" Vickers
4-2" How.
12,300
metres.
7,658
6,790
a
c
P
•a
en
a
a
o
Chap. 9, S e e s . 50 a n d 51.
267
5. PROPORTION OF GITNS AND SWORDS TO INFANTRY.
Proportion of
Foreign Army Corps.
^
Guns to 1,000 Inf. Sabres to 1,000 Inf.
Austria
Belgium
Bulgaria
Denmark
Estonia..
..
Finland
Franco
Germany
Holland
Italy
Japan (Division)
Latyia
Lithuania
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Russia
Rumania
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Yugo-Slavia
3 >25
5-3
3
1-0
2'5
5-5
11-2 (n)
6-4
4*3
8*3
3-75
6
3-2
3-7
8
2-5
(Uncertain)
3-4
6-4
3-3
2*24-2
70
117 (c)
108
20
333
60
141-2 (6)
48
0-5
21
30-5
20
50
30
20
25
110 (approx.)
40
120
45
60
30
. (a) Calculated on the following basis :—
Ouns.—For an Army Corps of 2 Divisions of 18 battalions of 850 rifles each
(approximately 15,000 rillcs for an army corps) 168 guns (60
guns for a division, plus 48 guns, corps artillery).
(&) Sabres.—56 regiments of cavalry, after deducting 4 regiments (abolished
in 1021), each regiment estimated at 750 men. 319 battalions of the line and
31 battalions " chasseurs ft pied " at 850 men to each battalion. All above
belonging to Metropolitan Army.
(c) Amongst the sabres arc included all the men belonging to the cavalry,
whether mounted on horses or bicycles. The number of cavalry cyclists is
about one-third of the number of horsemen.
51. W E I G H T S , M E A S U R E S , T H E R M O M E T E R ,
MONEYS, Ac.
1. The following tables contain information regarding English and foreign
weights and measures, and the coinage of foreign countries, <Src.:—
ENGLISH WEIGHTS AND MEASURES.
2. Linear Measure.
In.
Foot
Yard
Bod, pole or perch
Chain
Furlong
Mile
(B 28/332)Q
12
36
198
792
7,920
63,360
Ft.
1
S
16J66
660
5,280
Yds.
1
5t
22
220
1,760
Pis.
1
4
40
320
Ch.
1
10
80
Fs.
1
8
Chap. 9, S e c . 51.
268
3. Particular Measures of Length.
A fathom = 6 feet.
A cable's length = -fo nautical mile = 202-7 yards.
A degree of latitude varies from 68-7 statute miles at the Equator to 69-4]
at the Pole.
The following is the length in geographical miles of 1 degree of longitude
at various latitudes :—At the Equator, 69-176 ; at 15° N". or S., 66-832; at
30® N". or S., 69-96 ; at 45° N. or S., 48-992 ; at 60°
or S., 34-676.
A league = 3 miles.
A nautical mile or geographical mile = 2,026$ yards.
A half-penny is 1-inch in diameter.
An ordinary gentlemen's visiting card measures 3 inches by l i inches.
4. Square Measure.
In.
Square foot
Square yard
Hod, pole, or perch
Square chain
Rood
Acre
..
144
1,296
39,204
627,264
1,568,160
6,272,640
Ft. .
I
9
2721
4,356
10,890
43,560
Yds.
Pis.
1
30i
484
1,210
4,840
1
16
40
160
Ch.
*
1
1
4
10
A square mile contains 640 acres = 2,560 roods = 6,400 chains = 102,400 rods,
poles, or perches = 3,097,600 square yards.
N.B.—The term square feet must not be confounded with feet square. A
piece of cloth said to measure 6 square feet, consists of 6 squares of a foot
each, but a piece said to measure 6 feet square would be 6 feet along each
side, and comprise 36 squares of a foot each.
5. Cubic Measure.
1,728
27
42
108
128
cubic
cubic
cubic
cubic
cubic
1
1
1
1
1
inches
feet
feet timber
feet
feet
cubic foot.
cubic yard.
shipping ton.
stack of wood.
cord of wood.
6. ^Liquid Measure.
4 gills
Quart
Gallon
Firkin
Kilderkin
..
Barrel
Hogshead of ale
Puncheon
Butt of ale
,.
Gals.
Qts.
Pts.
i
9
18
36
54
72
108
i
4
36
72
144
216
288
432
1
2
8
72
144
288
432
570
864
Chap. 9, S e c . 51.
269
7. Dry Measure.
4 gills
2 pints
4 quarts
2 gallons
4 pecks
8 bushels (2 sacks)
36 bushels
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
pint,
quart.
gallon.
peck.
bushel.
quarter.
chaldron.
MEASURES OF WEIGHT.
8. Avoirdupois Weight. .
274 grains .
= 1 drachm = 27-34375 grains.
16 drachma.
= 1 ounce = 437-5
,,
16 ounces .
= 1 pound
7,000
„
14 pounds .
= l stone.
28 pounds .
= 1 quarter (qr.).
4 quarters
= 1 hundredweight (cwt.).
20 cwt.
— 1 ton.
This weight is used in almost all commercial transactions and common
dealings.
9. Troy Weight.
24 grains
20 pennyweights
12 ounces . .
= 1 pennyweight.
= 1 ounce
« lib.
10. Apothecaries Weight.
20 grains . .
3 scruples
8 drachms..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. . = 1 scruple,
. . — 1 drachm (drm.).
..
1 oz.
11. Apothecaries Fluid Measure.
60 minims (drops)
8 drachms..
..
20 ounces . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
* ..
. . = 1 fluid drachm,
. . = 1 oz.
. . — 1 pint.
Useful weights and measures:—1 sovereign=2 drams; 1 half-crown,
drs. ; 1 florin, 3 drs.; 1 shilling,
drs.; 1 threepenny piece, £ d r . ; 1 tablespoonful holds 1 oz.; 1 dessert spoon, £ oz.; 1 teaspoon, £ oz. Those
measures arc used for veterinary medicine.
12. Hay and Straw.
Truss of straw
..
,,
old hay . .
,,
new hay . .
..
..
..
..
.«
..
. . = 36 lbs.
. . = 56 ,,
. . = 60
„
Load, 36 trusses = stray?, 11 cwts. 2 qrs. 8 lbs.; old hay, 18 cwts. : new hay,
19 cwts. 1 qr. 4 lbs.
(B 2 8 / 3 3 2 ) 4
*
2
270
Chap. 9, S e c . 5 1 .
13. Weight of Coal, Wood, dx.
Anthracite per-cubic yard solid
= 2,160 l b 3 .
Bituminous, per cubic yard solid
= 2,025 „
Cannel, per cubic yard solid
= 1,400 ,,
Coal, stored in the usual way, solid
= 2,160 ,,
A cubic foot fresh water . .
weiglis 62^ lbs,
,,
salt water . .
63^ „
,,
Timber, ash . .
49
,,
beech
.
43 „
44 „
,,
bircli
15 „
,,
cork
36 „
,,
elm
41 ,,
,,
pine
59 ,.
,,
oak
125 ,,
,,
clay . .
95 ,,
,,
loose earth . .
about 225 lbs;
A cubic yard ctimpressed hay
„
126 ,,
,,
hay in stack
„
145 ,,
,,
compressed straw
,,
90 ,,
,,
straw in stack
,,
20 bushels.
„
of grain
FOREIGN W E I G H T S AND MEASURES.
14. The Metric System used in—
Argentine Republic, Austria-Hungary, Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria,
Chili, Colombia, Costa llica, Ecuador, France, Germany, Greece, Hayti,
Italy, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Rumania, San Domingo, Yugoslavia, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden, Turkey, United States (partially),
Venezuela.
15. Linear Measure.
Inches.
Millimetre
Centimetre ( = 10 millimetres)
Decimetre ( = 10 centimetres)
Metre ( = 10 decimetres)
Kilometre ( = 1,000 metres)
•039
•394
3-937
39-37
39,370-79
Yards.
•001
•011
•109
1-094
1,093-633
Note.—1 kilometre is approximately -g mile.
16. Square Measure.'
Sq. yards.
Centiare
Are (100 square metres)
Hectare
1-196
119-603
11,960-333
Acre.
•025
2-471
C h a p . 9, S e c . 50.
271
17. Measure! of Weight.
Oz. avoir.
Gramme
Kilogramme
•032
.35-26
Lbs.
•002
2-204
18. Measures of Capacity.
Pints.
Litre
Hectolitre
„
1-759
175-076
To convert yards t o metres multiply by • 914.
,,
miles to kilometres multiply by 1 • 609.
,,
acres to hectares multiply b y ' 4 0 5 .
,,
lbs. avoir, to kilogrammes multiply by • 454.
„
gallons to litres multiply by 4 • 54.
Gallons,
•22
21-997
1 9 . — O T H E K FOREIGN WEIGHTS AND MEASURES.
Country.
Burmali
...
Measures of Length.
1
1
1
1
Pulgat
Toung
Tain
Dain
=
1 inch
=
22 inches
= 1069 • 44 yards
=
2-430 miles
1 Mu
1 Tikal
1 Viss
=
=
=
50-4Tr.gr.
252
3-6 lb. av.
1
1
1
1
Ts'un
Ch'ih
Chang
Li
=
=
=
=
1 - 4 1 inches
14-1
141
i mile (app.)
1 Liang
(Tael)
1 Chin
1 Picul
=
=
=
1 -333 oz. ay.
1-333 lb. av.
133-3
Denmark . .
1
1
1
1
Fod
Favn
Rode
Mil
=
=
=
=
1-029 feet
6-178 „
12-556 „
4-680 miles
1 Pfund
1 Centner
=
=
1-10 lb.
110-23 lb. av.
E^ypt
1 Kadam
1 Pik
1 Kassaba
=
=
=
1 foot
29-53 inches
11-6 feet
1 Rott
1 Oke
1 Quntar
=
=
=
-99051b. av.
2-75
99-05
Japan
1
1
1
1
Sun
Shaku
Cho
Ri
=
=
=
=
1 -1931 inches
11-931
„
-1191 yards
2-44 miles
1 Kin
1 Kwan
=
=
1-32 lb. av.
8-27
Malta
1 Piede
1 Canna
=
=
11-166 inches
2-283 yards
1 Libbra (12
Oncia)
= 4886 Tr. sr.
1 Rotolo
=
1-745 l b . av.
China
Measures of Capacity.
Measures of Weight.
1
1
1
1
Salav
Sak
Saik
Teng
=
=
=
=
1 Ko
1 ShSng
=
=
2 pints (app.)
20 pints (app.)
2-278 gallons
1
1
1
1
1
=
=
=
=
=
1-2743 pints
1-699 gallons
28-885
„
-477S bushels
3-823
1 Ardeb
=
5-44 bushels
1
1
1
1
Go
Sho
To
Koku
=
=
=
=
-3176 pints
1-59 quarts
3-97 gallons
4-962 bushels
1 pint
1 Salma
=
=
-8331 pint
7-9372 bushels
Flaske
Viertel
Tonde
Skeppe
Tonde
1
1
1
1
pint
gallon
peck
bushel
Persia
„
..
1 Zar
1 Farsakh
=
=•
40-95 inches
1 Miskal
3-87miles(app.) 1 Seer
1 Maun
=
=
=
71 gr. a v .
-162 1b. av.
6-49
„
1 Collothun =
1-809 gallons
64-84 T r . g r .
-9028 lb. av.
36-113
or 40 f u n t
1
1
1
1
2-88 imp. qrts.
5-77 gallons
2-88 bushels
5-77
„
Russia
1 Arshin
=
28 inches
1 Sajen
=
7 feet
1 Verst (500
Sajen)
= 1166-6 yards
1 Zolotnik
1 Funt
1 Pood
=
=
=
Siam
1
1
1
1
1 Tical
1 Chang
1 Picul
=
15 s r .
=
2-675 lb. av.
= 133$ lb. av.
Xiew
ICeub
Sen
Yote
=
=
=
-83 inches
= 1 0
44-4 yards
10 miles (app.)
Turkey
1 Arshin
=
26-75 inches
The metric system is mostly
employed. Roads and railways
are marked in " k i l o m e t r o . "
"United States
Weight, length and surface measTires as in England : the metric system
is also permitted.
1 Oke (400
Drams)
=
2 -826 lb. av.
1 Kantar
=
124-36
100 Kilos = 78 Q k e s = 2 2 0 - 4 6 lbs.
NOTE.—There are no standard weights and measures in Siam.
mill owners.
Garnets
Chetverik
Osmina
Chetvest
=
=
=
=
See Note below
1 Kileh
=
1 Pint (dry) =
1 Gallon
=
1 Bushel
=
1 Pint (spirit) =
lPint(beei-) =
1 bushel (app.)
-9694 pint
-9694 gallon
-9694 bushel
-8331 p i n t
1-017 pints
Those given as measures of weight are commonly ussd by rice
bo
W
274
Chap. 9, S e c . 51.
2 0 . THERMOMETER.
Fahrenheit.
Eeaumur.
Centigrade.
-14-2
- 8
0
8
16
24
-17-8
-10
0
10
20
30
0
14
32
50
08
86
To convcrt Centigrade or IU'nlinuir degrees into Fahrenheit use formula;
as follows:—
9C
F
+ 32
5
9 E
F =
+ 32
4
F = C + B + 32
F - 32
C
E
9
5
4
2 1 . CURRENCY OP BRITISH DOMINIONS AND COLONIES.
IMPERIAL sterling coins are the sole legal metallic cuneney in the
loilowing :—
Union of South Africa and
South Africa generally.
Falkland Islands, Fiji.
Gibraltar.
New Zealand.
St. Helena.
West Indies (see
also
Jamaica
below).
Tn the following, special coins are current in addition to the Imperial
ierles:—
Australian Commonwealth.—Special florins, shillings, sixpences and threepences in silver, and pence and halfpence in bronze, of the same weights
ana composition as Imperial coins of these denominations, but of special
designs.
British Guiana.—A special groat of fourpence.
Guernsey.-—Eight doubles ( - one penny) four two and one double.
Jamaica.—Nickel-bronze pence, halfpence and farthings.
Jersey.-—Special pence, halfpence and farthings.
Malta.—One-third of a farthing.
British West Africa.—Silver and also " alloy metal," 2s., Is., tid. and 3d.
One penny, one halfpenny, and one-tenth penny (nickel-bronze).
C h a p . 9, S e c . 51.
275
2 2 . DOMINIONS AND COLONIES POSSESSING SPECIAL CURRENCIES,
Colony.
Monetary Unit.
(Standard Coin.)
See India.
. . Gold Dollar
Silver Dollar
British North Borneo Straits Settlements dollar at
fixed rating
Canada
Silver dollaT on gold basis
Ceylon
Indian rupee
Cyprus
Piastre . .
Hong Kong (and Dollar, Mexican or British
Labuan)
Rupee — 16 annas = 64 pice . .
India
Iraq
Same as India
Kenya
Shilling . .
..
Mauritius
(and Indian rupee
Seychelles)
Newfoundland
Dollar on gold basis
Straits Settlements.. S.S. dollar at fixed rating
Sudan
(AngloEgyptian) . .
. . Same as Egypt.
Tanganyika ..
Uganda
..
/ Same as Kenya.
Aden
British Honduras
Value in
English currency
at par or pre-war
rate.
9.
d.
4 14
1 9
2 4
4 H
1 4
0 tt
2 0
1 4
l" 0
1 i
4 U
2 i
A p p e n d i x III. 365
APPENDIX X
POINTS OF THE COMPASS
277
A p p e n d i x III.
APPENDIX
II.
Magnetic Variation, 1925.
GREAT! BRITAIN AND IRELAND.
Eastbourne, Maidstone . .
Jersey, Wimborne, Oxford,
Newark, Great Grimsby
Plymouth, Mertliyr T'ydvil,
Hereford, Morpeth, Newcastle
..
..
..
Cardigan,
Whitehaven,
Edinburgh, Dundee
..
Dublin, Belfast, Ayr, Glasgow, Stirling, Inverness
Mallow, Clones, Londonderry, Portree , ,
..
Conncmara, Mayo
..
(Decreasing 10£ to 11
minutes annually).
13 ° W.
11 " „
15 ° ,,
16 ° ,,
17 ° „
18 ° ,,
19 ° ,,
BRITISH DOMINIONS AND INDIA.
Canada and Newfoundland.
St. .Tolm's (Newfoundland) 30 ° "W.
Halifax
..
..
.. 23 ° „
Quebec
20 ° „
Montreal
16|° „
Ottawa
..
..
. . 14 ° ,,
Toronto
..
..
.. 7 ° „
Sault Ste. Mario . .
.. 4 ° ,,
Port Arthur
..
.. 2 D° E.
Winnipeg . .
..
.. 12J ,,
ltegina
..
..
. . 19 0° ,,
Calgary
..
..
. . 25 ,,
Vancouver . .
..
.. 25 ° ,,
Esquimalt . .
..
.. 24£° ,,
Prince Bupcrt
..
.. 29F „
Australia.
Brisbane, Sydney, Hobart
Bocliliampton, Melbourne
Townsville . .
..
..
Adelaide
Port Darwin
..
..
Broome
..
..
..
Coolgardie . .
..
..
Perth
Port Moresby (New Guinea)
A'e'.e Zealand.
Auckland
Wellington, Nelson
..
Christchurch
..
..
Dunedin, Invercargill
..
9 ° E.
8 ° ,,
,,
„
3 F ,,
2 ° ,,
2 ° W.
5 ° „
6 ° E.
15 °
16}°
17 °
17}°
E.
„
,,
,,
South Africa and Rhodesia
26}° W.
Cape Town
24 ° „
Port Nollotli
23 ° „
Port Elizabeth
22 ° ,.
East London
21}° „
Walflsh Bay
Kimberley
and Bloein21 °
fontein . .
Mafeking and Durban
..
Pretoria
Shoshong and Newcastle . .
Komati Poort
..
..
Livingstone and Buluwayo
Salisbury
Broken Hill, Eeira
..
Serenje
Abercorn . .
..
..
191° W18J ,,
18 ° ,,
16}° „
15 ° ,,
13 1 „
12}°,,
10 ° ,,
71° ,,
Indian Empire.
Peshawar . .
..
..
Quetta
.
Simla
Karachi, Delhi
..
..
Nagpllr, Patna
..
..
Bombay, Calcutta, Maiidalay
Rangoon ..
..
..
Vizagapatam
..
..
Bangalore, Madras
..
Madura
4 °
3 °
2 °
1J°
0 0
E.
„
„
,,
i'W,
1 ° ,,
1}° ,,
2}°.,,
3 ° „
BRITISH COLONIES AND
DEPENDENCIES.
Egypt and Sudan.
Port Said, Suakin
..
Cairo, Luxor, Kassaia
..
Alexandria, Wadi Haifa,
Abu Hamed, Gedaref . .
Merowe,
Khartoum,
Roseires . .
..
..
Suilum, Kodok, Gambela..
Siwa, El Obeid, Tauflkia,
Akobo Post
..
..
Meslira el Ttek and Mongalla
El Fasher, Wau . .
..
W.
1 ° „
1}° „
2 ° ,,
2}° ,,
3 ° „
3}° „
4 ° ,,
Palestine, Iraq and Arabia.
Haifa, Jerusalem, Mecca . .
R E.
Amman, Medina, Aden . . i ° , ,
IF „
Jauf
2 ° ,,
TTaii, Biyadli
2}° „
Masqat
3 ° „
Mosul, Baghdad
3i° „
Basra
Mediterranean.
Gibraltar
Malta
Cyprus (Nicosia)
13° W .
6 0 „
0 °
Asia.
Colombo
Penang
Singapore . .
Hong Kong
AYei Hai Wei
3}°W.
r „
0
}°W.
A p p e n d i x II.
278
St. Helena
Bathurst and Freetown . .
Sekondi
Accra and llumasi
Lagos
Zungeru
Sokoto, Zaria
Kano, Katsina
Lake Chad (Nigerian Shore)
Chindio
Zomba, Blantyre
Karonga
..
..
..
Ujijl, Ruvuma R.
Fort Portal, Lindi
Nimule, Entebbe, Dar-esSalaam
Nairobi and Mombasa
Lake Rudolph (north end),
Marsabit, L a m u . .
Berbera
Seychelles
Mauritius
24 °W,
18 0 „
Wf „
14 » „
12 0 „
10J° „
n° „
9 ° „
7 ° „
U °
10 " „
7 ° ,.
6 ° „
B° „
4
3
0
0
„
2 ° „
B.
2 °W.
10 ° „
America.
Bermuda
n r W.
Barbuda and Barbados . . 6i° „
Antigna and Dominica
..
Anguilla, St. Kitts and
Nevis, St. Lucia, St.
Vincent,
Georgetown
(Br. Guiana)
Grenada . . .
,.
5 „„
Trinidad
Caicos Is.
2'° „
Nassau (Bahamas)
0 °
Kingston (Jamaica)
E.
Belize (Br. Honduras)
6 ° „
Stanley Harbour (Falk0
10 „
lands)
„
Oceania.
Solomon Is.
..
6J°-8 °
New Hebrides (Central) . . 91°1
Samoa
10
Suva (Fiji)
101°
Vavau (Tonga)
..
. . 11 0
13.
„
„
„
„
ECBOPE.
Brest, Coimbra, Lisbon . . 1 -H<: \Y.
Bergen, Boulogne, Bordeaux, Madrid . .
. . 12£°
Dunkirk, Paris, Zaragoza.. 1 2 °
Amsterdam, Brussels
. . 11£°
Emden, Cologne, Metz,
Marseilles
..
. . 10 0
Cliristiania,
Bremen,
Frankfurt, Berne
.. . 9 °
Lubeck, Brunswick, Verona, 8 °
Copenhagen, Rogensburg,
Venice, Rome . .
.. 7 °
Stralsund,
Berlin,
Dresden, Pola . .
. . fc j°0
Liegnitz, Vienna, Taranto 5
Stockholm,
Broinberg,
Budapest, Corfu
.. 4 °
Danzig, Salonica, Athens.. 3 °
Konigsberg, Warsaw, Sofia 2£°
Varna, Constantinople
..
Haparanda, Riga, Vilna,
Constanz
..
. . 0 00
Helsingfors, Odessa
.. 1
Pctrograd
(Leningrad),
Ekaterinoslav . .
.. 3 °
Kola, Tula, Baku . .
.. 6 °
Moscow
..
..
..
Astrakhan . .
..
.. 6 °
Archangel
8 °
Kasau
„
..
„
9 •
A p p e n d i x III.
279
APPENDIX
III.
DATES o r FOLL MOON, 1 9 2 5 - 1 9 3 0 .
1925.
1926.
1927.
1928.
1929.
1930.
January
10
28
17
7
25
14
February
8
27
16
5
24
13
10
29
18
6
25
14
9
28
17
5
24
13
8
27
16
4
23
13
June
6
25
15
3
22
11
July
6
25
14
3
21
11
August
4
23
13
1, 31
20
9
2
• 21
11
29
18
8
21
10
28
18
7
Month.
March
April
..
May
..
September
October
•
2, 31
November
30
19
9
27
16
6
December
30
19
8
26
16
5
280
Appendix
II.
APPEN
The following table gives the local mean time of sunrise and sunset on certain
times for intermediate dates and latitudes
"NVltcn " Summer " time is in operation, the tabulated
SON'S RISING AND SETTING.
Latitude.
60° N.
50° N.
40° N.
30° N.
20° M".
rises. sets. rises. sets. rises. sets. rises. sets. rises. sets.
h. m. h. m. h, m. h. m. h. m. h. ni. Ii. m. h. in. h. m. h. m.
January 1 .. 9 7 2 59
„
1 4 5 7 23 4 43 6 57
6 9 6 36 5 30
16 . . S 52 3 28 7 56 4 24 1 22 4 58 6 59
5 21 6 40 5 49
February 1
„
16
8
8 20 4 8 7 37 4 61 7 11 5 17 6 53 5 35 6 38 5 50
7 40 4 48 7 11 5 17 5 54 6 34 6 40 5 48 6 30 5 58
. . 7 3 5 22 6 47
March 1
16
. . 5 30 6 38 5 40 6 28 5 47 6 21 5 52 6 16 5 56 6 12
April 1
„ 16
May 1
,,16
. . 4 46
7 15 5 8 6 52 5 23 6 37 5 34 6 26 5 43 6 17
^ .. 4 2
7 52 4 39 7 15 5 2 6 52 5 19 6 35 5 32 6 22
3 24 8 28 4 15 7 37 4 46 7 0 5 8 6 44 5 25 6 27
June 1
2 54 9 2 3 59 7 57 4 36 7 20 5 1 6 55 5 21 6 35
. . 2 40
„ 16
9 20 3 52 8 8 4 32
7 28 5 0 7 0 5 21 6 39
2 44 9 22 3 66 8 10 4 35 7 31 5 3 7 3 5 25 6 41
July 1
,,16
3 7 9 4 4 10 8 2 4 46
7 26 5 10 7 1 5 30 6 41
7 42 4 59
7 13 5 20 6 52 5 36 6 30
August 1 . . 3 42 8 30 4 30
„
6 39 6 36 5 49 6 28 5 67 0 22 6 4
6 19 5 59 6 15 6 3 6 13 6 6 6 11 6 7 6 10 6 8
16 . . 4 18 7 50 4 52 7 16 5 13 6 55 5 28 6 40 5 41 6 27
Sept. 1
4 55 7 5 5 15 6 45 5 28 6 32 5 38 6 22 5 45 6 15
„ 16
5 31 6 19 5 37' 6 13 5 42 6 8 5 46 6 4 5 48 6 2
October 1 . , 6 6 5 37 6 0 5 40 5 57 6 43 5 55 5 45 5 52 5 48
,.
16 . . 6 43 4 49 6 24 5 8 6 1 3
Nov. 1
„ 16
5 19 6 4 5 28 5 58 5 36
7 23 4 5 6 51 4 37
6 30 4 58 6 15 5 13 6 3 5 25
8 2
6 48 4 42 6 27 5 3 0 11 5 19
3 28 7 16 4 14
Bee.
1
8 37 3 1 7 38 4 0 7 4 4 34 6 39 4 59 6 20 5 18
„
16
. . 9 2 2 49 7 54 D 57 7 17 4 34 6 51 5 1 6 29 5 22
A p p e n d i x III.
281
D I X IV.
dates in each month of the year for latitudes between 60° N. and 40° S.; the
can be easily interpolated :—
values within that period should be increased by one hour.
MEAN LOCAL TIMES.
10° N. -
Equator.
10° S.
20° S.
30° S.
40° S.
rises. sets. rises. seta. rises. sets. rises. sets. rises. sets. rises. sets.
h. m. h. m. h. ni. h. m. h. m. h. m. h. in. h. ni. h. m. h . m. h. m. h. m.
6 18
5 48 6 1 6 5 5 44 6 22 5 25 6 41 5 4 7 2 4 30
7 30
6 23
5 57
6 8 6 12 5 52 6 28 5 35 6 45 5 16 7 4 4 52
7 28
6 24
6 4 6 12 6 16 5 58 6 29 5 45 6 43 5 30 6 58 5 11
7 17
6 21
6 7 6 12 6 16 6 2 6 20 5 53 6 35 5 42 fi 46 5 28
7
6 10
6 9
6 10 6 14 6 5 0 20 5 59 6 26
0
5 52 6 33 5 44
6 42
8
6 10 6 7 6 11 6 5 6 13 6 4 6 14 6 2 6 16 6 0
6 18
5 59
6 9 6 2 6 6 6 5 6 3 6 8 6 0 6 12 5 56 8 16
5 52
6 51
0 9 5 58 6 2 6 5 5 55 6 12 5 48 6 21 5 39
5 29
5 44
6 10
5 40
6 12 5 54 5 58 6 8 5 44 6 22 5 30 6 39 5 13 7 0
4 52
5 39
6 17
5 55 6 0 6 12 5 44 6 29 5 26 6 49 5 6 7 1 4
4 42
5 41
6 19
5 58 6 2 6 15 5 46
4 38
5 44
6 22 6 1 6 5 6 18 5 48 6 36 5 30 6 58 5 8
7 24
4 42
5 47
6 24 6 4 6 8 6 19 5 52 6 36 5 35 6 56 5 16 7 20
4 52
5 51
6 21 6 4 6 8 6 17 5 55 6 31 5 41 6 47 5 25 7 8
5
5 52
6 16 6 2 6 6 6 1 2
5 56 6 23 5 45 6 35 5 33 6 49
5 19
5 51
6 9 5 58 6 2 6 4 5 56 6 10 5 50 6 17 5 43 6 26
5 34
5 51
5 59 5 53 5 57
5 55 5 55 5 57 5 53 6 0 5 50 6 2
5 48
5 50
5 50 5 48 5 52 5 46 5 54
5 41 5 59
5 37
0
6 50
5 42 5 44 5 48 5 37 5 55 5 31 6 1 5 23 6 0
5 14
6 18
5 52
5 36 5 42 5 46 5 32 5 56 5 21 6 7 5 8 6 20 4 52
6 36
5 56
6 34 5 43 5 47 5 29 6 1 5 14 6 16 4 58 6 32 4 37
6 53
6
5 35 5 47 5 51 5 30 6 8 5 13 6 25 4 53 6 45 4 28
7 10
5 41 5 54 5 58 5 37 0 15
7 24
6
3
6 11
5 55 5 59 6
6
5 48 6 17 5 37 6 30 5 24
6 31
6 46
6 34 5 26 6 55 5 6 7 22
5 43 5 57
5 17 6 34 4 56 6 5C 4 28
5
8
4
3
282
A p p e n d i x V.
APPENDIX
V.
LIST OP AUTHORITIES TO WHOM INDENTS SHOULD HE ADDRESSED UR
"UNITS REQUIRING FOOD, STORES, &Q.
NOTES.
1. As regards units in t h e areas of field formations, all indents for stores
and clothing must be furnished t o the D.A.D.O.S. of the division or to the
ordnance officer attached to corps or army troops, as the case may be.
2. F o r engineering stores and materials the C.R.E. indents on R . E . parks
and dumps up to the quantities allotted for his division by C.E. Corps. C.E.
Corps will be authorized by G.H.Q.to draw from depots in a prescribed period
restricted quantities based upon estimates of his requirements, which are t o
be forwarded by him to C.E. Army in accordance with such instructions as
may be issued.
3. Indents for replacement of M.T. vehicles, for load and passenger carrying,
will be sent by Unit Commanders t o the O.C. Train or O.C. Field M.T. Company to which they arc affiliated. The latter communicates these demands
to the representative of the D.S.T.
4. Indents for track and other mechanically-propelled vehicles peculiar
t o fighting units will be submitted to the D.A.D.O.S. or other ordnance officer
of the formation to which the unit belongs.
Where to Apply.
Ammunition, Gun
S.A.A.
Arms
Camp equipment
Clothing
Disinfectants
Equipment
Explosives
Forage
Fuel
Harness
Horses or Mules . .
Light (Candles, Oil)
Medical Comforts
Medical Stores
..
Men
Money
Necessaries
•Oil (for lighting)
Oil (for lubricating)
Nearest Ordnance Ammunition Depot
O.O. Amn. Column.
O.C. Div. Train.
Nearest Ordnance Depot D.A.D.O.S. of Div. or
0 . 0 . Corps troops.
Nearest Supply D e p o t . . Supply Officer.
Nearest Ordnance Depot D.A.D.O.S. of Div. or
0 . 0 . Corps troops,
Nearest Ordnance Am- O.C. Div. Train.
munition Depot
Nearest Supply D e p o t . . Supply Officer.
Nearest Ordnance Depot D.A.D.O.S. "of Div. or
0 . 0 . Corps troop".
Nearest Remount Depot D. of Remounts or his.
representative.
Nearest Supply D e p o t . . Supply Officer.
Nearest Hospital
A.G's. staff
Nearest Pay Office
Nearest Ordnance Depot
A.D.M.S.
A.G's. Staff.
Field Cashier.
D.A.D.O.S. of Div. or
0 . 0 . Corps troops.
Nearest Supply D e p o t . . Supply Officer.
Nearest Ordnance Depot D.A.D.O.S. of Div. or
0 . 0 . Corps troops.
Ordnance Stores . .
Picketing Gear
Includes oil and wick for signalling.
283
A p p e n d i x III.
Where to Apply.
Requirements.
If on 1 . of C.
Rations ...
Saddlery
Signalling Gear (except
Oil)
Soap
Stationery
Tools
Transport (H.T?)
Veterinary Stores
(JJ 28/332)1)
_
If with Field Troops.
Nearest Supply D e p o t . . Supply Officer.
Nearest Ordnance Depot D.A.D.O.S. of Div. or
O.O. Corps troop3.
>>
>»
(if no'ordnance Officer
available,
Supply
Officer).
Stationery Depot A.P. Stationery Depot A.P.
and S.9.
and S.S.
Nearest Ordnance Depot D.A.D.O.S. of Div. or
0 . 0 . Corps troops.
Nearest
Transport Advanced Horse Transport Depot.
Depot
Veterinary Officer i/c of
R.A.V.O
Unit, or nearest Veterinary Officer.
284
Appendix
APPENDIX
SHORTENED
BURIAL
II.
VI.
F O R M OF
FOR
THE
OF
THE
SERVICE
DEAD.
I AM the resurrection and the life, saith the L o r d : he that helieveth in
me, though he were dead, yet shall he live: and whosoever liveth and
helieveth in me shall never die. St. John xi. 25, 26.
I KNOW that my Redeemer liveth, and t h a t he shall stand at the latter
day upon the earth. And though after my skin worms destroy this body,
yet in my flesh shall I see God : whom I shall see for myself, and mine eyes
shall behold, and not another. Job xix. 25,26,27.
WE brought nothing into this world, and it is certain we cancarry nothing
out. The Lord gave, and the Lord hath taken away ; blessed be the name
of the Lord. 1 Tim. vi. 7. Job i. 21.
Domine, refugium. Psalm xc.
LORD, thou hast been our refuge : from one generation to another.
Before the mountains were brought forth, or ever the earth and the world
were made : thou art God from everlasting, and world without end.
Thou turnest man to destruction : again thou sayest, Come again, ye
children of men.
For a thousand years in thy sight are but as yesterday: seeing that is
past as a watch in the night.
As soon as thou scatterest them, they are even as a sleep : and fade away
suddenly like the grass.
I n the morning it is green, and groweth u p : but in the evening it i9 cut
down, dried up, and withered.
For we consume away in t h y displeasure,: and are afiaid at thy wrathful
indignation.
Thou hast set our misdeeds before' tliee : and our secret sius in the light
of thy countenance.
For when thou art angry all our days are gone : we bring our years to
an end, as it were a tale that is told.
The days of our age are threescore years and t e n : and though men be so
strong, that they come to fourscore years : yet is their strength then but
labour and sorrow ; so soon passeth it away, and we are gone.
But who regardeth the power of t h y wrath : for even thereafter as a man
feareth, so is thy displeasure.
('
So teach us to number our days : that we may apply our hearts unto
wisdom.
Turn thee again, 0 Lord, at the l a s t : and be gracious unto t h y servants.
0 satisfy us with thy mercy, and tliat soon: so shall we rejoice and be
glad all the day3 of our life.
Comfort us again now and after the time t h a t thou hast plagued us : and
for the years wherein we have suffered adversity.
Show t h y servants t h y work: and their children thy glory.
And the glorious Majesty of the Lord our God be upon us : prosper thou
the work of our hands upon us, 0 prosper thou our handy-work.
Glory be to the Father, and to tlie Son : and to the Holy Ghost;
As it was in the beginning, is now and ever shall b e ; world without
end. Ameu.
Appendix
III.
285
JIAN t h a t is born of womat|;hath but a short time to live, and is full of
misery. He eometh up, and is cut down, like a flower, he fleeth as it were a
shadow, and never continueth in one stay.
In the midst of life we are in death : of whom may we seek foT succour,
but of thee, 0 Lord, who for our sins art justly displeased.
Yet, 0 Lord God most holy, 0 Lord most mighty, 0 holy and most
merciful Saviour, deliver us not into the bitter pains of eternal death.
Thou lmowest, Lord, the sccrets of our hearts ; shut not t h y merciful ears
to our prayer; but spare us, Lord most holy, O God most mighty, 0 holy
and merciful Saviour, thou most worthy Judge eternal, suffer us not, at our
last hour, for any pains of death, to fall from thee.
If Then, while the earth shall be cast upon the Body by some standing by, he
ivho conducts the burial service shall say,
FORASMUCH AS IT HATH PLEASED ALMIGHTY GOD OF HIS GREAT MERCY
TO TAKE UNTO HIMSELF THE SOUL OF OUR BEAR brother HERE DEPARTED, WE
THEREFORE COMMIT hti BODY TO THE GROUND ; EARTH TO EARTH, ASHES
TO ASHES, DUST TO DUST *, IN SURE AND CERTAIN HOPE OF THE RESURRECTION
TO ETERNAL LIFE, THROUGH OUR LORD J E S U S CHRIST ; "WHO SHALL CHANGE
OUR VILE BODY, THAT IT MAY BE LIKE UNTO HIS GLORIOUS BODY, ACCORDING
TO THE MIGHTY WORKING, WHEREBY HE IS ABLE TO SUBDUE ALL THINGS TO
HIMSELF.
I HEARD A VOICE FROM HEAVEN, SAYING UNTO ME, W R I T E , FROM HENCEFORTH BLESSED ARE THE DEAD WHICH DIE IN THE LORD 1 EVEN SO SAITH
THE SPIRIT ; FOR THEY REST FROM THEIR LABOURS.
OUR F A T H E R , WHICH ART IN HEAVEN, HALLOWED BE THY NAME.
THY
KINGDOM COME. T H Y WILL BE DONE, IN EARTH AS IT IS I N HEAVEN. GIVE
US THIS DAY OUR DAILY BREAD. A N D FORGIVE US OUR TRESPASSES. AS "WE
FORGIVP THEM THAT THESPASO AGAINST US. AND LEAD US NOT INTO TEMPTATION ; B U T DELIVER US FROM EVIL. AMEN.
Prayer.
ALMIGHTY God, with whom do live the spirits of them t h a t depart hence
in the Lord, and with whom the souls of the faithful, after they are delivered
from the burden of the flesh, are in joy and felicity; we give thee hearty
thanks, for t h a t it hath pleased thee to deliver this our brother out of the
miseries of this sinful world ; beseeching thee, that it may please thee, of thy
gracious goodness, shortly to accomplish the number of thjne elect and to
hasten t h y kingdom; that we, with all those t h a t are departed in the true
faith of thy holy Name, may have our perfect consummation and bliss, both
in body and soul, in thy eternal and everlasting glory; through Jesus Christ
our Lord.
Amen.
T H E GRACE OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST, AND THE LOVE OF GOD, AND
THE FELLOWSHIP OF THE H O L Y GHOST, BE WITH US ALL EVERMORE.
Amen-.
Xln the case of Roman Catholics, the form of service prescribed in the Roman
Catholic Prayer Book should be used.)
(B 28/332)Q
Index.
286
INDEX
A
PAGE
Abbreviated titles of formations and units, list of
.. •
..
Abbreviations for use in the field •.
..
..
..
..
Accommodation, in areas, allotment of . .
..
..
..
Adjutant-General's Branch, in war, duties of
..
..
..
Advanced guard, composition and strength of . .
..
..
Aeronautical t e r m s and their meaning
..
..
..
..
Air reconnaissance, details regarding
..
..
..
..
Photography an essential part of
..
..
..
..
Aircraft, methods and classification of communication with . .
Details visible from
..
..
..
..
..
..
Use of ground indicators, t o communicate with
..
..
Protection from
..
..
..
..
..
..
Alarm signals, in billets, classification of . .
..
..
•..
Aldershot oven, use of
Alphabet, phonetic, use of
Ambulances, field, duties and details of
Ammunition, details regarding
Supply and distribution of
..
..
..
..
..
For each man, with rifle, approximate number of rounds of
Tor guns and automatic weapons, number of rounds of . .
Method of packing and weight of
..
..
..
..
Prevention of corrosive effects of gas on
..
..
..
Wagons, details of
..
..
..
..
..
..
Anchorages, and use of spars
..
..
..
Angle, right, laying out of . .
Animals, captured, details regarding
From attack from the air, protection of
..
..
..
On the march, care of
Troughing accommodation and watering of
..
..
Use of bicycles, &c., in lieu of
..
..
..
..
Veterinary hints for injuries to
..
..
..
..
"Watering of when supply is restricted
..
..
..
Areas, for billeting, capacity and allotment of . .
..
..
Armies, Foreign, war organization of
..
..
...
..
Arms, disablement of
..
..
..
..
..
..
I n billets, guarding of
Protection against corrosive action of gas, on
..
..
Armoured Car Units, movements of
..
..
..
..
Army Act, courts-martial under the
..
..
..
..
Arrest, details regarding
Artillery, equipment, details of
..
..
..
..
..
Fire, cover required from
..
..
..
..
..
Fire, degrees of protection from
..
..
..
..
On the march, instructions regarding
..
..
..
Assault bridging, details regarding
Assembly posts, position of in case of attack
..
..
..
Reconnoitring of, routes t o . .
..
..
..
..
Attack, details required in preliminary instructions for
Distribution of units when liable to
Orders for
Plan of, explanation to subordinates
Programmes of work for
..
..
..
..
..
Secrecy of orders for
-
48 el
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
seq.
vi
21
3
65
72
59
60
53
68
54
68
23
30
56
200
156
166 etseq.
..
168
169,170
153,154
..
158
..
166
..
107
81
200
..
13
13
..
53
..
13
211 etseq.
..
33
..
21
248 etseq.
..
117
23
..
158
..
10
..
222
221
..
164
..
94
..
94
..
8
109
..
23
..
23
39
21
39
39
• 39
—
39
287
Index.
PAGE
40
39
Attack, time at which orders are to arrive at various H.Q. priorto
Time of issue of final orders for
Axle loads of various vehicles
Barges, types of
Base, duties of D,A.G. at the
Baths, provision of in the field, details regarding
Beef tea, recipes for ..
Bleeding, medical treatment for . .
Bomb-proof dug-outs and cellars, details regarding
Bugle calls on the march
Buildings, defence of
Burial service, form of
Billeting party, on arrival in area, procedure of . .
Billeting reconnaissance, details regarding
Details in Part I of report, during
Headings for Part I I of report, during
Billets, allotment of . .
Description of . .
Genera] rules in
. . . . .
Guarding of arms in
Leakage of information in
Marking of
Officers visiting men and horses in . .
Points to be observed in distributing troops, Ac..
Bivouacs, care of horses in . .
Information concerning
Bivouac shelters, disposal of rainwater from roof of
ImprovisedTypes of
Bread, how to make
Bridges, assault, details regarding
Breaking step when crossing military
Destruction of, tables of charges and times . .
Mechanical transport crossing floating
Military classification of
Posting of maintenance party and guards at
Table of spans and loads for Martel box girder
Types of
Weight of troops, guns, &c., on
Bridging, expedients, how constructed, &c.
Formula for calculating buoyancy in
Materials carried in the field
Operations, table of time and men required for
Bus column, duties of O.C.
Speed of . .
„
^
..
„
~
Camels, on board ship, points to be attended to
Transport, care of
Camouflage, details regarding
Defensive works, how recognized from the air
Materials available for
Camp cooking, Instructions regarding
M
Camp, kettle, capacity of . .
Trench
Camp. Britislrand Indian troops together in
Care of horses in
Disinfection of ...
...
«
General sanitation in . .
Grazing in
„
—
—
~
111
..
122
214
203
30
202
..
94,95
7
98
. .
284
22
62
62
63
21
23
22
23
22
22
22
22
27
23
26
26
26
81
..
100
«
118 et seq.
. .
9
9
9
114
109
..
Ill
108 etseq.
..
115
..
110
. .
114
12
12
125
13
102
102
102
29
29
30
24
27
204
203
et seq.
24
288
Index.
Camps, in mountain warfare, points to be attended to in
Best, details regarding
Itoads, use of by units in
Siting of . .
Staff officers on arrival in
Standing, details regarding
Water supply, &c., in . ,
Cantilevers, formulae for calculating size of
Care of animals on the march
Carts, water, use of . .
Casualties, system of evacuation of
Cattle, transport, care of
Cavalry on the march, instructions regarding
Censorship of private correspondence in the field
Chaplains, responsibilities of
Charges, demolitions, details regarding
Formula? for calculation of
Table of, with times, <fcc.
Checks, minor, prevention of in column
Chief Signal Officer, responsibility of
Chiropody, trained personnel in unit for ..
Ciphers, details and instructions regarding
Enciphering and deciphering rules governing
Substitution
Transposition
Circuit diagrams, conventional signs used in
Close reconnaissance aeroplanes .information from
Clothing, in the field, details regarding
To be carried in the field, detail and weight of
Codes, details and instructions regarding
Colonies, military forces in the
Column of route, space allowed in
Combined operations, communication in . .
Control by Board of Trade in
Definitions of titles and terms used in
Details regarding
Naval terms and their meaning in
Naval words of command used in
..
R.A.F. duties and responsibilities in
Responsibilities of the Navy in
Command in the field, system of . .
Commanders of patrols, hints for
Communication, with aircraft, classification of . .
With the Navv in combined operations
Company commander, powers of, regarding punishmen
Compass, points of . .
Compliments on service
Contents, table of
..
Conventional signs used in route plans and circuit dia
Convoys, on the march, rules for
Protection of
System of
Cooking, boiling, stewing and frying
Camp, instructions regarding
Hay box
..
..
I n mess tins
Recipes
Correspondence in the field, rules for
Private postal, in the field
Coupling horses, method of
Courts-martial, details regarding . .
Craters, table of cubic contents of
Cryptogram, table of comparative recurrence of letter f the
in a
Currency of British Dominions and Colonies
24
24 et seq.
24
23
23
24 et seq.
23
111,112
13
32
201
13
PAGE
8
..
216
4
115
116
118
et seq.
7
6
200
217 et seq.
217 et seq.
' ..
219
217
56
60
184
185 et seq.
217 et seq.
225 et seq.
15
55
69
70
69
70
71
69
63
53
55
221
276
7
iv
56
155
68
54,155
29
29
30
29
30
214
216
28
222
102
[thabet
220
274
289
Index.
D
PAGE
Dead, form of burial service for the,
..
..
Debusaing points, instructions regarding . .
,.
Defence, of buildings, preparations for
..
Of hedges and walls, details regarding
..
Of a position, object of
..
..
..
Definitions . .
..
..
..
..
..
Demolitions, details regarding
..
..
..
Table of charges and times in
Times for
Without explosives, details regarding
..
Dental treatment, details regarding
..
..
Derelict material, recovery of
..
..
..
Derricks, details regarding stresses in
..
..
Size of timber for
..
....
..
Despatch riders
..
..
..
..
..
Detached posts, strength and use of
..
r.
Detachments, artillery, dismounted, on the inarch
Details of trenches
..
..
..
..
Details of vehicles in common use
..
..
Detonators, types and how used . .
..
..
Detraining, rules for
..
..
..
..
Diaries, war, details regarding
..
..
..
Disablement of guns and arms
..
..
Discipline, march, rules for . .
..
..
..
Powers of C.O
Discs, displaying of . .
..
..
..
..
Disease conveyed by food, &c., precautions against
Disinfestation in the field, provision for . .
...
Distances, between troops in column
..
..
Between t a n k sections and companies
..
Increased or reduced by order of commander
Dock, labour, details regarding
..
..
..
Working, details regarding
..
..
..
Docks, details regarding
..
..
..
..
Dominions, currency of t h e . .
..
..
..
Military forces in the ..
..
..
..
Dressing, field, first, details of
Drinking water, purification of . .
..
..
Dug-outs, and trench shelters, use of
..
..
Cellars, &c., bomb-proof, details regarding . .
Duties, in signal units, allotment of
..
..
Of movement control, staff officers
Of officers commanding a bus column
..
Of the Adjutant-General's branch in war
Of the general staff in war
..
..
..
Of the Q.M.G's. branch in war
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
118 ei
284
11
98
98
95
xi
115
seq.
110
..
..
117
..
..
201
..
..
31
..
..
107
..
..
113
..
..
42
..
..
68
..
.;
8
..
...
97
..
114 el seq.
..
..
115
..
..
132
..
..
215
..
..117
.. , •'.'
7
' ' ' 2 2 0
..
,(vV 54
. . . ' ' 204
..
..
203
..
..
7
..
..
10
..
..
7
..
..
133
..
..
132
..
..
132
..
..
274
..
225 el seq.
202
..
..
206
..
..
24
..
..94,95
..
..
42
120,127
..
..
12
3
..
..
3
„
3
E
Embarking troops on board ship, details regarding
Embus, time taken to
..
..
..
..
..
Embussing, of troops, instructions regarding
..
..
Preparation of Lewis guns for action, prior to
..
Vehicles, space taken up on road by
..
..
Emergency schemes, railway arrangements for . .
..
Equipment, artillery, details of
..
..
..
..
Engagement, distribution of units in anticipation of an
Engineering, field, details of
..
..
..
..
Entraining, general rules for
..
..
..
..
Eutrainment, of horses and mules . .
..
...
..
Of units, times fgr
,.
,•
«.«
^
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.»
124
..
11
..
11
..
11
..
11
..
127
164,165
..
21
78 et seq.
..
130
..
130
,,
132
290
Index.
PAGE
Excreta in camps, disposal of
Explosives, carried by variotid units, table of
I n tlie field, supply of . .
..
Supply of
..
..
M
—
..
..
..
...
...
—
205
171
166 et seq.
170
F
Feeding of animals on t h e march 13
Fever, malaria, precautions against
..
..
..
..
207
Sandfly, precautions against . .
..
..
..
..
..
207
Field dressing, first, details of
202
Field engineering
78 et seq.
Details regarding working parties
..
..
..
..
..
80
Effect of weapons
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
93
Field geometry, simple
..
..
..
..
..
•.
81
Field works, classification of ...
—
..
..
..
..
78
Eield works, table of time, men and tools . .
..
..
87 et seq.
Filing on to work
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
81
Main object of field fortifications
..
..
..
..
..
93
Organization of work . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
78
Preparatory measures, marking out of work, &c. . .
..
..
79
Responsibilities of officer commanding working p a r t y
...
..
79
Responsibilities of officer in charge of woTk
..
..
..
78
Specimen of instructions t o unit providing a working p a r t y . .
84
Specimen of working p a r t y demand . .
..
..
..
..
82
Tables of tools carried in t h e field . .
..
..
..
..
85
Tracing and setting out work . .
..
..
..
..
..
80
Field kitchens, types of
29
Travelling, methods of cooking in
..
..
..
..
..
29
Field kits, table of
185 et seq.
Field punishment, details regarding
223
Field sketching and m a p reading . .
..
..
..
..
..
72
Fires in billets, precautions against
..
..
..
..
..
23
Flares, displaying of
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
54
Flies, breeding places of
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
204.
Destruction of
205
Followers on t h e march, instructions regarding . .
..
..
..
8
Food, authorities to whom indents should be addressed for . .
..
282
Contamination, protection against . .
..
..
..
..
206
Forage, carried in t h e field, details of
..
..
..
..
174,175
Equivalents
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
•.
175
Forces in t h e field, maintenance of t h e . .
..
..
..
..
' 4
Fords, depths a t which fordable b y different arms
8
Marking of
9
Foreign armies, details of guns and ranges in yards in . .
..
264 et seq.
Details of machine guns and automatic rifles in
..
..
..
262
Details of rifles, &c., in
261
Proportion of gnns and swords t o i n f a n t r y in
267
W a r organization of fighting troops in
248 et seq.
Frostbite, how caused
208
Preventative measures against
..
..
..
..
..
208
Prevention of
203
Full moon, dates of . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
279
Fuzes, methods of lighting, &c.
115
Used in demolitions
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
115
G
Gas a t t a c k , effect on arms, remedial measures after a
R a t e of fire during a
Gauges, railway
..
..
..
..
..
..
General staff, duties of in waT
Geometry, field, simple
,,
.,
.•
••
.i
i.
158
158
130
3
81
291
Index.
PAGE
Graves service, functions of
..
..
..
..
Grenades, details of
•
Dischargers
...
...
...
..
..
Inspection, priming and storage of . .
..
..
Ground indicators for communication with aircraft
..
Guns, disablement of
..
..
..
..
..
Field, details regarding
Lewis, details of
..
,.
...
..
Machine, details of
..
..
_
Method of packing and weight of ammunition for . .
Prevention of corrosive effects of gas on
..
..
Vehicles, <fcc., slinging on to a ship
4
160
161
1(50
54,65
..
117
162,163
..
160
160
153.154
..
158
126
_
^
...
..
..
..
..
..
..
H
Halts, instructions regarding
...
—
..
When marching in frost and snow, precautions during
Harness and saddlery, care of
..
..
..
..
Leather, washing of
..
..
..
..
llay-box cookery
..
..
».
..
Health, care of feet, hands and face
..
..
..
Maintenance of . .
..
..
..
..
..
Hints for commanders of patrols . .
..
..
..
Hirings service, functions of
..
..
..
..
Hobbling horses, method of
..
..
..
..
Horse lines in quarters, position of
..
..
..
Horses, coupling, method of
..
..
..
..
Entrainment of
..
..
' ..
..
..
Feeding and grazing in camp —
..
..
..
General care of in camps
..
..
..
..
Instructions regarding privately owned
Method of shooting
Methods of securing . .
...
..
..
..
On board ship, points t o be attended to
..
..
On the march, care of ..
..
..
..
..
Replacement of casualties to . .
..
..
..
Slinging on to a ship
Space required for in camps . .
..
..
..
Straying, prevention of
_
...
—
..
Horse Transport, general functions of
_
.-.
Hospitals, and C.C. stations in the field, details regarding
Position of
Hotchkiss guns, details of
Howitzers, details regarding
Huts, construction of
..
..
..
..
Precautions to be taken in
..
..
..
..
Hutting, details regarding Hygiene in the army, general organization of
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
...
..
8
..
7
..
29
..
29
..
30
..
203
202 et seq.
..
63
..
4
..
28
..
21
..
28
..
130
..
27
..
27
210
21E
..
27
..
125
..
13
..
209
125
..
27
..
28
..
134
..
201
21
..
160
162,163
..
27
..
27
27
199
I
Information, how acquired . .
I n billets, leakage of
Signs affording . .
..
..
..
..
Value of
Imprest holders, instructions lor . .
..
..
Improvised roads and tracks
..
..
..
Indents, authorities to whom addressed
_
Indicators, ground, for communication with aircraft
Infantry on the march, instructions regarding . .
..
..
».
..
..
..
.,
..
..
..
..
_
..
..
..
,.
_
56, 67
22
58
67
183
100
282
64,65
8
Index.
292
PAGE
Inland waterways and docks, details regarding . .
...
Inoculation, percentage, and responsibility of C.<). in unit
Intercommunication, details regarding
..
•..
..
Units in Royal Corps cf Signals
..
.. - ..
Irish stew, recipes . .
_
..
...
...
..
...
..
.•
..
.-.
132
207
41 ct seq.
..
41
80
M
J
Jackets, removal of during the march
...
Judge advocate-general's service, functions of
..
..
..
...
...
7
4
K
Kitchens, field, types of
..
..
..
..
..
Kits, field, table of
Horse, transport N.C.Os. and drivers, carriage o f . .
Officers', carried in the train transport
..
..
Officers', dismounted . .
..
..
..
..
Officers', dismounted, carried in train transport
..
Officers', mounted
..
..
..
..
..
Warrant Officer's, N.C.O's. and men (dismounted)..
Warrant Officer's, N.C.O's. and men (mounted) . .
Knee-haltering of hoises
..
..
..
..
..
Knots, cordage, blocks, tackles, &c.. details regarding . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
29
185 etseq.
..
198
..
188
..
193
..
194
..
185
195 et seq.
180 et seq.
..
28
103 et seq.
L
Land forces of the Dominions, Crown Colonies, &c.
Latrines in camp, instructions regarding
Lewis guns, details of
..
..
Lights, on lorries, instructions regarding
On vehicles in forward area, extinguishing cf
Screening of from t h e enemy
Liquor houses, control of
Line, marching in, fatiguing for troops
Linking horses, method of . .
Loading of vehicles on trains
Loading tables for vehicles
Loads, on one axle, for various vehicles
Lorries on the road, halting of
225 et seq.
..
205
..
160
11
11
8
22
7
29
..
131
147 et seq.
..
Ill
11
M
Machine guns, details of
..
..
..
..
Machine gun fire, details regarding
..
..
Magnetic variation in various countries, details of the
Maintenance, of health, details regarding..
..
Of the forces in the
field
..
..
..
Malaria, precautions against
..
..
..
Manure in camps, disposal of
..
..
..
Map reading, and field sketching, details regarding
Conventional signs
,.
,,
.,
.,
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
,,
..
..
,.
..
..
..
..
..
,,
..
160
..
94
...
277
203 et seq.
..
4
..
207
..
204
72 et seq.
..
73
293
Index.
Map reading—continued.
Description of a locality or point in . .
..
...
...
Gridded maps and variations . .
..
..
..
..
Methods of finding true n o r t h . .
..
..
..
..
Scales
Slopes, measurement of in
...
..
..
...
..
Use of the service compass . .
..
..
..
..
March, average distance of a
..
...
..
..
Care of animals on the
..
..
..
..
..
Formations on a road . .
..
..
..
..
..
Rules for convoys on the
..
..
..
..
..
Harcli discipline of M.T. column, responsibility for
..
..
March table, specimen of . .
..
..
..
..
..
Marches, and march discipline, rules for . .
..
..
..
By njght, prevention of noise on
..
..
..
..
„
marking of route prior to . .
..
..
,,
without protection, instructions regarding
..
,,
reconnaissance prior to
..
..
..
..
,,
rules for
..
..
..
..
..
..
Marching, rates of, details regarding
..
..
..
..
Time and space tables of
..
..
..
..
..
Martel box girder bridge, table of spans and loads for ..
..
Measures and weights, English and foreign, details of . .
..
Mechanical transport, companies, duties and allotment of
..
Organization and general functions of
..
..
..
Rules for
Rules for movements by
..
..
..
..
..
Units in quarters, position of ..
..
..
..
..
Medical, officer i/c unit, duties of . .
..
..
..
..
Service, functions of . .
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
(
„
general organization of
».
..
..
..
Treatment in cases of emergency
..
..
..
..
Units of a force in the field, details regarding the
Message-dropping stations . .
..
..
..
..
..
Messages, abbreviated titles of units and formations i n . .
..
Censorship of private or press..
..
..
..
..
Details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
..
For dispatch by M I . S
Tor dispatch by signals
General instructions regarding the preparation of ..
..
Responsibility for originating
Important, to be sent by more than one route
..
..
Messengers, instructions for
..
..
..
..
..
Mess tins, cooking in
..
..
..
..
..
..
Method of packing and weight of ammunition . .
..
..
Methods of securing horses
Military, bridges, classification of . .
..
Forces of Dominions, Crown Colonies and Protectorates . .
Tribunals, establishment of . .
..
..
..
..
Police, details regarding and duties of
..
..
..
Moon, full, dates of
*
Mortars, details of . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
Mosquitoes, habits of
Protection against bites of
Mountain warfare, camps in
..
..
..
..
..
Movement control staff officers, duties of
Movement of various bodies of troops, rate of . .
,.
..
Movements, by mechanical transport rules for
„ rail, general rules for
..
..
..
..
„ sea, details regarding
..
..
..
..
,, „ points in inspecting ships . .
..
..
of armoured car units, details regarding . .
..
„ tank units
„ troops, rolling stock for . .
..
..
..
Mules, entrainment of
..
..
..
...
...
..
PAGE
74
73
76
72
»..
73
..
76
..
7
..
13
..
7
..
155
..
12
..
38
..
7
..
10
...
9
..
10
...
9
..
9
..7,14
..
14
..
114
267 el seq.
..
135
...
134
10
..
11
..
21
..
200
..
4
198 et seq.
..
202
200
..
54
..
48
..
48
34 et seq.
47
47
..
52
48
..
35
..
53
..
29
..
153
27
0
225 et seq.
..
22
..
223
..
279
..
161
207
207
».,
24
«
126
..
14
11
..
126
121 et seq.
..
123
..
10
10
..
127
130
..
..
..
Index.
294
N
PAGE
N i v a l , terms a n d their meaning
Words of command
..
..
Navy, communication with
..
N.C.O., punishment of a
Night, advances, orders f o r . ,
..
Attacks, orders for
Marches, rules for
..
..
Noise on night marches, prevention of
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
Obstacles, improvised roads and tracks, details regarding
"Wiring, drill and stores for
Office work, general rules regarding
Officer commanding a bus column, duties of
Officer t o march in rear of unit
Officers, movement control staff, duties of
Passage of along a column
P a y m e n t of, &c.
Powers of regarding punishment
Sanitary, duties of
Offices, H.Q. officer on d u t y in
Staff and signal, position of
Operation orders, appendices t o
F r a m i n g of
March table, specimen of, issued with
Object and contents o f . .
Specimen of
To subordinate commanders, distribution of
Operations, combined details regarding . .
I n tropical country, t r a n s p o r t for
Night, details regarding
Table of t i m e and men required for bridging
Orderlies, and messengers, instructions for
Passage of along a column
Orders, b y C.-in-C., how communicated to heads (of services
Classification of
Departure f r o m
For attack
..
F o r movements b y rail, details regarding
F o r night attacks, framing of
Guiding principles and rules regarding execution of
Indefinite and ambiguous terms n o t t o be used in ...
Misleading, use of
Names of places and persons in
Operation
...
. . . .
Routine . .
..
.. J —
Rules for compiling
Serial numbers and. letters in . .
Standing
..
System of describing m a p references, &c., in
System of describing our own and enemy positions in
Warning, advantage of
Written or verbal
Ordnance service, functions of
..
..
..
Organization of t h e services in t h e field
Outpost, commander, information required by . .
Commander, points for orders issued b y an
D u t y , duties of commander on
Patrols, composition and use of
70
71
55
221
40
40
9
10
67
68
Index.
PAGE
Outposts, duties of
..
Prisoners and deserters, passing through
Rules regarding strength of
Traffic through
-
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
66
66
66
66
P
Pace, in slow and quick time, length of
Side, length of
Patrols, accuracy of reports hy
..
..
..
..
Hints for commanders of
..
..
..
..
Primary object of and hints for
..
..
..
Pay, arrangements, details regarding
Service, functions of
..
..
..
..
Payment, of officers, details regarding
..
..
,.
Of troops, details regarding . .
..
..
..
Penetration of rifle bullet into various materials, table of
Phonetic alphabet, use of . .
..
..
..
..
Piquet, or support, duties of commander of a unit on . .
Pitching tents, circular, directions for
..
..
..
Plates, list of
Printing and stationery service, functions of
..
..
Points of tl^e compass
..
..
..
..
..
Police, military, details regarding . .
..
..
..
Position, consideration affecting choice of a defensive . .
I n attack, reconnaissance of a
..
..
..
I n defence, organization of a . .
..
..
..
„
priority of work in a
..
..
..
,,
reconnaissance of a
..
..
..
Object of defending troops in a ^
..
,.
Postal, correspondence, private, details regarding
Service, functions of
..
..
..
..
Posts, assembly, in the case of attack
..
..
..
Prisoners, examination of ..
. . . .
..
..
Private postal correspondence, details regarding..
..
Protection, against artillery fire, degrees of
Details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
Mounted troops and armoured cars, employment of
Of convoys
..
..
..
..
..
..
Strength of advanced guard . .
..
..
..
Provost-marshal, responsibilities of the . .
..
..
Provost service, functions of
..
..
..
..
Pumps, water, capabilities of
..
..
..
..
Punishment, field, details regarding
Powers o! C.O. regarding
Purity of water
. . . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
...
14
14
..
63
..
63
..
63
183 et seq.
..
6
..
183
..
184
..
93
.•
56
..
67
..
26
v
..
6
..
276
..
223
..
96
. . 63, 64
..
96
..
96
,.
64
..
95
216
..
6
.'.
23
..
68
..
216
94
..
65
..
66
..
68
..
65
..
223
..
5
..
33
223
220
32
Q
Q.M.G's. branch, duties of in war . .
..
Quarters, distribution of troops in
^
General rules regarding
Protection against attack by aircraft in
Quick time, length of pace in
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
...
..
..
..
..
..
..
'
3
21
21
23
14
R
Railway reconnaissance, details regarding
Range cards, in attack, use of
..
..
..
I n defence, use of
..
..
..
..
Ranges of objects, ov/r and under-estimation of
Rate of marching of various bodies of troops
Rations, carried in the field, details of
Equivalents
..
..
.-.
»•
•--*
62
158
159
157
14
172
174
385
Index.
Ilations—continued.
Examples of native
..
..
..
..
..
Special scale of . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
Reconnaissance, air, details regarding
..
..
..
..
Billeting, details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
- Definition and classification of
..
..
..
••
Of a position in the attack
..
..
..
..
.•
Of roads
Railway details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
Reports, details regarding
.,
..
..
..
••
River, details regarding
..
..
..
..
-.
Reconnoitring parties, primary duty of . .
..
..
••
Recipes, cookery, beef tea . .
..
..
..
•.
••
Details of
Irish stew, seapie, &c. . .
..
..
..
..
••
Preserved meat soup . .
..
..
..
..
••
Stewing, &c
Refuse in camps, disposal of
..
..
..
..
..
Remount service, functions of
..
..
..
..
•.
Service, organization of
..
..
..
..
..
Remounts, indents for
..
..
..
..
..
..
Reports, details regarding . .
..
..
..
..
..
Reconnaissance, details regarding
..
..
..
..
Requisition, receipt note, example of
..
..
..
. . .
Supplies, details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
Return, definition of A
..
Rile, fire, details regarding..
..
..
..
..
..
Notes on the use of the
..
..
.,
..
..
Rifles, details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
..
Of drivers of transport vehicles, where carried
..
..
Ringing horses, method of . .
..
..
..
..
..
River, attack on, report during reconnaissance of
..
..
River, method of measuring width of
..
..
River reconnaissance, details of, reports on
..
..
..
Details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
..
Velocity of a river and strength of ice, how calculated during
Refilling points, hints on selection of localities for
..
..
Road, opening out of a column o n . .
..
..
..
..
Side of on which to march
..
..
..
..
..
Roadbearers and transoms for various loads and spans, sizes of
Formulte for calculating size of
..
..
..
..
Road reconnaissance, details regarding ..
..
..
..
Information in Reports, parts I and IT
..
..
..
I n the presence of the enemy
..
..
..
..
Road space, assumption in calculation of
..
..
..
Mechanical transport, 1st and 2nd line, tables of . .
. .•
Non-divisional troops, tables of
..
..
..
..
Units ol cavalry division, table of
..
..
..
Units of a division, tables of . .
..
..
..
..
Road, transport, details regarding..
..
..
..
..
Corduroy, construction of
..
..
..
..
..
Rolling stock, capacity of
European, continental, &c. . .
..
..
..
..
For movements of troops
..
..
..
..
..
Routine orders, instructions regarding
..
...
..
..
Route plans, conventional signs used in . .
..
..
..
Rest camps, details regarding
..
..
Rules for convoys on the march . .
..
..
..
..
3?or mechanical transport
..
..
—
...
..
Saddlery and harness, care of
Salvage, details regarding . .
Load empty vehicles with
..
...
..
..
..
...
..
..
..
..
PAGE
174
174
59
62
57
63
60
••
62
••
••
61
••
59
•*
30
30
••
SO
••
31
30
..
204
•.
5
..
209
..
209
34 et seq.
..
59
.
182
••
181
214
.•
156,157
•.
156
..
198
..
29
..
62
81
..
61
..
61
..
01
..
181
..
7
..
7
..
112
..
Ill
..
CO
..
61
..
60
..
15
16 et seq.
..
19
..
16
..
17
133 et seq.
..
101
129
..
129
..
127
..
36
..
56
..
24
..
155
...
10
..
..
• ••
..
•.
••
..
..
..
, 29
31
31
Index.
297
PAGE
Sanitary, officers, duties ol . .
»—.
199
Sections, allotment and duties of . . .
..
..
..
199
Sanitation, in camps, details regarding . .
..
..
..
etseq.
Responsibilities of C.O. yegardiug
..
..
..
..
..
200
Trained personnel in unit for . .
..
..
..
..
..
200
Scouts, if captjued, refusal to give information . .
..
..
,.
59
Special instruction of . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
58
Sea, details regarding movements by
..
..
..
..
121 etseq.
Pie, recipes
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
30
Voyages, change of clothing on
..
..
..
..
..
184
Sentences suspended, details regarding . .
..
..
..
..
223
Sentries, information to be supplied to
..
..
..
..
67
Sentry groups, details regarding . .
,.
..
..
..
..
67
Service, compliments not to be paid on . .
..
..
..
..
7
Services, organization and functions of the
..
..
..
4 et seq.
Sheers, size of timber for . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
113
Shelters, bivouac, types of ..
..
...
..
..
26
Shipping tonnage, conversion tables for deadweight and
..
..
123
Definition of
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
122
Ships, bugle calls and ship's signals on board
..
..
..
..
124
Dimensions of . .
..
..
..
..'
..
..
..
121
Hospital, capacity of . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
201
Points in inspecting
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
123
Points to be attended to w h e n horses on board
..
..
..
125
Slinging horses and camels on to
..
..
..
..
..
125
Sick, evacuation of . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
201
Side pace, length of . .
..
..
..
..
.'.
..
..
14
Signal Officer-in-Chief, responsibilities of ..
..
..
..
..
0
Signal, sections, miscellaneous
..
..
..
..
..
..
44
Traffic in the field .:
..
47
Signal units, distribution of
..
..
..
..
..
..
41
Means at disposal of various . .
..
..
..
..
-12 etseq.
Signallers in units other than R. Corps of Sigs., establishment of
45
Signalling to enemy in billets by inhabitants, precautions against
..
23
Signals, administration of Royal Corps of
..
..
..
..
46
Signals, ships'
..
..
...
..
..
..
..
..
124
Signs affording information—dust, fires, etc.
..
..
..
..
58
Site for camps and bivouacs
..
..
..
..
..
..
23
Slinging, guns and vehicles . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
120
Horses and camels 011 to a ship
..
..
..
..
..
125
Slow time, length of pacc in ,
..
..
..
..
..
..
14
Small arms and guns, details of . .
..
..
..
156 etseq.
Snipers, in mountain warfare
..
..
..
..
..
24
Soldier, punishment of
..
..
..
..
..
..
220 et seq.
Soldiers, casualties to, disposal of A.B. G4
..
..
,.
..
184
Payment of on active service . .
..
..
..
..
..
184
Sounds) measuring distances by means of
..
..
..
..
58
Soup made with preserved meat . .
..
' ..
..
..
..
30
Space, allowed in column of route for various animals, vehicles. <fcr\ . .
15
Tables of, road . .
..
10
Space to be left on outer flank of a column .
..
..
..
..
7
Spars, use of ..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
107
Stabling in billeting areas ..
..
..
..
..
..
..
22
Standing and rest camps, alarm posts in ..
..
..
..
..
25
Details regarding
..
..
.•
..
..
..
..
24
Drainage in
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
24
Latrines, <fcc., in
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
25
Notice boards in
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
25
Standing orders, instructions regarding . .
..
..
..
..
36
Object of
36
Starting point, instructions regarding
..
..
..
..
..
8
Marking of at night
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
8
Precedence on the road of, first line transport during movement to
8
State, definition of A
.,
,,
,,
,,
,,
214
Index.
298
PAGE
StOKes mortar, details of
..
..
,.
_
Stores, abandoned and unserviceable, recovery of
Authorities to whom indents should be addressed
Straying, horses, prevention of
..
..
..
Stream, method of measuring width of . .
,.
Sun, mean local times, rising and setting of the ..
Supplies, cattle, sheep, bread, forage, &c., notes on
Details regarding requisitions for
..
..
Normal method of packing
..
..
..
Required for one day, table of
..
..
Supply, and transport service, functions of
..
Arrangements, details regarding
..
..
Of ammunition and explosives in the field . .
Survey service, functions of
..
..
..
Suspended sentences, details regarding . .
..
,.
..
for
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
161'
31
282
28
81
..
280
..
178
•.
181
..
173
..
176
..
5
179 et seq.
166 et seq.
..
5
..
223
T
Tables, of road space occupied by various units , ,
.;
..
Tackles, knots, blocks, cordage, &c., details regarding . .
..
Tank lengths, definition of . .
Calculation of in March tables
..
..
..
..
Tank Units, movements of _
..
..
..
..
..
Tanks, rate of movement of
..
..
..
..
..
Telegrams, officers entitled to frank
..
..
..
..
Order in which t o be sent
..
..
..
..
..
Priority for
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
Telegraphy, visual, range of
..
..
..
..
..
Tents, circular, directions for pitching
..
..
..
..
Thermometer, details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
Time and space, tables of for marching . .
..
..
..
Titles of units and formations, list of abbreviated
..
"..
Tracks, levelling and marking of . .
..
..
..
..
Traffic, signal, in the
field
Train transport, details of vehicles in
..
..
..
..
Trains, divisional, allotment of and details regarding . .
..
Duties and allotment of M.T. companies and divisional . .
Railway, types of in Great Britain, &c.
..
..
..
Transoms, formulae for calculating size of
..
..
..
Transport, allotted to field units, division of
..
..
..
Camels and cattle, best time of day to march
..
..
„
,, care of
..
..
..
..
..
„
„ duration of march of
..
..
..
„
„ grazing and ruminating of
..
..
,,
„ skin disease, guarding against . .
..
„
„ watering of
..
..
..
..
Details of vehicles in 1st and 2nd line
..
..
..
„
on Train
Details regarding
Essentials for move of troops by mechanical
..
..
For savage warfare and operations in tropical countries . .
General functions of horse
..
..
..
..
..
I n single file, time taken to pass a given point
..
Mechanical, allotment and duties of . .
..
..
,,
companies, organization of
..
..
..
„
distance of move by
..
..
..
..
„
" double-banking" forbidden by
„
general functions of
..
..
..
..
,,
headings suitable for march table on move by
„
impedimenta t o be carried by . .
..
..
pace of
,,
,.
.,
**
tt
..
..
16
107
10
..
10
..
10
..
10
..
48
..
47
..
47
..
47
..
26
..
274
..
14
. . 48, 49
..
100
47
..
142
..
136
..
135
127 et seq.
..
Ill
..
136
..
13
—
13
13
,.
13
..
14
..
13
138 et seq.
142
121 et seq.
..
11
..
137
..
134
..
15
..
135
..
134
..
11
11
..
134
..
12
..
11
«10
Index.
299
Transport— continued.
Mechanical, responsibility of formations ordering move by
,,
rules for
.1
..
..
..
..
..
,,
rules for movements by . .
..
..
..
Move to starting point of first line . .
..
..
..
On level joad, rate of marching of
..
..
..
On the march, instructions regarding
..
..
..
On rough or hilly roads, rate of marching of
Road, details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
Transportation, service, functions of
..
..
..
..
Services, details regarding
..
..
..
..
..
Tonnage, definitions and calculations
Travelling field kitchens
..
..
••
••
..
..
Treatment of emergency medical cases . .
..
..
..
Trench foot, how caused
..
..
••
••
..
Preventative measures against
..
..
..
..
Trench shelters and dug-outs,
..
••
•.
.•
..
Trenches, details regarding
..
..
••
.•
..
Drainage of
..
..
..
••
••
.•
Infantry posts . .
..
..
.•
••
••
•.
Revetments, loopholes and observation posts in
Trestle legs, &c., size of timber for
Tribunals, military, establishment of
Troops, during movements by rail, points to be observed by . .
Estimation of numbers passing a point .
..
..
..
I n quarters, rules to be observed in distribution of
..
Payment of, details regarding
Trumpet or bugle calls on the march
..
..
..
..
Tying up a horse
..
..
.. k
—
••
••
••
Types of trains in Great Britain . .
..
..
..
.,
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
••
..
..
..
..
..
••
PAGE
12
11
10
8
14
8
15
133
5
121
122
29
202
208
208
24
97
97
97
97
113
22
127
58
21
184
7
27
127
U
Units, list of full and abbreviated, titles
Method of addressing in messages
Underclothing, clean provision of in the
Urinals, details regarding . .
..
of
..
field
..
..
..
..
..
..
.•
..
..
..
Variation, magnetic, details of
..
..
..
..
Vehicles, in common use, details of
..
..
..
I n 1st and 2nd line transport, details of
Loading tables of ammunition for . .
Loading tables of ordnance and engineer stores for
Loading tables of supplies for
..
•
On trains, loading of . .
..
..
Vermin in clothing, destruction of
..
..
..
Veterinary, hints for common ailments and injuries
Service, functions and organization of the ..
..
Visual telegraphy, range of
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
50
49
203
205
V
..
..
..
..
..
..
277
144 el seq.
13S et seq.
147
..
149
152
..
131
..
204
211
. . 5, 210
..
47
W
Wagons, ammunition, details of . .
War Establishments (see note)
..
Information a factor of success in
Diaries, items t o be recorded in
object of
..
,,
to be kept in duplicate
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
~
166
1
56
215
215
215
300
Warfare, mountain, camps, in
Savage, transport for
Warning order, advantage of
Waste, prevention of
Water, average yield of a stream' . .
Cart,, substitution for
Carts, use of
Drinking, purification of
Duties, trained personnel in unit for
For drinking and cooking
From unauthorized sources, drinking of
Health of a force depending upon purity of
I n a well, quantity of . .
Men and animals, daily consumption of
Pumps, capabilities of . .
Pumps, supply of carried by R.E.
Purity of
Sterilized, supply to be kept at various places
Sterilizing powder, substitution for . .
Supply, details regarding
„
how marked
„
sentries to be posted at
Watering arrangements, details regarding
On the march, for animals
Weights and measures, English and foreign, details of
Wireless, messages sent by . .
Sets, capabilities of
Telegrams, instructions regarding dispatch of
Wiring, drill and stores for
Works service, functions of
Wounded, evacuation of
Index.
PAQB
24
137
38
31
31
32
32
32,205
200
32
31
31
33
33
32
32
32
31
33
32
32
IS
267 Cl seq
48
47
52,63
9»
6
201
111 2S/S32)<j 12824-868 100M 5/26 H A S , U d . Gp. 38 Ste. 26/Ptg.llTl
^Aoxxjbtfl
go to
As soon as a production is announced.
K e i t h Prowse reserve whole blocks of
seats in t h e best positions in all bookable
p a r t s for all performances. These seats
cannot be obtained elsewhere.
YOU want Best Seats.
WE have them.
Wire, Write, 'Phone or Call.
T h e K e i t h P r o w s e b o o k i n g service e x t e n d s t o
Music H a l l s , C a b a r e t s , Concerts, Shows, a n d
S p o r t s [Races, Regattas, Cricket, &c.).
RailwayT i c k e t s , M o t o r Cars, &c.
W e a r e specialists in e v e r y t h i n g m u s i c a l
a n d s u p p l y p i a n o s , g r a m o p h o n e s , records,
m u s i c a l i n s t r u m e n t s (wood, w i n d , b r a s s
a n d string) a n d music.
159, NEW B O N D ST., W. 1.
48, CHEAPSIDE,
E.C. 2.
Regent 6000.
City 473.
For address of nearest Branch see 'Phone Directory—page
607.
100 Branches and Agencies. Equal facilities everywhere.
xil
Regulation
Boots
and
Leggings
TOM HILL
26, BROMPTON ROAD,
KNIGHTSBRIDGE,
S.W.I.
Specialist in " Regulation "
Boots, Leggings and Spurs.
Your enquiries solicited.
Measurement Forms and Catalogue on application.
xiii
Your Boots,
Belt, and Leggings, Sir!
T h e r e is n o t h i n g like M e l t o n i a n C r e a m f o r k e e p i n g good
l e a t h e r in t h e p i n k of c o n d i t i o n .
Get y o u r b a t m a n t o t r y t h i s t r e a t m e n t o n y o u r b r o w n
l e a t h e r e q u i p m e n t . T o n e it t o t h e r i g h t s h a d e w i t h
Meltonian B r o w n , t h e n clean d a i l y w i t h M e l t o n i a n W h i t e
C r e a m a n d a n occasional dressing of B r o w n . Y o u c a n
g e t a b e t t e r polish a n d a b e a u t i f u l even m a h o g a n y colour
by this method and at the same time preserve the
n a t u r e a n d flexibility of t h e l e a t h e r .
Meltonian
CREAM f o r G O O D SHOES
he
handy
Meltonian Cream is made in Ttube
for 1 I
Travelling
*/ ~
White, Black and three
box complete
shades of Brown (formerly in
with cloth for
called " Lutetian") for clean- Alsoapplying.
supplied in
ing and preserving
all The " dumpy "
j a r f o r Qd
polished Leathers.
the Home
Meltonian
White Cleaner it the ideal dressing for white equipment
and it will not rub o f f .
Made by E. Brown & Son, Ltd., Meltonian Works, Cricklewood, London, N.W.2
xlv
LIFE, FIRE, THEFT, MOTOR, PERSONAL
ACCIDENT, HORSE, INSURANCES.
Claim
Settlement
and
Renewals.
G. M. REYNELU
(Major G. MAITLAND-REYNELL, late R.A.S.C.)
Military Insurance Brokers.
Carlton House,
Lower Regent Street,
S.W.1.
Telephone
Telegrams
l } Gerrard 925.
. r "GREYNELLCO."
Cables |
LONDON.
Life Assurance at Ordinary
Rates and without
Medical
Examination.
Major Maitland - Reynell personally advises on Life
Assurance, E n d o w m e n t a n d Children's Assurances, a n d
h a v i n g no pecuniary interest in a n y Insurance C o m p a n y
recommends t h e m o s t f a v o u r a b l e t e r m s obtainable.
Quotations and Advice Free.
HUMPHREYS
&
CROOK,
L T D
A. E. CROOK, Govg. Dtor.
3,
H AYM ARKET,
LONDON,
s.w.i.
Established 1 8 5 0 .
No connection with any other firm
THE
MILITARY TAILORS
who a r e also
COMPLETE COLONIAL OUTFITTERS.
<•»!
Uniform, Mufti, Equipment, Provisions,
Lists on application.
Clients'
baggage forwarded
or stored.
Monthly
payments
arranged if desired.
Tel. :
'PADDYWHACK, LONDON."
By
'Phones:
GERRARD 4631-2.
Appointment
TURNBULL & ASSER
Military, Civilian & Sporting
Hosiers. Polo Specialists.
K H A K I SHIRTS
for all Climates.
Pyjamas,
Shirts,
Dressing
Gowns,
Ties,
Etc.
Racing and Steeplecbasing
Jackets a n d Colours.
71-72, JERMYN STREET, LONDON
GEORGE
PARKER &
(GEORGE P A R K E R & G E O R G E P A R K E R , Junr.)
S.W.I
SONS
E.tab.
1851.
Telegrams:
Telephone:
" CAVESSON,
LONDON."
2464 G E R R A R D .
We have the largest
stock of new and
second hand Hunt- §|L/f- ing Saddles by all
London Makers.
W/Tf
When
requiring
#
clothing write direct to the
makers above, who hold the
largest stock of Super Horse
'
/
Clothing in London.
Makers of Leather Suit C ases
and Bags.
Write for
Quotations.
BEST LEATHER LINED RUGBY PANEL HUNTING SADDLE £ s. d.
-
'
j
- J
(our o w n b e s t m a k e ) , c o m p l e t e w i t h p a i r s u p e r h a n d f o r g e d
steel o r s u p e r n i c k e l s t i r r u p s , p a i r of s u p e r l e a t h e r s , a n d s u p e r
w o o l l e n g i r t h s ...
...
...
...
...
11
BEST ORDINARY SERGE LINED PANEL, DITTO SADDLE,
complete as above
...
SECOND QUALITY DITTO, complete as above
10
8
11
0
10
0
8 0
I f w i t h folded l e a t h e r g i r t h s , 1 0 / 6 e x t r a .
We also hold a very large stock of Second-hand Saddles, Bridles and
Clothing by all London makers.
Write to us for Quotations when requiring Stable Brushes, &c.
ONLY
ADDRESS:
17, 18, & 19, Upper St. Martin's Lane, London, W.C.2.
xvll
MILITARY and CIVIL TAILORS
and OUTFITTERS.
LONDON:
4, New Burlington Street, W . 1.
ALDERSHOT:
29, High Street.
CAMBERLEY:
68 & 68a, High Street.
WOOLWICH:
5, Frances Street.
Telephnes:
Telegrams:
London, Regent 2346.
" Afflighty," London.
S
" Flight," Aldershot.
S
.
Woolwich, 300.
L
" Flight," Camberley.
LL Motorists are interested in
L every factor that contributes
to efficiency and economy.
A
Wakefield
CASTROL
Motor Oil
improves performance
minimises running costs.
m
=§
and
The unexcelled lasting and friction-reducing
properties of Wakefield
CASTROL ensure maxim u m performance, wi f h economy in thecon'sumption of both petrol and oil, while by prolonging the
intervals between decarbonisation and minimising engine wear, the use of Wakefield CASTROL
will save pounds in the long run.
There is a grade of Wakefield Castrol specially
suited toyourengine. The Wakefield Recommendation Chart can be seen at any Garage, or
write for a free copy of our Pocket Lubrication
Index.
WAKEFIELD
C. C. W A K E F I E L D & C O .
LTD.,
All-British Firm. Specialists inMotor
Lubrication.
Wakefield H o u s e , Cheapslde, London, E.C.2.
Illl!
xlx
Y
ES, Sir ! o n e spirit looks
m u c h like a n o t h e r , but
that's as far as it goes.
You will s o o n sense the differe n c e with m y spirit—PRATTS
P E R F E C T I O N — i n y o u r tank.
You will note the quicker
pick-up, increased p o w e r and
Kreater mileage.
Nol only
that. Sir. e x a m i n e your e n g i n e
a f t e r six m o n t h s r u n n i n g on
P R A T T S P E R F E C T I O N and
you will be surprised at the
m i n u t e a m o u n t of c a r b o n in
cylinders and on pistons. And
m y spirit is always the same,
p u r e and u n i f o r m , g u a r a n t e e d
n o t a d u l t e r a t e d with any o t h e r
b r a n d or grade.
PPATTS
PERFECTION SPIRIT
Uniform everywhere Reliable ahvays
ANClO-AMEBlCAN
OIL C O M P A N Y . LTD 3 6 QUEEN A M N C S CAT£
LONOO*
5 W '
XX
Do you feel fit in the morning? There is
nothing that so completely banishes morning
sluggishness and keeps you fit for the day's
routine as the glass of water sparkling with
a " dash" of E N O .
-J
'2T-
P>
Department of JDefmcn
Library.
15379
^ i m
iy ^
t